H04120_2007_Umschlag_Englisch.qxd 16.08.

2007 6:07 Uhr Seite 1

Application Manual –
Part 2: Draft Planning

Application Manual – Part 2: Draft Planning

www.siemens.com/tip
The information provided in this manual contains merely general descriptions or
characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as
described or which may change as a result of further development of the products.
An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly
agreed in the terms of contract.

All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or

supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate
the rights of the owners.

Integrated solutions
for power distribution
in commercial and industrial buildings

Totally Integrated PowerTM

totally integrated

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
Gleiwitzer Straße 555
90475 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
power
Power Transmission and Distribution Siemens SWITZERLAND AG Nominal charge: 36 EUR
Freyeslebenstraße 1 Building Technologies Group Order No. E20001-A70-M104-V1-7600
91058 ERLANGEN International Headquarters Dispo 27612
GERMANY Gubelstrasse 22
6301 ZUG
SWITZERLAND
Contents
1 Planning with Totally Integrated Power

1.1 Introduction 1/2 6.3 Requirements of the Switchgear

1.2 Draft Planning (System and Integration Planning) 1/3 in the Three Circuit Types 6/11
6.4 Container Solutions 6/14

2 Power System
7 Busbar Trunking Systems,
2.1 Overview 2/2
Cables and Wires
2.2 Dimensioning of Power Distribution Systems 2/10
2.3 System Protection and Safety Coordination 2/14 7.1 Busbar Trunking Systems 7/2
2.4 Protection Equipment for Low-Voltage Power Systems 2/20 7.2 Cables and Wires 7/10
2.5 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems 2/41
2.6 Protection of Capacitors 2/52
8 Subdistribution Systems
2.7 Protection of Distribution Transformers 2/53
2.8 Protection of Technical Building Installations – 8.1 General 8/2
Lightning Current and Overvoltage Protection 2/62 8.2 Configuration 8/2
8.3 Selectivity and Back-up Protection 8/3
8.4 Small Distribution Boards and
3 Medium Voltage
Wall- or Floor-Mounted Distribution Boards 8/6
3.1 Introduction 3/2 8.5 Circuit Protection Devices 8/9
3.2 Basics of Switchgear 3/3
3.3 Requirements on Medium-Voltage Switchgear 3/7
9 Power Consumers
3.4 Siemens Medium-Voltage Switchgear 3/9
3.5 From Medium-Voltage Switchgear 9.1 Starting, Switching and Protecting Motors 9/2
to Turnkey Solutions 3/25 9.2 Lighting 9/8
3.6 Protection of Power Distribution Systems 9.3 Elevator Systems 9/19
and Switchgear 3/28

10 Ease of Operation,
4 Transformers Safety and Control Engineering
4.1 Distribution Transformers 4/2 10.1 Power Management with SIMATIC powercontrol 10/2
4.2 Control and Isolating Transformers 4/6 10.2 Building Management System 10/7
10.3 Energy Automation for the Industry 10/14
10.4 Safety Lighting Systems 10/20
5 Power Generation
10.5 Robust Remote Terminal Unit for Extreme
5.1 Grid-Connected Photovoltaic (PV) Systems 5/2 Environmental Conditions (SIPLUS RIC) 10/27
5.2 Basis for the Use of UPS 5/5

11 Appendix
6 Low Voltage

6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear 6/2

6.2 Protective and Switching Devices
in the Low-Voltage Power Distribution 6/9
 Conversion Factors and Tables

Volume Volume flow rate Pressure

Non-metric Non-metric Non-metric Non-metric Non-metric Non-metric

SI unit
unit SI unit SI unit SI unit SI unit SI unit
unit unit unit unit unit
3 3 1
1
1 in
cm3 16.387
0.061 incm
3= 0.034 fl oz 1 l/s
gallon/s 0.264
3.785 gallons/s
l/s 1 in
barHG 0.034
29.53 bar
in Hg =
1
1 ft
dm3
3 28.317
61.024dm
3
in3 == 0.028 m
3 l/h
1 gallon/min 0.0044
0.227 mgallons/min
3/h = 227 l/h 105 pa
1= psi 14.504bar
0.069 psi =
3 = 102 kpa 2088.54 lbf/ft2 =
1
= yd
1l 0.765 ft3 = 1.057 quarts =
0.035 m ft33/s
1m /h 4.405 gallons/min
101.941 m3/h = 1 lbf/ft2 4.788 x 10-4 bar =
14.504 lbf/in2 =
1 fl oz 2.114 pint
29.574 cm=3 0.264 gallons
1 ft3/min 0.589 ft33/min = 0.0098 ft3/s 4.882 x 10-4 kgf/cm
2
2
1.699 m /h 0.932 tonf/ft =
m3
1 quart 0.946
0.629 dm 3 = 0.946 l
barrels Non-metric 1 lbf/in2 0.069
6.457 bar -3 tonf/inkgf/cm2
x 10= 0.070 2
unit Non-metric SI unit
SI unit (= 1.02 kgf/cm 2)
1 pint 0.473 dm3 = 0.473 l unit 1 tonf/ft2 1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2
Non-metric 1 gallon/s
SI unit 3.785 l/s
unit
1 gallon 3.785 dm3 = 3.785 l 1 l/s 0.264 gallons/s 1 tonf/in2 154.443 bar =
1 gallon/min 0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h Non-metric 2 unit
1 barrel 158,987 33 m3 157.488 kgf/cmSI
1 in3 16.387 cm = 1.589
dm 1 l/h 0.0044 gallons/min unit
= 159 l 1 ft3/s 101.941 m3/h
1 ft3 28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3 1 m3/h 4.405 gallons/min = 1 in HG 0.034Non-metric
bar
1 ft3/min 1.699 m
0.589
3/h
ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s SI unit unit
1 yd3 0.765 m3
Non-metric 1 psi 0.069 bar
SI unit unit
1 fl oz 29.574 cm3 11 lbf/ft
bar 2 29.53 xin10
4.788 Hg = =
-4 bar
= 105 pa 14.504x psi
10-4=kgf/cm2
cm3
1 quart in33==0.034
0.061 dm
0.946 0.946 fll oz 4.882
= 102 kpa 2088.54 lbf/ft2 =
dm3
1 pint 0.473 in33 =
61.024dm = 0.473 l Force 1 lbf/in2 0.069
14.504bar = 0.070
lbf/in 2= kgf/cm2
= gallon
1 1l 3.785 ft3 3==1.057
0.035 dm 3.785quarts
l = 1 tonf/ft2 1.072
0.932 bar 2 = kgf/cm2
= 1.093
tonf/ft
Non-metric Non-metric
1 barrel
2.
1 14 pint = 30.264
158,987 dm = 1.589 m
gallons
3 SI unit
unit SI unit 1 tonf/in2 6.457 x 10
154.443 bar =
-3 tonf/in2
unit 2
1 m3 0.629
= 159 lbarrels (= 1.02
157.488kgf/cm
kgf/cm2)
1Nlbf 4.448 lbf
0.225 N = 0.102 kgf
1 kN
1 kgf 9.807 tonf
0.100 N
1 tonf
Non-metric 9.964 kN
unit SI unit
SI unit Non-metric Energy,
y work
1 lbf unit
4.448 N
Velocity
1
1Nkgf 0.225
9.807 lbf
N = 0.102 kgf Non-metric
SI unit Non-metric
SI unit
Non-metric 1
1 kN
tonf 0.100
9.964 tonf
kN unit unit
Non-metric
SI unit
unit unit SI unit
1 hp h 0.746 kWh = 2.655
2.684 kgf 6J
x 10m
kWh 1.341 hp h=
m/s
1 ft/s 3.281 m/s
0.305 ft/s ==2.237
1,098 miles/h
km/h = 2.737 x 510J5 kgf m
3.6 x 10
km/h
1 mile/h 0.911 ft/s
0.447 m/s==0.621
1,609 miles/h
km/h 1 Jft lbf 0.138
3.725 kgf
x 10m -7 hp h =
Torque, moment of force
1 Btu 0.738
1.055 ft
kJ lbf
= =
1055.06 J
SI unit
Non-metric Non-metric -4 Btu
unit SI unit Non-metric 9.478
(= x 10
0.252 kcal)
unit Non-metric
SI unit
SI unit
unit unit (= 2.388 x 10-4 kcal)
1 ft/s
1 m/s 3.281 m/s
0.305 ft/s ==2.237
1,098 miles/h
km/h Non-metric
1 lbf
Nmin 0.113
8.851Nm = 0.012
lbf in kgflbf
= 0.738 m ft 1 kgf
SI unitm 3.653 x 10-6 hp h =
1 mile/h
km/h unit
1 0.447 m/s = 1,609 miles/h
0.911 ft/s = 0.621 km/h 1 lbf ft (= 0.102
1.356 Nmkgf m) kgf m
= 0.138 7.233 ft lbf
1 kWh 1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m
Non-metric Non-metric Non-metric
SI unit SI unit unit = 3.6 x 105 J SI unit
unit unit
1J 3.725 x 10-7 hp h =
Nmin
1 lbf 8.851Nm
0.113 lbf in = 0.738
= 0.012 kgflbf
m ft 1 hp h 0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J
0.738 ft lbf =5
(= 0.102 kgf m) = 2.737 x 10 kgf m
Mass, weight 1 lbf ft 1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m 9.478 x 10-4 Btu
1 ft lbf 0.138
(= kgfxm10-4 kcal)
2.388
Non-metric Non-metric
SI unit kgf m
1 Btu 1.055 kJ
3.653 = 61055.06
x 10- hp h = J
SI unit
unit unit (=
7 0.252
.233 kcal)
ft lbf
1 oz
g 28.35
0.035 g
oz Moment of inertia J

1 lb
kg 0.454 kg==35.27
2.205 lb 453.6oz
g GD2
Numerical value equation: J= = Wr 2
1 sh
t ton 0.907 t =ton
1.102 sh 907=.22,205
kg lb 4
Non-metric Non-metric
SI unit Non-metric SI unit
unit SI unit
Non-metric unit
unit SI unit
unit 1 kg ft22
lbf m 0.04214
23.73 kg2 m2
lb ft
1g 0.035 oz
1 oz 28.35 g Non-metric Non-metric
1 kg 2.205 lb = 35.27 oz SI unit SI unit
1 lb 0.454 kg = 453.6 g unit unit
1t 1.102 sh ton = 2,205 lb 1 2 2
1 sh ton 0.907 t = 907.2 kg 1 kg
lbf m
ft2 23.73 lb ft
0.04214 kg m2
 Conversion Factors and Tables

Conductor cross sections

in the Metric and US System

Metric cross American Wire Gauge

8m
sections acc. (AWG)
to IEC

15 m
3m
Conductor Equivalent AWG or MCM
cross metric CSA
section

7m
[mm2] [mm2]

13 m
0.653 19 AWG
0.75
0.832 18

6m
1.040 17
1.310 16

11 m
1.50
1.650 15
2.080 14
2.50
2m

5m
2.620 13
3.310 12
4.00
4.170 11

9m
5.260 10
6.00
6.630 9
4m

8.370 8
10.00 10.550 7
7m
13.300 6
16.00 16.770 5
21.150 4
3m

25.00 3
26.670
33.630 2
35.00
5m
1m

42.410 1
50.00 53.480 1/0
67.430 2/0
2m

70.00
95.00 85.030 3/0

107.200 4/0
3m

120.00 250 MCM

126.640
150.00 152.000 300
185.00
1m

202.710 400
240.00 253.350 500
300.00 304.000 600
1m
M 1 : 100

354.710 700
M 1 : 20

M 1 : 50

400.00 800
405.350
500.00 506.710 1000
625.00
 Conversion Factors and Tables

Specific steam consumption

Non-metric SI unit
unit
1 lb/hp h 0.608 kg/kWh

SI unit Non-metric
unit
1 kg/kWh 1.644 lb/hp h
 Planning with Totally Integrated Power

chapter 1
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Draft Planning
(System and Integration Planning)
1 Planning with Totally Integrated Power
1.1 Introduction
Today, the focus is on cost of invest-
ment, when power supply systems for
commercial, institutional and indus-
trial building projects are planned.
Operating and energy costs, on the
other hand, may not be neglected, as
they can have a lasting effect on the
total cost balance across the building’s
life cycle.
Investigations of the Scientific Council
of the German Federal Government
on Global Environmental Change
found in 2003 that world consump-
tion of primary energy is going to
double by 2050 (assumption: world
population growth to 9 to 10 billion
people). Among other consequences,
this would mean that energy would
become noticeably more expensive. If
sustainable building management and
* Also see Chapter 11, A1, Standards,
Regulations and Guidelines
Fig. 1.1/1: Safety, environmental compatibility and profitability of power supply and distribution are demanding challenges to the planning of modern building
and infrastructure projects
1/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
optimal utilization of resources is
considered in the planning stage
already, an important step will have
been made toward the minimization
of a building’s operating costs, and
thus toward its longterm value
increase.
So electrical engineering consultants
are entrusted with the responsible
task of designing power supply sys-
tems under the aspects of operational
safety and energy efficiency. Services
rendered must be in accordance with
the generally accepted rules of good
practice. This means that implement-
ing orders, administrative regulations,
relevant IEC, European (EN) and
national DIN standards as well as the
general building inspection certifi-
cates and general building permits
must also be observed across building
contract sections in the planning.*
Concepts like Totally Integrated Power
(TIP) now provide support for increas-
ingly complex engineering tasks. They
facilitate planning with integrated
solutions for power distribution and
efficient engineering tools.
Totally Integrated Power with its well-
matched components and optimized
interfaces offers everything that can
be expected from a future-oriented
power distribution system. Very good
engineering support is also rendered
by the TÜV-approved and certified
dimensioning tool SIMARIS design.
Using SIMARIS design for dimension-
ing electrical power distribution
systems in commercial, institutional
and industrial buildings produces
easy, fast and safe results.
Further information on
 Totally Integrated Power
 SIMARIS design
can be obtained on the Internet at
www.siemens.com/tip

1.2 Draft Planning
(System and
Integration
Planning)
Building upon the concept drafted in
the “Preliminary Planning” phase 2,
power distribution must be planned in
detail in the “Draft Planning” phase 3.
The Application Manual “Totally
Integrated Power – Draft Planning”
provides technical assistance and
information on components for tech-
nical installations in buildings with a
focus on “electrical power supply.”
Services in detail, which are an inte-
gral part of “Draft Planning”, are
defined in the Regulation of Archi-
tects' and Engineers' Fees (HOAI) in
Germany.
Based upon preliminary planning
results, Draft Planning represents the
definite planning concept including all
components specified. In projects
requiring a permit, the Draft Planning
is the basis for the subsequent
Approval Planning phase.
Table 1.2/1: Overview of the planner’s major
tasks in the first two project stages
according to the HOAI (Regulation
of Architects' and Engineers' Fees)
(excerpt)
Planning with Totally Integrated Power
Basic services
 Elaboration of the planning
concept (step by step prepara-
tion of drawings) that takes into
account requirements concern-
ing aspects of urban develop-
ment and design, functions,
technology, building physics,
profitability, energy manage-
ment (e.g. regarding efficient
power utilization and the use of
renewable energies) and land-
scape ecology, and integrates
contributions of other parties
involved in the planning, until a
complete draft is presented
 Integration of services rendered
by other experts involved in the
planning
 Description of the building
project including an explanation
of compensation and substitu-
tion measures as stipulated by
the impact regulation under
nature protection law
 Graphic presentation of the
overall draft, e.g. elaborated,
complete preliminary outline
and/or outline drawings (scale
Special services
 Analysis of alternatives/variants
and their assessment including
an investigation into costs
involved (optimization)
 Profitability calculation
 Cost calculation by setting up
quantity structures or a catalog
of components
 Elaboration of special measures
for the optimization of the build-
ing or building sections, which
exceed the normal range of
depending on the size of the
building project; for outdoor
facilities at scales of 1:500 to
1:100, detailing in particular the
improvements for biotope func-
tions, preventive, protective, care
and development activities as well
as on differentiated planting; for
space enclosing developments: in
scales of 1:50 to 1:20, in particu-
lar with details of wall design as
well as color, light and material
design; if necessary including
detailed plans of repetitive groups
of enclosed space; negotiations
with public authorities and other
experts involved in planning as to
whether an official approval can
be obtained
 Cost calculations in compliance
with DIN 276 or according to
statutory provisions for cost
calculations of residential
dwellings
 Summary of all draft documents
 Cost controlling by a comparison
of the cost calculation with the
cost estimate
engineering services, on the
reduction of energy consumption
as well as pollutant and CO2
emissions, and for the use of
renewable energies in coordina-
tion with other experts involved
in planning. The normal measure
for energy saving activities
means the fulfillment of require-
ments set by statutory provisions
and generally accepted rules of
good practice.
1/3 1
1/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Power System

chapter 2
2.1 Overview
2.2 Dimensioning of Power Distribution Systems
2.3 System Protection and Safety Coordination
2.4 Protection Equipment for Low-Voltage Power
Systems
2.5 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Systems
2.6 Protection of Capacitors
2.7 Protection of Distribution Transformers
2.8 Protection of Technical Building
Installations – Lightning Current and
Overvoltage Protection
2 Power System
2.1 Overview
2.1.1 System
Configurations
Table 2.1/1 illustrates the technical
aspects and influencing factors that
should be taken into account when
electrical power distribution systems
are planned and network components
are dimensioned.
 Simple radial system
(spur line topology)
All consumers are centrally supplied
from one power source. Each con-
necting line has an unambiguous
direction of energy flow.
 Radial system with changeover
connection as power reserve –
partial load:
All consumers are centrally supplied
from two to n power sources. They are
rated as such that each of it is capable
of supplying all consumers directly
connected to the main power distribu-
tion system (stand-alone operation
with open couplings). If one power
source fails, the remaining sources of
supply can also supply some consumers
connected to the other power source.
In this case, any other consumer must
be disconnected (load shedding).
 Radial system with changeover
connection as power reserve – full
load:
All consumers are centrally supplied
from two to n power sources (stand-
alone operation with open couplings).
They are rated as such that, if one
power source fails, the remaining
power sources are capable of addition-
ally supplying all those consumers
normally supplied by this power
source. No consumer must be discon-
nected. In this case, we speak of rating
the power sources according to
the (n-1) principle. With three parallel
power sources or more, other supply
principles, e.g. the (n-2) principle
would also be possible. In this case,
these power sources will be rated as
such that two out of three transform-
ers can fail without the continuous
supply of all consumers connected
being affected.
 Radial system in an interconnected
grid
Individual radial networks in which
the consumers connected are cen-
trally supplied by one power source
are additionally coupled electrically
with other radial networks by means
of coupling connections. All couplings
are normally closed.
Depending on the rating of the power
sources in relation to the total load
connected, the application of the
(n-1) principle, (n-2) principle etc. can
ensure continuous and faultless
power supply of all consumers by
means of additional connecting lines.

LV- side system configurations

Radial system with changeover Radial system with
Simple radial connection as power reserve Radial system in an
Quality criterion power distribution
system inter- connected grid
Partial load Full load via busbars

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Low cost of investment • • • • •

Low power losses • • • • •

High reliability of supply • • • • •

Great voltage stability • • • • •

Easy operation
• • • • •
Easy and clear system protection
High adaptability
• • • • •

Low fire load • • • • •

• • • • •

Rating: very good (1) to poor (5) fulfillment of a quality criterion

Table 2.1/1: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power system configuration

2/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

The direction of energy flow through TN-C TN-C/S TN-S IT system TT system
the coupling connections may vary Characteristics
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
depending on the line of supply,
which must be taken into account for Low cost of investment • • • • •
subsequent rating of switching/pro-
tective devices, and above all for Little expense for system extensions • • • • •
making protection settings. Any switchgear/protective technology
can be used
• • • • •
 Radial system with power distribu-
tion via busbars Ground fault detection can be implemented • • • • •
In this special case of radial systems
Fault currents and impedance conditions in
that can be operated in an intercon- the system can be calculated
• • • • •
nected grid, busbar trunking systems
are used instead of cables. Stability of the grounding system • • • • •

In the coupling circuits, these busbar High degree of operational safety • • • • •

trunking systems are either used for
power transmission (from radial High degree of protection • • • • •
system A to radial system B etc.) or
power distribution to the respective High degree of shock hazard protection • • • • •
consumers.
High degree of fire safety • • • • •
Automatic disconnection for protection
2.1.2 Power Supply purposes can be implemented
• • • • •
Systems according to the EMC-friendly • • • • •
Type of Connection to
Equipment functions maintained in case of
Ground 1st ground or enclosure fault
• • • • •

TN-C, TN-C/S, TN-S, IT and TT Fault localization during system operation • • • • •

systems
The implementation of IT systems
may be required by national or inter-
national standards.
 For parts of installations which have
to meet particularly high require-
ments regarding operational and
human safety (e.g. in medical
rooms, such as the OT, intensive
care or post-anaesthesia care unit)
 For installations erected and oper-
ated outdoors (e.g. in mining, at
cranes, garbage transfer stations
and in the chemical industry).
 Depending on the power system
and nominal system voltage there
may be different requirements
regarding the disconnection times
to be met (protection of persons
against indirect contact with live
parts by means of automatic discon-
nection).
Reduction of system downtimes by
controlled disconnection
• • • • •
1 = true 2 = conditionally true 3 = not true
Table 2.1/2: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power supply system according to its type of
connection to ground
 Power systems in which electro-
magnetic interference plays an
important part should preferably be
configured as TN-S systems immedi-
Further information
ately downstream of the point of
 Power system engineering:
supply. Later, it will mean a compar-
Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual -
atively high expense to turn existing Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary
TN-C or TN-C/S systems into an Planning, 2006, Chapters 4.1 and 7
EMC-compatible system.  EMC:
Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual -
Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary
The state of the art for TN systems is Planning, 2006, Chapter 7
an EMC-compatible design as TN-S  Design of the low-voltage main distribution
system. system
Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual -
Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary
Planning, 2006, Section 5.8
 Motors see Chapter 9 in this manual

2/3 2
Checklist

Important electrical parameters of the higher-level medium-voltage systems

Local supply network operator ........................................................................

Point of supply: Under responsibility of local supply network

operator / customer ........................................................................

Neutral-point connection of power system  low resistance grounded

 compensated

 isolated

Maximum short-circuit current Ik" max ........................ kA

Alternatively, maximum system short-circuit rating Sk" max ........................ MVA

Minimum short-circuit current Ik" min ........................ kA

Alternatively, minimum system short-circuit rating Sk" min ........................ MVA

Data of higher-level medium-voltage protection

Current transformer Iprim ........................ A

Isec ........................ A

Type of protection relay applied:

Thermal overload protection available?  yes  no

Type of characteristic curve:  inverse-time-delayed  definite-time-delayed

Setting zone Ith ........................ A / time constant ........................ min

Setting zone I > ........................ A / t > ........................ s

Setting zone I >> ........................ A / t >> ........................ s

Note:
 For preparing a comprehensive, end-to-end protection concept, the precise data of the higher-level medium-voltage
protection applied are required, so that the lower-level low-voltage protection system can be adapted in accordance
with the MV protection settings.

Further information on medium-voltage switchgear:

Siemens AG (Ed.), TIP Application Manual - Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Section 5.1

2/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

Checklist

Important electrical parameters of transformers

Uprim / Usec ........................ kV

Rating ........................ kVA

Rated short-circuit voltage ukr ........................ %

Winding losses Pk ........................ kW

No-load losses P0 ........................ kW

Overload capability
(vented/unvented transformers) ........................ %

Power reserve ........................ %

Note:
 The rated short-circuit voltage ukr is a measure for the amount of voltage to be applied at the primary side in order to
reach the rated current level, when the secondary-side winding is shorted.
 ukr is a measure for the transformer’s short-circuit power. As a rule, the higher ukr, the lower the short-circuit power.
 High-quality transformers (e.g. GEAFOL) are characterized by reduced winding and no-load losses, which should be
taken into account for a profitability evaluation.
 if transformers with cross-flow fans are used, their overloadability must be considered for rating the feeding lines,
switching devices and their protection settings.
 Short-circuit current determination: The level of short-circuit current which a transformer can supply is independent of
its design with or without cross-flow ventilation. The magnitude of the short-circuit current is solely determined by the
rated short-circuit voltage ukr .
 Technical considerations for the connection of motor loads: to determine regenerative feedback from motors in the
event of a short circuit, the sum total of installed motor loads is required.

Further information on distribution transformers:

Siemens AG (Ed.), TIP Application Manual - Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Section 5.2

2/5 2
Checklist

Important electrical parameters of generators

Main use:

No-break standby generating set*  yes  no

Quick-starting standby generating set*  yes  no

Safety power supply*  yes  no

Nominal voltage ........................ V

Rating ........................ kVA

Subtransient reactance xd" ........................ %

Initial symmetrical short-circuit current Ik" ........................ kA

1-phase sustained short-circuit current Ik1D ........................ A

Available for period t ........................ s

3-phase sustained short-circuit current Ik1D ........................ A

Available for period t ........................ s

R/X ratio ........................

* Safety power supply in compliance with IEC 60364-7-710, DIN VDE 0100-710 and -718;
designed as no-break standby generating set according to customer specifications

Note:
 Normally, generators can only supply the initial symmetrical short-circuit AC current Ik" for a period of few milliseconds.
 Therefore, the sustained short-circuit currents which the generator can carry over a longer period of time are relevant
for the protective settings of devices using time-delayed short-circuit releases.
 Above data must be obtained from the equipment manufacturer.
 Rating of switching/protective devices for generator operation: selective response of these switching/protective devices
can be expected if the rating of the largest consumer connected is less than 1/3 of the generator output.
 What is important for emergency lighting is the full compliance with standards from the point of supply to the
consumers (also see Section 10.4 “Safety Lighting Systems”).

Further information on generators:

Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual - Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Section 5.7

2/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

Checklist

Important electrical parameters of a combined heat and power plant

Main use:

Safety power supply*  yes  no

Redundant power supply  yes  no

Nominal voltage ........................ V

Rating ........................ kVA

Subtransient reactance xd" ........................ %

Initial symmetrical short-circuit current Ik" ........................ kA

1-phase sustained short-circuit current Ik 1D ........................ A

Available for period t ........................ s

3-phase sustained short-circuit current Ik 1D ........................ A

Available for period t ........................ s

R/X ratio ........................

* Safety power supply in compliance with IEC 60364-7-710, DIN VDE 0100-710 and -718;
designed as no-break standby generating set according to customer specifications

Note:
 Normally, combined heat and power plants are modularly designed and supply electricity and heat. They are based on
the principle of combined heat and power generation. The output of a combined heat and power plant is usually
designed as such that only a part of the maximum heating energy demand of the connected consumers is covered
when the plant is operated under full load. These co-generating plants are operated on a heat-demand basis.
 What is important for emergency lighting is the full compliance with standards from the point of supply to the
consumers (also see Section 10.4 “Safety Lighting Systems”).

2/7 2
Checklist

Important electrical parameters of uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

Nominal voltage ........................ V

Rating ........................ kVA

Load power factor ........................

UPS factor ........................

Static or dynamic system ........................

Time curve of short-circuit currents

(1-phase, 2-phase, 3-phase) ........................

Interconnection of primary circuits ........................

Availability of internal protection equipment

in the primary circuits ........................

Switching/protective response of internal

protection equipment ........................

Internal operational response in the event of

a short circuit ........................

Note:
 Uninterruptible power supplies for power supply systems are available in ratings of about 5 kW up to several 100 kW.
Their rating basically depends on the load carrying capability of the power converters. Another important feature of a
UPS is the maximum power outage bridging time which depends on the capacity of the storage batteries. Depending on
requirements, it may be just a few seconds or several hours. If high power and long bridging times are required, power
generating sets, so-called dynamic systems, are also used.
 Above data must be obtained from the equipment manufacturer.

Further information on UPS!

Siemens AG (Ed.): TIP Application Manual - Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Section 5.6, and
Section 5.2 in this manual.

2/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

Checklist

Compilation of the intended system operating modes in the supply section

Which system operating mode is intended for this plant?

System operating mode 1: ...................................................................................................................................

System operating mode 2: ...................................................................................................................................

System operating mode 3: ...................................................................................................................................

Other: ...................................................................................................................................

Examples:
System operating mode 1: Normal power supply
 3 out of 3 transformers connected
 Generator down
 Coupling 1 closed
 Coupling 2 closed
System operating mode 2: Transformer T1 in maintenance
 2 out of 3 transformers connected (transformer 1 down)
 Generator down
 Coupling 1 closed
 Coupling 2 closed
System operating mode 3: Emergency power supply
 Transformers down
 Generator connected into supply
 Coupling 1 open
 Coupling 2 open

Note:
 Alternative system operating modes from different sources of supply are important for determining minimum and
maximum short-circuit currents as well as subsequent device protection settings even if merely an extension of the
existing plant is considered.

2/9 2
2.2 Dimensioning
of Power Distribu-
tion Systems
When the basic supply concept for the
electricity supply system has been
established, it is necessary to dimen-
sion the electrical power system.
Dimensioning means the sizing/rating
of all equipment and components to
be used in this power system.
switching/protective devices and
connecting line for each circuit in the
power system.
Basic rules
On principle, circuit dimensioning
shall be performed in compliance with
the technical rules / standards listed in
Fig. 2.2/1. Details are explained below
under Section 2.2.1 Circuit Types.
Cross-circuit dimensioning
ically efficient overall system can be
designed. This cross-circuit matching
of network components may bear any
degree of complexity, as subsequent
modifications to certain components,
e.g. a switch or protective device, may
have effects on the neighboring,
higher-level, or all lower-level net-
work sections (high testing expense,
high planning risk).
Dimensioning principles

The dimensioning target is to obtain a When selected network components For each circuit, the dimensioning
technically permissible combination of and systems are matched, an econom- process comprises the selection of

DIN VDE 0100

Protection against overload IEC 60364-4-43
Part 430

IEC 60364-4-43 / DIN VDE 0100

Protection against short circuit IEC 60364-5-54 Part 430 / Part 540

DIN VDE 0100

Protection against electric shock IEC 60364-4-41
Part 410

DIN VDE 0100

Dynamic/static voltage drop IEC 60364-5-520
Part 520
IEC 60038
DIN VDE 0175

DIN VDE 0100

IEC 60364-7-710 Part 710 and 718
Dynamic/static selectivity IEC 60947-2 VDE 0660-101
IEC 60898-1 VDE 0641 Part 11

Fig. 2.2/1: Relevant standards for circuit dimensioning

2/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


Connecting line between
Supply
distribution boards
Fig. 2.2/2: Schematic representation of the different circuit types
one, or more than one switching/pro-
tective device to be used at the begin-
ning or end of a connecting line, as
well as the selection of the connect-
ing line itself (cable/line or busbar
connection) under consideration of
the technical features of the corre-
sponding switching/protective
devices. For supply circuits in particu-
lar, dimensioning also includes rating
the power sources.
The objectives of dimensioning may
vary depending on the circuit type.
The dimensioning target of overload
and short-circuit protection can be
attained in correlation to the mount-
ing location of the protective equip-
ment. Devices applied at the end of a
connecting line can ensure overload
protection for this line at best, not,
however, short-circuit protection!
2.2.1 Circuit types
The basic dimensioning rules and
standards listed in Fig. 2.2/1 princi-
pally apply to all circuit types. In
addition, there are specific require-
ments for these circuit types which
will be explained in detail below.
Load feeders in final
circuits
Start node
Transmission
medium
Load Target node
Supply circuits
Particularly high requirements apply to
the dimensioning of supply circuits.
This starts with the rating of the power
sources. Power sources are rated
according to the maximum load cur-
rent to be expected for the power
system, the desired amount of reserve
power, and the degree of supply
reliability required in case of a fault
(overload / short circuit).
Load conditions in the entire power
system are established by taking the
energy balance (in an “energy report”).
Reserve power and operational safety in
the vicinity of the supply system are
usually established by building up appro-
priate redundancies, for example by
 providing additional power sources
(transformer, generator, UPS);
 rating the power sources according
to the failure principle, n- or (n–1)
principle: applying the (n–1) princi-
ple means that two out of three
supply units are principally capable
of continually supplying the total
load for the power system without
any trouble if the smallest power
source fails;
 rating those power sources that can
temporarily be operated under
Power System
overload (e.g. using vented trans-
formers).
Independent of the load currents
established, dimensioning of any
further component in a supply circuit
is oriented to the ratings of the power
sources, the system operating modes
configured and all the related switch-
ing states in the vicinity of the supply
system.
As a rule, switching/protective devices
must be selected in such a way that
the planned performance maximum
can be transferred. In addition, the
different minimum/maximum short-
circuit current conditions in the vicin-
ity of the supply system, which are
dependent on the switching status,
must be determined.
When connecting lines are rated
(cable or busbar), appropriate reduc-
tion factors must be taken into
account, which depend on the num-
ber of systems laid in parallel and the
installation type.
When devices are rated, special atten-
tion should be paid on their rated
short-circuit breaking capacity. You
should also opt for a high-quality
tripping unit with variable settings, as
this component is an important basis
for attaining the best possible selec-
tivity towards all upstream and down-
stream devices.
Distribution circuit
Dimensioning of cable routes and
devices follows the maximum load
currents to be expected at this distribu-
tion level.
As a rule
Ib max = ∑ installed capacity x simul-
taneity factor
Switching/protective device and
connecting line are to be matched
with regard to overload and short-
circuit protection.
2/11 2
In order to ensure overload protection,
you must also observe the standardized
conventional (non-)tripping currents
referring to the devices in application.
A verification based merely on the rated
device current or the setting value Ir
would be insufficient.
Basic rules for ensuring overload
protection:
Rated current rule
 Non-adjustable protective
equipment
Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz
The rated current In of the selected
device must be between the calcu-
lated maximum load current Ib and
the maximum permissible load cur-
rent Iz of the selected transmission
medium (cable or busbar).
 Adjustable protective equipment
Ib ≤ Ir ≤ Iz
The rated current Ir of overload
release must be between the calcu-
lated maximum load current Ib and
the maximum permissible load cur-
rent Iz of the selected transmission
medium (cable or busbar).
Tripping current rule
I2 ≤ 1.45 x Iz
The maximum permissible load cur-
rent Iz of the selected transmission
medium (cable or busbar) must be
above the conventional tripping
current I2 /1.45 of the selected device.
The test value I2 is standardized and
varies according to type and charac-
teristics of the protective equipment
applied.
Basic rules for ensuring short-
circuit protection:
Short-circuit energy
K 2S 2 ≥ I 2t
2/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
(K = material coefficient; S = cross
section)
The amount of energy that is set free
from the moment, when a short
circuit occurs, until it is cleared auto-
matically, must at any time be less
than the energy which the transmis-
sion medium can carry as a maximum
before irreparable damage is caused.
As standard, this basic rule applies in
the time range up to max. 5 s.
Below 100 ms of short-circuit break-
ing time, the let-through energy of
the protective device (acc. to equip-
ment manufacturer’s specification)
must be taken into account.
When devices with a tripping unit are
used, observance of this rule across
the entire characteristic device curve
must be verified.
A mere verification in the range of the
maximum short-circuit current applied
(Ik max) is not always sufficient, in
particular, when time-delayed
releases are used.
Short-circuit time
ta (Ik min) ≤ 5 s
The resulting current breaking time of
the selected protective equipment
must ensure that the calculated
minimum short-circuit current Ik min at
the end of the transmission line or
protected line is automatically cleared
within 5 s at the latest.
Overload and short-circuit protection
needn’t necessarily be provided by
one and the same device. If required,
these two protection targets may be
realized by a device combination. The
use of separate switching/protective
devices could also be considered, i.e.
at the start and end of a cable route.
As a rule, devices applied at the end
of a cable route can ensure overload
protection for this line only.
Final circuits
The method for coordinating overload
and short-circuit protection is practi-
cally identical for distribution and final
circuits. Besides overload and short-
circuit protection, the protection of
human life is also important for all
circuits.
Protection against electric shock
ta (Ik1 min) ≤ ta perm
If a 1-phase fault to ground (Ik1 min)
occurs, the resulting current breaking
time ta for the selected protective
equipment must be shorter than the
maximum permissible breaking time
ta perm which is required for this circuit
according to IEC 60364-4-41 / DIN
VDE 0100-410 to ensure the protec-
tion of persons.
As the required maximum current
breaking time varies according to the
nominal system voltage and the type
of load connected (stationary and
non-stationary loads), protection
requirements regarding minimum
breaking times ta perm may be trans-
ferred from one load circuit to other
circuits. Alternatively, this protection
target may also be achieved by
observing a maximum touch voltage.
As final circuits are often character-
ized by long supply lines, their dimen-
sioning is often affected by the maxi-
mum permissible voltage drop.
As far as the choice of switching/pro-
tective devices is concerned, it is
important to bear in mind that long
connecting lines are characterized by
high impedances and thus strong
attenuation of the calculated short-
circuit currents.
 Power System

Depending on the system operating For reasons of risk minimization and

mode (coupling open, coupling
closed) and the medium of supply
(transformer or generator), the pro-
tective equipment and its settings
must be configured for the worst case
concerning short-circuit currents.
time efficiency, a number of engineer-
ing companies generally use advanced
calculation software, such as SIMARIS
design, to perform dimensioning and
verification processes in electrical
power systems.

In contrast to supply or distribution

circuits, where the choice of a high-
quality tripping unit is considered very
important, there are no special
requirements on the protective equip-
ment of final circuits regarding the
degree of selectivity to be achieved.
The use of a tripping unit with LI
characteristics is normally sufficient.

2.2.3 Summary
Basically, the dimensioning process
itself is easy to understand and can be
performed using simple means.
Its complexity lies in the procurement
of the technical data on products and
systems required, which can be found
in various technical standards and
regulations on the one hand and
numerous product catalogs on the
other.
An important aspect in this context is
the cross-circuit manipulation of
dimensioned components owing to
their technical data, for example, the
above mentioned inheritance of
minimum current breaking times of
the non-stationary load circuit to
other stationary load or distribution
circuits.
Another aspect is the mutual impact
of dimensioning <—> network calcula-
tion (short circuit), e.g. for the use of
short-circuit current limiting devices.
In addition, the complexity of the matter
rises, when different national standards
or installation practices are to be taken
into account for dimensioning.

2/13 2

2.3 System
Protection and
Safety
Coordination
This chapter basically comprises the
installation of electrical equipment in
LV systems. Therefore, the emphasis
lies on the low-voltage side also when
dealing with network protection.
Specific network protection require-
ments for medium voltage are dealt
with in Section 3.6 ”Protection of
Medium-Voltage Switchgear.”
System configurations
While in building and industrial power
systems ring-system configurations
are normally used for medium volt-
age, radial system configurations are
normally preferred for the low-voltage
side (radial systems, double spur
systems). A number of switchgear
substations and distribution boards
are required for distributing power
from the point of supply to the con-
sumers. The protective devices for
these items of equipment are
connected in series.
Objectives of system protection
The objective of system protection is
to detect faults and to selectively
isolate faulted parts of the system. It
must also permit short clearance
times to limit the fault power and the
effect of arcing faults.
High power density, high individual
power outputs, and the relatively
short distances in industrial and
building power systems mean that
low-voltage and medium-voltage
systems are closely linked. Activities in
the LV system (short circuits, starting
currents) also have an effect on the
MV system, and vice versa, the control
state of the MV system affects the
2/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
selectivity criteria in the secondary
power system. It is, therefore, neces-
sary to adjust the power system and
its protection throughout the entire
distribution system and to coordinate
the protective functions.
2.3.1 Definitions
Electrical installations in a power
system are protected either by protec-
tion equipment allocated to the
installation components or by combi-
nations of these protective elements.
Standby protection
When a protective device fails, the
higher-level device must take over this
protective function.
Back-up protection
If a short circuit, which is higher than
the rated switching capacity of the
protective device used, occurs at a
particular point in the system, back-up
protection must provide protection for
the downstream installation compo-
nent and for the protection device by
means of an upstream protective
device.
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacity
The rated short-circuit breaking capac-
ity is the maximum value of the short
circuit that the protective device is
able to clear according to specifica-
tions. The protection device may be
used in power systems for rated
switching capacities up to this value.
Selectivity
Selectivity, in particular, has become a
topic for discussion in the previous
years. Partly, it has become a general
requirement in tender specifications.
Due to the complexity of this issue,
information about proper selection
and application is often insufficient.
These requirements as well as the
effects of full or partial selectivity in
power distribution systems within the
context of the relevant standard,
industry, country, system configura-
tion or structure should be clarified in
advance with the network planners,
installation companies and system
operators involved. The system inter-
connection together with the five
rules of circuit dimensioning must
also be taken into account. Some
terms and definitions shall be
described in this chapter for a better
understanding of the issue. If you
wish to obtain more detailed informa-
tion regarding further applications,
please contact your Siemens represen-
tative.
Note:
Proof of selectivity is required in IEC
60364-7-710 and DIN VDE 100-710
and -718.
Full selectivity
To maintain the supply reliability of
power distribution systems, full selec-
tivity is increasingly demanded. A
power system is considered fully
selective, if only the protective device
upstream of the fault location discon-
nects from supply, as seen in the
direction of energy flow (from the
point of supply to the consumer).
Note:
Full selectivity always refers to the
maximum, fault current Ik at the
mounting location.
Partial selectivity
The corresponding device combina-
tion (upstream and downstream) is
not selective up to a dead, 3-phase,
i.e. maximum, fault current Ik max.
In certain situations, partial selectivity
(up to a particular short-circuit cur-
rent) is sufficient. The probability of
faults occurring and the effects of
these on the load must then be con-
sidered for unfavorable scenarios.

t definite-time-delayed
Short-circuit
inverse-
tripping
time-
delayed
HV HRC fuse Medium-voltage circuit-breaker
with overcurrent-time protection
Adjustable characteristic
curves or setting ranges
Fig. 2.3/1: Protective characteristic of LV HRC fuse and LV circuit-breaker
with releases
2.3.2 Protective
Equipment
Medium-voltage protection
equipment
HV HRC fuses
High-voltage high-breaking-capacity
(HV HRC) fuses can only be used for
short-circuit protection. They do not
provide overload protection. A mini-
mum short-circuit current is, there-
fore, required for correct operation.
HV HRC fuses restrict the peak short-
circuit current. The protective charac-
teristic is determined by the selected
rated current (Fig. 2.3/1).
Medium-voltage circuit-breakers
(IEC 62271-100/VDE 0671-100)
Circuit-breakers can provide time-
overcurrent protection (definite-time or
inverse-time-delay), time-overcurrent
protection with additional directional
function, or differential protection.
Distance protection is rarely used in the
distribution systems described here.
t 2
LV HRC fuse
Adjustable characteristic
curves or setting ranges
Fig. 2.3/2: Protective characteristic of HV HRC fuse and MV time-overcurrent
protection
Protective characteristics
Secondary relays, whose characteristic
curves are also determined by the
actual current transformation ratio,
are normally used as protective
devices in medium-voltage systems.
Static digital protection devices are
also being used to an increasing
extent.
Low-voltage protective devices*
Low-voltage high-rupturing-
capacity fuses
Low-voltage high-rupturing-capacity
(LV HRC) fuses have a high breaking
capacity. They fuse quickly to restrict
the short-circuit current to the utmost
degree. The protective characteristic
is determined by the selected utiliza-
tion category of the LV HRC fuse (e. g.
full-range fuse for overload and short-
circuit protection, or back-up fuse for
short-circuit protection only) and the
rated current (Fig. 2.3/2).
Power System
Definite-time-delayed
t = constant
4
t = constant
Inverse-time-
delayed
2
t = constant
not delayed
Low-voltage
circuit-breaker
with releases
Low-voltage circuit-breakers
(IEC 60947-2 / VDE 660-101)
Basically, circuit-breakers for power
distribution systems are distinguished
 according to their type design (open
or compact design),
 mounting type (fixed mounting,
plug-in, withdrawable),
 rated current (maximum design
current of the switch),
 method of operation: current-
limiting (MCCB – molded-case
circuit-breaker), or non-current-
limiting (ACB – air circuit-breaker)
 protective functions (see releases),
 communication capability (capabil-
ity to transmit data to and from the
switch),
 utilization category
(A or B, see IEC 60947-2).
* For descriptions and modes of operation of low-
voltage protection devices, controlgear and
switchgear, please also refer to the 4th edition of
the Siemens AG handbook “Switching, Protection
and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks”,
published by Publicis, Erlangen, 1997.
2/15 2
Releases / protective functions
The protective function of the circuit-
breaker in the power distribution
system is determined by the selection
of the appropriate release. Releases
can be divided into thermo-magnetic
releases (previously also called
electromechanical releases) and
electronic tripping units (ETU).
 Overload protection
Designation: “L” or earlier “a” (“L” for
long-time delay).
Depending on the type of release,
inverse-time-delay overload releases
are also available with optional
characteristic curves.
 Protection of neutral conductor
Designation: N (neutral)
Inverse-time-delay overload releases
for neutral conductors are available
in a 50% or 100% ratio of the over-
load release.
 Short-circuit protection, instanta-
neous
Designation: I (instantaneous),
previously also called “n” release.
Example: solenoid release. Depend-
ing on the application, I-releases are
also offered with a fixed, adjustable
or OFF function.
 Short-circuit protection, with delay
Designation: “S” (short-time delay),
previously also “z” release.
For a temporal adjustment of protec-
tive functions in series connections.
Besides the standard curves and
settings, there are also optional
functions for special applications.
– Definite-time-delay overcurrent
releases:
For this “standard S-function,”
the desired delay time (tsd) is set
to a definite value when a set
current value (limit-value Isd) is
exceeded (definite time; similar
to the DMT function in medium
voltage)
2/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
– Inverse-time-delay overcurrent
release:
For this optional S-function applies
I2t constant. This function is gener-
ally used to ensure a higher degree
of selectivity (inverse time; similar
to the inverse-time-delay function
in medium voltage)
 Ground fault protection
Designation: “G” (ground fault),
previously also called “g” release.
Besides the standard function
(definite-time), there is also an
optional function (I2t inverse-time
delay).
 Fault current protection
Designation: RCD (= residual current
device), previously also called “DI.”
To detect differential fault currents
up to 3 A, similar to the RCCB func-
tion for the protection of persons
(up to 500 mA).
Electronic releases also permit new
tripping criteria which are not possible
with electromechanical releases.
Protective characteristics
The protective characteristic curve is
determined by the rated circuit-breaker
current as well as the setting and the
operating values of the releases.
Low-voltage miniature circuit-
breakers (MCB) IEC 60898-
1/VDE 0641-11
Miniature circuit-breakers are distin-
guished according to their method of
operation, showing a
 high current-limiting, or
 low current-limiting capacity.
Their protective functions are deter-
mined by electromechanical releases:
 Overload protection by means of
inverse-time-delayed overload
releases, e.g. bimetallic releases
 Short-circuit protection by means of
instantaneous overload releases,
e.g. solenoid releases
2.3.3 Low-Voltage
Protective Switchgear
Assemblies
With series-connected distribution
boards, it is possible to arrange the
following protective devices in series
(relative to the direction of power
flow):
 Fuse with downstream fuse
 Circuit-breaker with downstream
miniature circuit-breaker
 Circuit-breaker with downstream
fuse
 Fuse with downstream circuit-
breaker
 Fuse with downstream miniature
circuit-breaker
 Several parallel feeding systems
with or without coupler units with
downstream circuit-breaker or
downstream fuse
Current selectivity must be verified in
the case of meshed LV systems.
The high- and low-voltage protection
for the transformers feeding power to
the LV system must be harmonized
and matched to ensure protection of
the secondary power system. Appro-
priate checks must be carried out to
determine the effects on the primary
MV system.
In MV systems, HV HRC fuses are
normally installed upstream of the
transformers in the LV feeding system
only. With the upstream circuit-
breakers, only time-overcurrent
protection devices with different
characteristics are usually connected
in series. Differential protection does
not affect, or only slightly influences
the grading of the other protective
devices.

2.3.4 Selectivity Criteria
In addition to factors such as rated
current and rated switching capacity,
another criterion to be considered is
selectivity. Selectivity is important
because it ensures optimum supply
reliability. The following criteria can
be applied for selective operation of
series-connected protection devices:
 Time difference for clearance (time
grading)
 Current difference for operating
values (current grading)
 Combination of time and current
grading (inverse-time grading)
Power direction (directional protec-
tion), impedance (distance protec-
tion) and current difference (differen-
tial protection) are also used.
Requirements for selective
behavior of protective devices
Protective devices can only act selec-
tively if both the highest and the
lowest short-circuit currents for the
relevant system points are known at
the project planning stage.
As a result:
 The highest short-circuit current
determines the required rated
short-circuit switching capacity
Icu/Ics of the circuit-breaker.
Criterion: Icu or Ics > Ik max
 The lowest short-circuit current is
important for setting the short-
circuit release; the operating value
of this release must be less than the
lowest short-circuit current at the
end of the line to be protected,
since only this setting of Isd or Ii
guarantees that the overcurrent
release can fulfill its operator and
system protection functions.
Attention
When using these settings, permissi-
ble setting tolerances of ± 20%, or the
tolerance specifications given by the
manufacturer must be observed!
Criterion: Isd or Ii ≤ Ik min – 20%
 The requirement that defined
tripping conditions be observed
determines the maximum conduc-
tor lengths or their cross sections.
 Selective current grading is only
possible if the short-circuit currents
are known.
 In addition to current grading,
partial selectivity can be achieved
using combinations of carefully
matched protective devices.
 In addition to current grading,
partial selectivity can be achieved
using combinations of carefully
matched protective devices.
 With feeding into LV power sys-
tems, the single-phase fault current
will be greater than the three-phase
fault current if transformers with
the Dy connection are used.
 The single-phase short-circuit cur-
rent will be the lowest fault current
if the damping zero phase-sequence
impedance of the LV cable is active.
With large installations, it is advisable
to determine all short-circuit currents
using a special computer program.
Here, our SIMARIS design® planning
and calculation software comes as the
optimum solution.
Grading the operating currents
with time grading
Grading of the operating currents is
also taken into consideration with
time grading, i.e. the operating value
of the overcurrent release of the
upstream circuit-breaker must be at
least 1.5 times the operating value of
the downstream circuit-breaker.
Tolerances of operating currents in
definite-time-delay overcurrent S-
releases (±20%) are thus compen-
sated. When the manufacturer speci-
Power System
fies narrower tolerances, this factor is
reduced accordingly.
Plotting the tripping characteristics of
the graded protective devices in a
grading diagram will help to verify
and visualize selectivity.
2.3.5 Preparing Current-
Time Diagrams (Grading
Diagrams)
When characteristic tripping curves
are entered on log-log graph paper,
the following must be observed:
 To ensure positive selectivity, the
tripping curves must neither cross
nor touch.
 With electronic inverse-time-delay
(long-time delay) overcurrent
releases, there is only one tripping
curve, as it is not affected by pre-
loading. The selected characteristic
curve must, therefore, be suitable
for the motor or transformer at
operating temperature.
 With mechanical (thermal) inverse-
time-delay overload releases (L), the
characteristic curves shown in the
manufacturer catalog apply to cold
releases. The opening times to are
reduced by up to 25% at normal
operating temperatures.
Tolerance range of tripping curves
 The tripping curves of circuit-break-
ers given in the manufacturer
catalogs are usually only average
values and must be extended to
include tolerance ranges (explicitly
shown in Fig. 3/4, 3/20 and 3/24
only).
 With overcurrent releases – instan-
taneous (I) and definite-time
delayed releases (S) – the tolerance
may be ±20% of the current setting
(according to IEC 60947-2 / VDE
0660 Part 101).
2/17 2
Significant tripping times
For the sake of clarity, only the
delay time (td) is plotted for circuit-
breakers with definite-time-delay
overcurrent releases (S), and only the
opening time (to) for circuit-breakers
with instantaneous overcurrent
releases (I).
Grading principle
Delay times and operating currents
are graded in the opposite direction to
the flow of power, starting with the
final circuit:
 without fuses, for the load breaker
with the highest current setting of
the overcurrent release,
 with fuses, for the fused outgoing
circuit from the busbars with the
highest rated fuse-link current.
Circuit-breakers are preferred to fuses
in cases where fuse links with high
rated currents do not provide selectiv-
ity vis-à-vis the definite-time-delay
overcurrent release (S) of the trans-
former feeder circuit-breaker, or only
with very long delay times tsd (400 to
500 ms). Furthermore, circuit-break-
ers are used where high system avail-
ability is required, as they help to
clear faults faster and the circuit-
breakers’ releases are not subject to
aging – especially with consumers
with very long feeding distances.
Procedure with two or more
voltage levels
In the case of selectivity involving two
or more voltage levels (Fig. 2.7/2ff.),
all currents and tripping curves on the
high-voltage side are converted and
referred to the low-voltage side on
the basis of the transformer’s transfor-
mation ratio.
Tools for preparing grading
diagrams
 Standard forms with paired current
values for commonly used voltages,
2/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Q1 Q2 k1 k2
120
100
40
t 20
min 10
4 L (cold)
2
1
20
10
s
4
2
1
400
200
S
100 t sd 180 ms
ms t st 150 ms
40
20
t i < 30 ms
10
2
101 2 3 4 6 102 2 3 4 6 103 2 3 4 6 10 4 2 3 4 6 105
Current (r.m.s. value)
Fig. 2.3/3: Grading diagram with tripping curves of the circuit-breakers Q1 and Q2
e. g. 20/0.4 kV, 10/0.4 kV, 13.8/ undervoltage release of the circuit-
0.4 kV, etc. breaker (command time tk).
 Templates for plotting the tripping The release causes the circuit-breaker
characteristics to open. The short-circuit current is
Fig. 2.3/3 shows a hand-drawn grad- interrupted when the arc has been
ing diagram with tripping curves for extinguished. Only then does the
two series-connected circuit-breakers, protection system revert to the nor-
not taking into account tolerances. mal (rest) position (release time).
When the SIMARIS design planning
software is used, a manual prepara- The grading time tst between succes-
tion of grading diagrams is no longer sive protective devices must be
greater than the sum of the total
necessary.
disconnection time tg of the breaker
and the release time of the protection
Medium-voltage time grading
system.
Tripping command and grading
time Since response time tolerances, which
The following must be observed when depend on a number of factors, have
determining the grading time tgt on to be expected for the protective
the medium-voltage side: devices (including circuit-breakers), a
safety margin is incorporated in the
Once the protective device has been
grading time.
energized (Fig. 2.3/4), the set time
must elapse, before the device issues Whereas grading times tst of less than
the tripping command to the shunt or 400 to 300 ms are not possible with
 Power System

protective devices with mechanical

releases, electronic releases have Current I
grading times of 300 ms, and digital Time setting of overlaid protection
Short- Time setting of
releases used with modern vacuum protective device Grading time t st
circuit
circuit-breakers even provide grading Command time t k
current
times of only 250 or 200 ms.
Operating Scatter band Scatter band Scatter band
current of protective of circuit- of protective
Low-voltage time grading tripping breaker tripping
Load
Grading and delay times current
Only the grading time tst and delay
time tsd are relevant for time grading
between several series-connected Disconnection t
circuit-breakers or in conjunction with time of circuit- Release Safety
LV HRC fuses. breaker time time

Proven grading times tst Total disconnection time t g

Series-connected circuit-breakers:
Those so-called “proven grading times”
are guiding values or rules of thumb.
Precise information must be obtained
from the equipment manufacturers.
 Grading between two circuit-break-
ers with electronic overcurrent
releases should be about 70-80 ms
 Grading between two circuit-break-
ers with different release types (ETU
and TM) should be about 100 ms
 For circuit-breakers with ZSI (zone-
selective interlocking, i.e. short-
time grading control) the grading
distance of the unblocked release
has been defined as 50 ms.
of circuit-breaker
Fig. 2.3/4: Time grading in medium-voltage switchgear
to prevent any damage being caused
by short-circuit currents.
The DIN VDE and IEC standards also
permit a switching device to be pro-
tected by one of the upstream protec-
tive devices with an adequate rated
short-circuit switching capacity if both
the branch circuit and the down-
stream protective device are also
protected.

If the release is blocked, the switch

trips within the set time tsd.
Irrespective of the type of S-release
(mechanical or electronic), a grading
time of 70 ms to 100 ms is necessary
between a circuit-breaker and a
downstream LV HRC fuse.

Back-up protection
According to the Technical Supply Further information on low-voltage switchgear and
protective devices
Conditions of the supply network
 Siemens AG (Ed.), Switching, Protection and
operators (see ”Electrical Installations Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks, 4th ed.,
Handbook”), miniature circuit-break- published by Publicis , Erlangen, 1997
 Seip, Günther (Ed.), Electrical Installations
ers must be fitted with back-up fuses
Handbook, published by Publicis, Erlangen,
with a rated current of 100 A (max.) 2000.

2/19 2

2.4 Protective
Equipment for Low-
Voltage Power
Systems
Overcurrent protection devices must
be used to protect lines and cables
against overheating which may result
from operational overloads or dead
short circuits.* The protective switch-
ing devices and safety systems dealt
with in this chapter are further
described in Chapter 5.
Tables 2.4/1 and 2.4/2 provide an
overview of the protection equipment
for LV systems. The protection equip-
ment in the MV system of transformer
branches has also been listed in Table
2.4/2.
* cf. Seip, Günther G. (Ed.):
Electrical Installations Handbook, 4th edition,
Publicis, Erlangen, 2000, Section 1.7
2.4.1 Circuit-Breakers
with Protective Functions
Protective functions of LV circuit-
breakers
Circuit-breakers are used, first and
foremost, for overload and short-
circuit protection. In order to increase
their protective functions, they can
also be equipped with additional
releases, e.g. for disconnection on
undervoltage, or with supplementary
modules for detecting fault/residual
currents (also see Chapter 6).
Circuit-breakers are distinguished
according to their protective function:
 Circuit-breakers for system protec-
tion acc. to IEC 60947-2 /
DIN VDE 0660-101
 Circuit-breakers for motor protec-
tion acc. to IEC 60947-2 /
DIN VDE 0660-101
 Circuit-breakers used in motor
starters acc. to IEC 60947-4-2 /
DIN VDE 0660-102
 Miniature circuit-breakers for cable
and line protection acc. to
EN 60898/ IEC 60898 /
DIN VDE 0641-11
Zero-current interrupters / current
limiters
Depending on their method of opera-
tion, circuit-breakers are available as:
 Zero-current interrupters
 Current limiters (fuse-type current
limiting)
When configuring selective distribu-
tion boards, zero-current interrupters
are more suitable as upstream protec-
tion devices and current limiters as
downstream protection devices.
Overload and overcurrent
protection
Table 2.4/3 provides an overview of
releases and relays in LV circuit-
breakers.

Overcurrent protection devices Standard Overload Short-circuit

protection protection

Line-protection fuses, gL IEC 60269/DIN VDE 0636 × ×

Miniature circuit-breakers IEC 60898/DIN VDE 0641-11 × ×

Circuit-breakers w. overload IEC 60947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101 × ×

and overcurrent releases

Switchgear fuses, aM IEC 60269/DIN VDE 0636 – ×

Switchgear assembly
consisting of line-side fuse in IEC 60269/DIN VDE 0636 – ×
utilization category gL or aM
and contactor w. overload relay IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102 × –

or
starter circuit-breaker IEC 60947-2/DIN VDE 0660-101 – ×
and contactor w. overload relay IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660-102 × –

× Protection ensured – protection not ensured

Table 2.4/1: Overview of overcurrent protection devices for lines and cables together with their protection range

2/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

MV protection Switch-disconnectors, Circuit-breaker, current

devices applied HV HRC fuses transformer, overcurrent-
time protection

LV Circuit-breakers Tie Circuit-breaker

or LV HRC fuses breakers

Expense low adequate high

Medium-voltage side

Transformers with temp. II >>

HV HRC
detectors or thermal II >>>>
protection MV MV
LV LV
Low-voltage side with series Typically
Typically
connections of various protective single and optionally
single and
devices in radial networks, and parallel
≤ 630 A parallel
operation
parallel connections of LV HRC operation
fuses in interconnected grids

NH

≤ 50 A, ≤ 100 A

HV HRC fuse or LV HRC fuse Circuit-breaker

Independent two-zone definite-time
> overcurrent-time protection,
>> > and >>, to current transformer Withdrawable circuit-breaker
(with isolating point)
Reactive-power control unit

Switch-disconnector Contactor

Overload relay

Table 2.4/2: Overview of protection grading schemes for transformer branch and LV branch circuits

Overcurrent releases retrofitting or replacement. For possi- Short-circuit protection with

Instantaneous electromagnetic over-
current releases have either fixed or
adjustable settings, whereas the
electronic overcurrent releases used in
Siemens circuit-breakers all have
adjustable settings.
Modules
The overcurrent releases can be
integrated in the circuit-breaker or
supplied as separate modules for
ble exceptions, please refer to the
manufacturers' specifications.
Overload releases
Mechanical (thermal) inverse-time-
delay overload releases (L-releases)
are not always suitable for networks
with a high harmonic content. Circuit-
breakers with electronic overload
releases must be used in such cases.
S-releases
If circuit-breakers with definite (short)
time-delay overcurrent releases (S)
are used for time-graded short-circuit
protection, it should be noted that the
circuit-breakers are designed for a
specific maximum permissible thermal
and dynamic load. If the time delay
causes this load limit to be exceeded
in the event of a short circuit, an
I-release must also be used to ensure

2/21 2
that the circuit-breaker is opened
Protective Code Delay type of the Symbols acc. to
instantaneously in case of very high
function release EN 60617 / DIN 40713
short-circuit currents. The information
supplied by the manufacturer should
be consulted when selecting an Schematic symbol Graphic
appropriate release. or symbol

Reclosing lockout after short-circuit Overload L Stromabhängig

tripping protection verzögert
Some circuit-breakers can be fitted
with a mechanical and/or electrical
reclosing lockout which prevents Selective short- S1) definite-time-
reclosing to the short circuit after II>>
circuit protection delayed by timer
tripping on this fault. The circuit- (with delay) Zeitglied
breaker can only be closed again after or with
the fault has been eliminated and the I2-dependent
lockout has been reset manually. delay

Fault-current/residual-current Fault-current/ G1) definite-time-

protection
Fault-current protection devices have
acquired a position of vital importance
in safety engineering all over the
world, due to the high level of protec-
tion they provide (protection of
human life and property) and their
extended scope of protection features
(alternating and pulsating current
sensitivity).
Apart from residual-current-operated
circuit-breakers, miniature circuit-
breaker assemblies, e. g. miniature
circuit-breakers with fault-current
tripping, are being used to an increas-
ing extent for commercial and indus-
trial applications.
Miniature circuit-breakers (MCB)
with fault-current tripping
These circuit-breaker assemblies are
available as compact factory-built
devices or may be assembled from a
miniature circuit-breaker as the basic
device and an add-on module.
Miniature circuit-breakers with
fault-current/residual-current
tripping
The assembly comprising a circuit-
breaker and add-on module has
established itself for circuit-breakers
residual-current/ delayed or with I
ground-fault I2-dependent
protection (RCD) delay
Short-circuit I instantaneous
I>
>>
protection
(instantaneous)
1) For SENTRON 3WL and SENTRON 3VL circuit-breakers also with
“zone-selective interlocking” (ZSI)
Combinations of releases will only be referred to by their codes as L-, S- and
I-releases etc.
Table 2.4/3: Symbols for releases according to protective function
with rated currents In of up to 400 A  Operation depends on the system
and fault-current/residual-current voltage
tripping.  Sensitivity: tripping with alternating
and pulsating DC fault currents
Technical features
( )
The add-on module for residual-  Reset button ”R” for resetting after
current tripping used in system pro- residual-current tripping
tection applications includes such the  Test button ”T” for testing the
technical features as: circuit-breaker assembly
 Status display for the present leak-
 Rated residual current I∆n adjustable
age/residual current I∆ in the down-
in steps, e.g. 30 mA/ 100 mA/ stream circuit, e. g. by means of
300 mA/ 1,000 mA/ 3,000 mA colored LEDs:
 Tripping time ta adjustable in steps,
e.g. instantaneous 60 ms/ 100 ms/ – green: I∆ ≤ 0,25 I∆n
250 ms/ 500 ms/ 1,000 ms – yellow: 0,25 I∆n < I∆ ≤ 0,5 I∆n

2/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


– red: IA > I∆ > 0.5 I∆n
IA = Tripping current of
additional residual-
current module
 Disconnection of the electronics’
overvoltage protection prior to
insulation measurements in the
installation
 ”Remote tripping”
 ”Auxiliary switch (AS)”
Interface to bus systems
The circuit-breaker assemblies can be
equipped to bus systems using appro-
priate interfaces, to enable the
exchange of information and interac-
tion with other components in the
electrical installation.
Circuit-breaker assemblies sensitive
to universal current
Miniature circuit-breaker assemblies,
which are sensitive to universal cur-
rent (AC/DC-sensitive), are required
for industrial applications for electrical
installations in which smooth DC fault
currents or currents with a low resid-
ual ripple occur in the event of a fault.
Standards
The standards IEC 60947-2 /
DIN VDE 0660-101 apply to circuit-
breakers with add-on fault-current or
residual-current modules.
Selection criteria for circuit-
breakers
When selecting the appropriate cir-
cuit-breakers for system protection,
special attention must be paid to the
following characteristics:
 Type of circuit-breaker and its
releases according to the respective
protective function and tasks
 Rated voltages
 Short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics and
rated short-circuit making (Icm) and
breaking capacity (Icn)
 Rated and maximum load currents
The system voltage and system fre-
quency are crucial factors for selecting
the circuit-breakers according to
 rated insulation voltage Ui and
 rated operating voltage Ue
Rated insulation voltage Ui
The rated insulation voltage Ui is the
standardized voltage value for which
the insulation of the circuit-breakers
and their associated components is
rated in accordance with HD 625 / IEC
60664 / DIN VDE 0110, Insulation
Group C.
Rated operating voltage Ue
The rated operating voltage Ue of a
circuit-breaker is the voltage value to
which the rated short-circuit making
and breaking capacities and the short-
circuit performance category refer.
Short-circuit current
The maximum short-circuit current at
the mounting location is a crucial
factor for selecting the circuit-break-
ers according to
 short-circuit strength Icu/ Ics, as well
as
 rated short-circuit making (Icm) and
breaking capacities (Icn).
Dynamic short-circuit strength
The dynamic short-circuit strength is
the maximum asymmetric short-circuit
current. It is the highest permissible
instantaneous value of the prospective
short-circuit current along the conduct-
ing path with the highest load.
Thermal short-circuit strength
(1-s current)
The permissible thermal short-circuit
strength is referred to as the rated
short-time current Icw. It is the maxi-
mum current which the breaker is
capable of withstanding for a defined
time without being damaged. Gener-
ally, the Icw current refers to 1 s. Other
time values > 1 s can be converted
assuming Icn = constant.
Power System
Rated switching capacity
The rated switching capacity of the
circuit-breakers is specified as the
rated short-circuit making capacity Icm
and rated short-circuit breaking
capacity Icn.
Rated short-circuit making
capacity Icm
The rated short-circuit making capac-
ity Icm is the short-circuit current
which the circuit-breaker is capable of
making at the rated operating voltage
+10%, rated frequency and a specified
power factor. It is expressed as the
maximum peak value of the prospec-
tive short-circuit current, and is at
least equal to the rated short-circuit
breaking capacity Icn, multiplied by
the factor n specified in Table 2.4/4.
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacity Icn
The rated short-circuit breaking capac-
ity Icn is the short-circuit current which
the circuit-breaker is capable of break-
ing at the rated operating voltage
+10%, rated frequency and a specified
power factor cos ϕ. It is expressed as
the r.m.s. value of the alternating
current component.
Switching capacity category
Switching capacity categories, which
specify how often a circuit-breaker
can switch its rated making and
breaking current as well as the condi-
tion of the breaker after the specified
switching cycle, are defined for cir-
cuit-breakers in IEC 60947/ DIN VDE
0660 and in accordance with
IEC 157-1 (Table 2.4/5). The rated
short-circuit breaking capacity Icn is
based on the test sequence O-t-CO-t-
CO. The rated service short-circuit
breaking capacity Ics can also be
specified on the basis of the short-
ened switching sequence O-t-CO (see
Table 2.4/5 for explanation of O, t,
and C).
2/23 2
 With adjustable inverse-time-delay
Short-circuit breaking Power factor Minimum value n
releases and relays, the maximum
capacity Icn cos ϕ short-circuit making capacity
n= current setting is the rated continuous
(r.m.s. value) [kA] short-circuit breaking capacity
current Iu.
4.5 <I≤ 6 0.7 1.5
6 < I ≤ 10 0.5 1.7 Rated current Ie
10 < I ≤ 20 0.3 2.0
The rated operating current Ie is the
20 < I ≤ 50 0.25 2.1 current that is determined by the
50 <I 0.2 2.2 following parameters:
 The operating conditions of the
Tabelle 2.4/4: Ratio n between short-circuit making and breaking capacity and
corresponding power factor (for AC circuit-breakers)
switching device
 Rated operating voltage
 Rated frequency
The rated short-circuit breaking capacity is indicated with two parameters:  Rated switching capacity
 Rated duty
Switching capacity Icu Ics
Rated Rated
ultimate short-circuit service short-circuit
breaking capacity breaking capacity

Test sequence O-t-CO O-t-CO-t-CO

Testing of • ultimate short-circuit • service short-circuit

breaking capacity breaking capacity
Verification of Verification of
• tripping on overload • tripping on overload
• dielectric strength • dielectric strength
• heating • heating

O Breaking (O = Open); CO Making/Breaking (C = Close); t Pause (t = time)

Table 2.4/5: Switching performance categories acc. to IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 157-1

Rated circuit-breaker currents Conventional rated thermal

The rated duty, e.g. continuous opera-
tion, intermittent operation or short-
time operation, plays a decisive role in
selecting the switchgear according to
its rated currents.
The following rated currents are
distinguished according to the ther-
mal characteristics:
 Conventional rated thermal
current Ith
 Rated continuous current Iu
 Rated operating current Ie
current Ith, rated continuous
current Iu
The conventional rated thermal cur-
rent Ith or Ithe for motor starters in
enclosures is defined as an 8-h current
in accordance with IEC 60947-1, -4-1,
-3 / DIN VDE 0660-100, -102, -107.
It is the maximum current which can
be carried during this time without
the temperature limit being exceeded.
* The utilization category describes the
The rated continuous current Iu can be switching devices’ application and stress, see
carried for an unlimited time. device standards IEC 60947 / DIN VDE 0660.

2/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

Application examples for Siemens circuit-breakers and their typical tripping characteristics

Switch type Rated current Application Tripping characteristic

Air Circuit- For the protection of distribution systems, L

Breaker (ACB) 630 A to 6,300 A motors, transformers and generators
S
SENTRON 3WL – High rated short-time current for time selectivity G
– Two product series, SENTRON 3WL1 and SENTRON 3WL6,
with high and medium rated switching capacity
– Electronic overcurrent releases, independent of
external voltages, based on microprocessors
– Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) with 50 ms total
delay time

Current-limiting Built and tested in compliance L

circuit-breaker with IEC 60947/DIN VDE 0660 and
(MCCB) suitable for use as/in: S
SENTRON 3VL

TM-release: For system protection up to 1,600 A

6 A to 630 A Option: adjustable overload and overcurrent releases:
L
ETU release: accurate adaptation to protection requirements
63 A to 1,600 A

ETU releases: For motor protection up to 500 A

63 A to 500 A electronic overload releases with adjustable
time lag class: L

effective protection when the motor is at full duty

M-releases: For starter combinations up to 500 A,

63 A to 500 A unaffected by inrush peak currents:
Release doesn’t trip on direct-on-line start of motor

M-releases: Isolating function up to 1,600 A

100 A to 1,600 A with integrated overcurrent releases,
no line-side fuse required

Circuit-breaker For motor protection with overload and

3RV1 0.16 A to 100 A overcurrent protection L

Tripping cause: L overload S short-time delayed overcurrent I instantaneous tripping on overcurrent G ground fault

Table 2.4/6: Application examples for Siemens circuit-breakers and their typical tripping characteristics

2/25 2
2.4.2 Switchgear
L Inverse-time delay
Assemblies Circuit- Fuse overload release
breaker I Instantaneous
Switchgear assemblies are series- L Fuse electromagnetic
connected switching and protection L overcurrent release
Circuit- Icn Rated short-circuit
devices which perform specific tasks breaking capacity
A breaker
for protecting a system component; Ik Sustained short-
the first device (relative to the flow of A circuit current at the
mounting location
power) provides the short-circuit A Spacings of
k
protection. characteristic curves
cn k

Switchgear assemblies with fuses

Fuses and molded-case circuit-
breakers
If the prospective short-circuit current
Ik exceeds the rated short-circuit
breaking capacity Icn of the circuit-
breaker at its mounting location, the
latter must be provided with upstream
fuses (Fig. 2.4/1).
Protection and operating ranges
Defined protection and operating
ranges are assigned to each device
in the switchgear assembly. The
L-release monitors overload currents,
while the I-release detects short-
circuit currents up to the rated short-
circuit breaking capacity of the circuit-
breaker.
The circuit-breaker provides protec-
tion against all overcurrents up to its
rated short-circuit breaking capacity
Icn and ensures all-pole opening and
reclosing.
The fuses will only be responsible
for clearing the short-circuit, when
higher short-circuit currents Ik are
present. In this case too, the circuit-
breaker disconnects all-pole almost
simultaneously via its I-release, trig-
gered by the let-through current ID of
the fuse. The fuse must, therefore, be
selected such that its let-through
current ID is less than the rated short-
circuit breaking capacity Icn of the
circuit-breaker.
Operating: L-release -release
Disconnecting: Circuit-breaker
Fig. 2.4/1: Switchgear assembly comprising fuse and circuit-breaker
Fuse, contactor, and thermal
inverse-time-delay overload relay
The switchgear assembly comprising
contactor and overload relay is
referred to as a motor starter or, if a
three-phase motor is started directly,
a direct-on-line starter. The contactor
is used to switch the motor on and
off. The overload relay protects the
motor, motor supply conductors, and
contactor against overloading. The
fuse upstream of the contactor and
overload relay provides protection
against short circuits. For this reason,
the protection ranges and characteris-
tics of all the components (Fig. 2.4./2)
must be carefully coordinated with
each other.
Specifications for contactors and
motor starters
The standards IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN
VDE 0660-102 apply to contactors and
motor starters up to 1,000 V for
direct-on-line starting (with maximum
voltage).
When short-circuit current protection
equipment is selected for switchgear
Fuse
Fuse
+ Breaker
assemblies, a distinction is made
between various types of protection
according to the permissible degree of
damage as defined in IEC 60947-4-1 /
DIN VDE 0660-102:
 Coordination type 1: Destruction of
contactor and overload relay are
permissible. The contactor and/or
overload relay must be replaced if
necessary.
 Coordination type 2: The overload
relay must not be damaged. Contact
welding at the contactor is, how-
ever, permissible, given the con-
tacts can easily be separated or the
contactor can easily be replaced.
Protection and operating ranges of
equipment
Grading diagram for a motor
starter
The protection ranges and the rele-
vant characteristics of the equipment
constituting a switchgear assembly
used as a motor starter are illustrated
in the grading diagram in Fig. 2.4/2.
The fuses in this assembly must satisfy
a number of conditions:

2/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


1 Tripping curve of
Assembly with (thermal) inverse-time-
t LV HRC fuse, delay overload relay
contactor and 2 Destruction curve of
thermal thermal overload relay
overload relay 3 Rated breaking capacity
1 (motor starter) of contactor
1 min 4 Characteristic curve of
the contactor for easily
2
separable contact
welding
B 5 Prearcing-time/current
characteristic curve of
A 4 (depending on
current limiting by the fuse, utilization
the fuse) category aM
6 Total clearing time curve
5 of the fuse, category aM
3 C
6
1 ms
A, B, C Safety margins for
correctly working
short-circuit protection
Fig. 2.4/2: Switchgear assembly comprising fuse, contactor, and thermal inverse-time-delay
overload relay
 The time-current characteristics of operating current Ie without the
fuses and overload relays must contacts being welded.
allow the motor to be run up to To satisfy these conditions, the fol-
speed. lowing safety margins A, B and C must
 The fuses must protect the overload be maintained between certain char-
relay from being destroyed by acteristic curves of the devices:
currents approximately 10 times
Protection of overload relay
higher than the rated current of the
In order to protect the overload relay,
relay. the prearcing-time/current character-
 The fuses must interrupt overcur- istic of the fuse must lie in margin A
rents beyond the capability of the below the intersection of the tripping
contactor (i.e. currents approxi- curve of the overload relay (1) with its
mately 10 times higher than the destruction curve (2) (an LV HRC
rated operating current Ie of the switchgear fuse of utilization category
contactor). aM was used in this example, please
 In the event of a short-circuit, the refer to the section ”Selecting fuses”
fuses must protect the contactor below).
such that any damage does not
Protection of contactor
exceed the specified degrees of
In order to protect the contactor
damage (see above). Depending on
against excessively high breaking
the rated operating current Ie , currents, the prearcing-time/current
contactors must be able to with- characteristic of the fuse from the
stand motor starting currents of current value, which corresponds to
between 8 and 12 times the rated the breaking capacity of the contactor
Power System
(3), must lie in margin B below the
tripping characteristic of the overload
relay (1).
In order to protect the contactor
against contact welding, time-current
characteristics, up to which load
currents can be applied, can be speci-
fied for each contactor, which either
result in
 no contact welding
or
 welded contacts that can easily be
separated (characteristic curve 4 in
Fig. 2.4/2).
In both cases, therefore, the fuse
must respond in good time. The total
clearing time curve of the fuse (6)
must lie in margin C below the charac-
teristic curve of the contactor for
easily separable contact welding (4)
(total fault clearing time = prearcing
time + extinction time).
Selecting fuses
LV HRC switchgear fuses
Fuses for motor starters are selected
according to the aforementioned
criteria.
Compared with LV HRC fuses in uti-
lization category gL used to protect
conductors and cables, LV HRC
switchgear fuses in utilization cate-
gory aM provide the advantage of
weld-free short-circuit protection for
the maximum motor power which the
contactor is capable of switching.
Owing to their more effective current-
limiting abilities (as compared with
those of line-protection fuses), they
are very effective in relieving contac-
tors of high peak short-circuit currents
Ip, since they respond more rapidly in
the upper short-circuit range as
shown in Fig. 2.4/3.
It is therefore preferable to use
switchgear fuses rather than line-
2/27 2
 Functional category Utilization category Prearcing time [s]
10 4
Designation Rated continuous Rated breaking Designation Protection of
current up to current
t s 10 3
Full-range fuses Utilization
10 2 category
g In ≥ Ia min gL/gG Cables and gL
lines aM
10 1
gR Semiconductors
gB Mining
10 0
facilities
-1
Back-up fuses 10

a In ≥ 4 In aM Switchgear -2
10
≥ 2.7 In aR Semiconductors
8
-3
Ia min lowest rated breaking current 10
4 10 2
10 3 10 4 5
[A]

Table 2.4/7: Classification of LV HRC fuses based on their functional characteristics defined in IEC Fig. 2.4/3: Comparison of prearcing-time/current
60269-1/DIN VDE 0636-10 characteristics of LV HRC fuses of
utilization categories gL and aM,
rated current 200 A

protection fuses with relay settings
> 80 A at higher operating currents
with correspondingly lower short-
circuit current attenuation.
Table 2.4/7 shows the classification of
the fuses based on functional fea-
tures.
Classification of LV HRC fuses and
comparison of characteristics of gL
and aM utilization categories
LV HRC fuses are divided into func-
tional and utilization categories in
accordance with their type. They can
continuously carry currents up to their
rated current.
Functional category g
(full-range fuses)
Functional category g applies to full-
range fuses which can interrupt
currents from the minimum fusing
current up to the rated short-circuit
breaking current.
Utilization category gL
This category includes fuses in utiliza-
tion category gL for cable and line
protection.
Functional category a
(back-up fuses)
Functional category a applies to fuses
for partial-range protection (back-up
fuses), which can interrupt currents
above a specified multiple of their
rated current up to the rated short-
circuit breaking current.
Utilization category aM
Utilization category aM applies to
switchgear fuses whose minimum
breaking current is approximately four
times the rated current. Therefore,
these fuses are only intended for
short-circuit protection. For this
reason, fuses of functional category
“a” must not be used above their rated
current. A means of overload protec-
tion, e.g. a thermal time-delay relay,
must always be provided.
The prearcing-time/current character-
istics of LV HRC of utilization category
gL and aM for 200 A are compared in
Fig. 2.4/3.
Switchgear assemblies without
fuses (circuit-breaker protected
design)
Back-up protection (cascade-
connected circuit-breakers)
If two circuit-breakers with I-releases
of the same type are connected in
series along one conducting path,
they will open simultaneously in the
event of a fault (K) in the vicinity of
the distribution board (Fig. 2.4/4,
2.4/5).
The short-circuit current is thereby
detected by two series-connected
interrupting devices and effectively
extinguished. As a result, the down-
stream circuit-breaker with a lower
rated switching capacity can be
installed at a location where the
possible maximum short-circuit cur-
rent exceeds its rated switching
capacity (see Section 2.3.1 “Back-up
Protection”).
Protection and operating ranges of
the circuit-breakers
Fig. 2.4/4 shows the single-line dia-
gram and Fig. 2.4/5 the principle of a
cascade connection. The rated current
of the upstream circuit-breaker Q2 is
selected in accordance with its rated
operating current.
The circuit-breaker Q2 is, for example,
used as a main circuit-breaker or
group circuit-breaker for several
branch circuits in subdistribution
Circuit-
Q2 breaker with
I-release
and
Circuit-breaker
Q1
with L- and
I-release
K
Fig. 2.4/4: Block diagram of a back-up protection
circuit (cascade connection) in a
subdistribution board

2/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


boards. Its I-release is set to a very
high operating current, if possible to
the rated short-circuit breaking capac-
ity (Icn) of the downstream circuit-
breakers. The branch circuit-breaker
Q1 provides overload protection and
also clears autonomously relatively
low short-circuit currents, which may
be caused by short circuits to exposed
conductive parts, insulation faults or
short circuits at the end of long lines
and cables. The upstream circuit-
breaker Q2 only opens at the same
time if high short-circuit currents flow
as a result of a dead short circuit in
the vicinity of the branch circuit-
breaker Q1 (limited selectivity).
Circuit-breakers with L- and I-
releases and contactor
Protection and operating ranges
The circuit-breaker provides overload
and short-circuit protection also for
the contactor, while the contactor
performs switching duties (Fig. 2.4/6).
The requirements that must be ful-
filled by the circuit-breaker are the
same as those that apply to the fuse
in switchgear assemblies comprising
fuse, contactor and overload relay
(see Fig. 2.4/2).
Starter circuit-breaker with I-
release, contactor, and overload
relay
Readiness for reclosing
Overload protection is provided by the
overload relay in conjunction with the
contactor, while short-circuit protec-
tion is provided by the starter circuit-
breaker. The operating current of its
I-release is set as low as the starting
cycle will permit, in order to include
low short-circuit currents in the
instantaneous breaking range as well
(Fig. 2.4/7). The advantage of this
switchgear assembly is that it is
possible to determine whether the
fault was an overload or short circuit
Power System
according to whether the contactor,
triggered by the overload relay, or the ip
starter circuit-breaker has opened.
Further advantages of the starter i
i D1
circuit-breaker following short-circuit
tripping are three-phase circuit inter-
i D(1+2)
ruption and immediate readiness for
reclosing.
Switchgear assemblies with starter
circuit-breakers are becoming increas-
ingly important in control units with-
out fuses. t
Switchgear assemblies with
thermistor motor-protection
u ue
devices
u B(1+2)
Overload relays and releases cease to
provide reliable overload protection u B1
when it is no longer possible to estab-
lish the winding temperature from the
t
motor current. This is the case with
 high switching frequencies,
 irregular, intermittent duty,
 restricted cooling and
 high ambient temperatures.
ip Peak short-circuit current
In these cases, switchgear assemblies (maximum value)
with thermistor motor-protection
iD1 Let-through current of branch
devices are used. The switchgear circuit-breaker Q1
assemblies are designed with or iD (1+ 2) Actual let-through current
without fuses depending on the (lower than iD1)
installation configuration. The degree ue Driving voltage
of protection that can be attained (operating voltage)
depends on whether the motor to be uB (1+ 2) Sum of the arc voltages of the
protected has a thermally critical upstream circuit breaker Q2
and the outgoing feeder
stator or rotor. The operating temper- circuit-breaker Q1
ature, coupling time constant, and the
uB1 Arc voltage of branch
position of the temperature sensor in circuit-breaker Q1
the motor winding are also crucial
factors. They are usually specified by
the motor manufacturer. Fig. 2.4/5: Principle of a back-up protection
circuit (cascade connection)
2/29 2
 Circuit- Circuit-breaker
t
breaker with with -release for
L -releases starter
t assemblies
L Contactor L
Contactor
1 2 Inverse-time-
delay overload
relay with
L-release

Einstellbereich
3 cn
cn

Tripping: L-release -release

Disconnecting: Contactor Circuit-breaker

1 Rated breaking capacity of L Characteristic curve of the

contactor
2 Rated making capacity of
contactor
3 Characteristic curve of the
contactor for easily
separable contact welding
inverse-time-delay overload
release
I Characteristic curve of the
instantaneous
electromagnetic L Characteristic curve of I Characteristic curve of
overovercurrent release (thermal) inverse-time- adjustable instantaneous
Icn Rated short-circuit breaking delay overload relay overcurrent release
capacity of circuit-breaker

Fig. 2.4/6: Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker and contactor Fig. 2.4/7: Switchgear assembly comprising circuit-breaker, adjustable
overcurrent release, contactor, and overload relay

a) b) c) d)

Fuse Fuse
Circuit-breaker with Circuit-breaker with Circuit-breaker with
L- and I-release L- and I-release I-release

Contactor Contactor Contactor

Overload relay Overload relay

Thermistor motor Thermistor motor Thermistor motor Thermistor motor
protection protection protection protection
M M M M

+ + + +

Fig. 2.4/8: Switchgear assembly comprising comprising thermistor motor protection plus additional overload relay or release (schematic circuit diagram)

Motors with thermally critical Motors with thermally critical Note:

stators
Motors with thermally critical stators
can be adequately protected against
overloads and overheating by means
of thermistor motor-protection
devices without overload relays.
Feeder cables are protected against
short circuits and overloads either by
fuses and circuit-breakers (Fig2.4/8a)
or by fuses alone (Fig. 2.4/8b).
rotors
Motors with thermally critical rotors,
even if started with a locked rotor, can
only be provided with adequate
protection if they are fitted with an
additional overload relay or release.
The overload relay or release also
protects the cabling against overloads
(Fig. 2.4/8a, c and d).
We recommend the use of an
electronic motor protection system
such as SIMOCODE (with or without
thermistor protection) for motors.
Advantages: broad performance
range, comprehensive control
functionalities, bus interfacing
(PROFIBUS-DP), etc.

2/30 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


[kA] 10A
cos
i p, i D cos 0,3
cos 0,5
13
10
8
iD
cos 0,7
1 1,05 1,2
1 10
Short-circuit current
iD Let-through currents
ip Peak short-circuit currents
Fig. 2.4/9: Current-limiting characteristics of circuit-breaker (63 A) and LV
HRC fuses (63 A or 100 A)
2.4.3 Selecting Protective
Equipment
Short-circuit protection of branch
circuits
Branch circuits in distribution boards
and control units can be provided
with short-circuit protection by means
of fuses or by means of circuit-break-
ers without fuses. The level of antici-
pated current limiting, which is higher
in fuses with low rated currents than
in current-limiting circuit-breakers
with the same rated current, may also
be a crucial factor in making a choice
in favor of one or the other solution.
Comparing the protective
characteristics of fuses with those
of current-limiting circuit-breakers
The following should be taken into
consideration when comparing the
protection characteristics of fuses and
circuit-breakers:
 The rated short-circuit breaking
capacity, which can vary consider-
ably;
 The level of current limiting which is
always higher with fuses of up to
400 A than for current-limiting
circuit-breakers with the same rated
current;
 The shape of the prearcing-
time/current characteristics of fuses
2h
2,25
ip t
63 A i 10 s
D a, a´
100 A
iD 63 A
b B A
10 ms
1 1,3 1,6
22 100
[kA] 1 Current-limiting range
k
2 Overload range
For example for Ik = 10 kA:
3 Short-circuit current range
iD Fuse (100 A) 7.5 kA
A Test range for fuse
iD Circuit-breaker 8 kA currents
Fig. 2.4/10: Characteristic curves and switching capacities of a fuse (a) and
circuit-breaker (b) with LI-releases
and the tripping characteristics of
circuit-breakers,
 Fault clearing conditions in accor-
dance with IEC 60 364-4-41/ DIN
VDE 0100-410, Section 6.1.3 ”Pro-
tection Measures in TN Systems”.*
Comparison of current-limiting
characteristics of LV HRC fuses and
circuit-breakers
Fig. 2.4/9 shows the current-limiting
characteristics of a circuit-breaker
with rated continuous current of 63 A,
at 400 V and 50 Hz compared to an LV
HRC fuse of type 3NA, utilization
category gL, rated currents 63 A and
100 A. Owing to the high motor
starting currents, however, the rated
current of the fuse must be higher
than the rated operating current of
the motor, i.e. a circuit-breaker with a
minimum rated current of 63 A or a
fuse with a minimum rated current of
100 A is required for a 30 kW motor.
Comparison between the tripping
curves of fuses with those of
circuit-breakers with the same
rated current
The prearcing-time/current character-
istic curve a of the 63 A fuse link,
utilization category gL, and the “LI”
tripping curve b of a circuit-breaker
Power System
a´
a b
1 2 3
cn
r ,( e) kmin kmax 100
[kA]
B Test range for the limiting
tripping currents of the
circuit-breaker
Icn Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity
are plotted in the time-current dia-
gram in Fig. 2.4/10. The setting
current for the inverse-time-delay
overload release of the circuit-breaker
corresponds to the rated current of
the fuse link.
Current limiting range (1)
The typical test range for fuse cur-
rents (A) is, for example, between 1.3
and 1.6 times the rated current while
the test range for the limiting tripping
currents of the overload release (B) is
between 1.05 and 1.2 times the
current setting. The adjustable over-
load release allows for the current
setting and, therefore, the limiting
tripping current to be matched more
closely to the continuous loading
capability of the equipment to be
protected than it would be possible
with a fuse, whose different current
ratings would only permit approxi-
mate matching. Although the limit
current of the fuse is adequate for
providing overload protection of lines
and cables, it is not sufficient for the
starting current of motors, where a
fuse with the characteristic a’ would
be needed.
* Also see Seip, Günther (Ed.),
Electrical Installations Handbook, 4th ed.,
Erlangen, 2000, Chapter 2.
2/31 2
Overload range (2)
Characteristic Fuse Circuit-breaker
In the overload range, the prearcing-
time/current characteristic curve of Rated switching capacity at > 100 kA, 690 V f (Ir Ue type1))
the fuse is steeper than the tripping alternating voltage
curve of the overload release. This is
Current limiting f (Ir Ik) f (Ir Ik Ue type1))
desirable for overload protection of
cables and conductors; the flatter Additional arcing space none f (Ir Ik Ue type1))
tripping characteristic b is, however,
Operability status visible from yes no
required for the overload protection
outside
of motors.
extra expense
Safe actuation during operation required2) yes
Short-circuit current range (3)
In the short-circuit current range, the Remote control no yes
instantaneous release of the circuit- extra expense
Automatic all-pole opening required3) yes
breaker detects short-circuit currents
extra expense
above its operating value faster than Signaling option required4) yes
the fuse. Higher currents are broken
Interlocking no yes
more quickly by the fuse. And for this
reason, a fuse limits the short-circuit Readiness for reclosing after
current more effectively than a circuit- disconnection on overload no yes
breaker. short-circuit clearing no f (condition)

This results in an extremely high rated Interruption of operations yes f (condition)

breaking capacity for fuses of over (no. of switching operations
Maintenance expense no f and condition)
100 kA at an operating voltage of
690 V AC. The rated short-circuit Selectivity no expense extra expense required
breaking capacity Icn of circuit-break-
Replaceability yes5) if the same make
ers, however, depends on a number
of factors, e.g. the rated operating Short-circuit protection
voltage Ue and the type. Line very good good
Motor very good good
A comparison between the protection
characteristics of fuses, circuit-break- Overload protection
ers and their switchgear assemblies Line sufficient good
can be found in Tables 2.4/6 and Motor not possible good
2.4/9.
1) Type of construction may be: arc nectors with high-speed closing
quenching method, short-circuit 3) By means of fuse monitoring and
Selecting circuit-breakers for strength owing to specific resistance, dedicated circuit-breaker
circuits with and without fuses constructive design 4)
2)
By means of fuse monitoring
For example, by means of shock- 5)
Circuits and control units can be hazard protected fuse-switch-discon- Standardized
designed with or without fuses.
Circuits with fuses Table 2.4/8: Comparison between the protective characteristics of fuses and circuit-breakers
(fuse-protected design)
The standard design with fuses may also be protected by a molded-
overload protection and selective
intended for system protection case circuit-breaker, type SENTRON
short-circuit protection for the trans-
includes fuse-switch-disconnectors
former and distribution board. 3VL. The fuse, providing system
switch-disconnectors with fuses, and
Siemens circuit-breakers SENTRON WL protection, protects the lines to the
fuse and base arrangements (Table
are ideal for this purpose. Transform- subdistribution board against over-
2.4/10).
ers featuring lower output ratings, loads and short circuits as well as non-
The feeder circuit-breaker provides and/or if selectivity is not required, motor consumers. The switchgear

2/32 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

Equipment Protective devices with fuses

to be protected
and switching
frequency Fuse

Circuit-breaker

Contactor

Overload protection

Thermistor-
motor protection
M M M M M M
3~ 3~
+ + + +

Overload protection
– Line ++ ++ + + ++ ++
– Motors (with thermally critical stators) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
– Motors (with thermally critical rotors) ++1) ++ + + ++ ++

Short-circuit protection
– Line ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
– Motor ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++

Switching frequency – ++ – ++ – ++

Equipment to be Protective devices without fuses

protected and
switching
frequency –

Circuit-breaker

Contactor

Overload protection

Thermistor-/
SIMOCODE
motor protection M M M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
+ + +ϑ

Overload protection
– Line ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ +
– Motors (with thermally critical stators) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++1) ++
– Motors (with thermally critical rotors) ++1) ++ ++ ++ ++1) ++

Short-circuit protection
– Line ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
– Motor ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++

Switching frequency + + + + – –

1) Protection with little restriction in case of phase failure

++ Very good + Good – Poor

Table 2.4/9: Comparison between the protective characteristics of different switchgear assemblies (schematic circuit diagrams)

2/33 2
 No. Type of Version Rated short- Type of release or relay Fuse Tripping
circuit- circuit L S I curve
breaker breaking Ad- Fixed Ad- Fixed Ad-

↔
capacity just- setting just- setting just- Icn Adjustable
Icn able able able > 100 kA ↔ release

Feeder circuit-breaker

1 Circuit-breaker 3WL ≥ Ik1 × – × – × – cn

for system
t
protection
with
k1
selectivity
requirement
1

k1
Distribution circuit-breaker

2 Fuse for 3NA ≥ Ik2 – – – – – × cn

system t
2 protection
k2

k2 k2

Load circuit-breaker
k2
3 Fuse and 3NA ≥ Ik3 – – – – – × cn
circuit- 3RV1 ≤ Ik3 × – – × – –
t
5 breaker for
4 motor
k3
3 k3 protection

4 Fuse and 3NA ≥ Ik3 – – – – – × cn

k3 k3 direct-on- 3RB × – – – – –
V t
line starter 3RT – – – – – –
M M for motor
k3
3~ 3~ protection

5 Fuse for 3NA ≥ Ik3 – – – – – × cn

power t
consumer
k3

Table 2.4/10: Distribution boards combining fuses and circuit-breakers

assemblies comprising fuse and
circuit-breaker, which provide motor
protection, as well as fuses, contactor,
and overload relay protect the motor
feeder cable and the motor against
overloads and short circuits.
Circuits without fuses (circuit-
breaker protected design)
In the case of distribution boards
without fuses (Table 2.4/11), short-
circuit protection is provided by
circuit-breakers for system protection.
In the case of load circuit-breakers,
short-circuit protection is provided by

2/34 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

No. Type of Version Rated short- Type of release or relay Tripping

circuit- circuit L S I characteristic
breaker breaking Ad- Fixed Ad- Fixed Ad-

↔
capacity just- set- just- set- just- Adjustable
Icn able ting able ting able ↔ release

Feeder circuit-breaker

1 Circuit-breaker 3WL ≥ Ik1 × – × – × cn

1 for system
t
protection
k1
without
k1
selectivity
requirement

Distribution circuit-breaker

2* Circuit-breakers 3VL ≥ Ik2 – × – × – cn

3 2 for system × – – × –
t
protection × – – – ×
k2 k2 without
k2
selectivity * 3 Varianten möglich,
requirement Variante 3 bildlich dargestellt

3 Circuit-breaker 3WL ≥ Ik2 × – × – ×

cn
for system 3VL
t
protection
4 with
5 k2
selectivity
requirement

Load circuit-breaker

4 Circuit- 3RV1 ≥ Ik3 × – – × – cn

k3 k3
breaker t
for motor
M M protection k3
3~ 3~
5 Circuit-breaker 3RA ≥ Ik3 × – – × −
cn
and direct-on-
t
line starter for
motor
k3
protection

Table 2.4/11: Power distribution using circuit-breaker without fuses

circuit-breakers for motor protection
only or for starter assemblies together
with the contactor. The protection
ranges of the switchgear assemblies
comprising circuit-breaker, contactor
and overload relay have already been
dealt with in this chapter. Further
technical data can be found in the
literature supplied by the manufac-
turer.

2/35 2
2.4.4 Miniature Circuit-
Breakers (MCBs)
Task
Miniature circuit-breakers (MCBs) are
mainly designed for the protection of
cables and lines against overload and
short circuit, thus ensuring the pro-
tection of electrical equipment against
excessively high heating in compli-
ance with the relevant standards, e.g.
IEC 60364-4-43 / DIN VDE 0100-430.
Under certain conditions, MCBs in a
TN system also provide protection
against electrical stroke at excessively
high contact voltage due to wrong
insulation, e.g. according to
IEC 364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410.
Use
Miniature circuit-breakers are used in
all distribution networks, both for
commercial buildings and industrial
buildings. Due to a wide range of
versions and accessories (e.g. auxil-
iary contacts, fault signal contacts,
open-circuit shunt releases), they are
able to meet the various requirements
of the most diverse areas of applica-
tion.
Tripping characteristics
Four tripping characteristics A, B, C
and D are available for any kind of
application; they correspond to the
equipment being connected in the
circuit to be protected.
 Tripping characteristic A is particu-
larly suitable for the protection of
transducers in measuring circuits,
for electronically controlled circuits
and where disconnection within
0.4 s is required in accordance with
IEC 60364-4-41/ DIN VDE 0100-410.
 Tripping characteristic B is the
standard characteristic for wall-
outlet circuits in residential and
2/36 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
1st condition 2st condition Ib Operating current to be
b ≤ n≤ z 2 ≤ 1.45· z
expected, i.e. current drawn
by the power consumer
b z under normal operating
conditions
Iz Permissible continuous load
n 2 1.45· z current for a conductor,
when the maximum
Time t continuously applied
temperature of the
1 2
insulation is not exceeded
1.45·Iz Maximum permissible
overload current of limited
duration, at which a sudden,
temporary exceeding of the
maximum continuously
applied temperature has not
yet resulted in a safety-
3 relevant reduction of
insulation properties
In Rated current, i.e. the
current the miniature circuit-
breaker has been laid out for
and other rating parameters
refer to (setting value)
I1 Conventional non-tripping
3
current, i.e. the current
which does not result in
disconnection under defined
conditions
I2 Conventional tripping
current, i.e. the current
which is broken under
defined conditions
(In ≤ 63 A) within one hour
I3 Tolerance margins
4 5
I4 Withstand current of the
instantaneous electro-
magnetic overcurrent
release (short-circuit
release)
I5 Tripping current of the
instantaneous electromag-
netic overcurrent release
(short-circuit release)
Fig. 2.4/11: Schematic reference value diagram of lines and their protective device
commercial buildings. Operating method
 Tripping characteristic C is advanta-
geous wherever equipment with Miniature circuit-breakers are protec-
higher inrush currents, e.g. lumi- tive switches for manual operation,
naires and motors, is used. including overcurrent remote tripping
 Tripping characteristic D is adapted (via thermal overcurrent instanta-
to highly pulse-generating equip- neous release). Multi-pole devices are
ment, such as transformers, sole- coupled mechanically at the outside
noid valves or capacitors. via handles and simultaneously inside
via their releases.

Standards
The international basic standard is
IEC 60898. The German national
standard DIN VDE 0641-11 is
based upon it. Device sizes are
described in DIN 43880. For the
protection against personal injury,
the relevant standards, e.g. concern-
ing fault clearing requirements in
compliance with IEC 60364-4-41 /
DIN VDE 0100-410 have to be met.
Versions
MCBs are available in many different
versions: 1-pole, 2-pole, 3-pole,
4-pole and with connected neutral
1-pole+N and 3-pole+N. Corresponding
to the preferred series according to
IEC 60898 and DIN 43880, MCBs
are allocated the following rated
currents:
 Devices with 55 mm in depth
0.3 A to 63 A
 Devices with 70 mm depth
0.3 A to 125 A
Depending on the device type, an
auxiliary switch (AS), fault-signal
contact (FC), open-circuit shunt
release (ST), undervoltage release
(UR) or residual-current-operated
circuit-breaker (RCCB module) can be
retrofitted.
By fitting an RCCB module to an MCB,
an RCBO assembly is created. As a
complete system, it can be used for
line protection as well as for protec-
tion against electrically ignited fires
and personal injury in the event of
direct or indirect contact voltages.
Auxiliary switches (AS) signal the
switching state of the MCB and indi-
cate whether it has been switched off
manually or automatically. Fault-
signal contacts (FC) indicate tripping
of the MCB due to overload or short
circuit. Open-circuit shunt releases
(ST) are suitable for remote switching
of MCBs. Undervoltage releases (UR)
protect devices connected in the
circuit against impacts of insufficiently
low supply voltage.
By connecting the AS and the FC to an
instabus KNX/EIB binary input, the
signals may also be read into an
instabus KNX/EIBEIB system (e.g.
GAMMA instabus). When using an
instabus KNX/EIB binary output, the
MCB which is tripped via the open-
circuit shunt release (AA) can also be
remotely tripped via instabus
KNX/EIB.
Depending on the device type, minia-
ture circuit-breakers by Siemens have
the following features:
 Excellent current-limiting and
selectivity characteristics
 Identical terminals on both sides for
optional feeding from the top or
bottom
 Installation and dismantling without
the use of tools
 Rapid and easy removal from the
system
 Terminals safe-to-touch by fingers
or the back of the hand according to
VDE 0106-100
 Combined terminals for simultane-
ous connection of busbars and
feeder cables
 Main switch characteristics
according to IEC 60204 / VDE 0113
 Separate switch position indicator
Alternating-current type MCBs are
suitable for all AC and three-phase
networks up to a voltage of 240/
415 V and all DC networks up to
60 V (1-pole) and 120 V (2-pole).
The MCB voltage rating is 230/400 V
AC. AC/DC-current type MCBs may also
be used for 220 V DC (1-pole) and
440 V DC (2-pole).
Power System
In order to avoid damaging of the
conductor insulation in case of faults,
temperatures must not rise above
certain values. For PVC insulation,
these values are 70 °C permanently or
160 °C for a maximum of 5 s (short
circuit).
For line-overcurrent protection, the
MCBs usually have two independent
releases. In the event of overload, a
bimetal contact opens inverse-time-
delayed corresponding to the current
value. If a certain threshold is
exceeded in the event of a short
circuit, however, an electro-magnetic
overcurrent release instantaneously
trips without delay. The tripping range
(time-current threshold zone) of the
MCB according IEC 60898 / DIN VDE
0641-11 is defined via parameters I1
to I5 (Fig. 2.4/12). The line parameters
Ib and Iz (see Fig. 2.4/11) are related
to it.
When the IEC 60898 was published,
new characteristics B, C and D were
defined internationally. They were
also adopted in DIN VDE 0641-11.
The new tripping requirements
of MCBs facilitate their assignment
to conductor cross sections.
In the relevant standards, e.g.
IEC 60364-4-43 / DIN/VDE 0100-430,
the following conditions are listed:
Rated current rule
Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz
Tripping current rule
I2 ≤ 1.45 x Iz
As the second condition is automati-
cally fulfilled with the new character-
istic curves due the fact that these
curves have been defined (Iz = In),
the MCB merely needs to be selected
according to the simplified criterion
In ≤ Iz
Resulting from this, a new allocation
of rated currents for MCBs and con-
2/37 2
 Rated cross Rated MCB current In for Iz (line)
section qn protection of Permissible continuous load current if
2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load 2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load
mm2 A A A A

1.5 16 16 19.5 17.5

2.5 25 20 27 24
4 32 32 36 32
6 40 40 46 41
10 63 50 63 57
16 80 63 85 76
25 100 80 112 96
35 125 100 138 119

Table 2.4/12: MCB and conductor cross section matrix

Example: flat-webbed cable, stranded cable, on or in the wall, installation type C*), at +30 ºC ambient temperature

* Installation type C in compliance with IEC 60364-5-52 / DIN VDE 0298-4: cables are fixed in such a way that the spacing between them and the
wall surface is less than 0.3 times the outer cable diameter.

ductor cross sections can be given

(see Table 2.4/12), related to an
ambient temperature of +30 °C, as it 300 MCB
is considered appropriate according to Tripping characteristics B, C, D acc. to
IEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11
IEC 60364-4-43 / DIN VDE 0100-430, 1 2
Time t

A1) B C D 1) Meets the requirements

and in relation to the type of installa- 60
1.13 x of IEC 60364-4-41/
1 (t > 1h) n 1.13 x n 1.13 x n 1.13 x n
tion and accumulation of equipment. DIN VDE 0100-410
Minutes

2 (t < 1h) 1.45 x n 1.45 x n 1.45 x n 1.45 x n

Siemens MCBs are available with the 10 4 (t > 0,1s) 2x n 3x n 5x n 10 x n

tripping characteristics B, C and D, 5 (t < 0,1s) 3x n 5x n 10 x n 20 x n

bearing, among other things, the VDE

mark based upon the CCA procedure 3
(CENELEC Certification Agreement). 1

Figure 2.4/12 represents all tripping

characteristics. Due to the position of
10
the tripping bands, the following
5 Disconnection condition
features vary in intensity with a rising acc. to
degree from curve A to D: IEC 60364-4-41/
Seconds

3 DIN VDE 0100-410

 Current pulse withstand strength, 1

rising 0.4
A B C D
 Permissible line and cable length for
the protection of persons, decreas- 5 5 5 5
0.1
ing 4 4 4 4

Temperature impact
The tripping characteristics are stan- 0.01
dard defined at an ambient tempera- 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
ture of +30 °C. At higher tempera- x Rated current n

tures, the thermal tripping curve in

Fig. 2.4/12 shifts to the left, and to
the right at lower temperatures. This Fig. 2.4/12: Time-current limit ranges of MCBs

2/38 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


means that tripping becomes effective
even with lower currents present
(higher temperatures) or only with
higher currents (lower temperatures).
This has to be taken into account in
particular for an installation in hot
rooms, in encapsulated distribution
boards where, owing to the current-
induced heat losses of the built-in
devices, higher temperatures may
prevail and for distribution boards
installed outdoors. MCBs can be used
at temperatures ranging from –25 °C
to +55 °C. The relative humidity may
be 95%.
Resistance to climate
Miniature circuit-breakers by Siemens
are resistant to climate in compliance
with IEC 68-2-30. They were success-
fully tested in six climatic cycles.
Degree of protection
As MCBs are mainly installed in distri-
bution boards, their degree of protec-
tion must meet the requirements of
the respective type of room. MCBs
without an encapsulation can reach
IP30 according to IEC 60529 / DIN VDE
0470-1 provided that they have
adequate terminal covers.
Standards Rated switching capacity classes
IEC 60898 / 1,500 A
DIN VDE 0641-11 3,000 A
4,500 A
6,000 A
10,000 A
15,000 A
20,000 A
25,000 A
Table 2.4/13: Rated switching capacity classes of MCBs
All MCBs are equipped with a snap-on
fixing for rapid fitting on 35-mm wide
standard mounting rails according to
DIN EN 50022. Some versions may
additionally be screwed on mounting
plates.
Installation
Moreover, some type series are avail-
able with a rapid wiring system for
manual handling without the use of
tools, which even enables the removal
of individual MCBs from the busbar
system.
Rated switching capacity
Besides a reliable adherence to char-
acteristic curves, an important per-
formance feature of MCBs is their
rated short-circuit breaking capacity.
It is divided into short-circuit breaking
capacity classes and indicates up to
which level short-circuit currents can
be broken according to IEC 60898/
DIN VDE 0641-11 (Table 2.4/13).
Depending on their design, MCBs by
Siemens have short-circuit breaking
capacity ratings up to 25,000 A and
VDE approval.
Current-limiting classes
As a selectivity indicator with regard
to upstream fuses, miniature circuit-
Power System
breakers with characteristic B and C
up to 40 A are divided in to three
current-limiting classes according to
their current-limiting capability.
For permissible let-through I2t values,
please refer to the standards
IEC 60898 / DIN VDE 0641-11.
For reasons of selectivity, only Class 3
MCBs with a rated switching capacity
of at least 6,000 A may be used in
distribution boards connected down-
stream of the meter for residential
and commercial buildings in compli-
ance with the Technical Supply Condi-
tions of German supply network
operators.
Devices must be labeled:
Selectivity
Selectivity means that only that pro-
tective device will trip in the event of
a fault which is closest to the fault
location in the course of the current
path. This way the energy flow can be
maintained in circuits which are
connected in parallel. In the diagram
in Fig. 2.4/13, the current curve in a
disconnection process is shown
schematically with regard to current-
limiting classes. Siemens MCBs of type
B16 reduce the energy flow to much
lower values than defined for current-
limiting class 3.
Figure 2.4/13 shows the selectivity
limits of MCBs with different current-
limiting classes as the intersection of
the MCB tripping curve with the
melting curve of the fuse. The highly
effective current limitation of the MCB
also affects the high current discrimi-
nation towards the upstream fuse.
Curve B16 relates to 16 A Siemens
breakers, tripping characteristic B.
2/39 2
 2
Transformer Permissible t value of calbe 1,5 mm 2

t [A 2 s] DIAZED 50 A 1 2 3
Fuse
B 16
2

MCB
10 4
[A] k
i
i
eff

3 2 1
B 16 Sine half-wave

10 3
0 5 10 10 -1 3 6 10 0 3 6 10 1
t [ms] k [kA]
1 2 3

Fig. 2.4/13: Selectivity of MCBs with current limiting classes as described and towards back-up fuses Curve B16 applies to 16 A Siemens breakers, tripping
characteristic B.

Back-up protection do not switch sufficiently current-

limiting in the range of the MCB
If the short-circuit current at the point
switching capacity limit (6 kA / 10 kA),
where the MCB is installed exceeds its
so that they cannot provide much
rated switching capacity, another
support. Therefore, miniature circuit-
short-circuit protecting device has to
breakers with a rated current of 6 A to
be connected upstream. Without
32 A are only protected by an
affecting the operability of the
upstream circuit-breaker up to the
breaker in such cases, the switching
defined rated switching capacity of
capacity of such an assembly will be
the MCB (back-up protection).
increased up to 50 kA.
In some countries, circuit-breakers rather
than LV HRC fuses are connected
upstream instead, which – depending
on the type – reduces the combined
switching capacity considerably. For further product information on MCBs please
refer to the ET B1 Catalog
Although circuit-breakers have a high ”BETA Low-Voltage Control Systems”,
inherent rated breaking capacity, they Order no. E86060-K8220-A101-A8

2/40 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


2.5 Selectivity in
Low-Voltage
Systems
Proof of selectivity is required in IEC
60364-7-710 and DIN VDE 100-710
and -718.
Full selectivity is achieved with two
series-connected protective devices if,
when a fault occurs after the down-
stream protection device, only the
downstream device disconnects from
supply.
A distinction is made between two
types of selectivity:
 Partial selectivity acc. to IEC 60947-2,
VDE 660-101: Overcurrent discrimi-
nation of two series-connected
overcurrent protection devices,
where the load-side protective
device takes over the full protection
task up to a defined overcurrent
level without the other protective
device being active.
 Full selectivity acc. to IEC 60947-2,
VDE 660-101: Overcurrent discrimi-
nation of two series-connected
overcurrent protection devices,
where the load-side protective
device takes over the full protection
task without the other protective
device being active.
Selectivity types
 Selective current breaking capacity
by grading the instantaneous short-
circuit releases of Ii circuit-breakers
with Ii characteristic.
 Time selectivity:
Grading of the configurable tripping
times (tsd in the S-part) of the short-
circuit releases. This applies to
standard as well as to optional
characteristic curves. Circuit-breaker
with LSI characteristics: it is often
required in main distribution boards
and at transfer points using devices
of different manufacturers.
 Dynamic/energy selectivity
Selectivity based on the evaluation of
the let-through energy of the
downstream devices and the tripping
energy of the upstream protective
device.
Determining the selectivity type
According to IEC 60947-2, Appendix
A, and VDE 660-101, the determina-
tion or verification of the desired type
of selectivity is divided in two time
ranges.
Time range ≥ 100 ms:
The time range above 100 ms can be
analyzed by a comparison of charac-
teristic curves in the L- or S-range,
taking the tolerances, required protec-
tive settings, curve representation in
identical scales etc. into account.
Time range < 100 ms:
The standard requires selectivity in
this time range to be verified by
testing. Due to the fact that the time
and cost expense involved are very
high, when different devices are used
in the power distribution system,
selectivity limits can often be
obtained from renowned equipment
manufacturers only. In practice, let-
through currents are therefore often
compared to the operating or pickup
currents or, the let-through currents
of the protective devices are com-
pared to each other. The prerequisite
being that the relevant data is avail-
able from the equipment manufac-
turer and that it is analyzed thor-
oughly.
Comparing characteristic curves
Three diagram types can be used for
comparing characteristic curves:
 Time-current diagram
 Let-through current diagram
 Let-through energy diagram
Power System
Since these characteristic curves are
compared over several orders of
magnitude, they are usually plotted
on log-log paper.
All characteristic curves must – if
not already specified by the manufac-
turer – be assigned a tolerance band
to enable selectivity to be determined
reliably. In the case of switchgear, IEC
60 947–2 / DIN VDE 0660–101 specify
a tolerance of ± 20% for the instanta-
neous overcurrent release. The oper-
ating times, which are sometimes
considerably shorter at normal operat-
ing temperatures, must be taken into
consideration for electromechanical
overload releases.
Determination of the selectivity
limit
As a rule, all selectivity limits between
two protective devices can be deter-
mined by carrying out measurements
or tests. These measurements are
virtually indispensable, particularly
when assessing selectivity in the
event of a short circuit, owing to the
extremely rapid switching operations
when current-limiting protection
equipment is used.
The measurements can, however, be
very costly and complicated, which is
why many manufacturers publish
selectivity tables for their switchgear.
The SIMARIS design software auto-
matically takes all these criteria into
account and selects suitable Siemens
products.
2/41 2
2.5.1 Selectivity in Radial
Systems
Selectivity between series-
connected fuses
The feeding line and the outgoing
circuits branching from the busbar of
a distribution board carry different
operating currents and, therefore,
also have different cross sections.
Consequently, they are usually pro-
tected by fuses with different rated
currents, which ensure selectivity on
account of their different operating
behaviors.
Selectivity between series-
connected fuses with identical
utilization categories
When fuses of the same utilization
category (e.g. gL or gG) are used,
selectivity is ensured across the entire
overcurrent range up to the rated
switching capacity (absolute selectiv-
ity) if the rated currents differ by a
factor of 1.6 or higher (Fig. 2.5/1).
The Joulean heat values (I2t values)
should be compared in case of high
short-circuit currents. In the example
shown, a 160 A LV HRC fuse would
also have absolute selectivity with
respect to a 100 A LV HRC fuse.
Selectivity between series-
connected circuit-breakers
Selectivity can be achieved by grading
the operating currents of instanta-
neous overcurrent releases
(I-releases) (Fig. 2.5/2). Prerequisites
for this are:
 Current grading with different
short-circuit currents
The short-circuit currents in the event
of a short circuit at the respective
locations of the circuit-breakers are
sufficiently different.
2/42 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
200 A
(160)
k =1,300 A
50 A 50 A 100 A
k=
K1
a) Selective disconnection of
short-circuit fault location K1
Fig. 2.5/1: Selectivity between series-connected LV HRC fuses with identical utilization categories (example)
 Current grading with differently
configured I-releases
The rated currents and, therefore, the
I-release values of the upstream and
downstream circuit-breakers differ
accordingly.
 5-second breaking and line-protec-
tion conditions
In compliance with the 5-second
breaking condition specified in IEC
60364-4-41 / DIN VDE 0100-410 or
the 5-second line-protection condition
specified in IEC 60364-4-43 / DIN VDE
0100-430 (if line protection cannot be
provided in any other way), the
I-release must generally be set to
4,000 A so that even very small short
circuits are cleared at the input termi-
nals of the downstream circuit-
breaker Q1 within the specified time.
Only partial selectivity can be estab-
lished by comparing characteristic
curves for current grading, since the
curve in the range < 100 ms – which
[s]
ts
100 A 200 A
Size 00 Size 1
1,4
1.37 s
0,03
1,300 A
101 10 2 10 3 10 4
1.3
[A]
b) Prearcing times at k = 1,300 A
is frequently, and quite rightly repre-
sented by broken lines – does not
permit any conclusions with regard to
selectivity owing to the complicated
dynamic switching and tripping
operations.
Selectivity through circuit-breaker
coordination
(dynamic selectivity)
With high-speed operations, e.g. in
the event of a short circuit, and the
interaction of series-connected pro-
tection devices, the dynamic
processes in the circuit and in the
electromechanical releases have a
considerable effect on selectivity
behavior, particularly if current lim-
iters are used.
Selectivity is also achieved if the
downstream current-limiting protec-
tion device trips so quickly that,
although the let-through current does
momentarily exceed the operating
value of the upstream protection
device, the ”mechanically slow”
 Power System

[s]
Opening time t
Sr = 400 kVA 10 4
at 400 V,
50 Hz 102
I II
min.
10 3
ukr = 4%
101
r = 577 A
k = 15 kA
e = 600 A 10 2
(L-release) 10 0
Q2 e = 4,000 A
k = 10 kA (I-release) L L
10 1

II

= 60 A 10 0
e
(L-release)
Q1 e = 720 A
5.0 kA (I-release)
10-1
I

2.1 kA 10-2
M
3~ 4
5 10 2 2 5 10 3 2 5 10 4 2 5
Current [A]
a) Block diagram b) Tripping curves
Q1 Circuit-breaker for motor L Definite-time delayed overload release
protection (current-limiting) I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release
Q2 Circuit-breaker (zero-current interrupter)

Fig. 2.5/2: Current selectivity for two series-connected circuit-breakers at different short-circuit current levels (example)

release does not have time to trigger.
The let-through current depends on
the maximum asymmetrical short-
circuit current and current limiting
characteristics.
Selectivity limits of two series-
connected circuit-breakers
A maximum short-circuit value – the
selectivity limit – up to which the
downstream circuit-breaker can open
more quickly and alone, i.e. selec-
tively, can be determined for each
switchgear assembly.
The selectivity limit may be well above
the operating value of the instantaneous
overcurrent release in the upstream
circuit-breaker (see Fig. 2.5/3).
Irrespective of this, it is important to
verify selectivity in the event of an
overload by comparing the character-
istic curves and by checking that
tripping times are in accordance with
the relevant regulations.
Generally speaking, dynamic selectiv-
ity in a short circuit only provides
partial selectivity. This may be suffi-
cient (full selectivity) if the prospec-
tive maximum short-circuit current at
the downstream protective device is
lower than the established selectivity
limit.
With partial selectivity, which usually
arises with current grading owing
to the fault clearing condition
(see Fig. 2.5/2), a consideration of
dynamic selectivity provides a good
possibility for verifying full selectivity
without having to use switchgear
with short-time-delay overcurrent
releases.
Selectivity by means of short-time-
delay overcurrent releases
(time grading)
If current grading is not possible and
cannot be achieved by selecting the
switchgear in accordance with selec-
tivity tables (dynamic selectivity),
selectivity can be provided by time-
grading short-time-delay overcurrent
releases. This requires grading of both
the tripping delays and the appropri-
ate operating currents.

2/43 2

Power
Circuit- system Delay time t v
breaker of S-release
3WL1 300 ms
3WL1 200 ms
3VL
3VL 100 ms
3VL instantaneous
3RV
M ers, they can be fitted with instanta-
Fig. 2.5/3: Required delay time settings for
electromagnetic short-time-delay
releases for selective short-circuit
protection
Time grading with virtually
identical short-circuit currents
The upstream circuit-breaker is
equipped with short-time-delay over-
current releases (S) so that, if a fault
occurs, only the downstream circuit-
breaker disconnects the affected part
of the installation from the system.
Time grading can be implemented to
safeguard selectivity if the prospective
short-circuit currents are almost identi-
cal. This requires grading of both the
tripping delays and the operating
currents of the overcurrent releases.
In addition to the diagram with the
four series-connected circuit-breakers,
Fig. 2.5/3 also contains the associated
grading diagram. The necessary
grading time, which allows for all
tolerances, depends on the operating
principle of the release and the type
of circuit-breaker.
2/44 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Electronic S-releases
With electronic short-time-delay over-
current releases (S-releases), a grading
time of approximately 70 ms to 100 ms
from circuit-breaker to circuit-breaker
is sufficient to allow for all tolerances.
Operating current
The operating current of the short-
time-delay overcurrent release should
be set to at least 1.45 times (twice per
20% tolerance, unless other values are
specified by the manufacturer) the
value of the downstream circuit-
breaker.
Additional I-releases
In order to reduce the short-circuit
stress in the event of a “dead” short
circuit at the upstream circuit-break-
neous electromagnetic overcurrent
releases in addition to the short-time
delay releases (Fig. 2.5/4). The value
selected for the operating current of
the instantaneous electromagnetic
overcurrent releases must be high
enough to ensure that the releases
only operate in case of direct ”dead”
short circuits and, under normal
operating conditions, do not interfere
with selective grading.
Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI)
A microprocessor-controlled short-
time grading control, also called
“zone-selective interlocking”, has been
developed for circuit-breakers to
prevent excessively long tripping
times when several circuit-breakers
are connected in series. This control
function allows the tripping delay to
be reduced to 50 ms (maximum) for
the circuit-breakers located upstream
of the short circuit.
The method of operation regarding
zone-selective interlocking is illus-
trated in Fig. 2.5/5. A short circuit at
K1 is detected by Q1, Q3, and Q5. If
ZSI is active, Q3 is temporarily dis-
abled by Q1 and Q5 by Q3 by means
of appropriate communication lines.
Since Q1 does not receive any dis-
abling signal, it trips after 10 ms.
A short circuit at K2 is only detected
by Q5; since it does not receive any
disabling signal, it trips after 50 ms.
Without “ZSI”, tripping would only
occur after 150 ms.
Selectivity between circuit-breaker
and fuse
When considering selectivity in con-
junction with fuses, a permissible
tolerance of ± 10% in the direction of
current flow must be allowed for in
the time-current characteristics.
Circuit-breaker with downstream
fuse
Selectivity between LI-releases and
fuses with very low rated currents
In the overload range up to the oper-
ating current Ii of the instantaneous
overcurrent release, partial selectivity
is achieved if the upper tolerance
band of the characteristic fuse curve
does not touch the tripping curve of
the fully preloaded, thermally delayed
overcurrent release (L). A reduction in
the tripping time of up to 25% must
be allowed for at normal operating
temperatures (unless the manufac-
turer states otherwise).
Full selectivity for circuit-breakers
without short-time-delay overcurrent
releases is achieved if the let-through
current of the fuse I D does not reach
the operating current of the instanta-
neous overcurrent release.* This is,
however, only to be expected for a
fuse, the rated current of which is
very low compared with the rated
continuous current of a circuit-
breaker.
* See the current-limiting diagram
for LV HRC fuses in
Seip, Günther G. (Ed.): Electrical Installations
Handbook, 4th edition, Erlangen, 2000,
Section 4.1.1.
 Power System

[s]
Sn = 1000 kVA Opening time t
at 400 V, 10 4
50 Hz

ukr = 6%
n = 1,445 A
10 3
k = 24.1 kA

Q1 Q2 Q3
10 2
t sd3 = 200 ms
Q3 i (20 kA)
L L L
Main
10 1
distribution
board

Q2 t sd2 = 100 ms
S S
10 0
tsd3 =
subdistribution k= 17 kA 200 ms
tsd2 =
board 100 ms
10 -1
Q1

k= 10 kA
10 -2
M 10 2 2 5 10 3 2 5 10 4 2 5 10 5
~ Current [A]

Fig. 2.5/4: Selectivity between three series-connected circuit-breakers with limitation of short-circuit stress by means of an additional I-release in
circuit-breaker Q3

[s]
Opening time t

tsd = 100 ms 10 4
A tzss = 50 ms
Q5 E
Q1/Q2/Q4 Q3 Q5
10 3
K2

10 2

A tsd = 100 ms A
Q3 E tzss = 50 ms Q4 E
tsd = 10 ms 10 1
tzss = tsd

10 0
tsd = 100 ms

A A tzss
Q1 E Q2 E
10 -1
tsd = 10 ms cn
tzss = tsd tsd =
10 ms
K1 10 -2

communication line 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5
Current [A]

Fig. 2.5/5: Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) of series- or parallel-connected circuit-breakers (block diagram)

2/45 2
 characteristic curve of the inverse-
F1 Q1 F1 Fuse time-delay overload release
Q1 Circuit-breaker (Fig. 2.5/8).
L Definite-time delayed
L Q1 t overload release In the case of short-circuits, it is
L
I Instantaneous electromagnetic important to remember that, after the
overcurrent release
releases in the circuit-breaker have
i Operating current of I-release
tripped, the fuse continues to be
The time-current curves (tolerance heated during the arcing time. The
bands) do not touch
I selectivity limit lies approximately at
F1
the point where a safety margin of
70 ms between the lower tolerance
band of the fuse and the operating
i time of the instantaneous overcurrent
Overcurrent limit release or the delay time of the short-
time-delay overcurrent release is
Fig. 2.5/6: Selectivity between circuit-breaker and downstream fuse in overload range
undershot.
Selectivity ratios in the short-circuit
range
F1 Q1 L Definite-time delayed overload release
A reliable and usually relatively high
S Short-time-delayed overcurrent release
selectivity limit for the short-circuit
t A Safety margin
L t
range can be determined in the I 2t
Q1 sd Operating current of S-release
S L t s Prearcing time of fuse diagram. In this diagram, the maxi-
t sd Delay time of S-release
mum let-through I 2t value of the
circuit-breaker is compared with the
minimum prearcing I 2t value of the
tA > 100 ms
S fuse (Fig. 2.5/9). Since these values
F1
are maximum and minimum values,
tolerances are obsolete.
ts t sd
k
sd Selectivity with parallel supply

Fig. 2.5/7: Selectivity between circuit-breaker with LS-releases and downstream fuse; short-circuit
current range
Selectivity between LS-releases
and fuses with relatively high rated
currents
Due to the dynamic processes that
take place in electromagnetic
releases, absolute selectivity can also
be achieved with fuses, whose I D
briefly exceeds the operating current.
Once again, selectivity can only be
verified by means of appropriate
measurements of I. Absolute selectiv-
ity can be achieved by using circuit-
breakers with short-time-delay over-
current releases (S-releases) if the
characteristic curves – including
safety margins – do not touch. In
practice, a safety margin of 100 ms
between the reference curves is
usually sufficient (Fig. 2.5/7).
Selectivity between fuse and
downstream circuit-breaker
Selectivity ratios in the overload
range
In order to achieve selectivity in the
overload range, a safety margin of
tA ≥ 1 s is required between the lower
tolerance band of the fuse and the
Improving selectivity with parallel
feeding systems
When feeding in parallel to a busbar,
the total short-circuit current I k ∑ that
occurs in the faulted outgoing circuit
comprises the partial short-circuit
currents I k Part in the individual feeding
lines and represents the base current
in the grading diagram (Fig. 2.5/10).
This is the case for all fault types.
Two identical feeding systems
If a short circuit occurs in the outgo-
ing circuit downstream of the circuit-
breaker Q1, the total short-circuit
current I k ∑ of ≤ 20 kA, for example,
flows through this circuit, while the

2/46 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

Q1 F1 F1 Fuse
Q1 Circuit-breaker
L Definite-time delayed
t overload release
F1 I Instantaneous electromagnetic
feeder circuit-breakers Q2 and Q3, L overcurrent release
tA≥ 1 s
with the outgoing circuit connected tA Safety margin
centrally to the busbars and feeding i Operating current of I-release

lines of equal length, each carry only I The time-current curves (tolerance
L Q1
half this current, i.e. ≤ 10 kA. I bands) do not touch

Additional current selectivity with

parallel transformer operation
In the grading diagram, the tripping Overload limit
characteristic of circuit-breakers Q2
and Q3 must, therefore, be consid-
ered in relation to the base current of Fig. 2.5/8: Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker; overload range
the circuit-breaker Q1.
Since the total short-circuit current is
ideally distributed equally among the Q1 Circuit-breaker
F1
two feeding lines (ignoring the load (max. let-through value)
currents in the other outgoing cir- 2 F1 Fuse (min. prearcing value)
t
cuits) with the outgoing circuit F1 Sel Selectivity limit
located at the center of the busbars,
the tripping curve of circuit-breakers
Q2 and Q3 can be shifted optimally to
the right along the current scale by a Q1
Miniature Q1
characteristic displacement factor of 2 circuit-
up to the line I k ∑, which represents breaker

the base current for this fault condi- k

tion. The result of this is selectivity Sel
both with regard to time and current. Selectivity limit

If the characteristic curve of the

individual circuit-breaker is used Fig. 2.5/9: Selectivity between fuse and downstream circuit-breaker; short circuit

[s] Separate Parallel

t Q1 Q2 Q2+Q3 Basis k
T1 Equal output T2 10 4
L L L
kTeil
10 3
r = 600 A
L sd = 3,000 A L
Q2
S
Q3
S 10 2
i = 12,000 A
I k < 10 kA I k< 10 kA
kTeil
101
S
r = 200 A 10 0
tsd = 100 ms
Q1 L i = 2,400 A i
I (> 70 ms)
-1
10

k 10 2
M 10 2 2 4 6 10 3 2 4 10 4 2 4
~ 3 6 [A]

Fig. 2.5/10: Selectivity with two feeding transformers of the same rating and operating simultaneously.
Example with outgoing circuit in the center of the busbar

2/47 2

T1 T2 T3
kS k k
< 30 kA < 15 kA
L Q3
Q1 S Q2
15 kA 15 kA
Fig. 2.5/11: Selectivity with three feeding
transformers operating
simultaneously
instead of the shifted characteristic,
the exact short-circuit current (distri-
bution) which flows through the
circuit-breaker must be taken into
consideration.
With asymmetrical configurations and
with incoming (feeding) and outgoing
circuits located in the busbars, short-
circuit current distribution will differ
according to the impedance along the
feeding lines.
This is particularly significant in the
event of fused branch circuits with
high current ratings, e.g. 630 A to
1,000 A. It is important to ensure that
a safety margin of ≥ 100 ms between
the tripping characteristic of the
S-release and the prearcing-time/
current characteristic of the LV HRC
fuse is provided not only with parallel
operation, but also with individual
transformer operation.
When setting the releases of circuit-
breakers Q1, Q2 and Q3, it must be
ensured that selectivity is also
achieved for operation with one
transformer and for all short-circuit
currents (single- to three-phase).
2/48 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
k Part 1 k Part 2
Q1 Q2
< 15 kA
Q3
k∑
Fig. 2.5/12: Short-circuit distribution via the
tie breaker Q3 with two feeders
Q1 and Q2
For cost-related reasons, S-releases
for the feeder circuit-breakers must
also be provided for low and medium
rated fuse currents as the resulting
current selectivity of I-releases is
insufficient.
Three identical feeding systems
With parallel operation of three trans-
formers, the selectivity ratios will,
owing to the additional current selec-
tivity, be more favorable than with
two units since the characteristic
displacement factor is > 2 and < 3.
Once again, LS-releases are required
for the circuit-breakers in the feeding
lines in order to achieve unambiguous
selectivity ratios.
Furthermore, it is necessary to provide
additional I-releases to allow a fault
between the transformer and feeder
circuit-breaker to be detected, as
shown in Fig. 2.5/11. For this pur-
pose, the S-releases of circuit-breakers
Q1 to Q3 must be set to a value < Ik
and the I-releases to a value > Ik but <
< Ik ∑. The highest and lowest fault
currents are important here. Due to
the I-releases, only the faulted trans-
former branch circuit will be discon-
nected on the high-voltage and low-
voltage side. The circuit-breakers in
the “healthy” feeding systems remain
operative.
Parallel-connected feeding lines
via tie breakers
Tie breakers must perform the follow-
ing protective functions in fault situa-
tions:
 Instantaneous tripping with faults in
the vicinity of the busbars and
 relief of branch circuits of the
effects of high total short-circuit
currents.
Selecting the circuit-breakers
The type of device used in the branch
circuits and the selectivity ratios
depend primarily on whether circuit-
breakers with current-zero cut-off, i.e.
without current limiting, or with
current limiting are used as tie break-
ers.
Instantaneous, current-limiting tie
breakers relieve the outgoing circuits
of the effects of high unlimited total
peak short-circuit currents Ip and,
therefore, permit the use of lower-
duty and less expensive circuit-break-
ers.
Setting the overcurrent releases in
tie breakers
The values set for the overcurrent
releases must be as high as possible in
order to prevent operational interfer-
ence caused by the tie breakers open-
ing at relatively low short-circuit
currents, e.g. in the branch circuits of
the subdistribution boards.
With two feeding lines
With two feeding lines and depending
on the fault location (left or right
busbar section or outgoing circuit),

a) Fault in the outgoing circuit of center
busbar section
k Part 1 k Part 2
Q1 Q2
Q4 Q5
3 2
k
k∑
Fig. 2.5/13: Distribution of the short-circuit currents used in determining the settings for the overcurrent
release
– in the tie breakers Q4 and Q5 with three feeders and faults a and b
– in the outgoing circuits in different busbar sections
only the associated partial short-
circuit current (e.g. I k Part 2) flows
through the tie breaker Q3 as shown
in Fig. 2.5/12.
With three feeding lines and fault
With three feeding lines, the ratios are
different according to which of the
branch circuits shown in Fig. 2.5/13a
and b is faulted.
In the center busbar section
If a fault occurs at the outgoing
circuit of the center busbar section
(Fig. 2.5/13a), approximately equal
partial short-circuit currents flow
through the tie breakers Q4 and Q5.
In the outer busbar section
If a fault occurs at the outgoing
circuit of the outer busbar section,
(Fig. 2.5/13b), two partial short-circuit
currents flow through the tie breaker
Q4.
Computer-assisted selectivity check
Precise values for the short-circuit
currents, which flow through the tie
breakers, are required to permit
b) Fault in the outgoing circuit of outer
busbar section
k Part k Part
Q3 Q1 Q2
Q4 Q5
k Part
k∑
optimum setting of the overcurrent
releases. They provide information
concerning selective characteristics
with a large number of different fault
currents, and are determined and
evaluated with the aid of a computer
program.
Selectivity and undervoltage
protection
If a short circuit occurs, the system
voltage collapses to a residual voltage
at the short-circuit location. The
magnitude of the residual voltage
depends on the fault impedance. With
a ”dead” short circuit, the fault imped-
ance and, therefore, the voltage at
the short-circuit location drops to
almost zero. Generally speaking,
however, arcs with arc-drop voltages
between approximately 30 V and 70 V
occur with short circuits. This voltage,
starting at the fault location, increases
proportionately to the intermediate
impedance with increasing proximity
to the power source.
Power System
Fig. 2.5/14 illustrates the voltage
conditions in LV switchgear with a
”dead” short circuit.
If a short circuit occurs at K
(Fig. 2.5/14a), the rated operating
voltage Ue drops to 0.13 Ue at the
busbar of the subdistribution board
and to 0.5 x Ue at the busbar of the
Q3
main distribution board. The next
upstream circuit-breaker Q1 clears the
fault. Depending on the size and type
of the circuit-breaker, the total break-
ing time is ≤ 30 ms for zero-current
interrupters and a maximum of 10 ms
for current-limiting circuit-breakers.
If a short-circuit occurs at K2
(Fig. 2.5/14b), the circuit-breaker Q2
opens. It is equipped with a short-
time-delay overcurrent release (S).
The delay time is at least 100 ms.
During this time, the rated operating
voltage at the busbar of the main
distribution board is reduced to
0.13 x Ue.
If the rated operating voltage drops
to 0.7 – 0.35 times this value and
voltage reduction takes longer than
approximately 20 ms, all of the
circuit-breakers with undervoltage
releases open. All contactors also
open if the rated control supply
voltage collapses to below 75%
of its rated value for longer than 5 to
30 ms.
Tripping delay for contactors and
undervoltage releases
Undervoltage releases and contactors
with tripping delay are required to
ensure that the selective overcurrent
protection is not interrupted prema-
turely. They are not necessary if
current-limiting circuit-breakers,
which have a maximum total clearing
time of 10 ms, are used.
2/49 2
 a) Short circuit in subdistribution board b) Short circuit in main distribution board

Q3 Q3
0.5.Ue .
0.13 Ue
Main
distribution
board
Q2 Q2
tv >
100 ms

80 m K2
3 x 95 mm2 Cu
.
0.13 Ue Subdistribution
board

Q1 Q1
tv = 0
Ue Rated operating voltage
K1 tv Delay time

Fig. 2.5/14: Voltage conditions for short-circuited LV switchgear with a main and subdistribution board

k1 F1 a F2 k2

k3 = k1 + k2

F3
k3 + k4

K1

k4
k k
b

Fig. 2.5/15: Short-circuited cable with its two Fig. 2.5/16: Example of a meshed system with multi-phase feeding
feeder nodes a and b

2/50 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


2.5.2 Selectivity in
Meshed Systems
Two selectivity functions must be
performed in meshed systems:
 Only the short-circuited cable may
be disconnected from the system.
 If a short-circuit occurs at the termi-
nals of a feeding transformer, only
the faulted terminal may be discon-
nected from the system.
Node fuses
The nodes of a meshed LV system are
normally equipped with cables with
the same cross section and with
LV HRC fuses of utilization category gL
of the same type and rated current
(Fig. 2.5/15).
K3
a
K1
K2
b of the transformer (K1) or between
a HV HRC fuses
b LV circuit-breaker with I²t
c characteristic in the
S-release
c Node fuses
Fig. 2.5/17: Block diagram showing the feeding
point of a meshed LV power system
Power System
If a short circuit (K1) occurs along the breaker, this circuit-breaker will trip
meshed system cable, the short-circuit fast enough and thus selectively,
currents I k3 and I k4 flow to the fault owing to its I 2t characteristic.
location. Short-circuit current I k3 from
node ”a” comprises the partial cur-
rents I k1 and I k2 which may differ
greatly depending on the impedance
ratios.
Permissible current ratio
Selectivity of the fuses at node a is
achieved if fuse F3, through which
the total current I k3 flows, melts and
fuse F1 or F2, through which the
partial short-circuit I k1 or I k2 flows,
remains operative. In the case of
Siemens LV HRC fuses (400 V, max.
400 A), the permissible current ratio
I k1 /(I k1 + I k2 ) for high short-circuit
currents is 0.8.
Power transformers in meshed
systems
Feeder circuit-breaker
In multi-phase meshed systems (Fig.
2.5/16), i.e. feeding several medium-
voltage lines and transformers, power
feedback from the LV system to the
fault location should be prevented if a
fault occurs in a transformer substa-
tion or medium-voltage line. A net-
work master relay (reverse power
relay) used to perform this task at the
low-voltage side of the transformer.
Today, circuit-breakers with electronic
releases, e.g. an S-release with an I 2t
characteristic, are used for this task.
If a short circuit occurs on the HV side
the transformer and network circuit-
breaker (K2) or along the cable (K3)
(Fig. 2.5/17), the HV HRC fuse oper-
ates on the HV side; on the LV side,
power flows back to the fault location
via the low-voltage circuit-breaker and
its S-release (with I 2t characteristic).
As the sum of all short-circuit current
quantities from all the other trans-
formers flows through this circuit-
2/51 2
2.6 Protection of
Capacitors
According to IEC 60358 / VDE 0560
Part 4, capacitor units must be suit-
able for continuous operation with a
current whose r.m.s. value does not
exceed 1.3 times the current which
flows with a sinusoidal voltage and
rated frequency. Owing to the above-
mentioned dimensioning require-
ments, no overload protection is
provided for capacitor units in the
majority of cases.
Capacitors in systems with
harmonic components
The capacitors can only be overloaded
in systems with devices which gener-
ate high harmonics (e.g. generators
and converter-fed drives). The capaci-
tors, together with the series-con-
nected transformer and short-circuit
reactance of the primary system, form
an anti-resonant circuit. Resonance
phenomena occur if the natural
frequency of the resonant circuit
matches or is close to the frequency
of a harmonic current generated by
the power converter.
Reactor-connected capacitors
The capacitors must be equipped with
reactors to prevent resonance.* An LC
resonant circuit, whose resonance
frequency is below the lowest har-
2/52 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
monic component (250 Hz) in the
load current, is used instead of the
capacitor. The capacitor unit is thus
inductive for all harmonic currents
that occur in the load current and can,
therefore, no longer form a resonant
circuit with the system reactance.
Settings of the overload relay
If thermal time-delay overload relays
are used to provide protection against
overcurrents, the tripping value can
be set at 1.3 to 1.43 times the rated
current of the capacitor since, allow-
ing for the permissible capacitance
deviation, the capacitor current can
be 1.1 x 1.3 = 1.43 times the rated
capacitor current.
With transformer-heated overload
relays or releases, a higher secondary
current flows due to the changed
transformation ratio of the transform-
ers caused by the harmonic compo-
nents. This may result in premature
tripping.
Harmonics suppression by means
of filter circuits
An alternative solution would be to
use filter circuits to remove the major-
ity of harmonics from the primary
system. ** The filter circuits are also
series-resonant circuits which, unlike
the reactor-connected capacitors, are
tuned precisely to the frequencies of
the harmonic currents to be filtered.
As a result, the impedance is almost
zero.
Short-circuit protection
LV HRC fuses with utilization category
gL are typically used in capacitor units
for short-circuit protection.
A rated fuse current of 1.6 to 1.7
times the rated current of the con-
nected capacitor modules is selected
to prevent the fuses from tripping in
the overload range and when the
capacitors switch.
Note:
Fuses, fuse-switch-disconnectors,
capacitors and contactors must be
matched during configuration. We
recommend using complete assembly
kits (see Application Manual –
Establishment of Basic Data and
Preliminary Planning, Section 5.8)
* Seip, Günther G. (Ed.): Electrical Installations
Handbook, 4th edition, Erlangen, 2000,
Section 1.6.
** Seip, Günther G. (Ed.): Electrical Installations
Handbook, 4th edition, Erlangen, 2000,
Sections 1.6.3, 16.4.

2.7 Protection of
Distribution
Transformers
The following devices are used for
protection tasks in medium-voltage
systems:
HV HRC fuses
High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity
(HV HRC) fuses usually used in con-
junction with switch-disconnectors to
protect radial feeders and transform-
ers against short circuits.
Circuit-breakers with protection
Protection relays
Protection relays connected to current
transformers (protection core) can be
used to perform all protection-related
tasks irrespective of the magnitude of
the short-circuit currents and rated
operating currents of the required
circuit-breakers.
Digital protection
Modern protection equipment is
controlled by microprocessors (digital
protection) and supports all of the
protective functions required for a
medium-voltage branch circuit.
Protection as component of the
energy automation system
Digital protection also allows operat-
Power System
operation are also attained in the
ing and fault data, which can be
called up via serial data interfaces, to event of faults during emergency
be collected and stored. Digital pro- operation using generators with
tection can, therefore, be incorpo- relatively low rated outputs.
rated in substation control and protec-
Three-phase time-overcurrent
tion systems as an autonomous com-
protection
ponent.
In the interests of future system
Current transformer rating for safety, it is advisable to configure the
protection purposes time-overcurrent protection as a
Current transformers are subject to three-phase system, irrespective of
the standards DIN VDE 0414, Parts 1 the method of neutral-point connec-
to 3, as well as IEC 185 and IEC 186. tion.
Current transformers with 5P or 10P Note:
cores must be used for connecting Protection against internal faults
protection equipment. (excess temperature etc.),
see Section 2.7.2.
The required rated output and over-
current factor must both be deter-
mined on the basis of the information
provided in the protection relay
descriptions.
Overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection via current
transformers for protecting cables and
transformer branches can be either
two-phase or three-phase. The neu-
tral-point connection of the medium-
voltage network must be considered
here.
Relay operating currents with
emergency generator operation
Care should be taken to ensure that
the operating currents of the protec-
tion relays provided for normal system
2/53 2
2.7.1 Protection with
Overreaching Selectivity 1,000
3GD 50 A 10 kV

Ideally, transformer branches should

t
min Basis k < 10.5 kA
be protected by: 3GD
50 A
 HV HRC fuses
High-voltage high-rupturing-capacity 100 400 kVA
(HV HRC) fuses used in conjunction u kr 6%
with switch-disconnectors for rated k < 10.5 kA
transformer outputs of up to approx.
1,250 kVA for low switching rates, or 0.4 kV

 Circuit-breakers with protection

s

10
Circuit-breakers with protection of
about 800 kVA of higher, and for high
switching rates; also when several
circuit-breakers with S-releases are
arranged in series on the low-voltage 1
a min

side and selectivity is not possible 25% safety margin

with upstream HV HRC fuses.
The anticipated selectivity conditions
must, therefore, be checked before
Rush
the protection concept is chosen and
ms

0.1
details determined. 20% safety margin

Protection by means of HV HRC

fuses
Dimensioning HV HRC fuses 0.01
The rated current of the HV HRC fuses 1,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

specified by the manufacturers for the
rated output of each transformer
should be used when dimensioning
the HV HRC fuses. The lowest rated
current is dictated by the rush cur-
rents generated when the transform-
ers are energized and is 1.5 to 2 times
the rated transformer currents.
 Energizing current of the
transformer
The lowest rated current is dimensioned
by the rush currents generated when the
transformers are energized and is 1.5 to
2 times the rated transformer current. In
practice it is normally sufficient if the
maximum energizing current of the
transformer has a selective clearance of
20% from the fuse curve at 0.1 s
A at 0.4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50 ,000
A at 10 kV 40 80 120 200 40 0 80 0 2,000
ts Prearcing time of fuses
Lowest breaking current a min of HV HRC fuse
Fig. 2.7/1: Example for dimensioning a HV HRC fuse acc. to the minimum breaking current of the HV
HRC fuse and the energizing current of the transformer
 In order to determine the maximum lated maximum short-circuit current in
rated current, the minimum breaking the vicinity of the busbar on the low-
current Ia min of the fuse must be voltage side (converted to the
exceeded in the event of a short circuit medium-voltage side) and the mini-
on the secondary side of the trans- mum breaking current Ia min (the circle
former reaching as far as the busbars in the prearcing-time/current charac-
in the installation. Actual practice has teristic).
shown that a 25% minimum safety The fuse link can be chosen between
margin of Ia min should be established the above specified limits according to
in relation to the short-circuit current Ik the selectivity requirements (see
of the transformer between the calcu- Fig. 2.7/1).

2/54 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


Protection by switch-disconnectors
and HV HRC fuses
As a load interrupter switch is nor-
mally used for transformer protection,
when HV HRC fuses are used, its
limited current breaking capacity must
be taken into account. According to
IEC 62271-105 / VDE 0671-105, the
following two conditions must be met
among others:
 The transient current of the HV HRC
fuse / switch-disconnector combina-
tion must be lower than the breaking
capacity of the load interrupter
switch.
 A secondary-side transformer short
circuit should be cleared by the HV
HRC fuse in order to relieve the load
interrupter switch from high tran-
sient recovery voltages.
On account of the extremely complex
interaction of this combination and
the data required, such as the charac-
teristic time-current curve of the HV
HRC fuse, time to contact separation
and rated transient current of the load
interrupter switch, the manufacturer
of the medium-voltage switchgear
must provide the fuse type and rated
current to be used for the specified
transformer.
In practice it may happen under
difficult conditions, that simultaneous
compliance with both standards
IEC 60787 / DIN VDE 0670-402 and
IEC 62271-105 / VDE 0671-105 is not
possible. In these cases, the
switchgear manufacturer should be
consulted, or a circuit-breaker should
be used for transformer protection.
Working range covered by standby
protection
HV HRC fuses must provide sufficient
standby protection in case of a failure
of the downstream protective device.
The required working range can be
seen in Fig. 2.7/2, illustrated for three
circuit diagrams. The working range
of the standby protection is inversely
proportional to the rated fuse current.
Further information on safety mar-
gins, e.g. for gradings as shown in
Fig. 2.7/2, case b and c, is given below.
Grading of HV HRC with LV HRC
fuses in supply circuits
Grading HV HRC fuses and LV HRC
fuses is mainly used for transformers
with rated outputs of max. 400 kVA,
when LV HRC fuse switch-disconnec-
tors or motor fuse-disconnectors
(maximum rated current 630 A) are
also applied (example: Fig. 2.7/3);
circuit-breakers with overcurrent
releases are used at the low-voltage
side for rated outputs ≥ 500 kVA.
It is acceptable for the prearcing-
time/current characteristics F2
(LV HRC) and F3 (HV HRC) – referred
to 0.4 kV – to touch or intersect, and
the switch-disconnector to be possibly
tripped on the high-voltage side by
the upstream HV HRC fuse, since both
fuses protect the same system ele-
HH
Required
scope of
standby
protection NH
3WL
a c
NH
b
Fig. 2.7/2: Necessary scope of standby protection of HV HRC fuses when different protection equipment
is used at the low-voltage side
Power System
ment and interruption will occur in all
cases (limited selectivity). HV HRC
fuses with higher rated currents
(e. g. 80 A as shown in Fig. 2.7/3)
would not be suitable here, since their
minimum breaking current Ia min has
no safety margin of at least 25%
below the short-circuit current Ik
which the transformer can carry (max.
10.5 kA).
A non-selective fuse response, as
demonstrated in the example of the
50 A HV HRC fuse towards the
630 A low-voltage fuse (Fig. 2.7/3)
may result in damage of unblown fuse
links in case of faults in the LV busbar,
so that the tripping characteristic is
changed and the fuse may trip at any
time under any load – even its rated
current. In the event of protective
tripping by the HV HRC fuse, or the
low-voltage fuse, both fuse links
should always be replaced altogether.
This applies to all descriptions below
and the examples given for HV HRC
fuses, where non-selective protection
at the transformers’ low-voltage
side is provided (Fig. 2.7/4 to
Fig. 2.7/6).
HH HH
S
3WL
400 V
NH
NH
S Network master relay 7RM
2/55 2
 1,000 1,000
10 kV
10 kV
F3
3GD 50 A F2
t

t
min

3GD 3GD 80 A

min
3GD 80 A 50 A
F3 3GD
(80 A) F2
F2 80 A
3NA 630 A Basis < 10.5 kA Q1 Basis k< 16.4 kA
100 k
400 kVA 100 3WL 1000 A 630 kVA
u kr 6% u kr 6%

F1 2t
3WL
F2 3NA -characteristic 1,000 A
3NA 400 A 630 A Q1
t sd 300 ms
0,4 kV
F1
s

10
s
0.4 kV 10 3NA 315 A
3NA
F1
315 A
3NA
F1
400 A
k< 16.4 kA

1 a min k < 10.5 kA 1

25% safety margin is not

t sd
maintained!
ms
ms

0.1 0.1

0.01 0.01
1,000 10,000 / A at 0,4 kV 100,000 1,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

A at 0.4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,500 10,000 20,000 50 ,000 A at 0.4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50 ,000

A at 10 kV 40 80 120 2 00 40 0 80 0 2,000 A at 10 kV 40 80 12 0 2 00 40 0 12 800 2,000

ts Prearcing time of fuses t s Prearcing time of fuses

Lowest breaking current a min of HV HRC fuse t sd Delay time of S-release (Q1)

Fig. 2.7/3: Example of grading HV HRC fuses – LV HRC fuses in the branch Fig. 2.7/4: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q1 and
circuit, and a 400 kVA transformer downstream LV HRC fuse F1 in the branch circuit

Grading of HV HRC fuses with LV the delay times tR and tsd must be Grading between HV HRC fuses and
circuit-breakers and downstream matched to the transformer output L/S releases
LV HRC fuses and the downstream LV HRC fuse. Since the protective devices in the
feeding system form a functional unit,
Requirements If a low-voltage circuit-breaker is used a restriction in selectivity in the upper
Selectivity is to be established with an additional I4t characteristic in short-circuit current range is accepted
between the protective devices of the the L-release, higher LV HRC fuses can in case of faults in the vicinity of the
branch circuits and those of the be used in the branch circuits owing busbars (as indicated by the circle in
supply, which together form a func- to characteristics, and selectivity will the diagram for the 80 A HV HRC fuse
tional unit; the safety margins of the in Fig. 2.7/4 to 2.7/6), because faults
still be maintained (Fig. 2.7/5).
protective devices must also be taken inside the switchgear in this short-
into account (Fig. 2.7/4 and Fig. If circuit-breakers, such as the SEN- circuit range can virtually be outruled
2.7/5). TRON 3WL, are used instead of LV HRC for Siemens low-voltage SIVACON
Grading between LV HRC fuses and fuses, branch circuits can be config- switchboards.
L/S releases ured with higher currents while
Even partial selectivity of the low-
Selectivity is ensured with the 315 A maintaining selectivity (Fig. 2.7/6), as
voltage circuit-breaker in the branch
fuse link used in the example (Fig. the S-releases can be adapted accord- circuit with the HV HRC fuse (see Fig.
2.7/4). With L- and S-releases, the ingly with regard to their excitation 2.7/6) in the upper short-circuit range
excitation values IR and Isd as well as currents Isd and delay times tsd . is often acceptable, as dead 3-phase

2/56 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

1,000 1,000
10 kV 10 kV

F2 F2

t
t

min
3GD 80 A
min

3GD 80 A 3GD
Q1 3GD F2
F2 Q2 80 A
80 A
3WL 1,000 A 3WL 1,000 A
4t Basis k< 16.4 kA
characteristic Basis k< 16.4 kA 2t
characteristic
100 100 630 kVA
630 kVA
u kr 6% u kr 6%
Q1
3WL 1,000 A 3WL 630 A 3WL 1,000 A
2t
characteristic Q2 sd 4,000 A
Q1 sd 4,000 A
t sd 300 ms t sd 300 ms

0.4 kV 0.4 kV
F1

s
10
s

10 3NA 400 A 3WL 630 A

3NA sd 2,520 A
F1 Q1 t sd 200 ms
315 A

k< 16.4 kA
k< 16.4 kA

1 1

t sd t sd2

t sd1
ms

0.1
ms

0.1

0.01 0.01
1,000 10,000 / A at 0,4 kV 10,0000 1,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000

A at 0.4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50 ,000 A at 0.4 kV 1000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50 ,000

A at 10 kV 40 80 120 2 00 40 0 80 0 2,000 A at 10 kV 40 80 120 2 00 40 0 80 0 2,000

t s Prearcing time of fuses ts Prearcing time of fuses

t sd Delay time of S-release (Q1) t sd1 Delay time of S-release (Q1)
t sd2 Delay time of S-release (Q2)

Fig. 2.7/5: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q1 Fig. 2.7/6: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q2 and
(optional I4t characteristic of the L-release) and downstream LV downstream circuit-breaker Q1 with an LSI-release in the branch
HRC fuse F1 in the branch circuit circuit

short-circuit currents can be outruled Attention: The requirement of full selectivity and
in practice, and faults will be below Tie breakers connecting safety power the use of HV HRC fuses can often be
the selectivity level just a few meters supply networks (SPS networks) must met by implementing zone-selective
downstream of the protective device fulfill the criterion of full selectivity interlocking with low-voltage circuit-
(here: the intersection of the HV HRC towards line-side HV HRC fuses in breakers. All of the downstream
fuse curve and S-release curve). In compliance with IEC 60364-7-710 /
distribution systems and protective
VDE 0100-710 and VDE 0100-718!
these cases, the focus is on improved devices, as well as the short-circuit
cost-efficiency, as offered by a HV HRC currents likely to be present at the
fuse compared to a medium-voltage fault locations must then be taken
circuit-breaker, rather than on the into account.
criterion of 100% selectivity.
Tolerances of HV HRC fuses
According to EN 60282-1 / DIN VDE
0670-4, the tolerance of HV HRC fuse
links can be ±20%. Siemens HV HRC
fuse links have a tolerance of ±10%.

2/57 2
 1,000
10 kV
Q3

t
min
> 66 A/500 ms
60/1 A >> 780 A/50 ms

Basis < 16.4 kA 630 kVA

k
100 Q2 u kr 6%
3WL 1,000 A
Protection by means of circuit- 2t
characteristic Q2
3WL 1,000 A
sd 4,000 A
breakers with definite-time t sd 300 ms

overcurrent protection (DMT) 0.4 kV

Q1 3WL 630 A
Requirements sd 1,260 A
t sd 200 ms
s
10
The two feeder circuit-breakers (in F1
3NA
160 A
Fig. 2.7/7, 2.7/8 and Fig.2.7/9, 2.7/10)
form a functional unit and require
k< 16.4 kA k< 16.4 kA
selectivity with respect to the protec-
tion devices on the low-voltage side. Q3
1 > / t>
DMT protection
Nowadays, digital devices are used to
provide DMT protection in practically t sd2
all applications. They have broader
F1
setting ranges, allow a choice
ms

0.1 3NA 160 A Q3

between definite-time and inverse-
time overcurrent protection or over-
load protection, provide a greater and
more consistent level of measuring
accuracy and are self-monitoring.
2-zone DMT protection
If DMT protection is applied, whose
protective function merely consists of
the two I> (ANSI Code 51) and I>>
(ANSI Code 50) short-circuit zones,
and if no further measures are taken
for transformer protection, the I>
zone is normally used as standby
protection for the low-voltage side,
i.e. the I> zone is set to 1.5 up to 2.0
times the transformer’s rated current
value. This means that the size of the
branch circuits in the main distribu-
tion system at the low-voltage level is
limited in order to ensure selectivity
there. For example, with a 630 kVA
transformer this means:
 A fuse of a maximum size of 160 A
can be used in the main distribu-
tion (Fig. 2.7/7). In practice this
roughly corresponds to 20% of the
rated transformer current.
 With circuit-breakers, their maxi-
mum size depends on the setting
ranges of the circuit-breakers’
releases and their tolerances, as
well as the protective devices in the
branch circuits of the subdistribu-
tion board. Selective grading using
0.01
1,000
A at 0.4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000
A at 10 kV 40 80 120
ts Prearcing time of fuses
t sd1 Delay time of S-release (Q1)
t sd2 Delay time of S-release (Q2)
t > / t >> Delay times of short-circuit tripping zones > / >> of the DMT protection (Q3)
Grafik 2.7/7: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), circuit-breaker 3WL,
1,000 A with LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g. LV HRC fuse 160 A
(F1), and a transformer supplying 630 kVA
a SENTRON 3WL, 630 A, or even
800 A is possible (Fig. 2.7/8). Gen-
erally speaking, circuit-breakers can
be used with current ratings of 50%
up to 80% of the rated transformer
current.
Intersection of the characteristic
curves Q2 and Q3 in the middle short-
circuit range is permissible, because
 the low-voltage circuit-breaker and
the medium-voltage circuit-breaker
form a functional unit;
 the L-release of the low-voltage
circuit-breaker Q2 protects the
transformer against overloading,
>> / t >>
10,000 / A at 0,4 kV 100,000
5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000
2 00 40 0 80 0 2,000
which practically applies in the
range of 1.0 – 1.3 times the rated
current of the transformer only;
 a safety margin of 50 ms to 100 ms
exists between the tripping value of
the I> zone of the DMT protection
(lower tolerance band) and the
upper tolerance bands of the char-
acteristic LV HRC fuse curve F1 and
the S-release of the circuit-breaker
Q1 in the branch circuits, which
means that selectivity is ensured.
2-zone DMT protection with
overload protection
If advanced DMT protection equip-
ment is applied, which provides

2/58 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

1,000
10 kV
Q3
t
min

> 66 A/500 ms
60/1 A >> 780 A/50 ms
Q1
3WL 630 A Basis 630 kVA
2t k< 16.4 kA
100 characteristic u kr 6%

3WL 1,000 A
Q2 Q2
sd 4,000 A 50% up to 80% of the rated trans-
3WL 1,000 A t sd 300 ms
2t
characteristic former current.
0.4 kV
Q1 3WL 630 A Current transformer sizing for
sd 1,260 A
t sd 200 ms protection purposes
s

10
3NA
F1
160 A Dimensioning a current transformer
depends on many parameters if
k< 16.4 kA k< 16.4 kA correct functioning of the relays is to
be ensured. This includes
Q3
1
> / t>  maximum short-circuit currents
present,
t sd2
 requirements set by the protective
devices on the current transformers,
t sd1  secondary-side rated current trans-
Q3 former current,
ms

0.1
>> / t >>  burden of the connecting cables
and other connected protective
devices,
 power output and inherent burden
of the current transformer,
0.01
1,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000  rated accuracy limit factor of the
current transformer.
A at 0.4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50 ,000

A at 10 kV 40 80 120 2 00 40 0 80 0 2000
Authorized information on the precise
ts Prearcing time of fuses rating of these current transformers
t sd1 Delay time of S-release (Q1)
t sd2 Delay time of S-release (Q2)
matching the protection relays
t > / t >> Delay times of short-circuit tripping zones > / >> of the DMT protection (Q3) applied and the prevailing boundary
conditions can only be given by the
specialized technical departments of
Fig. 2.7/8: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection and overload protection (Q3), the equipment manufacturer.
circuit-breaker 3WL, 1,000 A with LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g. LV
HRC fuse 160 A (F1), and a transformer supplying 630 kVA
In practice, the rated currents of the
current transformers used for DMT
protection devices can be determined
additional overload protection Ith  A fuse of a maximum size of 315 A
as follows:
(ANSI Code 49) besides the two can be used in the main distribution
standard short-circuit protection (Fig. 2.7/9). In practice this roughly  General use of 1-A transformers
zones I> and I>>, the I> zone can act corresponds to 35% of the rated (secondary side) if numerical pro-
as a “proper” short-circuit protection transformer current. tection technology is applied:
zone, and the overload protection can usually, this approach almost com-
 With circuit-breakers, their maxi- pletely outrules possible problems
be used as transformer protection mum size depends on the setting regarding non-saturated transmis-
and standby protection for the low- ranges of the circuit-breakers’ sion of short-circuit currents and the
voltage side. Above all, this allows releases and their tolerances, as burdening of the current transform-
the use of larger fuses in the low- well as the protective devices in the ers for DMT protection in advance.
voltage branch circuits. With regard to branch circuits of the subdistribu-  The primary rated current of the
overload protection, it must be tion board. Selective grading using current transformer should be 1.2
ensured that the initial load is also a SENTRON 3WL, 630 A, or even to 2.0 times the transformer rated
taken into account for a selectivity 800 A is possible (Fig. 2.7/10). current. This protects the current
evaluation. For a 630 kVA transformer Generally speaking, circuit-breakers transformer against damage from
this means: can be used with current ratings of overload, as for cost reasons, cur-

2/59 2
 1,000
10 kV
Q3 Q3
th

t
min
th 42 A
60/1 A > 210 A/500 ms
0% Vorlast >>
780 A/50 ms
100% Vorlast
Basis 630 kVA
k< 16.4 kA
100 u kr 6%

3WL 1,000 A
Q2 Q2
sd 4,000 A
rent transformers without overload 3WL 1,000 A t sd 300 ms
2t
characteristic
capability are nowadays used in 0,4 kV

applications, unless requirements Q1 3WL 630 A

sd 2,560 A
t sd 200 ms
are explicitly defined otherwise. s 10
3NA
 The primary rated current of the F1
315 A
F1
current transformer should not 3NA 315 A
exceed 4 times the transformer k< 16.4 kA k< 16.4 kA

rated current in order to prevent

significant impacts of current trans- 1
Q3
> / t>
formers tolerances on measure-
ments and current evaluations.
For our example this means: t sd2

Rated transformer current 36.4 A

ms

0.1 Q3
(630 kVA, 10 kV) –> rated current of >> / t >>
current transformer, primary side [1.2
x InTr ... 2 x InTr] = [43.7 A ... 72.8 A]
–> A 60/1-A current transformer is
chosen.
0.01
Setting the short-circuit current zones 1,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000
I >, I>> and time delays t >, t >> A at 0.4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50,000

Short-circuit current zone I >: A at 10 kV 40 80 120 2 00 40 0 80 0 2,000

(Fig. 2.7/9 and Fig. 2.7/10) ts Prearcing time of fuses

Assuming that additional overload
protection Ith has also been set in the
DMT protection device, the short-
circuit current zone is chosen in such
a way that it will excite at a safety
margin of approx. 20% towards the
t sd1 Delay time of S-release (Q1)
t sd2 Delay time of S-release (Q2)
t > / t >> Delay times of short-circuit tripping zones > / >> of the DMT protection (Q3)
Fig. 2.7/9: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), circuit-breaker 3WL, 1,000 A
with LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g. circuit-breaker 3WL, 630 A with
LSI-release (Q1), and a transformer supplying 630 kVA

minimum single-phase fault on the

secondary side of the transformer.
Please note that on account of the
transformer’s Dy vector group, this
fault is shown on the primary side as
follows:
representing the transformer’s trans-
formation ratio, in the example:
ü = 10 kV / 0.4 kV = 25
Assuming a minimum single-phase
short-circuit current of approx.
12.5 kA (in this example: transformer
with 630 kVA, ukr 6%), there is:
Ik min prim ≈ 288 A
Consequently, when considering a
safety margin of 20%, there is:
I’k min prim = 0,8 x Ik min prim ≈ 230 A
A selected value of I’k min prim = 210 A
results in the following setting value:
The time delay of the I > zone is set to:
t ≥ 0.5 s
Short-circuit current zone I >>:
(Fig. 2.7/9 and Fig. 2.7/10)
The short-circuit current zone I >> is
set in such a way, that it will only
acquire primary-side faults which are
then cleared as fast as possible. Usu-
ally, it is chosen with a safety margin
of approx. 20% above the maximum
three-phase fault on the secondary
side of the transformer.
When taking the new cmax factor for
low-voltage networks into account as
given in the standard for short-circuit
current calculation, IEC 60909 /
VDE 0102, the maximum secondary-
side three-phase short-circuit current
can initially be estimated as:

2/60 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power System

1,000
10 kV
Q3 Q3
th
t
min

th 42 A
60/1 A > 210 A/500 ms
0% Vorlast >>
780 A/50 ms
100% Vorlast
Q2 Basis k< 16.4 kA 630 kVA
100 3WL 1,000 A u kr 6%
2t
characteristic 3WL 1,000 A
Q2
sd 4,000 A

Q1
t sd 300 ms
2.7.2 Equipment for
3WL 630 A
2t
characteristic Q1
0,4 kV
3WL 630 A
Protecting Distribution
sd 2,560 A
t sd 200 ms
Transformers (against
s

10
F1
3NA
315 A
Internal Faults)
The following signaling devices and
k< 16.4 kA k< 16.4 kA
protection equipment are used to
detect internal transformer faults:
Q3
1
> / t>  Devices for monitoring and protect-
ing liquid-cooled transformers such
t sd2
as Buchholz protectors, temperature
detectors, contact thermometers,
t sd1
etc.
 Temperature monitoring systems
ms

0.1 Q3
>> / t >>
for GEAFOL resin-encapsulated
transformers comprising:
– temperature sensors in the low-
voltage winding
0.01 and
1,000 10,000 / A at 0.4 kV 100,000 – signaling and tripping devices in
A at 0,4 kV 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 7,50010,000 20,000 50 ,000 the incoming-feeder switch panel.
A at 10 kV 40 80 120 2 00 40 0 80 0 2,000
The thermistor-type thermal protec-
ts Prearcing time of fuses
t sd1 Delay time of S-release (Q1)
tion protects the transformer against
t sd2 Delay time of S-release (Q2) overheating resulting from increased
t > / t >> Delay times of short-circuit tripping zones > / >> of the DMT protection (Q3) ambient temperatures or overloading.
Furthermore, it allows the full output
Fig. 2.7/10: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection and overload protection (Q3), of the transformer to be utilized
circuit-breaker 3WL, 1,000 A with LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g. irrespective of the number of load
circuit-breaker 3WL, 630 A with LSI-release (Q1), and a transformer supplying 630 kVA
cycles without the risk of damage to
the transformer.
A selected value of I’k max prim = 780 A These signaling and protection
results in the following setting value: devices do not have to be included in
the grading diagram.

In practice, the time delay of the I >>

stage is set to 50 – 100 ms.

Assuming the transformer of our

example (630 kVA, ukr 6%) and a cmax
factor = 1.05, there is

Ik max prim ≈ 636 A

Consequently, when considering a

safety margin of 20%, there is:
I’k max prim = 1.2 x Ik max prim ≈ 764 A

2/61 2
2.8 Protection of
Technical Building
Installations –
Lightning Current
and Overvoltage
Protection
2.8.1 Standards,
Regulations and
Guidelines
Direct damaging effects of lightning
and overvoltages can be prevented or
at least reduced by taking appropriate
action. Such protection measures
cause a safe current discharge and
prevent injections of potential differ-
ences. Relevant standards are:
DIN EN 62305-1 (VDE 0185-305-1):
2006-11 Protection against lightning,
Part 1: General principles
DIN-EN 62305-2 (VDE 0185-305-2):
2006-11 Protection against lightning,
Part 2: Risk management: Calculation
assistance for assessment of risk for
structures
DIN-EN 62305-3 (VDE 0185-305-3):
2006-11 Protection against lightning,
Part 3: Physical damage to structures
and life hazard
DIN-EN 62305-4 (VDE 0185-305-4):
2006-11 Protection against lightning,
Part 4: Electrical and electronic sys-
tems within structures
IEC 60364-4-44: 2001-08 Electrical
installations of buildings; Part 4-44
IEC 60362-5-53: 2001-08 Electrical
installations of buildings; Part 5-53
Procedures for risk evaluation are
described in IEC 62305-2.
2/62 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
2.8.2 Planning of
Lightning and
Overvoltage Protection
Installations
Lightning and overvoltage protection
should be taken into planning considera-
tions (preliminary draft) of a building or
reconstruction project at an early stage.
In order to protect building installations
against the direct impact of strikes of
lightning, a ligtning protection system is
required comprising:
 Exterior lightning protection
 Interior lightning protection
Integration of building contract
sections – planning, support,
inspection
A tailored combination of individual
protection measures may be chosen
from the options listed below, in order
to protect a building and all of its
installed electrical and electronic
systems against the impact of light-
ning electrommagnetic pulses (LEMP):
 Cable routing and screening
 Equipotential bonding
 Room shielding
 Grounding
Table 2.8/1 exemplifies recommenda-
tions on grounding, equipotential
bonding, lightning protection and
overvoltage protection measures for
various building contract sections.
Additional overvoltage protection
measures may be necessary for the
power supply and IT despite the
existence of a lightning protection
system.
The basis for rating and and planning
lightning and overvoltage protection
systems is a definition of the build-
ing’s endangerment level. This defini-
tion must be made in compliance with
DIN EN 50164-2.
Lightning protection zones (LPZ) must
be defined on the basis of building
layout drawings and a categorization
of the technical building installations.
Appropriate measures for protection
against strikes of lightning and/or
overvoltages must be implemented at
every zone transition area. To do this,
every zone is allocated its own
equipotential bonding rail. These rails
must be connected to the grounding
system via the grounded main equipo-
tential rail.
The most important objective is the
protection of human life. Technical
building system functions and system
availability for use are of secondary
importance in this context. Based on
these priorities, a protection zone
concept needs to be established for
the building facility in compliance
with DIN EN 50164-3 and -4. Its
characteristics are:
 Treatment of the grounding system
 Treatment of roof and facade areas
 Integration of the technical building
installations
 Establishment of the protection
zone concept within the building
including zone-specific equipon-
tential bonding systems, each of
which being connected to the
grounding system.
Table 2.8/1: Recommendations on grounding,
equipotential bonding, lightning
protection and overvoltage
protection measures, see next page.
 Power System

Grounding / Lightning Overvoltage Overvoltage Overvoltage

Cost group (KG)
System name equipotential protection protection protection protection in IT
acc. to DIN 276
bonding (type 1) (type 2) (type 3) systems
Freshwater supply X
Drinking water supply X
Rainwater supply X
Water supply for fire quenching X
Sanitary
systems Ventilation X X X X
(KG 410)
Lifting gear X X X X
Collector/ separator systems/ gulleys X X X X
Draining X X X X
Piping X
Gas supply X)) X
District heating supply X)) X
Solar collectors X
Chimney system X
Heating systems
Air intake X
(KG 420)
Outdoor sensors/ actuators X X) X X X
Outdoor tanks X X X X
Air heat pumps X X X X
Piping X
Roof mounting constructions X X X X X
Wall-mounted constructions X X X X X
Geothermal heat exchanger X X X X
Installations in
Light domes X X X X
air (KG 430)
Smoke evacuation systems X X X X X
Rotary heat exchangers X X X X X
Canal system X
MV building supply X
LV building supply X X
LV installations X X) X X X
Photovoltaic systems X X) X X X
Electrical Paths/access ways X X X X X
installations
(KG 440) External fire extinguishing system X X X X X
Billboards X X) X X X
Shutter systems X X) X X X
Sun shields X X) X X X
Outdoor sensors/ actuators X X) X X X
Telecom supply X X X
RF supply X X X
Satellite system X X X
Telecommunica- Antenna systems X included in the included in the X X
tions and IT low-voltage low-voltage
systems Mobile radio communications X installations installations X X
Burglar alarm system X X X
Alarm system X X X
Bell/intercom X X X

Hauling/ conveyor Elevators X X X X

systems (KG 460) Escalators X X X X
x Recommended x) Required if a lightning protection system exists x)) Cathode-protected tank and piping systems must not be directly
grounded, they must be integrated in the equipotential bonding and grounding systems by means of a series gap.

2/63 2
Besides an integration of the rein-
forcement steel girders and all of the
canal, conduit, piping and cable
support systems made of conductive
materials into the equipotential
bonding system, an EMC-suitable
layout of the building installations is
required.
New installations must always be
equipped with a concrete-footed
ground electrode (DIN 18014). This
electrode must be connected with the
reinforcement (by clamping or weld-
ing) at regular distances of about 5 m
in such a way that it can carry light-
ning currents. Existing building instal-
lations without a grounding system of
its own must be retrofitted with ring
ground electrodes or buried ground
rods – or a combination thereof,
which must be integrated in the
equipotential bonding system.
Electrical power distribution
To meet the requirement of establish-
ing protection zones for all cabling
systems which intersect protection
zone borders, suitable overvoltage
protection measures must be planned
and implemented.
Cabling
Cable routing in buildings
Cables and lines inside a building
must be routed separately, split
according to their voltage levels.
If the reference potential of auxiliary
supplies, e.g. 24 V DC systems, are
permanently grounded, only one
grounding connection is permissible
per system. With more than one
grounding connection in such systems
there would be the risk of malfunc-
tions or even total destruction.
If such systems, which are merely
grounded at the central grounding
point, are spread at a large scale
2/64 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
across the building, this mass poten- 2.8.3. Implementing
tial is to be treated separately as a live Lightning and
conductor. Overvoltage Protection
Cable routing outside buildings Installations
Lines and cables leading to technical
installations outside the building must Exterior lightning protection
be included in the LPZ framework of
Roof areas are often used as “technol-
zone-specific equipotential bonding at
ogy platforms” for large-size equip-
the transition areas of the lightning
ment. In compliance with DIN EN
protection zones, which is imple-
50164-3, these roof mounting con-
mented by means of overvoltage
structions are often protected against
protection devices. For this purpose,
direct strikes of lightning by means of
the overvoltage protection devices
separate lightning rods and roof con-
required must be connected to the
ductors. Three methods may be
building’s equipotential bonding
applied to determine the protection
system close to their mounting loca-
category (Fig. 2.8/1):
tion. As few cable entry points into
the building as possible should be
planned.
Mesh width
Lightning rod
h1
1
r
h Cover
Protection
Lightning ball
angle
Grounding system
Fig. 2.8/1: Methods for determining the protection class (source: VDE)
 Power System

 Lightning ball method
 Meshing method
 Protection angle method
Cable bushings penetrating the roof
should be avoided. For this reason, it
cannot be avoided to route supply
lines on the roof across longer dis-
tances. These lines must be protected
against direct strikes of lightning
across their full length by means of
lightning rods and roof conductors.
Sufficient isolating space must be
maintained between them. Power
cables to the roof mounting construc-
tions must be equipped with electro-
magnetic screening. The screen is to
be laid on both sides.
Connections of current discharge lines
If the lightning protection equipoten-
tializer is only connected to a single
grounding electrode, there may be
high potential differences to the other
grounding electrodes. For this reason,
current discharge lines must be con-
nected with each other at ground level
(i.e. close to soil). This connection
should be made outside the building.
What applies to all these connecting
lines is that the length of current paths
should be kept as short as possible.
They should not be installed above a
height of 1 m above ground.
Minimum dimensions and materials
of overhead connecting lines outside
buildings are defined in
DIN EN 62305-3.
Equipotential bonding and
grounding
Equipotential bonding
Owing to technical progress, an
increasing number of electrical equip-
ment is installed in buildings, there-
fore DIN VDE 0100-410 calls for
equipotential bonding.
The following conductive parts shall
be connected:
 Connection lug of the concrete-
footed ground electrode
 Main protective conductor
(PE conductor in the TT system, PEN
conductor in the TN system)
 Water pipe
 Gas pipe (behind the water meter)
 Metal air pipes

LPZ 0 A

LEMP
LPZ 0 B M

LPZ 1
LEMP
Room shield

Ventilation Terminal
LPZ 2
LPZ 3
LEMP

LPZ 2
LPZ 0 B LPZ 0 B

IT network
SEMP

Equipotential bonding as lightning

protection, lightning current arrester
Power Local equipotential bonding,
system surge arrester

LEMP: Lightning Electromagnetic Pulse; SEMP: Switching Electromagnetic Pulse; LPZ: Lightning Protection Zone

Fig. 2.8/2: The concept of lightning protection zones

2/65 2
 Metal waste water and rainwater
pipes
 Heating pipes
 Cooling pipe
 Other metal piping
 Metal rails
 Antenna systems
 Telecommunications system
 Lightning protection systems
An additional equipotential bonding
conductor is required for bathrooms
and shower rooms. Several pipes may
be interconnected and connected to
the equipotential bonding rail via a
common main equipotential bonding
conductor. The main equipotential
bonding conductor must be half the
cross section of the main protective
conductor, but at least 6 mm2 Cu,
maximum cross section of 25 mm2 Cu.
Regional regulations must be observed.
The main equipotential bonding rail
should be laid in the building’s service
entrance room, and this is where the
main equipotential bonding conduc-
tors and the connection lug of the
concrete-footed ground electrode are
connected to it. DIN VDE 0100-7
requires additional equipotential
bonding in rooms with special hazards
for people.
All conductive metal pipes and the
conductive outlets of bath- and shower
tubs must be connected to an equipo-
tential bonding conductor with a
minimum cross section of 4 mm2 Cu.
Connection with the equipotential
bonding busbar is made with a conduc-
tor cross section of at least 6 mm2 Cu.
Parallel running, metal cable support
systems should be connected at regu-
lar intervals (ideally 5 m).
2/66 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Grounding At the lightning protection zone LPZ 2
(e.g. subdistribution boards), coordi-
Two types of arrangements for
nated overvoltage protection devices
grounding electrodes, type A and B,
type 2 must be series-connected
are distinguished. Arrangement type
down the line of overvoltage protec-
A consists of horizontal or vertical tion devices type 1.
single grounding electrodes. Arrange-
ment type A requires at least 2 DIN VDE 0100-534 requires that the
length of connecting lines to overvolt-
grounding electrodes. Buried ground-
ing rods are normally used in practice. age protection devices in branch
circuits must not be more than 0.5 m.
Arrangement type B consist of a ring
grounding conductor outside the
building/facility, with a minimum
of 80% of its total lenght being
buried in the ground, or it could be
a concrete-footed ground electrode.
Mesh widths of a concrete-footed
ground electrode should not be
more than 20 m x 20 m.
Interior lightning protection
Lightning protection zones are
defined protection areas which are
classified according to the degree of
endangerment by lightning strikes.
Equipotential bonding must be imple-
mented at the borders of these ligthn-
ing protection zones for all metal
parts and electrical supply lines enter-
ing the zone.
Equipotential bonding for lightning
protection from LPZ 0 to LPZ 1 must
be performed for all metal systems
and electric power and data lines. The
aim of equipotential bonding is to
reduce potential differences caused
by a lightning current. Requirements
on equipotential bonding for lightning
protection are fulfilled by a direct
connection of all metal systems and
the indirect connection of all live
systems by means of overvoltage
protection devices, type 1. Equipoten-
tial bonding for lightning protection
should be implemented as closely as
possible near the service entrance into
the building, in order to prevent the
ingress of partial lightning currents
into the building.
 Medium Voltage

chapter 3
3.1 Introduction 3.5 From Medium-Voltage Switchgear
to Turnkey Solutions
3.2 Basics of Switching Devices
3.3 Requirements on Medium-Voltage 3.6 Protection of Power Distribution
Switchgear Systems and Switchgear

3.4 Siemens Medium-Voltage Switchgear

3 Medium Voltage
3.1 Introduction
Low Medium voltage
High voltage
According to international rules, there voltage 1 kV < 52 kV
are only two voltage groups:
 Low voltage: up to and including
1 kV AC (or 1,500 V DC) 0 1 kV 52 kV Alternating voltage

 High voltage: above 1 kV AC

Fig. 3.1/1: Voltage definitions
(or 1,500 V DC)
Most electrical appliances used in (operating voltage). The values vary  in power stations, for generators
household, commercial and industrial greatly from country to country, and station supply systems,
applications work with low voltage. depending on the historical develop-
High voltage is used not only to  in transformer substations of the
ment of technology and the local
transmit electrical energy over very primary distribution level (public
conditions.
large distances, but also, finely supply systems or systems of large
branched, for regional distribution to industrial companies), in which
Medium-voltage equipment
the load centers. However, as differ- power supplied from the high-
ent high voltages are used for trans- Apart from the public supply, there voltage system is transformed to
mission and regional distribution, and are still other voltages fulfilling the medium voltage,
since the tasks and requirements of needs of consumers in industrial  in local supply, transformer or
the switchgear and substations are plants with medium-voltage systems; customer transfer substations for
also very different, the term "medium in most cases, the operating voltages large consumers (secondary distri-
voltage" has come to be used for the of the motors installed are decisive. bution level), in which the power is
voltages required for regional power Operating voltages between 3 kV and transformed from medium to low
distribution, as a part of the high- 15 kV are frequently found in indus- voltage and distributed to the end
voltage range above 1 kV AC up to trial supply systems. In power supply consumer (Fig. 3.1/3).
and including 52 kV AC. Most operat- and distribution systems, medium-
ing voltages in medium-voltage voltage equipment is available
systems are in the 3 kV AC to 40.5 kV
AC range.
The electrical transmission and distri-
bution systems not only connect
power stations and electricity con-
sumers, but also, with their “meshed
systems”, form a supraregional back-
bone with reserves for reliable supply
and for the compensation of load
differences. High operating voltages
(and therefore low currents) are
preferred for the power transmission
in order to minimize losses. The
voltage is not transformed to the
usual values of the low-voltage sys-
tem until it reaches the load centers
1 2 1 3
close to the consumer.
In public power supplies, the majority
1 Medium voltage 2 High voltage 3 Low voltage
of medium-voltage systems are oper-
ated in the 10 kV to 30 kV range Fig. 3.1/2: Voltage levels from the power plant to the consumer

3/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


G G
Medium voltage Power generation
High voltage Power transmission
Transformer substation
Primary
distribution level
M switching rates.
Medium voltage
Secondary
distribution level
Low voltage
Fig. 3.1/3: Medium voltage in the power supply and distribution system
3.2 Basics of 3.2.2 What can the different
switching devices do?
Switching Devices
 Circuit-breakers
3.2.1 What are switching can make and break all currents within
the scope of their ratings, from small
devices?
inductive and capacitive load currents
Switching devices are devices used to up to the full short-circuit current, and
close (make) or open (break) electrical this under all fault conditions in the
circuits. The following stress can occur power supply system, such as earth
during making and breaking: faults, phase opposition, etc.
 No-load switching  Switches
 Breaking of operating currents
can switch currents up to their rated
normal current and make on existing
 Breaking of short-circuit currents
short circuits (up to their rated short-
circuit making current).
Medium Voltage
 Disconnectors (isolators)
are used for no-load closing and
opening operations. Their function is
to “isolate” downstream devices so
they can be worked on.
 Switch-disconnectors
(load break switches)
are the combination of a switch and a
disconnector, or a switch with isolat-
ing distance.
 Contactors
are load breaking devices with a
limited short-circuit making or break-
ing capacity. They are used for high
 Earthing switches
earth isolated circuits.
 Make-proof earthing switches
(earthing switches with making
capacity)
are used for the safe earthing of
circuits, even if voltage is present, i.e.
also in the event that the circuit to be
earthed was accidentally not isolated.
 Fuses
consist of a fuse base and a fuse link.
With the fuse base, an isolating dis-
tance can be established when the
fuse link is pulled out in de-energized
condition (like in a disconnector). The
fuse link is used for one single break-
ing of a short-circuit current.
 Surge arresters
discharge loads caused by lightning
strikes (external overvoltages) or
switching operations and earth faults
(internal overvoltages) to earth. They
therefore protect the connected
equipment against impermissibly high
voltages.
3/3 3
3.2.3 Selection of
switching devices
Switching devices are selected both
according to their ratings and accord-
ing to the switching duties to be
performed, which also includes the
switching rates. The following tables
illustrate these selection criteria: Table
3.1/1 shows the selection according to
ratings. Tables 3.1/2 to 3.1/5 show the
service life of the devices.
Selection according to ratings
The system conditions, i.e. the proper-
ties of the primary circuit, determine
the required parameters. The most
important of these are:
 Rated voltage
is the upper limit of the system volt-
age the device is designed for. As all
high-voltage switching devices are
zero-current interrupters – except for
some fuses – the system voltage is the
most important dimensioning crite-
rion. It determines the dielectric stress
of the switching device by means of
the transient recovery voltage and the
recovery voltage, especially while
switching off.
 Rated insulation level
is the dielectric strength from phase
to earth, between phases and across
the open contact gap, or across the
isolating distance. The dielectric
strength is the capability of an electri-
cal component to withstand all volt-
ages with a specific time sequence up
to the magnitude of the correspon-
ding withstand voltages. These can be
operating voltages or higher-fre-
quency voltages caused by switching
operations, earth faults (internal
overvoltages) or lightning strikes
(external overvoltages). The dielectric
strength is verified by a lightning
impulse withstand voltage test with
the standard impulse wave of 1.2/50
µs and a power-frequency withstand
voltage test (50 Hz / 1 min).
 Rated normal current
is the current the main circuit of a
device can continuously carry under
defined conditions. The temperature
rise of components – especially con-
tacts – must not exceed defined
values. Permissible temperature rises

Device Withstand capability, rated … Switching capacity, rated …

peak withstand short-circuit short-circuit

insulation level voltage normal current breaking current
current breaking current making current

Circuit-breaker x x x x x

Switch(-disconnector) x x x x x

Disconnector x x x

Earthing switch x x

Make-proof earthing switch x x x

Contactor x x x x x 1) x 1)

Fuse link x x x

Fuse base x x

Surge arrester* x 2) x 3) x 4) x 5)

Current limiting reactor x x x

Bushing x x x 6)

Post insulator (insulator) x x 6)

x Selection parameter 4) Rated discharge current for surge arresters

1) Limited short-circuit breaking capacity 5)
For surge arresters: Short-circuit strength in case of overload
2) Applicable as selection parameter in special cases only, e.g. 6) For bushings and insulators: Minimum failing loads for tension, bending and torsion

for exceptional pollution layer * See also Section 3.3

3) For surge arresters with spark gap = rated voltage

(Parameters of the secondary equipment for drives, control and monitoring are not taken into consideration in this table.)

Table 3.2/1: Device selection according to data of the primary circuit

3/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


always refer to the ambient air tem-
perature. If a device is mounted in an
enclosure, it may possibly not be
loaded with its full rated current,
depending on the quality of heat
dissipation.
 Rated peak withstand current
is the peak value of the major loop of
the short-circuit current during a
compensation process after the begin-
ning of the current flow, which the
device can carry in closed state. It is a
measure for the electrodynamic
(mechanical) load of an electrical
component. For devices with full
making capacity, this value is not
relevant (see Rated short-circuit
making current).
 Rated short-circuit making current
is the peak value of the making cur-
rent in case of short circuit at the
terminals of the switching device. This
stress is greater than that of the rated
peak withstand current, as dynamic
forces may work against the contact
movement.
 Rated breaking current
is the load breaking current in normal
operation. For devices with full break-
ing capacity and without a critical
current range, this value is not rele-
vant (see Rated short-circuit breaking
current).
 Rated short-circuit breaking current
is the root-mean-square value of the
breaking current in case of short
circuit at the terminals of the switch-
ing device.
Class Operating cycles
M1 1,000
M
M2 5,000
E1 10 x I1
10 x I2a
2 x Ima
E2 30 x I1
E 20 x I2a
3 x Ima
E3 100 x I1
20 x I2a
5 x Ima
Table 3.2/2: Endurance classes for switches
Selection according to endurance
and switching rates
If several devices satisfy the electrical
requirements and no further criteria
are more important, the required
switching rate can be used as an
additional selection criterion. The
following tables show the endurance
of the switching devices and therefore
provide a recommendation for their
appropriate use. The respective device
standards distinguish between classes
of mechanical (M) and electrical (E)
endurance, whereby they can also be
used together on the same switching
device; for example, a switching
device can have both mechanical class
M1 and electrical class E3.
 Switches
Standard IEC 60265-1 / VDE 0670-301
only specifies classes for the so-called
general-purpose switches. There are
also “Special switches” and “Switches
for limited applications”.*
– General-purpose switches
must be able to switch different types
of operating currents (load currents,
ring currents, currents of unloaded
transformers, charging currents of
unloaded cables and overhead lines) as
well as make on short-circuit currents.
Medium Voltage
Description
Mechanical endurance
Increased mechanical endurance
20 x 0.05 · I1 I1 mainly active load current
10 x I4a I2a closed loop current
10 x 0.2 … 0,4 · I4a I4a cable-charging current
10 x I4b I4b line-charging current
10 x I6a I6a earth-fault current
10 x I6b I6b cable-charging and line-
charging current under
earth-fault conditions
Ima short-circuit making current
General-purpose switches that are
intended for use in systems with
isolated neutral or with earth fault
compensation, must also be able to
switch under earth fault conditions.
The versatility is mirrored in the very
exact specifications for the E classes.
– SF6 switches
are appropriate when the switching
rate is ≤ once a month. These
switches are usually classified as E3
with regard to their electrical
endurance.
* Switches for limited applications must only
control some of the switching duties of a
general-purpose switch.
Switches for special applications are provided
for switching duties such as switching of
single capacitor banks, paralleling of capacitor
banks, switching of ring circuits formed by
transformers connected in parallel, or
switching of motors in normal and locked
condition.
3/5 3
 Class Description  Circuit-breakers
M1 2,000 operating cycles Normal mechanical endurance Whereas the number of mechanical
M operating cycles is specifically stated
M2 10,000 operating cycles Extended mechanical endurance, low maintenance
in the M classes, the circuit-breaker
standard IEC 62271-100 / VDE 0671-
E1 2 x C and 3 x O with 10%, Normal electrical endurance
30%, 60% and 100% Isc (Switch which is not covered by E2) 100 does not define the electrical
endurance of the E classes by specific
E2 2 x C and 3 x O with 10%, Without AR* Extended electrical
30%, 60% and 100% Isc operation endurance without
numbers of operating cycles, but
E remains very vague on this.
maintenance of the arcing
26 x C 130 x O 10% Isc Without AR* chamber
26 x C 130 x O 30% Isc operation The test duties of the short-circuit
4xC 8xO 6% Isc type tests provide an orientation as to
4xC 6xO 100% Isc what is meant by “normal electrical
* AR = automatic reclosing
endurance” and “extended electrical
endurance”. The number of make and
Table 3.2/3: Endurance classes for circuit-breakers break operations (Close, Open) is
specified in the fields of the table with
a gray background.
– Air-break or hard-gas switches – Vacuum switches
Modern vacuum circuit-breakers can
Their switching capacity is signifi-
are appropriate when the switching generally make and break the rated
cantly higher than that of the M2/E3
rate is ≤ once a year. These switches normal current with the number of
classes. They are used for special tasks
are simpler and usually belong to the mechanical operating cycles.
– mostly in industrial power supply
E1 class. There are also E2 versions
systems – or when the switching rate The switching rate is not a determin-
available.
is ≥ 1 once a week. ing selection criterion, as circuit-
breakers are always used where short-
circuit breaking capacity is required to
protect equipment.

Class Operating cycles Description  Disconnectors

M0 1,000 For general requirements Disconnectors do not have any switch-
ing capacity.* Therefore, classes are
M M1 2,000 Extended mechanical endurance
only specified for the number of
M2 10,000 mechanical operating cycles.

Table 3.2/4: Endurance classes for disconnectors  Earthing switches

With earthing switches, the E classes
designate the short-circuit making
Class Operating cycles Description
capacity (earthing on applied volt-
E0 0 x Ima No short-circuit making For general requirements age). E0 corresponds to a normal
capacity
earthing switch; switches of the E1
E1 2 x Ima Short-circuit making and E2 classes are also called make-
E
capacity
proof or high-speed earthing
E2 5 x Ima Reduced maintenance required switches.
The standard does not specify how
Table 3.2/5: Endurance classes for earthing switches often an earthing switch can be

* Disconnectors up to 52 kV may only switch negligible currents up to 500 mA (e.g. voltage transformer) or larger currents only when there is an
insignificant voltage difference (e.g. during busbar transfer when the bus coupler is closed).

3/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

actuated purely mechanically; there

are no M classes for these switches. • Rated voltage • Neutral earthing
• Short-circuit current • Cable / overhead line
 Contactors System parameters
• Normal current • Overvoltage protection
• Load flow • Power quality
The standard has not specified any
endurance classes for contactors yet.
• Protection functions • Redundancy
Commonly used contactors today System protection and measuring • Selectivity • Tripping times
have a mechanical and electrical • Measuring • Metering
endurance in the range of 250,000 to
1,000,000 operating cycles. They are
• Public power systems • Emergency power
used wherever switching operations Supplies
• In-plant power generation • Redundancy
are performed very frequently, e.g.
> once an hour. • Place of installation • Accessibility
Service location • Utilities room • Buildings
• Transport • Installation
3.3 Requirements
on Medium-Voltage Ambient conditions
• Room climate
• Temperature
• Altitude
• Air humidity
Switchgear
• Switching duties • Switching rate
The major influences and stress values Sector-specific application
• Busbar transfer • Availability
a switchgear assembly is subject to
result from the task and its rank in the • Operation • Personal protection
distribution system. These influencing Sector-specific operating procedures • Working • Work instructions
factors and stresses determine the • Inspection • Maintenance
selection parameters and ratings of
the switchgear. Regulations
• Standards • Laws
• Association guidelines • Company regulations

3.3.1 Influences and

stress values
System parameters
System voltage
It determines the rated voltage of the
switchgear, switching devices and
other installed components. The
maximum system voltage at the upper
tolerance limit is the deciding factor.
Assigned configuration criteria
for switchgear
 Rated voltage Ur
 Rated insulation level Ud; Up
 Rated primary voltage of voltage
transformers Upr
Fig. 3.3/1: Influencing factors and stresses on the switchgear
Short-circuit current Attention: The ratio of peak current
to sustained short-circuit current in
It is characterized by the electrical
the system can be significantly larger
values of peak withstand current Ip
than the standardized factor Ip /Ik =
(peak value of the initial symmetrical
2.5 (50 Hz), used for the construction
short-circuit current) and sustained
of the switching devices and the
short-circuit current Ik. The required
switchgear. A possible cause, for
short-circuit current level in the sys-
example, are motors that feed power
tem is predetermined by the dynamic
back to the system when a short
response of the loads and the power
circuit occurs, thus increasing the
quality to be maintained, and deter-
peak current significantly.
mines the making and breaking
capacity and the withstand capability
of the switching devices and the
switchgear (Table 3.3/1).

3/7 3
 Assigned configuration criteria for switchgear

Main and earthing circuits – Rated peak withstand current Ip

– Rated short-time withstand current Ik

Switching devices – Rated short-circuit making current Ima

– Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc
Current transformers – Rated peak withstand current Ik dyn
– Rated short-time thermal current Ith

Table 3.3/1: Configuration criteria for short-circuit current

Normal current and load flow Large cable cross sections or several
parallel cables must be connected for
The normal current refers to current
high normal currents; the panel con-
paths of the incoming feeders, bus-
nection must be designed accordingly.
bar(s) and outgoing consumer feed-
ers. Because of the spatial arrange- Assigned configuration criteria for
ment of the panels, the current is also switchgear
distributed and therefore there may
 Rated current of busbar(s) and
be different rated current values next
feeders
to one another along a conducting
path; different values for busbars and  Number of cables per phase in the
feeders are typical. panel (parallel cables)
Reserves must be planned when  Current transformer ratings.
dimensioning the switchgear, e.g.
 in accordance with the ambient air
temperature,
 for planned overload or
 temporary overload during faults.

3/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

3.4 Siemens Loss of service

continuity category
When an accessible
compartment of the
Type of construction

Medium-Voltage switchgear is opened …

Switchgear LSC 1 the busbar and therefore the

As described on page 5/2 in the TIP
Application Manual “Establishment of
Basic Data and Preliminary Planning”,
the 8DH switchgear is the right choice
for the majority of applications in
infrastructure projects. In this TIP
Manual for Draft Planning, we would
like to present some advanced prod-
ucts and solutions. For more detailed
information, please contact your local
Siemens representative.
complete switchgear must be
isolated.
LSC 2 LSC 2A the incoming cable must
be isolated. The busbar and the
adjacent switchgear panels can
remain in operation.
LSC 2B the incoming cable, the
busbar and the adjacent switchgear
panels can remain in operation.
Table 3.4/1: Loss of service continuity categories
No partitions within the panel,
no panel separation walls to
adjacent panels.
Panel separation walls and
isolating distance with partition
to the busbar.
Panel separation walls and isolating
distance with partition to the
busbar and to the cable.

Type of accessibility Access features Type of construction

to a compartment

Interlock-controlled Opening for normal operation Access is controlled by the

and maintenance, e.g. fuse construction of the switchgear, i.e.
replacement. integrated interlocks prevent
impermissible opening.

Procedure-based Opening for normal operation Access control via a suitable

or maintenance, e.g. fuse procedure (work instruction of the
replacement. operator) combined with a locking
device (lock).

Tool-based Opening not for normal operation Access only with tool for opening,
and maintenance, e.g. cable special access procedure (instruc-
testing. tion of the operator).

Not accessible Opening not possible / not intended for operator,

opening can destroy the compartment.
This applies generally to the gas-filled compartments of gas-insulated
switchgear. As the switchgear is maintenance-free and climate-independ-
ent, access is neither required nor possible.

Table 3.4/2: Accessibility of compartments

The notation IAC A FLR, I and t contains the abbreviations for the following values:

IAC Internal Arc Classification

A Distance between the indicators 300 mm, i.e. installation in rooms with access for
authorized personnel, closed electrical service location.

FLR Access from the front (F), from the sides (L = lateral) and from the rear (R).

I Test current = rated short-circuit breaking current (in kA)

t Arc duration (in s)

Table 3.4/3: Internal arc classification according to IEC 62271-200

3/9 3
 Distribution Insula- Type of Loss of service Partition Internal arc Switchgear Busbar Rated Rated short-time Rated current, Rated current,
level tion construc- continuity class classification* type system voltage (kV) withstand current (kA) busbar (A) feeder (A)
tion

3/10
1s 3s
Primary Gas- Extendible LSC 2B (panels without PM IAC A FLR 31,5 kA, 1s NXPLUS C Single 15 31.5 31.5 2,500 2,500
insulated HV HRC fuses)
LSC 2A (panels with 24.0 25 25 2,500 2,000
HV HRC fuses)

LSC 2B (panels without PM IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1s NXPLUS C Double 24 25 25 2,500 1,250
HV HRC fuses)
LSC 2A (panels with
HV HRC fuses)

LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 31,5 kA, 1s NXPLUS Single 40.5 31.5 31.5 2,500 2,500

LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 31,5 kA, 1s NXPLUS Double 36 31.5 31.5 2,500 2,500

LSC 2B PM IAC A FL 40 kA, 1s 8DA10 Single 40.5 40 40 4,000 2,500

LSC 2B PM IAC A FL 40 kA, 1s 8DB10 Double 40.5 40 40 4,000 2,500

Air- Extendible LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 40 kA, 1s NXAIR Single 12 40 40 3,150 3,150
insulated
LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 40 kA, 1s NXAIR Double 12 40 40 3,150 3,150

Table 3.4/4: Overview of Siemens medium-voltage switchgear

Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1s NXAIR M Single 24 25 25 2,500 2,500

LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1s NXAIR M Double 24 25 25 2,500 2,500

LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 50 kA, 1s NXAIR P Single 15 50 50 4,000 4,000

LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 50 kA, 1s NXAIR P Double 15 50 50 4,000 4,000

LSC 2B PM IAC A FLR 31,5 kA, 1s SIMOPRIME Single 17.5 31.5 31.5 3,150 3,150

LSC 2A PM IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1s 8BT1 Single 24 25 25 2,000 2,000

LSC 2B PM IAC A FL 31,5 kA, 1s 8BT2 Single 36 31.5 31.5 2,500 2,500

LSC 1 PM IAC A FL 16 kA, 1s 8BT3 Single 36 16 16 1,250 1,250

Secondary Gas- Non- LSC 2B (panels without PM IAC A FL 21 kA, 1s 8DJ10 Single 17.5 25 20 630 630
insulated extendible HV HRC fuses)
LSC 2A (panels with 24 20 20 630 630
HV HRC fuses)

LSC 2B (panels without PM IAC A FL 21 kA, 1s 8DJ20 Single 17.5 25 20 630 630
HV HRC fuses)
LSC 2A (panels with 24 20 20 630 630
HV HRC fuses)

Extendible LSC 2B (panels without PM IAC A FLR 21 kA, 1s 8DH10 Single 17.5 25 20 1,250 1,250
HV HRC fuses)
LSC 2A (panels with 24 20 20 1,250 1,250
HV HRC fuses)

Air- Extendible LSC 2B (panels without PM IAC A FLR 20 kA, 1s SIMOSEC Single 17.5 25 20 1,250 1,250
insulated HV HRC fuses)
LSC 2A (panels with 24 20 20 1,250 1,250
HV HRC fuses)

* Maximum possible IAC classification

 Medium Voltage

NXAIR Rated
voltage kV 7.2 12

Performance features frequency Hz 50/60 50/60

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28 *
The air-insulated, metal-clad
lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75
switchgear type NXAIR is the innova-
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 40 40
tion in the switchgear field for the
short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 40 40
distribution and process level up to
12 kV, 40 kA, 3150 A. short-circuit making current** max. kA 100 100
peak withstand current** max. kA 100 100
 Metal-enclosed, metal-clad
normal current of the busbark max. Ak 3,150 3,150
LSC 2B PM switchgear
normal current of the feeders
 Resistance to internal faults: with circuit-breaker max. Ak 3,150 3,150
IAC A FLR 40 kA, 1 s with switch-disconnector*** max. Ak 200 200
* 42 kV optional
 Type tests of the circuit-breaker ** Values for 50 Hz
and make-proof earthing switch *** Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used
in the panel
Table 3.4/5: Technical data of NXAIR
 Cable connection from the front
or from the rear
 Bushing-type transformers enable
selective shutdown of feeders
 Confinement of internal fault to
respective compartment
 Replacement of module and con-
nection compartment possible
 Modular contactor panels
H2
H1
H3
TIP_NXAIR-001

W D

All panel types Dimensions in mm

Width W 400 / 600 / 800 / 1,000
Height H1 Standard 2,300
H2 – For higher low-voltage compartment 2,350
– For natural ventilation
– With additional compartment for busbar components
H3 Height of standard low-voltage compartment 2,000
Depth D Single busbar ≤ 31.5 kA, ≤ 2,500 A 1,350
40 kA, 3,150 A 1,450
D Double busbar ≤ 31.5 kA, ≤ 2,500 A 2,850
40 kA, 3,150 A 3,050

Fig. 3.4/1: NXAIR panel Table 3.4/6: Dimensions of NXAIR

3/11 3
NXAIR M Rated
voltage kV 24

Performance features frequency Hz 50

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 50
The air-insulated, metal-clad
lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 125
switchgear type NXAIR M is the conse-
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25
quent further development of the
NXAIR family for use in the distribu- short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 25

tion and process level up to 24 kV, short-circuit making current max. kA 63

25 kA, 2,500 A. peak withstand current max. kA 63
normal current of the busbark max. Ak 2,500
 Metal-enclosed, metal-clad
normal current of the feeders
LSC 2B PM switchgear
with circuit-breaker max. Ak 2,500
 Resistance to internal faults: with switch-disconnector max. Ak 200*
IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1 s * Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used

 Type tests of the circuit-breaker Table 3.4/7: Technical data of NXAIR M

and make-proof earthing switch
in the panel
 Cable connection from the front
or from the rear
 Bushing-type transformers enable
selective shutdown of feeders
 Confinement of internal fault to
respective compartment
 Replacement of module and con-
nection compartment possible
H4
H1
H2
H3
TIP_NXAIR-M-001

W D

All panel types Dimensions in mm

Width W ≤ 1,600 A 800
2,000, 2,500 A 1,000
Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment 2,655
– For natural ventilation
H2 Front for standard low-voltage compartment 2,200
H3 – For higher low-voltage compartment 2,550
H4 – With additional compartment for busbar components 2,770
Depth D Single busbar 1,554
Double busbar for back-to-back arrangement 3,,260

Fig. 3.4/2: NXAIR M panel Table 3.4/8: Dimensions of NXAIR M

3/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

NXAIR P Rated
voltage kV 7.2 12 15

Performance features frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60

short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28 35
The air-insulated, metal-clad
lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95
switchgear type NXAIR P is based on
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 50 50 50
the construction principles of the
NXAIR family and designed for use in short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 50 50 50
the distribution and process level up short-circuit making current* max. kA 125 125 125
to 15 kV, 50 kA, 4000 A. peak withstand current* max. kA 125 125 125
 Metal-enclosed, metal-clad normal current of the busbark max. Ak 4,000 4,000 4,000
LSC 2B PM switchgear normal current of the feeders
with circuit-breaker max. Ak 4,000 4,000 4,000
 Resistance to internal faults:
with vacuum contactor max. Ak 400** 400** –
IAC A FLR 50 kA, 1 s
* Values for 50 Hz
 Type tests of the circuit-breaker
** Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used
and make-proof earthing switch in
the panel Table 3.4/9: Technical data of NXAIR P
 Cable connection from the front
or from the rear
 Can be delivered as withdrawable
or truck-type switchgear
 Bushing-type transformers enable
selective shutdown of feeders up
to 31.5 kA
 Confinement of internal fault to
respective compartment up to
31.5 kA
 Replacement of module and con-
H4
H3

nection compartment is possible

H2
H1

 Modular contactor panels

HA25-2688d eps

W D

All panel types (except vacuum contactor panel) Dimensions in mm

Width W ≤ 2,000 A 800
> 2,000 A (for panel ventilation) 1,000
Height H1 Front for standard low-voltage compartment (≤ 3150 A) 2,225
H2 With higher low-voltage compartment 2,485
H3 With standard, top-mounted pressure relief duct 2,550
H4 For forced ventilation 2,710
Depth D Single busbar 1,635
Double busbar for back-to-back arrangement 3,320
Vacuum contactor panel
Width W 400
Height H1 Front for standard low-voltage compartment (≤ 3150 A) 2,225
H2 With higher low-voltage compartment 2,485
H3 With standard, top-mounted pressure relief duct 2,550
H4 For forced ventilation (400 A) 2,710
Depth D Single busbar 1,650

Fig. 3.4/3: NXAIR P panel Table 3.4/10: Dimensions of NXAIR P

3/13 3
SIMOPRIME Rated
voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5
Performance features
frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
The air-insulated, metal-clad short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28* 35 38
switchgear type SIMOPRIME is a lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95
factory-assembled, type-tested indoor short-circuit breaking current max. kA 40 40 40 40
switchgear for use in the distribution
short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 40 40 40 40
and process level up to 17.5 kV,
short-circuit making current** max. kA 100 100 100 100
40 kA, 3600 A.
peak withstand current **k max. kA 100 100 100 100
 Metal-enclosed, metal-clad normal current of the busbar max. Ak 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
LSC 2B PM switchgear normal current of the feeders
 Resistance to internal faults: with circuit-breaker max. Ak 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
with switch-disconnector max. Ak 200*** 200*** 200*** 200***
IAC A FLR 40 kA, 1 s
with vacuum contactor max. Ak 400*** 400*** – –
 Type tests of the circuit-breaker * 42 kV optional
and make-proof earthing switch ** Values for 50 Hz
*** Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used
in the panel
 Cable connection from the front Table 3.4/11: Technical data of SIMOPRIME
or from the rear
 Truck-type design
 Use of block-type or ring-core
HA26-2024a eps

current transformers
 All switching operations with
closed door
 Logical mechanical interlocks
H1
H2

W D

All panel types Dimensions in mm

≤ 31.5 kA 40 kA
Width W Circuit-breaker panel ≤ 1,250 A 600 800
2,500 A, 3,150 A, 3,600 A 800
Vacuum contactor panel 400
Disconnector panel ≤ 1,250 A 600 800
2,500 A, 3,150 A, 3,600 A 800
Switch-disconnector/ fuse panel 12 kV 600 800
17.5 kV 600 800
Bus sectionalizer/circuit-breaker panel 1,250 A 600 800
≤ 2,500 A, 3,150 A, 3,600 A 800
Bus sectionalizer/bus riser panel ≤ 2,500 A 600 800
3,150 A, 3,600 A 800
Metering panel 600 800
Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment and IAC 0.1 s 2,200
With standard low-voltage compartment and IAC 1.0 s 2,437
H2 – 1,780
Depth D Standard 1,860

Fig. 3.4/4: SIMOPRIME panel Table 3.4/12: Dimensions of SIMOPRIME

3/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

8BT1 Rated
voltage kV 12 24
Performance features
frequency Hz 50 50
The air-insulated, cubicle-type short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 28 50
switchgear type 8BT1 is a factory- lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 125
assembled, type-tested indoor
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25
switchgear for lower ratings in the
short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 25 25
distribution and process level up to
short-circuit making current max. kA 63 63
24 kV, 25 kA, 2,000 A.
peak withstand current max. kA 63 63
 Metal-enclosed, LSC 2A PM cubicle
normal current of the busbark max. Ak 2,000 2,000
switchgear
normal current of the feeders
 Type tests of the circuit-breaker with circuit-breaker max. Ak 2,000 2,000
and make-proof earthing switch or disconnector truck
with switch-disconnector max. Ak 630 A / 200 A* 630 A / 200 A*
in the panel
* Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used
 Tested for resistance to internal
faults: IAC A FLR 25 kA, 1 s Table 3.4/13: Technical data of 8BT1

 Circuit-breaker panel, fixed-

mounted switch-disconnector
panel, modular
 Cable connection from the front
 Truck-type design
HA26-2029a eps

 Use of block-type current

transformers
 All switching operations with
closed door
H2

 Logical mechanical interlocks

H1

 Use of SION vacuum

circuit-breakers

W D1
D2

All panel types Dimensions in mm

7.2/12 kV
Width W For circuit-breaker max. 1,250 A 600
For circuit-breaker 2,000 A 800
For switch-disconnector 600
Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment 2,050
H2 With cable duct* 2,350
Depth D1 Without low-voltage compartment 1,200
D2 With low-voltage compartment 1,410
24 kV
Width W For circuit-breaker max. 1,250 A 800
For circuit-breaker 2,000 A 1,000
For switch-disconnector 800
Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment 2,050
H2 With cable duct* 2,350
Depth D1 Without low-voltage compartment 1,200
D2 With low-voltage compartment 1,410
* For 1 s arc duration

Fig. 3.4/5: 8BT1 panel Table 3.4/14: Dimensions of 8BT1

3/15 3
8BT2 Rated
voltage kV 36
Performance features
frequency Hz 50/60
The air-insulated, metal-clad short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 70
switchgear type 8BT2 is a factory- lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 170
assembled, type-tested indoor
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5
switchgear for use in the distribution
short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5
and process level up to 36 kV, 25 kA,
short-circuit making current max. kA 80/82
2,500 A.
peak withstand current max. kA 80/82
 LSC 2B PM switchgear
normal current of the busbar max. Ak 2,500
 Tested for resistance to internal normal current of the feeders
faults: IAC A FLR 31.5 kA, 1 s with circuit-breaker max. Ak 2,500
with contactor max. Ak –
 Cable connection from the front with switch-disconnector max. Ak –

 Truck-type design Table 3.4/15: Technical data of 8BT2

 Use of block-type current transformers
 All switching operations with
closed door
 Logical mechanical interlocks
H

W D

All panel types Dimensions in mm

Width W 1,550
Height H ≤ 25 kA 2,400
31.5 kA 2,775
Depth D 2,450

Fig. 3.4/6: 8BT2 switchgear Table 3.4/16: Dimensions of 8BT2

3/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

8BT3 Rated
voltage kV 36
Performance features
frequency Hz 50/60
The air-insulated, cubicle-type short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 70
switchgear type 8BT3 is a factory- lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 170
assembled, type-tested indoor
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 16
switchgear for lower ratings in the
short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 16
distribution and process level up to
short-circuit making current max. kA 40/42
36 kV, 16 kA, 1,250 A.
peak withstand current max. kA 40/42
 LSC 1 switchgear
normal current of the busbar max. Ak 1,250
 Tested for resistance to internal normal current of the feeders
faults: IAC FLR 16 kA, 1 s with circuit-breaker max. Ak 1,250
with contactor max. Ak –
 Circuit-breaker panel, fixed- with switch-disconnector max. Ak 400*
mounted switch-disconnector * Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used
panel, modular
Table 3.4/17: Technical data of 8BT3
 Cable connection from the front
 Truck-type design
 Use of block-type current transformers
 All switching operations with
closed door
 Logical mechanical interlocks
H

W D

All panel types Dimensions in mm

Width W 1,000
Height H 2,400
Depth D 1,450

Fig. 3.4/7: 8BT3 switchgear Table 3.4/18: Dimensions of 8BT3

3/17 3
8DJ10  Internal arc classification:  High operating and personal safety
IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s  Operational reliability
The gas-insulated switchgear type 8DJ10
 No gas work during installation  Environmentally compatible
with switch-disconnectors is used for
power distribution in the secondary Advantages:  Cost-efficient
distribution system up to 24 kV. With its  Independent of the environment
extremely narrow design, block versions and climate
with up to six feeders can be used in all  Compact
types of substations.
 Maintenance-free
Performance features:
 Type-tested according to
IEC 62271-200
 Sealed pressure system with SF6 Rated
filling for the entire service life voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
 Safe-to-touch enclosure and stan- frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
dardized connections for plug-in short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20 28* 36 38 50
cable terminations lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125
 Block-type construction, non- short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
extendable short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA – 20 20 20 20
 Three-pole, gas-insulated short-circuit making current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
switchgear vessel with three- peak withstand current max. kA 63 63 63 63 50
position switch, for connection normal current of the ring-main feeders A 630
of cable plugs normal current of the transformer A 200
 Operating mechanisms located feeders (depending on the HV HRC
fuse link)
outside the switchgear vessel, easily
accessible * 42 kV / 75 kV according to some national requirements

 Metal-enclosed, partition class PM Table 3.4/19: Technical data of 8DJ10

 Loss of service continuity category

for switchgear:
– without HV HRC fuses: LSC 2B
– with HV HRC fuses: LSC 2A
H2
H1

TIP_8DJ10-2358_1a
TIP_8DJ10-2355_1

W D

Dimensions Dimensions in mm
Width (module) W Connection method:
2RC + 1T (connection 10) 710
3RC + 1T (connection 71) 1,060
4RC + 2T (connection 62) 1,410
Height H1 Low design 1,360
H2 High design 1,650
Depth D Standard switchgear 775
Switchgear with pressure absorber 880

Fig. 3.4/8: 8DJ10 switchgear Table 3.4/20: Internal arc classification according to IEC 62271-200

3/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

8DJ20  Internal arc classification:  Compact

IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s  Maintenance-free
The gas-insulated medium-voltage
 No gas work during installation  High operating and personal safety
switchgear type 8DJ20 is used for
power distribution in the secondary Advantages:  Environmentally compatible
distribution system up to 24 kV. Ring-  Independent of the environment  Cost-efficient
main feeders, circuit-breaker feeders and climate
and transformer feeders are all part of
a comprehensive product range in
Rated
compact block-type construction to
voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
satisfy all requirements – also for
extreme ambient conditions. frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28* 36 38 50
Performance features: withstand voltage
 Type-tested according to IEC 62271-200 lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125
 Sealed pressure system with SF6 short-circuit breaking current
filling for the entire service life for switchgear with circuit-breakers max. kA 20 20 16 16 16

 Safe-to-touch enclosure and stan- short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 25 25 25 25 20

dardized connections for plug-in short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA – 20 20 20 20
cable terminations short-circuit making current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
 Block-type construction, non- peak withstand current max. kA 63 63 63 63 50
extendible normal current of the ring-main feeders A 630
 Three-pole, gas-insulated normal current of the circuit-breaker A 250 oder 630
switchgear vessel with three- feeders

position switch, for connection of normal current of the transformer A 200

cable plugs
 Operating mechanisms located
outside the switchgear vessel,
easily accessible
feeders (depending on the
HV HRC fuse link)
* 42 kV / 75 kV according to some national requirements
Table 3.4/21: Technical data of 8DJ20

 Metal enclosed, partition class PM

 Loss of service continuity category
for switchgear:
– without HV HRC fuses: LSC 2B
– with HV HRC fuses: LSC 2A
H1
H2
H3
TIP_8DJ20-LST-2420_1

TIP_8DJ20-2337_4a

W D

Dimensions Dimensions in mm
Width W Number of feeders (in extracts)
2 feeders (e.g. 2RC) 710
3 feeders (e.g. 2RC + 1T) 1,060
4 feeders (e.g. 3RC + 1T, 4RC) 1,410
5 feeders (e.g. 4RC + 1T, 5RC) 1,760
Height H1 Low overall height 1,200
H2 Standard overall height 1,400
H3 High structure (higher frame) 1,760
Option: Low-voltage compartment, compartment height: 400 or 600
Depth D Standard switchgear 775
Switchgear with pressure absorber 880

Fig. 3.4/9: 8DJ20 switchgear Table 3.4/22: Dimensions of 8DJ20

3/19 3
8DH10 – Free-standing arrangement:  High operating and personal safety
IAC A FLR 21 kA, 1 s  Operational reliability and security
The gas-insulated medium-voltage
 No gas work during installation or of investment
switchgear type 8DH10 is used for
extension  Environmentally compatible
power distribution in secondary and
primary distribution systems up to Advantages:  Cost-efficient
24 kV. The product range includes  Independent of the environment
individual panels such as ring-main, and climate
transformer and circuit-breaker panels  Compact
or metering panels, as well as panel
 Maintenance-free
blocks to satisfy all requirements with the
highest level of operational reliability.
Rated
Performance features:
voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
 Type-tested according to IEC 62271-200 frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
 Sealed pressure system with SF6 short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28* 36 38 50
filling for the entire service life withstand voltage

 Safe-to-touch enclosure and stan- lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125

dardized connections for plug-in short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20

cable terminations short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 25 25 25 25 20

 Single-pole insulated busbar short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA – 20 20 20 20

 Three-pole gas-insulated switchgear short-circuit making current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20

vessels with three-position switch, peak withstand current max. kA 63 63 63 63 50

circuit-breaker and earthing switch, normal current of the busbark A 630 or 1,250
for connection of cable plugs normal current of the feeders A 630 630 630 630 630
 Operating mechanisms and trans- * 42 kV / 75 kV according to some national requirements
formers located outside the
Table 3.4/23: Technical data of 8DH10
switchgear vessel, easily accessible
 Metal-enclosed, partition class PM
 Loss of service continuity category
for switchgear:
– without HV HRC fuses: LSC 2B
– with HV HRC fuses: LSC 2A
 Internal arc classification for:
– Wall-standing arrangement:
IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s
H2
H2

H1
H1

TIP_8DH-2301_1a
TIP_8DH-2279_1

TIP_8DH-2282_1

W W D

Dimensions Dimensions in mm
Width W Ring-main feeders 350
Transformer feeders, 500
circuit-breaker feeders,
bus sectionalizer panels

Metering panels 850

Panel blocks 700, 1,050, 1,400
Height H1 Panels without low-voltage compartment 1400
H2 Panels with low-voltage compartment 2,000 or 2,300
Depth D Standard switchgear 775
Switchgear with pressure absorber 890

Fig. 3.4/10: 8DH10 switchgear Table 3.4/24: Dimensions of 8DH10

3/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

NXPLUS C  Internal arc classification for: and climate

– Wall-standing arrangement:  Compact
The medium-voltage circuit-breaker IAC A FL 31,5 kA, 1 s
switchgear that made gas insulation  Maintenance-free
– Free-standing arrangement:
with the proven vacuum switching IAC A FLR 31,5 kA, 1 s  Safe for operators
technology economical in its class –  Operational reliability
Advantages:
the compact NXPLUS C for secondary
 No gas work during installation  Environmentally compatible
and primary distribution systems up to
24 kV, up to 31.5 kA, up to 2,500 A. It or extension  Cost-efficient
can also be supplied as double-busbar  Independent of the environment
switchgear in back-to-back arrange-
ment (see Catalog HA35.41).
Performance features: Rated
voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
 Type-tested according to IEC 62271-200
frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
 Sealed pressure system with SF6
short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28* 36 38 50
filling for the entire service life withstand voltage
 Safe-to-touch enclosure and stan- lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125
dardized connections for plug-in short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25
cable terminations short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25
 Single-pole insulated and screened short-circuit making current max. kA 80 80 80 63 63
busbar peak withstand current max. kA 80 80 80 63 63
 Three-pole gas-insulated switchgear normal current of the busbar max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500
vessels with three-position switch normal current of the feeders max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,000 2,000
and circuit-breaker, for connection * 42 kV / 75 kV according to some national requirements
of cable plugs
Table 3.4/25: Technical data of NXPLUS C
 Operating mechanisms and trans-
formers are arranged outside the
switchgear vessel, easily accessible
 Metal-enclosed, partition class PM
 Loss of service continuity category
for switchgear:
– without HV HRC fuses: LSC 2B
– with HV HRC fuses: LSC 2A
H2
H1
TIP_NXPLUS-C-001

W D
D

Dimensions Dimensions in mm
Width W 630 A, 1,000 A, 1,250 A 600
2,000 A, 2,300 A, 2,500 A 1,200
Height H1 Standard design 2,250
H2 For higher low-voltage compartment 2,650
Depth D Wall-standing arrangement 1,100
Free-standing arrangement 1,250

Fig. 3.4/11: NXPLUS C panel Table 3.4/26: Dimensions of NXPLUS C

3/21 3
8DA/8DB Rated
voltage kV 12 24 36 40.5
The gas-insulated medium-voltage circuit-
frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
breaker switchgear up to 40.5 kV with the
advantages of the vacuum switching short-duration power-frequency kV 28 50 70 50
withstand voltage
technology – for a high degree of inde-
lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 125 170 185
pendence in all applications. 8DA/8DB10
short-circuit breaking current max. kA 40 40 40 40
for primary distribution systems up to
40.5 kV, 40 kA, up to 4000 A. short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 40 40 40 40

Performance features: short-circuit making current max. kA 100 100 100 100
peak withstand current max. kA 100 100 100 100
 Type-tested according to IEC 62271-200
normal current of the busbar max. Ak 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000
 Enclosure with modular standard-
ized housings made from corrosion- normal current of the feederse max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500

resistant aluminum alloy Table 3.4/27: Technical data of 8DA/8DB

 Safe-to-touch enclosure and stan-
dardized connections for plug-in
cable terminations
8DA switchgear
 Operating mechanisms and trans-
formers are easily accessible outside
the enclosure
 Metal-enclosed, partition class PM
 Loss of service continuity category
for switchgear: LSC 2B
 Internal arc classification:
IAC A FL 40 kA 1 s
H

Advantages:
 Independent of the environment
and climate
 Compact
TIP_8DA-001

 Low maintenance
 Safe for operators W D1
 Operational reliability
 Environmentally compatible 8DB switchgear
 Cost-efficient
H
TIP_8DB-001

W D2

Dimensions Dimensions in mm
Width (spacing) W 600
Height H Standard design 2,350
Design with higher low-voltage 2,700
compartment
Depth D1 Single-busbar switchgear 1,625
D2 Double-busbar switchgear 2,660
Fig. 3.4/12: 8DA (on the left) for single-busbar and
8DB for double-busbar applications Table 3.4/28: Dimensions of 8DA/8DB

3/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

NXPLUS  Loss of service continuity category  Compact

for switchgear: LSC 2B  Maintenance-free
The gas-insulated medium-voltage
 Internal arc classification:  Safe for operators
circuit-breaker switchgear up to
IAC A FLR 31,5 kA, 1 s
40.5 kV with the advantages of the  Operational reliability
vacuum switching technology – for a  No gas work during installation or
 Environmentally compatible
high degree of independence in all extension
 Cost-efficient
applications. NXPLUS for primary Advantages:
distribution systems up to 40.5 kV, up  Independent of the environment
to 31.5 kA, up to 2,000 A (for double- and climate
busbar switchgear up to 2500 A).
Performance features:
Rated
 Type-tested according to IEC 62271-200
voltage kV 7.2 12 24 36 40.5
 Sealed pressure system with SF6
frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
filling for the entire service life
short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28 50 70 85
 Safe-to-touch enclosure and stan- withstand voltage
dardized connections for plug-in lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 125 170 185
cable terminations short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
 Three-pole gas-insulated modules short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
for busbar with three-position short-circuit making current max. kA 80 80 80 80 80
disconnector, as well as circuit-
peak withstand current max. kA 80 80 80 80 80
breaker, for connection of cable
normal current of the busbar max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,000
plugs
normal current of the feeders max. Ak 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,500 2,000
 Interconnection of modules with
single-pole insulated and screened Table 3.4/29: Technical data of NXPLUS
module couplings
 Operating mechanisms and trans-
formers are arranged outside the NXPLUS switchgear with single busbar NXPLUS switchgear with double busbar
switchgear vessels, easily accessible
 Metal enclosed, partition class PM
H2
H1

TIP_NXPLUS_DSS-001
TIP_NXPLUS-001

W D1 W D2

Dimensions Dimensions in mm
Width (spacing) W Feeders up to 1,250 A 600
Height H Switchgear design
H1 Single-busbar switchgear 2,450
H2 Double-busbar switchgear 2,600
Depth D1 Single-busbar switchgear 1,600
Fig. 3.4/13: NXPLUS switchgear for single-busbar
applications (on the left), NXPLUS D2 Double-busbar switchgear 1,840
switchgear for double-busbar
applications (on the right) Table 3.4/30: Dimensions of NXPLUS

3/23 3
SIMOSEC with HV HRC fuses: LSC 2A Advantages:
 Internal arc classification for:  Compact modular design
The air-insulated medium-voltage
– Wall-standing arrangement:  High operating and personal safety
switchgear type SIMOSEC is used for
IAC A FL 20 kA, 1 s
power distribution in secondary and  Environmentally compatible
– Free-standing arrangement:
primary distribution systems up to  Cost-efficient
IAC A FLR 20 kA, 1 s
24 kV and up to 1,250 A. The modular
product range includes individual  Can be mounted side-by-side and
panels such as ring-main, transformer extended as desired
and circuit-breaker panels or metering
panels to fully satisfy all requirements
for power suppliers and industrial Rated
applications.
voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
Performance features: frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
 Type-tested according to IEC 62271-200 short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28* 36 38 50
withstand voltage
 Phases for busbar and cable connec-
lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125
tion are arranged one behind the
other short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
 Three-pole gas-insulated switching-
device modules with three-position short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA – 20 20 20 20

disconnector, circuit-breaker and short-circuit making current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20

earthing switch as sealed pressure peak withstand current max. kA 63 63 63 63 50
system with SF6 filling for the entire normal current of the busbar A 630 or 1,250
service life normal current of the feeders max. Ak 1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250
 Air-insulated busbar system * 42 kV / 75 kV according to some national requirements
 Air-insulated cable connection
Table 3.4/31: Technical data of SIMOSEC
system, for conventional cable
sealing ends
 Metal-enclosed, partition class PM
 Loss of service continuity category
for switchgear:
without HV HRC fuses: LSC 2B
H2
H1

TIP_SIM-2393_2
TIP_SIM-2407_1

W D

Dimensions Dimensions in mm
Width (spacing) W Ring-main feeders, transformer feeders 375 or 500
Circuit-breaker feeders, bus sectionalizer 750 or 875
Metering panels 750
Height H1 Panels without low-voltage compartment 1,760
H2 Panels without low-voltage compartment 2,100 or 2,300
Depth D Standard 1,230

Fig. 3.4/14: SIMOSEC switchgear Table 3.4/32: Dimensions of SIMOSEC

3/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

 Generator switchgear
3.5 From Medium- simulation programs and the many
years of experience then enable
 Photovoltaic systems coupled to
Voltage Switchgear the power system
customer-specific solutions to be
to Turnkey  Hydro-electric systems
dimensioned.

Solutions  Wind power stations

Besides supplying just medium-volt-
age switchgear, the Siemens Power
Transmission and Distribution Group
(PTD) also provides the engineering
and implementation of turnkey power
supply systems for power supply
companies, industrial customers and
investors.
These turnkey solutions combine the
stages of design, supply, installation
and commissioning of power supply
systems to the hand-over of a com-
plete package. The major benefit to
the customer: communication with
only one partner who is responsible
for the entire project implementation.
The portfolio encompasses standard
and turnkey solutions as well as
individual special solutions such as:
 Power quality solutions
 – SIPLINK solutions for load flow
control in 2 and/or 4-quadrant
operation
 – Active and passive compensation
systems for low-voltage and
medium-voltage applications
 – Line filters
With just a few details from the “Com-
pensation systems for medium volt-
age” checklist (marked with an *), it is
Some examples from the solutions
already possible to estimate costs for
portfolio of Siemens PTD M are
the compensation measures during
described below.
the planning stage, or depending on
the amount of information available,
Dimensioning of compensation
to submit tenders for compensation
systems for medium voltage
systems based on a sound technical
Today, electrical energy can be con- knowledge.
verted into every conceivable form of
power, whereby the technology used
reduces the quality of the power to a
greater of lesser extent. The use of
compensation systems is becoming
increasingly necessary in order to
comply with the standards and guide-
lines or to meet the specifications
relevant for electricity rates. Compen-
sation systems help to
 reduce losses,
 save electricity costs and
 improve the voltage quality.
To improve the quality of the power,
compensation systems for medium-
voltage applications are adapted to
the technological processes of individ-
ual, exposed consumers or consumer
groups or entire subsystems. The
major focus is on system compatibility
of all electrical consumers.

Your contact for Europe including In addition to knowledge of the power

Germany:
Jürgen Sauer
PTD M 34, Turnkey
Stromversorgungsanlagen
Dynamostraße 4
61850 Mannheim
Tel.: +49 6 21 4 56-32 80
Fax: +49 6 21 4 56-32 89
Mobile: +49 1 72 6 32 31 44
juergen.sauer@siemens.com
supply system and local conditions at
the place of installation, the prerequi-
site for correct dimensioning is infor-
mation on the present rated and
operating data of the consumers to be
compensated, as well as a definition
of the actual goals that are to be
achieved with the compensation
measures. Special measuring instru-
ments for data acquisition, powerful
Fig. 3.5/1: Application examples
Contact:
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Power Quality Management
Direct Business Division
E-mail:
support.PQM@reinhausen.com
www.reinhausen.com

3/25 3
Checklist

Compensation systems for medium voltage

Project name:

Contractor:

Environmental conditions:

Place of installation (country)

Site altitude (above sea level)  < 1,000 m  m

Pollution

Ambient air temperature (min./max.)

Air humidity

Resistance to earthquakes

Rated system voltage*

Operating voltage*

System frequency*

Short-circuit current or short-circuit capacity* (min./max.)

Audio-frequency remote control  Yes Frequency: ......... Hz

 No

Harmonic pre-stressing  Yes 03rd h. ..... 05th h. ..... 07th h. ..... 11th h. .....
of the supply system
13th h. ..... 17th h. ..... 19th .h. ..... _.h. .....
 None

3/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Medium Voltage

Checklist

Industrial sector*  Power supplier  Steel industry

 Oil and gas  Chemical
 Cement  Mining


Characteristic of the consumer to be compensated  Constant  Fluctuating

 Stochastic  Dynamic


Power/operating data of the consumers to be  Data sheets

compensated  Measurement results

Consumers to be compensated* Type: Power: cos ϕ:

Type: Power: cos ϕ:

Relevant producers of harmonics* Type: Power: cos ϕ:

 6-pulse  12-pulse 
 Thyristors  Diodes

Type: Power: cos ϕ:

 6-pulse  12-pulse 
 Thyristors  Diodes
 None

Objective of the compensation*  Improvement of the average cos ϕ

 Nominal cos ϕ: Time base:
 Improvement of the momentary cos ϕ
 Nominal cos ϕ: Time base:
 Ensuring the motor startup
 Reduction of harmonics
 Voltage stabilization
 Flicker compensation
 Inrush current limitation
 Reduction of capacitive charging power

Standard or guideline to be complied with

for the voltage quality

3/27 3
3.6 Protection of
Medium-Voltage
Switchgear
This section provides information
about the selection and use of
SIPROTEC protective relays in the field
of power system protection. These
protective devices have the task to
reliably detect faults in the power
system and selectively disconnect the
affected substation component. No
matter whether you want to protect
cables, switchgear or busbars,
SIPROTEC protective relays always
offer optimal and economical solutions.
Basic requirements on numerical
protection relays:
 Complete digital measuring and
analysis for precise measurements
throughout the entire life cycle
 Integrated self-monitoring with
alarm contact for low maintenance
costs and higher device availability
 Integrated fault recording and a
powerful analysis program (e.g.
SIGRA) for fast fault clearing and
signaling, thus reducing downtimes
in the event of a line fault
 One operating program (e.g. DIGSI)
for all protective devices, providing
a higher degree of operating safety
and savings in staff training costs
 Parameter set changeover for
automatic adaptation of the
pickup values to different supply
conditions
 Application-oriented functional
adaptations, e.g. by means of CFC
logic (Continuous Function Chart)
using the DIGSI operator tool
 Serial communications interface for
easy integration into a control
system or for the data export to
3/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
other applications (e.g. power
management)
3.6.1 Protection Configu-
ration in a Radial Network
Radial networks distribute power from
the infeed points to the consumers.
However, protective tripping switches
off all downstream consumers. These
can be supplied from another side
after switchovers (closing of emer-
gency connections).
A radial network is easy to protect
due to the single-sided supply and
because its topology is not meshed.
However, there are still different
solution options. Generally, a grading
of non-directional overcurrent-time
protection relays is sufficient. In this
network structure, the substation
busbars can also be protected by
means of reverse interlocking with
very short tripping times.
Supply 1
I>>
MS
I>>
> >
I>>
I>>
I>> Busbar protection through reverse interlocking via additional definite-time overcurrent
protection or integrated backup definite-time overcurrent protection (for
∆I Line differential protection: SIPROTEC 7SD600 or 7SD610
Note: Only the protection relays that are relevant for the topology have been shown
Fig. 3.6/1: Radial network with a low extension
The disadvantage of this solution is
the increase in the tripping times in
the direction of the system supply, the
location of the highest short-circuit
power. The increasing grading time
also limits the number of subordinate
substations. At the same time, the
upstream overcurrent-time protection
relays act as backup protection for
subordinate devices.
The overcurrent-time protection
should be equipped with an I> (ANSI
Code 51) and an I>> (ANSI Code 50)
zone. Thermal overload protection
should have parameterization options
for signaling or tripping, depending
on the requirement.
Differential protection devices with
very short tripping times offer an
alternative protection concept. Line
differential protection relays protect
the connections between the substa-
Supply 2
I>>
Emergency
MS
I>> connection ∆I ∆I
∆I
Emergency connection I>> ∆I
∆I
Emergency connection
∆I
)

tions in first-zone time. The backup
protection concept must be consid-
ered separately. Under no circum-
stances should the overcurrent-time
protection/backup protection func-
tion, which is integrated in the differ-
ential protection devices, be used for
the same network section, as in that
case hardware redundancy would not
be ensured.
Note:
Differential protection is less common
in radial networks because of cost
reasons. It is only used in the process
industry in order to ensure short fault
clearing times and therefore prevent
process interruption whenever possible.
Of course, a radial network can also
be protected by means of Z< distance
protection relays when the distance
between neighboring stations permits
a correct grading of the distance
zones. These devices would be able to
clear the majority of faults in first-
zone time. The principle of reverse
interlocking is also suitable here to
protect the busbars. Backup protec-
tion is also implicitly provided through
the extended zone grading of subordi-
nate network sections.
Proposed devices:
I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ61, 7SJ62
ΔI = SIPROTEC 7SD600 or 7SD610
Z< = SIPROTEC 7SA6
Medium Voltage
3.6.2 Protection stations to be tripped in first-zone
Configuration in a Closed time. The non-directional overcurrent-
time protection function contained in
Ring Network these relays can be utilized for a
Ring networks are used frequently as backup protection concept, but not
they permanently supply all stations for busbar protection via reverse
with power from two sides. This interlocking. This suggests the use of
enables faults on connecting cables to SIPROTEC 7UT6 or 7SS60 for busbar
be selectively cleared without having protection, in which case backup
to disconnect consumers. protection also requires consideration.
The supply from two or more sides Alternatively, ring networks can be
places high demands on the protec- protected by means of directional
tion concept, as the fault current can comparison protection. Directional
flow in both directions, i.e. non- overcurrent-time protection relays are
directional overcurrent-time protec- used for this purpose; they require
tion relays are not suitable as the voltage transformers as well as a
main protection measure. communication link to the respective
partner device at the opposite end of
Ring networks are generally protected the line. Busbar protection can be
by means of differential protection implemented with these relays via
relays. This enables faults on the reverse interlocking. A backup protec-
connecting cables between the sub- tion concept can also be set up
Supply 1 Supply 2
I>> >
I>> I>>
I>> I>>
I>> I>>
M
Line differential protection: SIPROTEC 7SD61 with backup overcurrent-time protection
Busbar differential protection: SIPROTEC 7UT6
> Directional overcurrent-time protection: SIPROTEC 7SJ62
Note: Only the protection relays that are relevant for the topology have been shown
Fig. 3.6/2: Ring network with a low extension
3/29 3
through extended zone grading of
adjacent network sections. Directional
comparison protection is mainly used
in power supply systems for infra-
structure and industry.
Of course, ring networks can also be
protected by means of distance pro-
tection relays when the distance
between neighboring substations
permits a clear grading of the distance
zones. These devices would clear the
majority of faults in first-zone time.
The principle of reverse interlocking is
also suitable here to protect the
busbars. Backup protection is implic-
itly contained through the extended
zone grading of adjacent network
sections. Distance protection relays
also require voltage transformers.
Distance protection is mainly used in
the ring networks of distribution
system operators.
Proposed devices:
ΔI = line differential protection
SIPROTEC 7SD610
ΔI = busbar differential protection
SIPROTEC 7UT6

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ62
3.6.3 Protection
Configuration for Open
Ring Networks
Open ring networks have the follow-
ing characteristics: circuit-breakers are
installed in the system supplies. The
substations in the open ring are
equipped with switch-disconnectors.
As a rule, they are not equipped with
protective devices, as switch-discon-
nectors cannot break short-circuit
currents. Only outgoing transformer
feeders are equipped with fuses.
Regarding the protective equipment
for the system supply, the same
applies as for the radial network.
3/30 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
3.6.4 Protection of
Parallel Lines
The directional overcurrent-time
protection determines the direction of
the current flow from the phase angle
of the current and voltage, and offers
additional directional overcurrent
zones besides the non-directional
overcurrent-time protection. This
permits different current thresholds
and delay times for the two directions.
Main applications are parallel lines as
well as lines supplied from both sides.
Proposed devices:

I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ62
I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ61 or 7SJ600,
7SJ602 or 7SJ80
Supply direction
> >
t = 300ms t = 300ms
t = 0ms t = 0ms
> >
t = 0ms
> >
Overcurrent-time protection
> SIPROTEC (7SJ61 or 7SJ600)
Directional overcurrent-time
> protection SIPROTEC (7SJ62)
Fig. 3.6/3: Protection concept for parallel supply
with definite-time overcurrent
protection
Differential protection relays with very
short tripping times offer an alterna-
tive protection concept for parallel
lines. Line differential protection
relays protect the interconnections
between the substations in first-zone
time. The backup protection concept
must be considered separately.
Note:
Differential protection is used mainly
in the process industry in order to
ensure short fault clearing times and
therefore prevent a process interrup-
tion whenever possible.
Supply direction
t = 0ms
Line differential protection
SIPROTEC 7SD610
Overcurrent-time protection
>
SIPROTEC 7SJ61
Grafik 3.6/4: Protection concept for parallel
supply with differential protection
relays

3.6.5 Earth-Fault
Detection in an Isolated or
Compensated System
An earth fault is not a short circuit.
Operation is first of all continued. An
earth fault must be signaled and
cleared as quickly as possible. The
earth fault is located by devices with
wattmetric earth-fault direction
detection, such as SIPROTEC 7SJ602.
In meshed systems, transient earth-
fault relays such as SIPROTEC 7SN60
are used to locate the earth fault.
The earth currents can be detected
with a Holmgreen circuit or a cable-
type current transformer. The Holm-
green circuit is suitable for higher
earth-fault currents (> 40 A) and a
transformation ratio of the feeder
transformers (< 150/1), that is not too
high.
Power direction
Forward
Backward
Wattmetric directional earth-fault relay
Fig. 3.6/5: Earth-fault protection
3.6.6 Earth-Fault
Protection for Low-
Resistance Neutral
Earthing
In a system with a low-resistance
earthed neutral, every earth fault is a
short circuit. The pickup value for the
earth-fault protection must be
selected so that it is suitably sensitive
to reliably trip every earth fault.
SIPROTEC line protection relays can
optionally be selected with the appro-
priate earth-fault protection. In the
overhead line system, approximately
70% of the earth faults are success-
fully cleared without major opera-
tional interruptions through auto-
matic reclosing (AR).
Medium Voltage
3.6.7 Transformer
Protection
Transformer differential protection is
used for selective, instantaneous
protection of transformers. As the
feeding line lengths of the transform-
ers on the high and low voltage sides
are usually not too long, the sum-
mated current can be formed in one
device and not in separate devices as
in line differential protection.
Modern transformer differential
protection relays no longer require
any secondary interface circuits to
simulate current effects imposed by
the transformer. This is computed by
the numerical protection device.
The protection device should also be
equipped with an inrush detection to
ensure safe connection of the trans-
former.
Proposed devices:
ΔI = SIPROTEC 7UT612 for two-
winding transformers
ΔI = SIPROTEC 7UT613 for three-
winding transformers
1
Transformer differential protection
SIPROTEC 7UT612 for two-winding transformers
SIPROTEC 7UT613 for three-winding transformers
Fig. 3.6/6: Transformer protection
3/31 3
3.6.8 Machine Protection
MV
Generators < 1 MW
If a cable-type current transformer is
available for sensitive earth-fault
protection, a 7SJ602 or 7SK80 device
with a separate earth-current input
can be used instead of the SIPROTEC
7SJ600.
Generators up to 5 MW
A SIPROTEC 7UM61 protection relay Fig. 3.6/7: Protection concept for very small generators with solidly earthed neutral

is used for larger generators. With its

frequency adjustment from 11 to
60 Hz, the protection is also fully
effective when the generator is
started up. If a generator differential
protection is required, a SIPROTEC
7UM62 protection relay should be
Panel
used.
Note:
Two voltage transformers in
a V-connection are sufficient.

Fig. 3.6/8: Protection concept for small generators

Further information:
ΔI = SIPROTEC 7SD600 I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ602
Catalog SIP 5.2 Catalog SIP 3.3
Order no. E50001-K4405-A121-A2 Order no. E50001-K4403-A131-A2
ΔI = SIPROTEC 7SD610 I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ61
Catalog SIP 5.4 Catalog SIP 3.1
Order no. E50001-K4405-A141-A2 Order no. E50001-K4403-A111-A5
Z< = SIPROTEC 7SA6 I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ600
Catalog SIP 4.3 Catalog SIP 3.2
Order no. E50001-K4404-A131-A2 Order no. E50001-K4403-A121-A1
ΔI = Busbar differential protection Machine protection SIPROTEC 7UM61
SIPROTEC 7UT6 Catalog SIP 6.1
Catalog SIP 5.6 Order no. E50001-K4406-A111-A1
Order no. E50001-K4405-A161-A2
 SIPROTEC 7SJ61-64
I> = SIPROTEC 7SJ62 Catalog SIP 3.1
Catalog SIP 3.1 Order no. E50001-K4403-A111-A5
Order no. E50001-K4403-A111-A5

3/32 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Transformers

chapter 4
4.1 Distribution Transformers
4.2 Control and Isolating Transformers
4 Transformers
4.1 Distribution Trans-
former
Type of
cooling in
General In isolated electrical
operating areas
Outdoor installations

Transformers design accordance

with
EN 60076-2
A safe power supply requires a well
developed supply system with high- Mineraloil * O a Oil sumps und collecting Impermeable floors No oil sumps and
pits with ground plates collecting pits under
capacity transformers. Wherever are permissible as oil certain conditions
b Discharge of liquid from
distribution transformers in the the collecting pit must be sumps und collecting
immediate vicinity of people must prevented pit with max. 3
transformers and less Complete text of
guarantee highest safety, cast-resin c Water Resources Act and
than 1,000 liters of VDE 0101, Section
the state ordinances are
transformers are the perfect solution. to be observed liquid per transformer 5.4.2.5 C, must be
Cast-resin transformers have made it taken into
consideration
possible to avoid the restrictions of
liquid-filled transformers, while still = Transfor- K As with coolant code O
mers with
preserving tried and tested properties silicone oil
such as operational reliability and or synth.
long service life. ester **

Cast-resin A No measures required

In the TIP Application Manual on the
dry-type
Establishment of Basic Data and trans-
Preliminary Planning, essential formers
information for the design and config- * or burning point of the cooling and insulation liquid ≤ 300 °C
uration of distribution transformers is ** or burning point of the cooling and insulation liquid > 300 °C
described in Section 5.2, p. 5/12 ff. In
addition to this section, please see Table 4.1/1: Protective measures for water protection in accordance with DIN VDE 0101
below for the most important require-
ments for the site of installation.
Coolant code General Outdoor installations

Requirements on the site of

installation
Cast-resin transformers place the
lowest requirements on the site of
installation. This arises from the
provisions for groundwater protec-
tion, fire protection and conservation
of functions in DIN VDE 0101, DIN
VDE 0100-718 and of Elt Bau VO.
Below is a comparison of transformers
of different designs on the basis of
these provisions, as valid in 1997.
O a Rooms fire-proof F90A, isolated; a Sufficient distances
b Doors fire-retardant T30; or
c Doors leading outside fire-resistant b Fire-proof partitions
d Oil sumps and collecting pits arranged so that fire does
not spread; except for installation in isolated electrical
operating areas with max. 3 transformers and less than
1,000 liters of liquid per transformer;
e Fast working protective equipment
K As with coolant code O a, b and c are not necessary if e is No measures required
fulfilled
A As with coolant code K, but without d No measures required

Table 4.1/2: Protective measures for fire protection and conservation of functions in accordance with
DIN VDE 0101

4/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Transformers

Environment Categories, Environment Category

Climate Categories and
Class E0 No precipitation, pollution negligible
Fire Safety Categories
Class E1 Occasional precipitation, pollution possible to a limited extent
IEC 60076-11 defines Environment
Categories, Climate Categories and Class E2 Frequent precipitation or pollution, also both at the same time
Fire Safety Categories, which take into
Climate Category
consideration the various operating
conditions at the site of installation. Class C1 Indoor installation not below –5 °C
The Environment Category (E) takes Class C2 Outdoor installation down to –25 °C
into account air humidity, precipita-
tion and pollution. The Climate Cate- Fire Safety Category
gory (C) takes into account the lowest Class F0 Limiting of the fire risk is not envisaged.
ambient temperature. It is thus also a
Class F1 The properties of the transformer mean the fire risk is limited.
measure of the crack resistance of the
cast-resin impregnation. The Fire
Table 4.1/3: Environment Categories, Climate Categories and Fire Safety Categories in accordance with
Safety Category (F) takes into account IEC 60076-11
the possible consequences of fire.
Under normal operation this means
Important! Ambient
normal service life consumption is temperature Capacity
In accordance with IEC 60076-11 or
attained. The average annual tempera- (annual average)
DIN 42523 the required class may be
ture and the capacity in particular are –20 °C 124 %
defined by the operator.
decisive for service life consumption.
–10 °C 118 %
Ambient temperatures deviating from
GEAFOL transformers fulfill the this affect the load capacity of the 0 °C 112 %
requirements of the highest defined system. +10 °C 106 %
classes:
+20 °C 100 %
Special installation conditions
 Environment Category E2
+30 °C 93 %
 Climate Category C2 Extreme conditions on site are to be
 Fire Safety Category F1 taken into consideration when Table 4.1/4: System capacity depending
planning the system: on the ambient temperature

Temperature of the cooling air  Coating and prevailing tempera-

Transformers are designed for the
following values of the cooling air in
 For use at an altitude of over
accordance with the relevant
standards:
 Maximum 40 °C
 Daily average 30 °C
 Annual average 20 °C
tures are relevant for use in a
tropical climate.
1,000 m above sea level, a special
design with regard to warming and
insulation level is necessary
(see IEC 60076-11).
 In the event of increased mechani-
cal strain – use in a ship, excavator,
earthquake region, etc. – structural
support may be required, e.g.
propping of the top yokes.

4/3 4
Minimum distances

Maximum voltage*) Rated, withstand, lightning Minimum

of the equipment stroke, impulse voltage*) distance
Um LI

c
(see Fig. 4.1/1) List 1 List 2 a b c

kV kV kV mm mm mm

12 – 75 120 **) 50

24 95 – 160 **) 80

24 – 125 220 **) 100

36 45 – 270 **) 120

36 – 170 320 **) 160

*) see DIN EN 60076-3 (VDE 0532 T3);

**) distance b = distance a, if h.v. tapping here; otherwise: distance b = distance c

Table 4.1/5: Minimum distances around GEAFOL transformers

Shock-hazard protection height of 1,100 to 1,300 mm. For Um,

b a
the following applies:
The cast-resin surface of the trans-
former winding is not safe to touch  12 kV = 500 mm
during operation. Hence, protection  24 kV = 500 mm Fig. 4.1/1: Minimum distances around GEAFOL
against accidental touching is neces-  36 kV = 525 mm transformers

sary. Various measures taken at the

time of installation of the transformer
in an electrical operating area ensure
shock-hazard protection, e.g. the
fitting of a guard strip (Fig. 4.1/2) or
grid (Fig. 4.1/3).
Examples of design
Fig. 4.1/2 and 4.1/3 show examples of
types of protection against accidental
touching.
For the distances A, B and C the
following rule applies:
 Minimum distance (Table 4.1/3)
plus
 30 mm safety margin (tried and
tested dimension) plus
 Assembly distance (depending on
space required).
Safe clearance D (Fig. 4.1/3) is
required for separation with cover
strips, chains or ropes, mounted at a
Safe clearance E (Fig. 4.1/3) is
required for a grid height of
a simple, non-flammable partition.
1800 mm. For Um, the following
Partitioning has clear advantages if
applies:
transformers supply different net-
 12 kV = 215 mm works; if one transformer has to be
 24 kV = 315 mm isolated, the other one can remain in
 36 kV = 425 mm operation.
and max. 40 mm mesh size for
wire-mesh doors or guards.
Safe clearance D and E in accordance
with DIN VDE 0101.
Room division between
transformers
When several cast-resin transformers Further information:
are arranged in one room (Fig. 4.1/2 Siemens AG, Power Transmission
and 4.1/3), room division is not stipu- and Distribution (ed.):
GEAFOL cast-resin transformers: Planning Notes,
lated, but this is normally done using Order No. E50001-U413-A47-V2

4/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Transformers

Full wall Full wall

1800

1800
1300

C
C

A
B

A
B
D

Fig. 4.1/2: Example of a guard strip Fig. 4.1/3: Example of a grid

4/5 4

4.2 Control
and Isolating
Transformers
4.2.1 Single- and
Three-phase Dry-type
Transformers
Fig. 4.2/1: SIRIUS dry-type transformers
Areas of application
 Control transformers in the
construction of plants and process
control equipment
 Matching transformers for
manufacturing plants
 Isolating and safety isolating
transformers for electrical
equipment
 Transformers in production
machines
 Associated transformers for
communication technology,
medical engineering and building
installations
 Transformers for drive systems
In order to ensure the correct voltage
in every situation, the right trans-
former is needed. SIRIUS dry-type
transformers are reliable, functionally
4/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
safely under very varied conditions
throughout the world. The range
comprises:
 Power range 25 VA to 2 MVA
 Voltage range 1 V to 3.6 kV
 Current range 1 A to 20 kA
Standards/regulations
SIRIUS one- and three-phase
transformers < 16 kVA are categorized
as isolating, control and line
transformers in accordance with
EN 61558-2-4, -2-2, -2-1 or safety
isolating, control and line
transformers in accordance with
EN 61558-2-6, -2-2, -2-1 or
autotransformers in accordance with
EN 61558-2-13 with selectable input
and output voltages
Note:
In the case of SIRIUS transformers,
line transformers with ≤ 50 V on the
output side are always designed as
safety isolating transformers.
SIRIUS one- and three-phase power
transformers > 16 kVA can be used as
matching transformers with an
input/output voltage in accordance
with DIN VDE 0532-6 and as match-
ing, auto- or converter transformers in
accordance with DIN VDE 0532-6 with
selectable input and output voltages.
SIRIUS dry-type transformers provide
optimal protection with high permissi-
ble ambient temperatures up to 40 °C
or 55 °C, high short-time rating in the
case of control transformers, a fuse-
less design and their safety standard
“Safety inside“ EN 61558.
For more technical data on the Internet
see www.siemens.com/sidac
One- and three-phase dry-type
transformers < 16 kVA
EN 61558-2-6, -2-4, -2-2, -2-1, -2-13
The standard EN 61558 with the VDE
classification VDE 0570 is the German-
language version of the international
standard IEC 61558 (Safety of power
transformers, power supply units and
similar) and has completely replaced
the older standards VDE 0550 and
VDE 0551.
These changes have resulted in
stricter conditions for production and
testing for some transformers. With
SELV* (exposed, maximum 50 V AC or
120 V DC), transformers for general
use always have double or reinforced
insulations, i.e. these transformers
are exclusively safety isolating trans-
formers. Furthermore, all trans-
formers are supplied with instructions
for protective elements which can be
used to protect them against short
circuit und overload.
One- and three-phase dry-type
transformers > 16 kVA
DIN VDE 0532-6
Area of application
In industrial machines, process engi-
neering, heating and air conditioning
technology, etc. for feeding control
and signaling circuits, if
 several electromagnetic consumers
(e.g. contactors) are to be
controlled,
 control and signaling devices are
used outside the control cabinet,
 the operating voltage of the
consumer is different to that which
is available, as well as for
 voltage matching for machines and
systems with electrical isolation or
as an autotransformer, or
 in general for voltage matching of
electrical equipment, e.g. in
communication technology, medical
engineering and building
installations.
* Safety Extra-Low voltage
 Transformers

 In drive engineering, special

converter transformers are used for
voltage matching and as auto-
transformers when infeed/feedback
modules are used
 Special transformers are used for
rail vehicles, ships and container
loading bridges, wind power and
solar energy.

Important properties of one- and

three-phase dry-type transformers
 High short-time rating of SIRIUS
control transformers: lower
transformer-rated power with a
larger number of contactors
 Suitable for “fuseless design“:
the low inrush on the primary side
means “circuit-breakers for motor
protection“ can also be used
 CUUS-approved for the US and
Canada

Characteristics
 Rated power Pn (continuous
operation)
depending on:
– frequency AC 50 Hz … 60 Hz
– degree of protection IP00
– installation altitude up to 1,000 m
above sea level and
– ambient temperature ta,
type-dependent 40 °C or 55 °C.

Referring to the ambient temperature,

the parameter Pn is a characteristic of
the thermal load capacity. Installation
and operating conditions that deviate
from this affect the permissible con-
tinuous load by the consumers (see
Fig. 4.2/1).
Short-time rating Pshortt
The most important selection criterion
for control transformers is their short-
Table 4.2/1 SIRIUS transformers
time rating Pshortt. This is required for

4/7 4

1,10
n zul.
n 1,0
0,9
0,8
0 1
Installation altitude [x 1,000 m above sea level]
1,4
n zul. 1,2
n
a= 40 °C/H
1,0
a=
0,8
0,6
0 10 20
Fig. 4.2/1: Load characteristics: permissible
transformer continuous load in
relation to the ambient temperature
and the installation height
switching on electromagnetic loads,
e.g. contactors with high making
capacity in relation to the holding
power. In accordance with
EN 61558-2-2 “Particular require-
ments for control transformers“ the
output voltage with this load should
not drop more than 5% in relation to
the rated voltage in order to ensure
safe switching. Depending on their
application, SIRIUS control transform-
ers < 16 kVA are optimized for high
short-time rating with comparatively
low rated power and thus small size
Inrush current
SIRUS transformers in the power
range < 16 kVA have been designed
for protective equipment which
provides the transformers with reliable
protection in the event of short circuit
or overload.
Optimal protection is provided by the
SIRIUS standard circuit-breakers 3RV
and 3VF. Thus, the transformers are
protected on the primary side against
both short circuits and overload,
without the risk of false tripping on
startup. The low inrush current, the
4/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
short-circuit current and the thermal
NSF0_00141c
load capacity on overload are
matched to the tripping characteris-
tics of the circuit-breakers.
It is also possible to protect the trans-
2
3 4 5 6 formers on the secondary side against
short circuits or overload with circuit-
NSF0_00142c
breakers or with miniature circuit-
a= 55 °C/H breakers with C characteristics.
40 °C/B Note:
The specified primary-side circuit-
30 40 50 60 °C 80 breakers are for protecting the
Ambient temperature
primary side of transformers in the
event of short circuit und overload on
the secondary side. In the event of a
possible short circuit on the feeder
lines between the protective device
and the primary side of the trans-
former, the rated short-circuit break-
ing capacity of the circuit-breaker
must be taken into account with
regard to the maximum possible
current at the place of installation.
Configuration assistant ASIST
ASIST is a PC program for selecting
control transformers available in
German, English and Danish.
EN 61558-2-2 stipulates that the
short-time rating must be entered on
the rating plate only if power factor
cos phi = 0.5 of the load. The short-
time rating of control transformers
depends essentially on cos phi of the
load, however. It increases with lower
power factors in particular. It is thus
all the more important to calculate
the exact short-time rating with the
relevant cos phi. Using the PC pro-
gram ASIST as a configuration assis-
tant reduces the time it takes to
calculate the required type size to a
minimum and guarantees that the
control transformer is technologically
and economically optimal.
The current version of the ASIST
program can be ordered on the Inter-
net and downloaded from
www.siemens.com/sidac
–> Support –> Tools & Downloads
4.2.2 Non-Stabilized
DC 24 V Power Supplies
Area of application
Non-stabilized 24 V DC power supplies
are used to
 supply general electrical loads,
 feed control circuits,
 provide a power supply for
electronic controllers.
Note:
They meet the requirements in accor-
dance with EN 61131-2 “Programma-
ble controllers – Equipment require-
ments and tests“ and are, besides
other applications, also suitable for
SIMATIC.
Selection/overview
SIRIUS power supplies provide non-
stabilized direct voltage of 24 V DC on
the basis of single-phase transformer
or three-phase safety isolating trans-
formers with series-connected recti-
fiers and smoothing capacitor.
Function
SIRIUS power supplies meet the
requirements in accordance with
EN 61131-2, depending on the loading
(idling to rated current) and irrespec-
tive of the fluctuation of the supply
voltage (+6% to –10% in accordance
with IEC 60038). The electronic con-
troller is supplied with the permissible
operating voltage also in the event of
fluctuation of these parameters with-
out the necessity, depending on the
load and network conditions, of also
having to select relevant tapping on
the transformer to raise or lower the
output direct voltage. In the event of a
 Transformers

SIRIUS power supplies Properties

Non-Stabilized Power Supplies
The robust design means the power
Version Ripple Phases Rated output Rated output Rated output Connection Installation cURus
factor voltage voltage in acc. w. current/rated approval supplies have a very high reliability.
EN 61131-2 power
suitable for They prove to be extremely stable
SIMATIC systems
against the influence of external
AC V DC V A/W system disturbances and have a
Filtered dampening effect on electromagnetic
4AV21/23 <5% 1 115 ... 415 24 1 ... 3,5 A screw-type/ on standard
slip-on mounting yes interference. They are also well-suited
terminal rail
for supplying capacitive loads, since
4AV20/22/ <5% 1 115 ... 415 24 2,5 ... 15 A screw-type/ screw-type
24/26 slip-on or and/or connecting these consumers causes
cage clamp top-hat rail
terminal installation no only minor voltage dips.
4AV4 <5% 1 230 ... 415 24 1,5 ... 10 A screw-type/ screw-type
slip-on and/or on Protective equipment
or cage standard
clamp partly
In order to ensure short circuit,
4AV3 <5% 3 200 ... 600 24 15 ... 150 A screw-type/ screw-type overload and shock-hazard protection,
slip-on installation no
terminal conductors between the output
4AV5 <5% 3 400 ... 415 24 25, 35 A screw-type/ screw-type terminals of the power supply and the
slip-on installation
terminal consumer must show negligible line
Unfiltered impedance. Further details are to be
4AV98 48,3 % 1 230 or 400 24 50 ... 500 W screw-type/ screw-type
slip-on installation no found in DIN VDE 0100 (Erection of
terminal power installations with rated volt-
4AV96 <5% 3 400 30-27-24 4 ... 25 A screw-type/ screw-type
slip-on installation ages below 1,000 V) Part 410,
terminal
Part 520 in particular Section 525 and
Table 4.2/2: SIRIUS power supplies Part 610.

Supplementary capacitors for the

higher power requirement, any num-
ber of devices of the same type can be
switched in parallel. Here the total
current may not exceed 90% of the
individual rated currents.,
Layout
SIRIUS power supplies are one- or
three-phase transformers with series-
connected rectifiers in a 2-pulse (B2)
or 6-pulse (B6) bridge circuit and
smoothing capacitor. They correspond
to safety class I.
The safety isolating transformers used
are laid out in accordance with
EN 61558-2-6 and make it possible to
safely isolate SELV and FELV* control
circuits from other control circuits.
They are fully impregnated in poly-
ester resin to protect against harmful
environmental factors.
three-phase model (aluminum
electrolyte)
SIRIUS power supplies are:
3-phase power supplies are available
 Suitable for protection by standard
with supplementary capacitors upon
circuit-breakers for fuseless design
request. Thus the values in the
 Fitted with additional earth “Selection and order data” are
terminals for easy earthing of the attained. The back-up time applies
control circuit by means of a where U1 = U1N – 10%
detachable connection directly to
the equipment
 Easy to install with freely accessible
mounting holes or rail snap-on
mounting
 At the output terminal to damp
higher-frequency overvoltages
wired with varistors and MKT capac-
itors
 Available for the IEC standard
voltages of 230 / 400 V and in
multi-voltage design that can be
connected to the most common
system voltages worldwide up to
600 V. * Functional extra-low voltage.

4/9 4
4/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Power Generation

chapter 5
5.1 Grid-connected
Photovoltaic (PV) Systems
5.2 Basis for the Use of UPS
5.1 Grid-Connected
Photovoltaic (PV)
Systems
Alternative power generation con-
cepts are becoming increasingly
important as the energy reserves
decrease and the cost of electricity is
constantly rising. Photovoltaic sys-
tems convert sunlight directly into
electrical energy without emitting any
pollution, thus increasing indepen-
dence from expensive fossil fuels.
Government sponsorship programs
and improvements in performance are
making photovoltaic (PV) systems
more and more interesting for inves-
Photo 5.1/1: PV system integrated in the facade
tors. Above-average returns can be
achieved by feeding solar power into
the grid.
Basics
Typically a PV system is made up of Requirements
the following components:
While planning solar systems, civil and
 Solar generator electrical requirements must be taken
into consideration, as previsions for
 Cabling
photovoltaic systems will rarely have
 Inverter been made originally, when the
building was planned. For years,
 Feed-in meter
“Siemens Solar Projects” has been
 Connection to the local grid developing civil and electrical solu-
tions for solar power plants, resulting
Processes
in a broad experience with all kinds of
Sunlight can be absorbed by solar systems
cells and converted into electrical The following factors directly
energy. Direct current will be produ- influence the efficiency, during the
ced by the solar cells. Several solar planning and implementation of a PV
cells connected form a solar panel. system and therefore influence the
Panels connected in series are called Photo 5.1/2: Installation of a PV system on the
profitability. roof of a building
strings. All strings, connected parallel,
form the solar generator. The inver-  System location (high solar Available systems
ters convert the direct current from irradiation)
 Facade system
the solar generator into alternating  Orientation and tilt of the PV system
 Roof system
current which will be fed into the
 Quality of the products (optimally  Flat roof installation
public grid. Optimal engineering
configured)
forms the basis for a highly efficienct  Custom solutions for special
and reliable PV system.  Optimal engineering systems
(electrical/civil)

5/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power Generation

Planning guidelines As a rule, roof and facade systems are

The following points have to be
clarified when planning a grid-connec-
ted PV system:
 The configuration and orientation
(solar irradiation)
 Clarity about the type of solar
power system
 – The total installed power of the
system, depending on investment
possibilities and the available area
– Creation of a financing package
– Static proof of the load carrying
capacity of the roof or facade
– Electrical and civil engineering
– Clarification of the feed-in possibi-
lity and registration at the local
grid operator
fed 3-phase into the low-voltage
power system of the local grid. The
type of grid feed-in should be clarified
individually with the local grid opera-
tor.
Turnkey solutions
Siemens provides efficient and relia-
ble system solutions for turnkey
supply of solar power systems; this
means the supply of grid-connected
PV systems, including the planning,
purchasing and engineering and the
acceptance of works performed.
Siemens supports the planning
process with ...
 Advice Photo 5.1/3: Example of a special mounting
solutions for fastening the support
 Concept creation structure on a stadium roof

1,08
0
Y Specially developed solar
panel clamp
Detail side view X Solar panel
500
of World Cup stadium

Detail view Y
of solar panel clamp
14 80
11
Side view of
World Cup stadium
90°
3
46

90°
6

Ø6

Fig. 5.1/1: Example of a special mounting solutions for fastening the support structure on a stadium roof (World Cup soccer stadium in Nuremberg)

5/3 5
 26 modules 26 modules
GT6 GT6
1 2
A A
GT =
generator terminal box
Fig. 5.1/2: Systematic representation for the configuration of a grid-connected PV system
 Creation of tender specifications
 Calculation of profitability
 Support during the preparation of a
financing concept
 Provision of system solutions
Based on many years of experience in
the implementation of PV systems
coupled to the power system,
Siemens can provide the following
system solutions:
 Lightweight flat roof solar system
 Building integrated solar power
system (BIPV)
5/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
25 modules 25 modules 25 modules 25 modules 25 modules 25 modules
GT6 GT6 GT6 GT6 GT6 GT6
3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B
A
B A
Cable sizes:
A = 35 mm 2
B = 70 mm 2
= = Siemens master/slave inverter unit
Sinvert Solar 2x60
≈ ≈
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Contact:
 SUNIT™ roof-mounted system Siemens Solar Projects
 Solar system integrated in the Tobias Wittmann
facade PTD M 3 M,
Marketing & Innovation
 SolarPark™ solar canopy
Mozartstraße 31c
A SUNIT solar power system consists 91052 Erlangen, Germany
of for example solar panels, Siemens +49 91 31 7-3 45 06
inverter(s), switches, cabling, moun- tobias.wittmann@siemens.com
ting systems and their installation www.siemens.com/solar
manuals. This product family can be
supplied in various configurations for Photovoltaic support
tiled, flat or corrugated sheet roofs or Information about the current remu-
facades. neration for supplies, sponsorship
programs and allowances is available
www.siemens.com/solar from the Kreditanstalt für Wiederauf-
bau (Development Loan Corporation)
at www.kfw.de/ or from the local
power distribution network operator.
 Power Generation

5.2 Basis for the
Use of UPS
The use of a UPS system is for the
protection of sensitive consumers in
the general power supply system
(GPS) and to ensure that they can
continue to operate during power
failures [1]. The notes in this section
refer to static UPS systems where
electronic components influence the
voltage. The international standard
IEC 62040-3 describes the classifica-
tion for static UPS systems and defines
the tests for the associated classifica-
tion. The UPS classification focuses on
the behavior during line faults and the
quality of the load supply (Table
5.2/1).
The requirements of the system
integration in accordance with Totally
Integrated Power must be satisfied by
an (input-side) frequency- and vol-
tage-independent load supply through
double-transformer UPS devices (so-
called online devices with double-
conversion operation). In this context,
the distributed use of plug-in devices
can be excluded from the planning.
A CE marking in accordance with
Directive 73/23/EEC for low-voltage
systems and 89/336/EEC for electro-
magnetic compatibility is required for
operation of UPS devices within the
European Community. These regula-
tions have been included in the inter-
national standards for safety require-
ments (IEC 62040-1-1 for operation
in easily accessible rooms and
IEC 62040-1-2 for operation in closed
rooms) as well as in the EMC require-
ments (IEC 62040-2).
The special features of the UPS that
have to be taken into account during
the planning and operation have
resulted in separate UPS-specific
characteristics having to be defined
that go beyond the IEC 60950 stan-
dard for the safety of IT facilities. The
basic schematic structure of a UPS
comprises:
 A mains-supplied input
 The possibility of switching to a
back-up system
 The dedicated power supply via the
DC link
 The charging function for the DC link
accumulators
 The ability to control elements of the
power electronics
 The influence on the supplied loads
via IT connections
 Load supply via the inverters
These factors result in numerous
interdependencies and operating
modes that must be taken into
account during the planning.
Care should also be taken when
planning extensions to the UPS sys-
tem. These include:
 Power supply input and system
perturbations
 Battery, battery monitoring and DC
link
 (Manual) bypasses, UPS output and
load

Line faults Time e.g. IEC 62040-3 UPS solution Ableiter-Lösung

1. Power failures > 10 ms –

VFD Classification 3, passive
2. Voltage fluctuations < 16 ms Voltage + Frequency standby operation –
Dependent (offline)
3. Voltage peaks 4 ... 16 ms –

4. Undervoltages Continuous VI –
Classification 2, line
Voltage +
interactive operation
5. Overvoltages Continuous Independent –

6. Lightning strikes Sporadic Lightning and

overvoltage protection
7. Surge < 4 ms (IEC 60364-5-534)
VFI
Classification 1, double-
Voltage +
8. Frequency fluctuations Sporadic conversion operation –
Frequency
(online)
9. Voltage distortion (burst) Periodic Independent –

10. Voltage harmonics Continuous –

Table 5.2/1: Line faults and UPS classification according to international standard (source: [2])

5/5 5

Switch disconnector QS 3
Switch disconnector QS 2
Back-up
system
Rectifier Inverter
Switch dis-
Main connector QS 1
system
Sicherung
Battery fuse
Battery switch disconnector QS 9
Battery fuse
Remote
signaling
Battery switch disconnector
Battery cabinet
Fig. 5.2/1: UPS block diagram for MASTERGUARD S III series
 Redundancy and availability
 Construction, installation and
environmental conditions
 Extensions, options and accessories
 IT and communication interfaces,
signaling and load tripping
 Telemonitoring, maintenance and
service
There is no standard approach for UPS
engineering. Planning notes for the
individual points are not a recipe how
to proceed and are not a substitute for
consulting our Siemens engineering
promoters. Every project has its own
boundary conditions that need to be
adhered to, and for weighting indivi-
dual parameters appropriately, an
iterative planning and implementa-
tion process involving the customer
and the contracting engineering firm
should be considered.
System perturbations and separate
input networks are much more impor-
tant for a large, central three-phase
current UPS system than for one-
phase UPS devices in 19-inch cabinets.
On the other hand, environmental
5/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Electronic bypass switch
Transformer
Switch dis-
connector QS 4
Interfaces
Software
option
conditions such as noise, EMC, waste
heat and battery gassing are more
important in office and computer
environments. As in this manual the
emphasis is on commercial, institutio-
nal and industrial buildings with
sensitive consumers, the devices to be
considered can be limited to three-
phase UPS devices (380/400/415 V
and 50/60 Hz) with an output power
greater than 10 kVA. This corresponds
to the MASTERGUARD UPS devices of
the C, D and S III series installed in
separate operating rooms.
5.2.1 Power Supply Input
The following must be considered
during the planning phase:
 Input voltage range without switch-
over to battery operation
 Maximum permissible input current
Consumer
for rectifiers (charging operation,
efficiency, power factor, connecting
lead, line-side fusing, etc.)
 Separate bypass input and feedback
protection
 Rectifier circuit, system perturba-
tions and input power factor
(dimensioning of emergency gene-
rating sets)
The rectifier has the task of building
up the DC link. The inverter is supplied
and the energy storage module char-
ged with a direct voltage that is as
constant as possible. If special battery
chargers or charging converters are
used in the UPS, it must be deter-
mined whether the charging current is
sufficient to recharge the connected
temporary storage module within a
reasonable time. A broad input vol-
tage range is useful for weak or
fluctuating networks, especially for
low voltages, in order to avoid fre-
quent switchover to battery opera-
tion.
Typical rectifier circuits for three-
phase networks are 6-pulse or 12-
pulse bridge circuits with diodes,
thyristors or more recently also with
transistors (Fig. 5.2/2).
Input voltage range and maximum
input current of the UPS are typical
parameters that characterize the
power capability of the rectifier.
Fluctuations can already occur in the
public power supply of the network
operator, in a range between +10%
and –10% of the rated voltage (accor-
ding to IEC 60038; +6% / –10% applies
provisionally until 2008). If line losses
 Power Generation

of approx. –4% also occur in the

consumer system, then the UPS
should have an input voltage range of
+10% / –14% or better. The DC link
current supplied by the rectifier must
be sufficient to supply the inverter
with power at the lowest permissible
input voltage without discharging the
battery. For this reasons, specifica-
tions for the part-load operation can
be helpful for the operation of UPS
devices in weak power systems. The
cabling for the UPS input and output
must be dimensioned appropriately
for the input currents and the cable
lengths. Recommended and maxi-
mum possible conductor cross-sec- Fig. 5.2/2: Rectifier configuration for MASTERGUARD S III series with 12-pulse circuit and filter
tions should be specified for the
connection.
match. The UPS and generator manu- of the generator (to be obtained from
Please note that higher currents may facturers should provide a joint solu- the manufacturer)
flow through a separate bypass con- tion. A simple aid is the dimensioning
nection in order to trip fuses in the KUPS = UPS factor
factor (DF), which determines the
outgoing circuit via the electronic ratio between the rated apparent THDV = permissible voltage distortion
bypass. With UPS devices of large power of the generator SGen and the in the UPS input network (Total Har-
power, it must be clarified whether apparent power of the UPS at the monic Distortion)
the manual bypass is already integra- input SUPS:
ted in the device as standard, or Whereas 8% is a typical value for the
whether it has to be installed in a DF = SGen / SUPS THDV when further consumers are to
separate cabinet. It is also possible to be supplied in the input network, the
The boundary condition must be
separate the input networks or inte- UPS factor depends on the UPS recti-
grate emergency generators without a SSGen ≥ SUPS fier (Table 5.2/2).
network switchover upstream of the
The dimensioning factor is defined as
UPS via suitable, separate connection
possibilities on the UPS. The all-pole DF = xd“ x KUPS / THDV
diagrams (Fig. 5.2/3) for the UPS
i.e. a generator should be selected for
connection are important for this. The
which the following applies:
grounding and switching conditions
upstream and downstream of the UPS SGen ≥ DF x SUPS
must be considered for the planning,
for example, does the spatial assign- where
ment of the main ground bus (MGB) xd“ = subtransient reactance
between the system supply and the
UPS output have to be taken into
account. THDV = 8% SIII series 6-pulse rectifier SIII series 12-pulse rectifier D series

Emergency generators upstream of Generator KUPS = 1.6 KUPS = 0.8 KUPS = 0.6
the UPS require special consideration xd“ = 8% DF = 1.6 DF = 1 DF = 1
so that the interaction between UPS xd“ = 14% DF = 2.8 DF = 1.4 DF = 1.05
and generator functions correctly. It is
xd“ = 20% DF = 4 DF = 2 DF = 1.5
important that the rectifier of the UPS
and the characteristic of the generator Fig. 5.2/2: Rectifier configuration for MASTERGUARD S III series with 12-pulse circuit and filter

5/7 5
 
Fig. 5.2/3: All-pole diagrams for the connection of the S III and D series
5.2.2 Battery, Battery
Monitoring and DC Link
The connection of an energy storage
module in the UPS DC link is a major
difference between a UPS and a
voltage stabilizer or a frequency
converter. At present, battery systems
are generally used in UPS systems for
cost-performance reasons. Current
alternatives are rotating mechanical
energy storage modules (flywheel)
and storage capacitors (Supercap);
however, for cost reasons, they can
only be used for short interruptions
(< 1 min), until a generator has
started up. The fuel cell can also be
operated as power generator in the
DC link, but requires a further buffer
storage for the start-up phase.
The fuel cell should therefore be
compared with corresponding diesel
generators upstream of the UPS.
5/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
The following factors are a simplifica-
tion of what has to be considered for
the availability of the battery storage
and the uninterrupted integration
when a fault occurs in the rectifier
supply:
 DC link voltage and inverter supply
 Battery type, battery life and spatial
requirements
 Capacity and required stored energy
time
 Discharging and charging
 Monitoring system
The DC link voltage is a base value for
the circuit design of a three-phase
UPS. An inverter output voltage which
is as sinusoidal as possible is achieved
either via a much higher DC voltage at
the inverter input or through the use
of expensive inverter transformers.

Thanks to the latest developments in
semiconductor electronics and the
associated control possibilities, low
battery voltages can also be raised
through so-called boosters (DC/DC
converters). Additional benefits of
controllable DC link electronics are the
charging characteristic that can be set
to the battery type and the easier
possibilities provided for a battery
test.
The following are mainly used for
static UPS systems:
 Sealed lead-acid batteries contai-
ning an electrolyte, e.g. incorpora-
ted in a gel or fleece; also called
maintenance-free battery (VRLA =
Valve-Regulated Lead Acid)

 Encapsulated lead-acid batteries
that can be refilled; therefore also
called low-maintenance battery
 Nickel-cadmium batteries (NiCd)
that can be refilled with electrolyte;
high resistance to corrosion (see
also www.eurobat.org)
Typical factors that influence the
selection of the battery type:
 Space requirements, installation
 Service life
 Ambient temperature
 Cyclic strength and suitability for
high current loads
 Ease of maintenance
 Price
Because of their high price, NiCd
batteries are usually only used under
extreme climatic conditions, e.g. in
artic or tropical regions, when service
and maintenance is unreliable or for
possible exhaustive discharge over a
longer period. In Central Europe and
North America, the majority of sys-
tems are stationary using lead-acid
batteries. Services, which operators
should have contractually agreed for
their UPS systems, as well as monito-
ring systems are a precaution against
battery failures such as high-resi-
stance collapses, short-circuits or even
fire hazard.
To be able to determine the suitability
of a battery block type, the planning
engineer needs information about the
desired stored energy time for the
associated output power, about the
nominal voltage in the DC link and the
end-point voltage. In actual UPS
operation, monitoring is performed by
the MASTERGUARD UPS devices of the
C, D and S III series so that there is a
load-dependent determination of the
end-point voltage (to avoid exhaus-
tive discharge during long power
failures and low load), and also to
take account of load changes during
battery operation.
5.2.3 UPS Output and
Load
The reliable supply of the connected
consumers with faultless alternating
voltage that causes as little disturban-
ces as possible is the task of the
controllable output electronics, such
as the inverter and electronic bypass.
Therefore, the load requirements
during reference conditions must be
taken into account for UPS dimensio-
ning.
These are:
 Active power
 Power factor
 Apparent power
 Overload capability
 Voltage stability
 Phase angle precision
Fig. 5.2/4: UPS inverter configuration with IGBTs, output transformer and filter
Power Generation
Additional considerations about the
power system configuration, subdistri-
bution, back-up and behavior during
load-side faults are also part of the
planning.
The inverter configuration with IGBTs
with pulse width modulation and
digital closed-loop control (Fig. 5.2/4)
has established itself for static, three-
phase current UPS systems.
As described earlier, modern compo-
nents with high switching frequencies
enable a reduction in the size of filter
elements and/or elimination of an
inverter output transformer; prerequi-
site is that the controller is also equip-
ped with high-speed digital signal
processors and real-time algorithms.
In addition to an improvement in the
efficiency, flexibility advantages with
regard to the load requirements can
also be utilized.
The different consumers can produce
typical effects on the voltage quality:
 Electric arc furnaces, electric for-
ging and welding can cause fluctua-
ting currents.
5/9 5
 


 


  

  


ϕ ϕ


  
 
 

 
 

 

 
Fig. 5.2/5: Current-voltage phase relationships for different simple loads
 Single-phase consumers can cause
imbalanced loading in three-phase
supplies.
 Non-linear loads such as PC swit-
ched-mode power supplies, dim-
mers or controlled drives produce
undesired harmonics.
 Switches and relays can also cause
faults in the output network.
The non-linear loads and the asymme-
tric distribution of consumers result in
current load on the N conductor in the
three-phase network. The load on the
N conductor can even be greater than
on a phase, and therefore the cross-
section of the N conductor should be
overdimensioned for safety reasons
(factor of 1.7 compared with the
phase maximum). Care should always
be taken when laying the power
cables to ensure that no electromag-
netic effects, e.g. on data lines, cause
interference. The phase displacement
between voltage and current must
also be taken into account.
5/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 
Equivalent circuit diagrams with
ohmic, capacitive and inductive
resistances (Fig. 5.2/5) for all consum-
ers connected to the UPS can be
combined by the planning engineer
into a phase analysis. At the same
time, an appropriate description or
graphics should be available for the
UPS (Fig. 5.2/6).
If used for the UPS, the transformer
and the output filter components
have a major effect on the curve form.
As can be seen in Fig. 5.2/6, with
overdimensioning, conventional UPS
technology can more than compen-
sate for the limitation to a power
factor of cos ϕ = 0.8 in the area of
inductive loads, but the connected
consumers still have to be selected
with care for capacitive loads.
Electronic bypass
With MASTERGUARD UPS devices, the
electronic bypass switches the load
supply to the back-up line. There is a
second system input for this. The
electronic bypass switch is also called


the static bypass switch (SBS). If two
separate input systems are not availa-
ble, the back-up input can be connec-
ted to the rectifier input. The switch-
over is made without interruption as
static electronic components, such as
thyristors, are used. The following are
typical occurrences that can result in a
switchover to the back-up system:
 UPS fault in the double-transformer
section, such as inverter fault,
impermissible AC components in
the DC link, short-circuits in the DC
link, etc.
 Overload, so that the inverter could
be damaged.
 The end-point voltage is reached
during battery operation due to a
power failure at the rectifier input;
the UPS tries to switch over to the
back-up system.
In all cases, the UPS control checks
whether the back-up system is availa-
ble in a suitable voltage and
frequency quality and is synchronous

with the UPS output, before a switch-
over is performed. The electronic
bypass switch does not have an effect
on the quality of the back-up system
supply to the load.
Under certain circumstances, the
electronic bypass can also be used for
a parameterized and deliberate load
supply without loading the power
electronics in the double-transformer
path. This reduces the losses during
UPS operation; however, the connec-
ted consumers must also have a
tolerance for the voltage and fre-
quency fluctuations that is appropri-
ate for the parameterization of this
UPS operating mode.
Manual bypass
The electronics can be bypassed via
the back-up system for maintenance
and service work on the UPS. To do
this, the UPS must be switched from
ϕ
 ϕ
ϕ 
 
Fig. 5.2/6: Phasor diagram for the output cos phi range of various UPS output configurations
double-transformer mode through
electronic bypass mode to the manual
bypass mode. Also for this reason, it
is necessary to consult the operating
instructions before any switching
operation on the UPS is performed.
5.2.4 Interfaces and
Communication
The voltage and current for the input
supply and for the load response can
be monitored with the UPS. For this
reason, human-machine communica-
tion possibilities are important and
also that they be automated as
human-machine signaling in the
computer network. As the boundary
conditions for the UPS operation are
constantly changing, they have to be
just as closely monitored as the bat-
tery function, which has to supply full
power when the normal supply sys-
tem fails.


ϕ

  
Power Generation
 Human machine interface
Optical and acoustic signals are the
simple signaling methods of a UPS.
Each UPS is equipped with acoustic
warning signals and indicator lights,
usually colored LEDs. A combination
of LEDs and LCDs is being increasingly
used in the larger UPS devices. The
LEDs clearly indicate when something
is wrong, so that the user should read
out the LCDs to obtain detailed infor-
mation about the irregularities. Gra-
phic displays have the advantage of
clarity compared with scrolling
through alphanumeric displays line by
line. Make sure that the display is not
too high or too low, otherwise the
viewing angle is unfavorable.
Control keys are required on the
operator panel to acknowledge mes-
sages, handle display and control
menus and enter parameters. Some
UPSs can be switched to bypass mode
and back again via a key (which may
be mechanically locked or electroni-
cally protected), and also reparamete-
rized via input keys.
 Machine-machine interfaces
Interfacing the UPS to a data network,
improves the versatility, ease of
operation, clarity and information
content of displays. There should at
least be a serial PC connection possibi-
lity (USB or RS232) for the UPS. Two
separate interfaces are better or even
the possibility of a network connec-
tion via an SNMP* adapter.

* Simple Network Management Protocol
5/11 5
The UPS then communicates with the
adapter, which can have a separate
data memory. This functions in the
network as an intelligent network
component that sends and receives
data and, if necessary, forwards it to
the UPS. Browser-supported commu-
nication and the sending of e-mails
are possible, for example, with Telnet,
Web, FTP and SNMP server functiona-
lity (see Fig. 5.2/7). Vice versa, the
UPS commands and parameterization
changes can also be received via the
network connection.
The basis for the data traffic is the
UPS-specific software. This includes:
 Individual computer workstation
shutdown in Windows and Unix
systems
 Controlled server-client shutdown
a) Serial communication directly with a PC
b) Serial communication with server/client network shutdown of clients
c) Network connection via SNMP adapter and server/client shutdown
RS 232
sub D
USB
Slot
Input 230 V Outlets, 230 V
a)
Fig. 5.2/7: UPS communications interfaces
5/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Fault-tolerant solutions in which
redundant systems play an essential
role
The cost of the most sophisticated
software combinations is normally
only a fraction of the total invest-
ment.
An important point for the monitoring
software is the energy stored in the
battery. Automatically performed
battery tests are used to check whet-
her the battery system can ensure the
required backup of the load supply.
The software test algorithms must be
set so that there are no undesired
shutdowns or switchovers even if
there are battery problems. In addi-
tion, individual battery blocks can
nowadays be monitored [3]. This is
useful as battery blocks connected in
series should work as homogenously
RS 232
sub D
USB
Slot
Input 230 V Outlets, 230 V
b)
as possible in order to avoid compen-
sation effects.
Depending on the project, further
communication options via industrial
bus systems such as PROFIBUS DP,
J-bus, ModBus, CAN, etc. are required
in industrial environments. For this
purpose, the UPS is integrated in the
back-up of the system. Contact inputs
or outputs can be programmed in the
UPS for special communication
requirements. Boundary conditions
such as the voltage and current
available at the so-called contact
interface are important parameters for
the configuration. In accordance with
the requirements of the international
standard IEC 62040-1, the UPS
provides safety-relevant contacts for
a rapid shutdown and the feedback
protection via the system input for the
static bypass switch.
RESET
10/100 BASE-T
SNMP adapter
plugable
USB
Slot
Input 230 V Outlets, 230 V
c)

5.2.5 Redundancy
Concepts and Availability
Redundancy generally describes the
presence of several objects with the
same function, content or of the same
type. Multiple availability is intended
to reduce the risk of failure for a
system. A distinction is made in the
following between internal redun-
dancy, device redundancy and system
redundancy.
Internal redundancy
A typical example of the internal
redundancy of a UPS device is the
ventilation system. In generously
configured UPS devices, one or more
fans can fail without the operation
having to be restricted. However, the
fan failure should still be signaled.
More frequently, there is a limited
internal redundancy. This means that
the functioning fans can cool the
power electronics in the UPS during
part-load operation, but this fan
performance is not sufficient for full-
load operation.
As the switchover of the UPS to the
static bypass path is also included in
* RAID: Redundant Array of Independent Discs
the availability calculations (see Ref.
[4]), the static switch is also often
considered to be internally redundant.
However, this is only true to a limited
extent, as voltage corrections are no
longer possible during bypass opera-
tion.
Device redundancy
With special demands on the availabi-
lity, it is not sufficient to switch to the
supply system via the static bypass
when a fault occurs. The same applies
if not all UPS devices can be accessed
from the load for maintenance or
repair work.
In true parallel operation, several UPS
devices supply the connected loads
simultaneously. It is important that
the UPS devices work in harmony via
the parallel connection and that there
is an optimum load distribution.
Overloads can occur if there is no
control, which can result in the failure
of the device with the lowest impe-
dance. Fig. 5.2/8 shows an (n+1)
redundancy for n = 2. In this context,
it is irrelevant which of the three
devices is replaced by the other two,
when a fault occurs, as long as the
Fig. 5.2/8: Parallel connection for (2+1) redundancy and common, external electronic bypass switch
with manual bypass
Power Generation
power for each device does not
exceed the rated power. This means
that the output power of each UPS
may not exceed 66% of the rated
power, as long as all three devices
supply the load.
The synchronization of external
bypass switches with the integrated
bypass switches during parallel opera-
tion provides a simple improvement
of the short-circuit properties via the
electronic bypass paths. As the cur-
rent carrying capacity increases as a
square of the rated current, a doub-
ling of the bypass current paths
results in a quadrupling of the short-
circuit working capacity.
System redundancy
In the IT sector and especially with
operators of data centers, the mirro-
ring of as many components as possi-
ble is offered as a high-availability
solution. Networks and network
components are set up and operated
in parallel. Computers, servers and
disc systems are installed twice and
operated in a defined RAID* mode. All
components also have two power
supply units, so that the power supply
5/13 5
supply is also redundant. The power
supply can be backed up via two
independent sources by means of an
(n+n) UPS parallel system. Fig. 5.2/9
shows the so-called “Tier IV” structure
according to Ref. [5]; STS is a static
transfer switch which enables a
switchover to be made to a second
supply source when a fault occurs for
devices with only one system input.
However, it must be noted that each
additional component in the
availability calculation also brings in
its own probability of a fault.
An important tool for the
implementation of a functioning
system redundancy with regard to the
power
supply is a suitable high availability
control software solution. If, for
example, one of the two parallel UPS
systems fails, it is not necessary that
an automatic shutdown be performed
in another IT area. On the other hand,
the boundary conditions that result
from linked systems must also be
taken into consideration, even when
no problem occurs in your own area.
5.2.6 Construction,
Installation and
Environmental Conditions
An alternative that is becoming
increasingly important especially for a
replacement, is the use of UPS
systems in separate, air-conditioned
containers. If, for example, the initial
UPS system was installed during the
building phase, before the stairs or
the ceilings were built, then a
subsequent replacement with a larger
system can cause problems. Therefore
information about the shipment
dimensions and the use of hand-pallet
trucks and fork-lift trucks should be
provided.

 
The specifications for ventilation, safe
floor loads, accessibility for service
and maintenance purposes and the
    requirements of the various


 

 connections, such as supply inputs,


# 
# battery connection, load connection
" " and communication connections,
must be taken into account for the
! !  ! ! UPS installation. The necessary


 


  clearances between UPS and ceiling
  
must be taken into account and, if


 required, the specifications with




regard to the degree of protection;

 this also applies to for the inflow of
the cooling air. Dust filters and







mechanical protection equipment
such as screens and covers or special


 

 enclosures can help achieve the

"$ %  &
'
 desired IP protection class according
%  

to IEC 60529. An example of such an
% " "
#&
'

%  ''
 application is the so-called “Ice Box”
%   


%  (# (Fig. 5.2/10), in which a UPS of the
MASTERGUARD C series is installed in
Fig. 5.2/9: Block diagram for the infrastructure configuration according to “Tier IV”

5/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power Generation

A water-cooled outer casing can be

used as a special option for the large
UPS devices of the MASTERGUARD S III
series so that the room air conditio-
ning and ventilation can be dispensed
with. However, the appropriate water
pipes will then have to be installed.
The installation altitude is also of
interest for ventilation and cooling, so
that a power derating in accordance
with the manufacturer specifications
may have to be taken into account for
altitudes greater than 1,000 m above
sea level.



Fig. 5.2/10: MASTERGUARD C series with integrated battery in an air-conditioned cabinet for use in
critical environments

5/15 5
5.2.7 Planning of Service
and Operation
When planning a UPS system, the
following operating factors must be
considered in detail:
 Energy costs
 Supply quality
 Operational safety
The required reliability and efficiency
of the power supply must be ensured
during operation over a long term. If a
data center operator is only concer-
ned with the operation and mainte-
nance of the UPS system after the
legal warranty period has expired, this
attitude is subject to the following
risks:
 No or inadequate support when
problems occur
 Delivery times for spare parts (e.g.
wear due to incorrect operation,
pollution due to environmental
conditions or external causes)
 Extended response times and
incorrect responses when a fault
occurs
 Reduction of the service life of the
equipment
An operator can avoid these dangers
if expert support is already agreed
upon during commissioning. The
long-term guarantee of UPS operation
can roughly be divided into three
areas:
 Regular inspections and service
 Maintenance contracts of various
kinds concerning the scope of
performance and response times
 Round-the-clock solutions with
telemonitoring service
5/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Inspections and service
Environmental influences such as
dust, moisture, temperature or possi-
ble air flow can cause problems not
only for the UPS, but also for the
associated battery system during
operation. Dust can reduce the insula-
tion distances for electronic compo-
nents and impede the air supply or
heat dissipation. Moisture can cause
corrosion or short circuits. Tempera-
ture influences the service life of the
battery blocks and components (see
Ref. [6]), whereby the temperature
itself is influenced by the air flow, the
actual operating state and other
factors.
With closed storage battery systems,
the battery level must be checked
regularly as the battery loses electro-
lyte through gassing during opera-
tion. The battery manufacturers
generally recommend that this also be
checked for valve-regulated, sealed
lead-acid batteries. Individual block
monitoring can be very useful here
and help reduce the inspection costs.
It is recommended that half-yearly
inspections be performed after the
start of operation.
During inspections, the battery and
the environmental conditions are
checked and any pollution removed. If
necessary, advice on the use of air
filters or air conditioning can be given
during the service call. It may be
useful for the data center operator to
have a stock of spare parts when
there is no maintenance contract.
Maintenance contracts
As the availability of the power supply
in the data center is affected by the
availability of the UPS system, unfore-
seen problems should have as little
effect as possible on the operation.
For this reason, maintenance con-
tracts are usually made with a defini-
tion of the response time and with
fixed agreements for the service
assignments of the maintenance
personnel when faults occur and for
inspections. In that case, the mainte-
nance service can be entrusted with
stock keeping of spare parts. The
service personnel must be on site
quickly and also be well trained.
They should already be acquainted
with the UPS system and its system
environment at the customer’s so that
any repairs can be carried out quickly
on-site.
Round-the-clock solutions
Optimum support is provided by a
separate signaling option directly
from the UPS to the service center.
The UPS then signals every problem
and fault to a monitoring center and
to the service technician who has the
responsibility for the specific system
(see Ref. [7]). The technician can then
read out the data stored by the UPS
using remote diagnostics, compare
this with a UPS type-specific database
and initiate appropriate action. Messa-
ges can, of course, be forwarded to
authorized personnel at the data
center operator’s. The accumulated
operating data is also sent from the
UPS memory to the monitoring center
at regular intervals and collected
there. Any problems that are develo-
ping can be detected in good time
through permanent checking and
analysis of the data. Indications of a
problem can be:
 UPS utilization that is becoming
increasingly imbalanced
 Gradual temperature rise in the
room
 Extraordinary load peaks that may
be an indication of unplanned
events
 Power Generation

 Continual deterioration of the input

voltage conditions that may later
result in a switchover to battery
operation
 Increased temperatures during
battery tests

5.2.8 Profitability
Considerations
It can be assumed that the UPS solution
is primarily to satisfy the project-specific
safety requirements, because failure of
the backed-up load would generally
result in higher costs. The costs for the
UPS system are made up of:
 Procurement costs plus extra costs,
such as planning, delivery, installa-
tion and commissioning
Fig 5.2/11: Investment costs in relation to the UPS power
 Electricity costs through internal
losses and for the air conditioning
and room lighting
toring systems, such as telemonito-
References:
 Depreciation or rent for the rooms ring and battery monitoring. [1] Siemens AG (Hrsg.): Totally Integrated Power
in which the UPS and battery sys- Application Manual – Establishment of Basic
tem are operated and their insu- Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006
rance costs [2] Uninterruptible Power System European
Guide / CEMEP, 2nd extended edition; ZVEI
 Service and commissioning costs e.V. – 2003
[3] Battery Management: Increasing the
A rough estimate of the relationship Reliability of UPS – etz; D. Fischer,
A. Lohner, P. Mauracher – 4/96
between investment costs and power
[4] Quality and Reliability of System-independent
output can be displayed graphically Power Supplies – Conference: UPS and
for the UPS. Fig. 5.2/11 shows that a Standby Power Supply; Dipl.-Ing. R. Hümpfner
(MASTERGUARD GmbH) – 2000
redundant solution with several
[5] White paper: The Classifications Define Site
smaller UPS systems, e.g. block sizes Infrastructure Performance; The Uptime
less than 100 kVA, should be carefully Institute, Inc. – 1996, 2001–2006
calculated and compared to a (1+1) [6] Service Life Considerations
for Stationary Batteries;
solution with larger UPS systems. ZVEI Leaflet No. 19 – 2003
Service and monitoring costs for the [7] LIFE Data Sheet / Product Brochure
various concepts must also be taken MASTERGUARD GmbH – 2003
into consideration. [8] How environmentally friendly is a UPS
electronic ecodesign; Dr. Siegbert Hopf
When considering the costs caused by (MASTERGUARD GmbH) – 2006
internal power losses, do not forget
that protective measures such as
filters and transformers make a major
contribution to the safety of the
system (Ref. [8]); this also applies to
the costs for maintenance and moni-

5/17 5
Further information:
Technical details and order information
about UPS products of the MASTER-
GUARD C, D and S III series are availa-
ble electronically via the Siemens A&D
Mall:
 https://mall.automation.siemens.
com/de
Tender specification documents for the
UPS devices can be downloaded as text
or GAEB file from the specifications
pages of Siemens Totally Integrated
Power:
 http://www.automation.siemens.
com/tip/html_00/support/ausschrei
bung_stromversorgungen.htm
Hard copies of the product catalogs can
be ordered via the MASTERGUARD
Internet pages:
 http://www.masterguard.de/page/
ger/contact4.php
Personal support is provided by the
local sales representative:
 http://www.masterguard.de/page/
partner_d_ger_karte.html
The latest information on the subject
of UPS can be found in the MASTER-
GUARD newsletter “NewsBoard” which
can be ordered free of charge from the
website:
 http://www.masterguard.de/
newsboard/ger/anmeldung/
nboard3.php
For direct requests, specific questions
or suggestions, please mail
 info@masterguard.de
or use the Internet form at
 http://www.masterguard.de/qm/
Webservice.htm

5/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Low Voltage

chapter 6
6.1 Low-Voltage Switchgear
6.2 Protective and Switching Devices
in the Low-Voltage Power
Distribution
6.3 Requirements of the Switchgear
in the Three Circuit Types
6.4 Container Solutions
6 Low Voltage
6.1 Low-Voltage
Switchgear
When a power distribution concept is
to be developed with dimensioning of
the systems and devices, its require-
ments and feasibility have to be
matched by the end user and the
manufacturer.
When selecting a low-voltage main
distribution board, the prerequisite for
its efficient sizing is knowledge of its
use, availability and future options for
extension. The demands on power
distribution are extremely diverse.
They start with buildings that do not
place such high demands on the
power supply, such as office build-
ings, and continue through to the
high demands, for example, made by
data centers, in which smooth opera-
tion is of prime importance.
As no major switching functions in the
LVMD have to be considered in the
planning of power distribution
systems in commercial buildings and
Photo 6.1/1: SIVACON S8 switchgear
6/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
no further extensions are to be
expected, a performance-optimized
technology with high component
density can be used. In these cases,
mainly fuse-protected equipment in
fixed-mounted design is used. When
planning a power distribution system
for a production plant however,
system availability, extendibility,
control and the visualization are
important functions to keep plant
downtimes as short as possible. The
use of circuit-breaker-protected and
fuse-protected withdrawable-unit
design is an important basis. Selectiv-
ity is also of great importance for
reliable power supply. Between these
two extremes there is a great design
variety which is to be optimally
matched to customer requirements.
The prevention of personal injury and
damage to equipment must, however,
be the first priority in all cases. When
selecting appropriate switchgear,
it must be ensured that it is a type-
tested switchgear assembly (TTA,
in compliance with IEC 60439-1 and
DIN VDE 0660-500) with extended
testing of behavior in the event
of an accidental arc (IEC 61641,
VDE 0660-500, Addendum 2), and
that the selection is always made
under consideration of the regulations
that have to be observed with regard
to the requirements for the entire
supply system (full selectivity, partial
selectivity).
Further information:
 Dimensioning of the low-voltage main
distribution system:
Siemens AG (ed.): Totally Integrated Power,
Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data
and Preliminary Planning, 2006, Chapter 5,
page 5/17 ff.
 For the detailed planning:
Siemens AG:
SIVACON planning manuals.
The planning manuals are also available for
download at www.siemens.com/sivacon
–> Support –> Infomaterial
 Low Voltage

6.1.1 Overview
The SIVACON S8 low-voltage
switchgear is a variable, multi-purpose
and type-tested low-voltage
switchgear assembly (TTA) that can be
used for the infrastructure supply not
only in administrative and institu-
tional buildings, but also in industry
and commerce. SIVACON S8 consists
of standardized, modular components
that can be flexibly combined to form
an economical, overall solution
depending on the requirements. 1 2 3 4 5 6
SIVACON S8 has a high level of func-
tionality, flexibility and quality with
compact dimensions and a high
degree of safety for persons and
equipment. We or our authorized
contracting party will perform the
following:
 The customer-specific configuration
 The mechanical and electrical
installation
 The testing, for which we use
type-tested function modules

The documentation specified by us
forms the basis for our authorized
contracting party. SIVACON S8 can be
used as a type-tested power distribu-
tion board up to 4,000 A. Further
information is available on the Inter-
net at www.siemens.com/sivacon
Standards and regulations
SIVACON S8 is a type-tested low-
voltage switchgear assembly (TTA)
in compliance with IEC 60439-1/
DIN EN 60439-1 / VDE 0660-500.
SIVACON S8 is resistant to accidental
arcs in compliance with IEC 61641,
DIN EN 60439 / VDE 0660-500,
Addendum 2
Circuit-breaker design
The panels for the installation of the
3WL and 3VL circuit-breakers are used
Photo 6.1/2: The following mounting designs are available (description from left to right):
(1) Circuit-breaker panel with Sentron 3WL up to 4000 A or 3VL up to 1600 A
(2) Universal mounting design for cable feeders up to 630 A in fixed-mounted and plug-in
design (3NJ6)
(3) 3NJ6 in-line switch disconnector design (plugged in) for cable feeders up to 630 A
in plug-in design
(4) Fixed-mounted panel (front cover) for cable feeders up to 630 A and modular devices
(5) 3NJ4 in-line switch disconnector design (fixed-mounted) for cable feeders up to 630 A
(6) Reactive power compensation up to 600 kvar
for the supply of the switchgear and  Sectionalizer and bus coupler with
for the outgoing feeders and bus ties 3WL circuit-breakers in fixed-
(sectionalizer and bus coupler). mounted and withdrawable-unit
The rule that only one circuit-breaker design up to 4,000 A
is used for each panel applies to  Incoming/outgoing feeders with
the entire circuit-breaker design 3VL circuit-breakers in fixed-
(Photo 6.1/4).
mounted design up to 1,600 A
The device mounting space is
intended for the following functions: Universal mounting design
The panels for cable feeders in fixed-
 Incoming/outgoing feeders with
mounted and plug-in designup to
3WL circuit-breakers in fixed-
630 A are intended for the installation
mounted and withdrawable-unit
of the following switchgear
design up to 4000 A
(Photo 6.1/5):

6/3 6
Photo 6.1/3: Circuit-breaker design
 SIRIUS 3RV/3VL circuit-breaker
 SENTRON 3K switch disconnector
 SENTRON 3NP switch disconnector
 SENTRON 3NJ6 switch disconnector
in plug-in design
The switching devices are mounted on
mounting plates and connected to the
vertical current distribution bars with
the supply side. Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line
switch disconnectors can be installed
using an adapter. The front is covered
by panel doors or compartment doors.
Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switch
disconnector design
The panels for cable feeders in plug-in
design up to 630 A are intended for
the installation of in-line switch
disconnectors. The plug-in contact on
the supply side is a cost-effective
alternative to the withdrawable-unit
design. Their modular design enables
an easy and quick retrofit or replace-
ment under operating conditions. The
device mounting space is intended for
plug-in, in-line switch disconnectors
with a distance between pole centers
of 185 mm. The vertical plug-on bus
system is arranged at the back of the
panel and covered by an optional
touch protection with pick-off open-
ings in the IP20 degree of protection.
This enables the in-line switch
disconnectors to be replaced without
shutting down the switchgear
(Photo 6.1/6).
6/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Photo 6.1/4: Universal mounting design
Fixed-mounted design with front
covers
The panels for cable feeders in fixed-
mounted design up to 630 A are
intended for the installation of the
following switchgear (Photo 6.1/7):
 SIRIUS 3RV/3VL circuit-breaker
 SENTRON 3K switch disconnector
 SENTRON 3NP switch disconnector
 Modular devices
Photo 6.1/6: Fixed-mounted design with front
covers
Photo 6.1/7: Fixed-mounted 3NJ4 in-line switch
disconnector design
Photo 6.1/5: Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switch
disconnector design
The switching devices are mounted on
infinitely adjustable device holders
and connected to the vertical current
distribution bars with the supply side.
The front of the panel has either
covers with or without hinges or
additional doors with or without a
window.
Fixed-mounted 3NJ4 in-line switch
disconnector design
The panels for cable feeders in fixed-
mounted design up to 630 A are
intended for the installation of 3NJ4
in-line fuse switch disconnectors. With
their compact design and modular
structure, in-line fuse switch discon-
nectors offer optimal installation
conditions with regard to the achiev-
able packing density. The busbar
system is arranged horizontally at the
back of the panel. This busbar system
is connected to the main busbar
system via cross-members. The in-line
fuse switch disconnectors are screwed
directly onto the busbar system
(Photo 6.1/8).
 Low Voltage

Checklist

Low-voltage main distribution board (LVMD)

The LVMD checklist with the most important properties of a power distribution board and the associated explanation is
used to match the requirements of the end user and manufacturer.

Safety against accidental arcs

The testing of low-voltage switchgear under accidental arc conditions is a special test according to IEC 61641 or
VDE 0660-500, Addendum 2. This test helps to estimate the danger to which a person is subject when an accidental
arc occurs. With the test under accidental arc conditions, SIVACON already provides the proof of safety for personnel as
standard, with the following assessment criteria.

Assessment criteria

 Correctly secured doors, covers, etc. may not open.

 Parts that are potentially hazardous may not jump apart.
 No holes may form in the freely accessible external parts of the housing (enclosure).
 No vertically mounted indicators may ignite.
 The protective conductor circuit for parts of the housing that can be touched must still be functional.

Standards and regulations

 IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-500

 IEC 61641 / VDE 0660-500 Addendum 2, safety against accidental arcs
 Arc barriers to restrict the accidental arc to one panel
 Insulated busbars
Safety standard for low-voltage switchgear assemblies
(see Chapter 11, Appendix A3)

 Type-tested assemblies (TTA)

 Partially type-tested assemblies (PTTA)
Ambient conditions (in the switchgear room)

Environment category
(see Totally Integrated Power, Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, Chapter 5, page 5/21)

c IR 1 c IR 2 c IR 3

Ambient temperature
(24 hour average, see Totally Integrated Power, Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, Chapter 5, page 5/24

c ........... °C
Depending on the ambient temperature and the power losses of the switchgear, there may be thermal effects (derating)
that can make cabinet air-conditioning necessary.

Installation altitude above sea level c < 2,000 m c other ........... m

IP degree of protection according to IEC 60529 (see Appendix A4)

For indoors c IP30 c IP31 c IP40 c IP41

For cable basement c IP00 c IP40 c IP54

Severe operating conditions c None

6/5 6
 Checklist

Chemical emissions
(see Totally Integrated Power, Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, Chapter 5, page 5/22)

System configuration
(see Totally Integrated Power, Application Manual, Establishment of Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, Chapter 4, page 4/8)
c TN-C
c TN-S
c IT
c TT
Supply connection: c L1, L2, L3, PE
c L1, L2, L3, PEN
c L1, L2, L3, PE + N
c L1, L2, L3, PEN (isolated) + PE
Central grounding point (CGP) location: c Outside c Inside in panel ........................

Line data
Number of feeding systems
(transformer, generator, UPS)
Parallel line operation
Power per feeding system
Number of main busbar sections
Rated current In
Rated operational voltage Ue
Rated short-time withstand current Icw
Rated short-circuit impulse current withstand strength Ipk
Cable/busbar connection
..................................................................................
c Yes
........................ kVA
........................ units
........................ A
........................ V
........................ kA
........................ kA

For supply panels c From the bottom c Cable c Busbar

c From the top c Cable c Busbar
c From the rear c Cable c Busbar
For outgoing feeder panels c From the bottom c Cable c Busbar
c From the top c Cable c Busbar
c From the rear c Cable c Busbar

Horizontal busbar system

Location c Top
c Rear (top)
c Rear (bottom)

6/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Low Voltage

Checklist

Internal compartmentalization of the panels in accordance with IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660-500 Item 7.7

Legend: Form 3
Compartmentalization between busbars and functional
Busbars including
distribution bars units + compartmentalization between functional units
themselves + compartmentalization between
Functional unit(s) including connections and functional units
terminals for the connection
of external conductors

Enclosure Internal compartmentalization

Form 1
No internal compartmentalization Form 3a Form 3b
No compartmentaliza- Compartmentalization
tion between connec- between connections
tions and busbars and busbars

Form 4
Compartmentalization between busbars and functional
Form 2 units + compartmentalization between functional units
Compartmentalization between busbars themselves + compartmentalization between connec-
and functional units tions of functional units

Form 2a Form 2b Form 4a Form 4b

No compartmentalization Compartmentalization Connections in the same Connections not in the same
between connections and between connections compartmentalization as the compartmentalization as the
busbars and busbars connected functional unit connected functional unit

Panels

Circuit-breaker design c Form 1 c Form 2b c Form 3a c Form 4b

Fixed-mounted design c Form 1 c Form 2b c Form 4a c Form 4b
Fixed-mounted 3NJ4 in-line
switch disconnector design c Form 1 c Form 2b
Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switch
disconnector design c Form 1 c Form 3b c Form 4b
Reactive power compensation c Form 1 c Form 2b
* Form 4b according to IEC 60439-1 is comparable to Form 4 Type 4 or Form 4 Type 5 according to BS 60439, when the cable feed is via heavy-gauge
conduit screwed joints in the base plate.

6/7 6
Checklist

Versions (L1, L2, L3 + …)

c PE
c PEN
c PE + N
c PEN (insulated) + PE
c PEN, N = 50 %
c PEN, N = 100 %

Design and installation

Fixed-mounted design c
Plug-in/non-withdrawable design c
Withdrawable design c
Type of installation c Single front
c Back to back
c Double front

6/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


6.2 Low-Voltage
Protective and
Switching Devices
The TIP Application Manual,
Establishment of Basic Data and
Preliminary Planning, Section 5.3
describes the basics for the
dimensioning of the low-voltage main
distribution board and its main
components. The following focuses
on the relevant characteristics and
selection criteria of the respective
devices that are used in the main
power distribution circuits in
commercial buildings and in industry.
Note:
All figures apply for low-voltage
power systems or distribution boards
in IEC applications. Different regula-
tions and criteria apply for systems
according to UL standards.
If you have questions on UL applica-
tions, please contact your local
Siemens representative. We provide
solutions for these applications, but
they must be treated completely
differently.
Depending on the country, standard
specifications, local practices, plan-
ning engineer, technical threshold
values, etc., low voltage power distri-
bution systems are made up of vari-
ous protective devices.
Low Voltage
Circuit-breaker-protected switchgear (circuit-breaker)
Air Circuit-Breaker
ACB
– Air circuit-breaker
– Non-current-limiting circuit-breaker
– Current-zero cut-off circuit breaker
MCCB Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker
– Molded-case circuit-breaker
– Current-limiting circuit-breaker
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
– Miniature circuit-breaker
MSP Motor Starter Protector
MPCB Motor Protector Circuit-Breaker
– Circuit-breaker for motor protection
Table 6.2/1: Overview of circuit-breaker-protected switchgear
Fuse-protected switchgear (fuse switch disconnector / switch disconnector
LTS Switch disconnector
Depending on the type of operation, these
devices are divided into two main groups:
Operator-dependent
– Without breaker latching
mechanism, with protection (fuse);
with these devices, the fuse is
also moved when making and breaking
(= fuse switch disconnector)
– With breaker latching mechanism,
with protection (fuse); with these devices,
the fuse is not moved when making and
breaking (= switch disconnector with fuse
Operator-independent
– With breaker latching mechanism,
without protection (without fuse);
these devices are only used to interrupt
the circuit, similar to a main switch
(= switch disconnector without fuse)
Table 6.2/2: Overview of fuse-protected switchgear
6/9 6
6.2.1 Circuits and Device
Assignment
(see also Section 2.2 “Dimensioning of ACB
Power Distribution Systems”)

Basic configuration of a low-

voltage power distribution system
and assignment of the protective
devices including core functions
ACB MCCB LTS
Core functions in the respective
circuits
Supply circuit
Task: System protection
Protective device
– ACB (air circuit-breaker)
MCCB LTS MSP
Distribution circuit
Task: System protection
Protective devices:
– ACB (air circuit-breaker)
– MCCB (molded-case circuit-breaker)
– SD (switch disconnector)
Final circuit
Task: Motor protection
M M M
Protective devices:
– MCCB (circuit-breaker
for motor protection) Fig. 6.2/1: Core functions of the protective devices in the individual circuit types
– SD (switch disconnector)
– MSP (3RT contactor, 3RU overload
relay, 3UF motor protection and
1. Application
control devices plants motor isolators

2. 3-pole/4-pole
6.2.2 Criteria for Device 3. Fixed mounting / plug-in /
Selection withdrawable-unit design

A protective device is always part of a 4. Rated current

circuit and must satisfy the correspon- ACB: 6300 A
MCCB: 1600 A
ding requirements (see also Section Fuse: 630 A
2.2 “Dimensioning of Power Distribu- M M
5. Short-circuit
tion Systems”). The most important breaking capacity
selection criteria are shown in the
following. 6. Release
Influences selectivity
and protection setting
M M M M M M
Main selection criteria
7. Communication
Fig. 6.2/2 shows the seven most Fuse-protected and data transfer Circuit-breaker-protected
important selection criteria that must
be at least taken into account for the
device selection. Fig. 6.2/2: Main selection criteria

6/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


6.3 Requirements
on the Switchgear
in the Three Circuit
Types
6.3.1 Device Application
in the Supply Circuit
The system infeed is the most “sensi-
tive” circuit in the entire power distri-
bution. A failure here would result in
the entire network and therefore the
building or production being without
power. This worst-case scenario must
be considered during the planning.
Redundant system supplies and selec-
tive protection setting are important
preconditions for a safe network
configuration. The selection of the
correct protective devices is therefore
of elementary importance in order to
create these preconditions. Some of
the key dimensioning data is
addressed in the following.
Rated current
The feeder circuit-breaker in the LVMD
must be dimensioned for the maxi-
mum load of the transformer/genera-
tor. When using ventilated transform-
ers, the higher operating current of up
to 1.5 x IN of the transformer must be
taken into account.
Short-circuit strength
The short-circuit strength of the
feeder circuit-breaker is determined
by (n–1) x Ik max of the transformer or
transformers (n = number of trans-
formers). This means that the maxi-
mum short-circuit current that occurs
at the installation position must be
known in order to specify the appro-
priate short-circuit strength of the
protective device (Icu). Initial orienta-
tion is provided in the table of short-
circuit currents (see Totally Integrated
Power, Application Manual, Establish-
ment of Basic Data and Preliminary
Planning, Chapter 10, page 10/20).
Exact short-circuit current calculations
including attenuations of the
medium-voltage levels or the laid
cables can be made, for example, with
the aid of the SIMARIS design dimen-
sioning software. SIMARIS design
determines the maximum and mini-
mum short-circuit currents and auto-
matically dimensions the correct
protective devices
Utilization category
When dimensioning a selective net-
work, time grading of the protective
devices is essential. When using time
grading up to 500 ms, the selected
circuit-breaker must be able to carry
the short-circuit current that occurs
for the set time. Close to the trans-
former, the currents are very high.
This current carrying capacity is speci-
fied by the Icw value (rated short-time
withstand current) of the circuit-
breaker; this means the contact
system must be able to carry the
maximum short-circuit current, i.e.
the energy contained therein, until
the circuit-breaker is tripped. This
requirement is satisfied by circuit-
breakers of utilization category B
(e.g. air circuit-breakers, ACB).
Current-limiting circuit breakers
(molded-case circuit breakers, MCCB)
trip during the current rise. They can
therefore be constructed more com-
pactly.
Release
For a selective network design, the
release (trip unit) of the feeder circuit-
breaker must have an LSI characteris-
tic. It must be possible to deactivate
the instantaneous release (I). Depend-
ing on the curve characteristic of the
upstream and downstream protective
devices, the characteristics of the
Low Voltage
feeder circuit-breaker in the overload
range (L) and also in the time-lag
short-circuit range (S) should be
optionally switchable
(I4t or I2t characteristic curve). This
facilitates the adaptation of upstream
and downstream devices.
Internal accessories
Depending on the respective control,
not only shunt releases (previously:
f releases), but also undervoltage
releases are required.
Communication
Information about the current
operating states, maintenance, error
messages and analyses, etc. is being
increasingly required, especially from
the very sensitive supply circuits.
Flexibility may be required with
regard to a later upgrade or retrofit to
the desired type of data transmission.
6.3.2 Device Application
in Supply Circuits
(Coupling)
If the coupling (connection of Net-
work 1 to Network 2) is operated
open, the circuit-breaker (tie breaker)
only has the function of an isolator or
main switch. A protective function
(release) is not absolutely necessary.
The following considerations apply to
closed operation
Rated current
Must be dimensioned for the maxi-
mum possible operating current
(load compensation). The simultane-
ity factor can be assumed to be 0.9.
Short-circuit strength
The short-circuit strength of the feeder
circuit-breaker is determined by the
sum of the short-circuit components
that flow through the coupling. This
depends on the configuration of the
component busbars and their supply.
6/11 6
Utilization category
As for the system supply, utilization
category B is also required for the
current carrying capacity (Icw value).
Release
Partial shutdown with the couplings
must be taken into consideration for
the supply reliability. As the coupling
and the feeder circuit-breakers have
the same current components when a
fault occurs, similar to the parallel
operation of two transformers, the LSI
characteristic is required. The special
“Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI)”
function should be used for larger
networks and/or protection settings
that are difficult to determine.
6/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
6.3.3 Device Application
in the Distribution Circuit
The distribution circuit receives power
from the higher level (supply circuit)
and feeds it to the next distribution
level (final circuit).
Depending on the country, local
practices, etc., circuit-breakers and
fuses can be used for system protec-
tion; in principle, all protective
devices described in this chapter.
The specifications for the circuit
dimensioning must be fulfilled. The
ACB has advantages if full selectivity
is required. However for cost reasons,
the ACB is only frequently used in the
distribution circuit as of a rated cur-
rent of 630 A or 800 A. As the ACB is
not a current-limiting device, it differs
greatly from other protective devices
such as MCCB, MCB and fuses.
As no clear recommendations can
otherwise be given, Table 6.3/1 shows
the major differences and limits of the
respective protective devices.
6.3.4 Device Application
in the Final Circuit
The final circuit receives power from
the distribution circuit and supplies it
to the consumer (e.g. motor, lamp,
non-stationary load (power outlet),
etc.). The protective device must
satisfy the requirements of the con-
sumer to be protected by it
(see Fig. 5.2.2).
Note:
All protection settings, comparison of
characteristic curves, etc. always start
with the load. This means that no
protective devices are required with
adjustable time grading in the final
circuit
Meter cabinet, floor distribution
board:
See Chapter 8, Subdistribution Boards
Motors:
See Chapter 8, Subdistribution Boards
 Low Voltage

MCCB Switch MCB Reference

ACB air molded-case Fuse switch disconnector miniature values,
circuit-breaker circuit-breaker disconnector with fuses circuit-breaker specifications

Standards IEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Region

Application System protection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Power supply system

Fixed mounting Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Installation Plug-in – Up to 800 A – Partly – Availability

Withdrawable unit Yes Yes – – –

Rated current In 6300 A 1600 A 630 A 630 A 125 A Operating current IB

Short-circuit breaking Maximum short-circuit

Icu Up to 150 kA Up to 100 kA Up to 120 kA Up to 120 kA Up to 25 kA
capacity current Ik max

Current carrying capacity Icw Up to 80 kA Up to 5 kA – – – Circuit

3-pole Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Number of poles Power supply system
4-pole Yes Yes – Partly –

ETU Yes Yes – – –

Tripping characteristic Power supply system
TM – Up to 630 A Yes Yes Yes

LI Yes Yes Yes* Yes* Yes

LSI Yes Yes – – –

Tripping function Power supply system
N Yes Yes – – –

G Yes Yes – – –

Fixed – Yes Yes Yes Yes

Characteristics Adjustable Yes Yes – – – Power supply system

Optional Yes Yes – – –

Protection against
Detection Depends on Depends on Depends on Depends on Minimum short-circuit
electric shock, No limitation
of Ik min cable length cable length cable length cable length current Ik min
tripping condition

High Yes – – – –
Communication Medium Yes Yes – – – Customer specification
(data transmission)
Low Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Local Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Customer

Activation
Remote (motor Yes Yes – Partly – specifications

Full rated
Derating 60 ºC 50 ºC 30 ºC 30 ºC 30 ºC Switchgear
current up to

System synchronization Yes Up to 800 A – – – Power supply system

* According to the fuse characteristic

Table 6.3/1: Overview of the protective devices

6/13 6
6.4 Container
Solutions
The costs for infrastructure rooms are
increasing. Space is a rare commodity!
Container solutions as turnkey alter-
natives to conventional infrastructure
rooms create additional space and
also offer further decisive advantages
such as flexibility in installation,
utilization and reuse. In addition,
there is also less pressure imposed by
the planning schedule, as the installa-
tion is independent of the building
construction progress and not least, a
cost advantage through better utiliza-
tion of the space in the building. The
optimized installation of the compo-
nents in the container and the tested
solutions also help to reduce costs.
Containers create space
The containers can be installed on the
roof of the building or next to the
building and thus provide additional
space for infrastructure equipment
such as power distribution systems,
fire alarm equipment, service rooms,
etc.
Increased reliability of supply
Installation on the roof increases the
reliability of supply. Whereas cellars
can be flooded and the power distri-
bution interrupted, power supply is
maintained with a container solution
on the roof of the building
Note:
The weight of a container varies,
depending on the type of container
construction and amount of equip-
ment, between 20 and 30 t.
Customized solutions
The container dimensions are variable
and therefore enable the installation
of standard switchgear. No special
solutions have to be constructed on
account of technical conditions asso-
ciated with the building.
6/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Container erection independent of
project schedule
The construction and equipping of the
containers mainly depends on the
power demand and the number of
panels. In this way, the power distribu-
tion can be planned and constructed
separately from the building require-
ments. This provides the planning
engineer with more time and the
architect with more freedom when
designing the building.
Factory-assembled installation
Construction and equipping of the
containers is performed at the manu-
facturer’s premises under optimum
working conditions. Thus, higher
productivity owing to the increased
material availability, the more eco-
nomical use of tools, as well as the
more efficient cost structures
(severance) result in a significant cost
advantage.
Quality
The equipped containers can be
completely tested (safety, wiring,
high voltage, function). This reduces
the testing and commissioning work
at the building site, which results in
further cost and time savings.
Project milestones
If desired, the customer acceptance of
the container can be performed at the
factory. In this way, a project mile-
stone can be achieved independently
of the remaining progress of the
project.
Variable use
Container solutions can be reused or
transported to new locations and are
especially suitable for temporary or
mobile applications. Examples of this
are: building site power supplies,
power supply for a mobile, open-cast
mining excavator.
Containers can be customized for the
complex systems in standard and
special sizes, e.g. for power distribu-
tion, automation and drive systems.
They are completely configured,
assembled and tested at the factory.
Container construction types
The three most common types of
construction are described in the
following. The appropriate container
construction type depends on the
location of use and the environmental
conditions there.
Simple construction
Containers for normal requirements
consist of a steel frame covered with
sandwich panels.
Fully welded construction
Fully welded steel containers fulfill high
requirements with regard to stability
and tightness. The walls are constructed
of corrugated steel plates. The walls can
carry loads and are suitable for open-
type equipping of the interior. The
construction is EMC-tested in accor-
dance with international standards.
Stackable versions can also be con-
structed when space is limited.
Steel skeleton construction
The steel skeleton construction is
technologically the most sophisticated
version. With the torsionally rigid,
rugged steel skeleton, the containers
are exceptionally stable during trans-
port and installation.
The open-type construction (patented
modular enclosure system) saves
weight and space and is especially
suitable for containers that can be
transported by air (ICCC). The con-
struction is EMC-tested in accordance
with international standards. Stack-
able versions can also be constructed
when space is limited.
Electronics cabinet that can be
transported by air
The ICCC (Instrumentation an
Control Cargo Cabinet) is the com-
 Low Voltage

 Installation of electrical systems up

Simple construction to the control room level
 Cabling of the electrical and control
systems – simply in the false floor
 Guaranteed high quality and long
service live (approx. 20 to 30 years)
 Option: resistant to earthquakes
(strengthening for seismic areas).

Advantages at a glance
Fully welded construction
 No building costs thanks to
preassembled containers
 Reduced installation and quick
commissioning on site
 Simplified logistics and shorter
throughput times
 Shorter capital tie-up through later
container planning
 No unnecessary provision of
Steel skeleton construction
reserve space during building
works
 Integration test of related system
control systems in the factory
 Faster availability at the
installation site and prepared
external connections
 Optimization of the available
space in the building
 Less space required at the
installation site through stacking

Fig. 6.4/1: Container construction types

Contact
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives Systems
pact and flexible solution for the Technical features Engineering (A&D SE S5)
installation of electronic components  Variable dimensions or ISO standard Würzburger Str. 121
in an accessible electronics cabinet dimensions up to 20 m long and 90766 Fürth
that can be transported by air. 4 m wide Germany
Several functional units can be com-  Outdoor installation – from arctic to Claus-Thomas Michalak
bined into an overall function in an tropical environments +49 911 7 50-23 04
ICCC (e.g. entire automation of a  Thermal insulation and air claus.michalak@siemens.com
plant). This complete solution enables conditioning – as required Karlheinz Schrems
the entire function to be delivered to  High level of soundproofing – +49 911 7 50-29 79
the building site already tested, which expandable according to external karlheinz.schrems@siemens.de
reduces the commissioning times. noise level

6/15 6
6/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires

chapter 7
7.1 Busbar Trunking Systems
7.2 Cables and Wires
7 Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires
7.1 Busbar
Trunking Systems
When a planning concept for power
supply is developed, it is not only
imperative to observe standards and
regulations, it is also important to
discuss and clarify economic and
technical interrelations. The rating
and selection of electric equipment,
such as distribution boards and trans-
formers, must be performed in such a
way that an optimum result for the
power system as whole is kept in
mind rather than focusing on individ-
ual components.
All components must be sufficiently
rated to withstand normal operating
conditions as well as fault conditions.
Further important aspects to be
considered for the preparation of an
energy concept are:
 Type, use and shape of the building
(e.g. high-rise building, low-rise
building, number of story levels),
 Load centers and possible power
transmission routes and locations
for transformers and main distribu-
tion boards,
 Building-related connection details
according to specific area loads that
correspond to the type of use of the
building,
 Statutory provisions and conditions
imposed by building authorities,
 Requirements by the power supply
network operator.
The result will never be a single solu-
tion. Several options have to be
assessed in terms of their technical
and economic impacts. The following
requirements are of central impor-
tance:
 Easy and transparent planning
7/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 High service life
 High availability
 Low fire load
 Flexible adaptation to changes in
the building
Most applications suggest the use of
suitable busbar trunking systems to
meet these requirements. For this
reason, engineering companies
increasingly prefer busbar trunking to
cable installation for power transmis-
sion and distribution.
Siemens offers busbar trunking sys-
tems ranging from 25 A to 6,300 A:
 the CD-K busbar system from 25 to
40 A for the supply of light fixtures
and micro-consumers,
 the BD01 busbar system from 40 to
160 A for supplying workshops with
tap-offs up to 63 A,
 the BD2 busbar system from 160 to
1,250 A for supplying medium-size
consumers in buildings and indus-
try,
 the ventilated LD system from
1,100 to 5,000 A for power trans-
mission and power distribution an
production sites with a high energy
demand,
 the LX sandwich system from 800
to 5,000 A, mainly for power trans-
mission insensitive to position in
buildings with the requirements of
degree of protection IP54 and
special conductor configurations
such as double N or insulated PE,
 the encapsulated LR system from
630 to 6,300 A for power transmis-
sion for extreme environmental
conditions (IP68).
For the configuration of a busbar
system the following points are to be
noted:
Calculation/dimensioning
 Electrical parameters, such as rated
current, voltage, given voltage drop
and short-circuit strength at place of
installation
Technical parameters of the busbar
systems
 The conductor configuration
depends on the mains system
according to type of earth connec-
tion
 Reduction factors e.g. for ambient
temperature, type of installation,
(vertical) busbar position (horizon-
tal on edge) and degree of protec-
tion
 Copper is required as conductor
material; otherwise aluminum has
advantages such as weight, price,
etc.
 How is the system supply to be
carried out: as a TTA solution
directly from the distribution board
or by means of cables at the end or
center of the busbar
 Max. cable connection options to
infeed and tap-off units
 Power and size of the tap-off units
including installation conditions
 Number of tapping points
 Use of bus systems possible
 Influence of a magnetic field (hospi-
tals, broadcasting studios)
 Environmental conditions, espe-
cially ambient temperature (e. g.
where there are fire compartments
in each floor of a vertical shaft
Structural parameters and
boundary conditions
 Phase response (changes of direc-
tion in the busbar routing possible,
differences in height, etc.)
 Functional sections (e.g. various
environmental conditions or various
uses)

 Check use in sprinkler-protected
building sections
 Fire areas (provision of fire barriers
–> what structural (e.g. type of
walls) and fire fighting (local provi-
sions) boundary conditions are
there?
 Fire protection classes of the fire
barriers (S90 and S120)
 Functional endurance classes (E60,
E90, E120) and certifications of the
busbar systems (observe relevant
deratings)
 Fire loads/halogens (prescribed fire
loads in certain functional sections,
e.g. fire escape routes, must not be
exceeded).
Fixing of the busbar systems to the
structure
 Maximum clearance from fixings
taking into consideration location,
weight of system and additional loads
such as tap-off units, lighting, etc.
 Agreement on possible means of
fixing with structural analyst
 Use of tested fixing accessories with
busbar systems with functional
endurance
 Observe derating for type of instal-
lation
 Dimensions of the distribution
board, system supplies and tap-off
units:
Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires
– installation clearance from ceiling,
wall and parallel systems for the
purpose of heat dissipation and
installation options
– crossing with other installations
(water, gas pipes etc.)
– swing angle for installing and
operating the tap-off units
– minimum dimensions for changes
of direction in the busbar routing,
fire protection compartmentaliza-
tion, wall cutouts
– space requirement for distribution
connection
– cutout planning (sizes and loca-
tions of the cutouts)
 Linear expansion (expansion units,
if applicable).
Further information:
 Siemens AG
Totally Integrated Power Application Manual –
Basics and Preliminary Planning
Nuremberg, 2006, Chapter 5
 Technical data, dimension drawings, compo-
nents, etc. are included in the technical catalogs
LV70, LV71 T, LV 72 T of Siemens AG.
7/3 7
CD-K system
25 A – 40 A
The system is designed for applica-
tions of 25 to 40 A and serves to
provide an economical and flexible
power supply for lighting systems and
low-consumption equipment. Typical
areas of application are department
stores, supermarkets, storerooms or
clean room technology.

1.Trunking unit
 3-, 4-, 5-conductor
 Degree of protection: IP54, IP55
 Standard lengths:
2 m and 3 m
 Rated current:
30 A, 40 A, 2 x 25 A, 2 x 40 A
 Spacing of the tapping points:
0.5 m and 1 m
 Rated operating voltage:
400 V AC
2. Feeding unit
 Cable entry:
from three sides
3. Tap-off component
 Pluggable while energized
 3-pole for 10 A and 16 A
 Equipped as
L1, L2 or L3 with N and PE
 5-pole for 10 A and 16 A
NSV0_00035

 Codable
4. End flange
5. Possible supplementary
equipment
 Fixing clamp
 Suspension hook
 Hanger
 Cable fixing
 Coding set
1 Busbar case
2 Feeding unit
3 Tap-off component
4 End flange
5 Supplementary equipment

Fig. 7.1/1: System components for CD-K system

7/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires

System BD01  Standard lengths: 2 m and 3 m. circuit-breaker (MCB) and with

40 A – 160 A
The BD01 busbar trunking system is
designed for applications from 40 to
160 A. Five rated amperages are
available for only one size, i.e. all
other components can be used for all
five rated currents irrespective of the
power supply. The system is used
primarily to supply smaller consumers,
e.g. in workshops.
1. Trunking unit
 4-conductor (L1, L2, L3, N, PE =
casing)
 Degree of protection: IP54, IP55
 Rated current:
40 A, 63 A, 100 A, 125 A, 160 A
 Spacing of the tapping points:
0.5 m und 1 m
 Rated operating voltage:
400 V AC
2. Directional change components
 Changes of direction in the busbar
routing possible:
flexible, length 0.5 m, 1 m
3. Feeding unit
 Universal system supply
4. Tap-off unit
 Up to 63 A, with fuses or miniature
fused outlets
 With fittings or for customized
assembly
 For 3, 4 or 8 modules (MW)
 With or without assembly unit
5. Device case
 For 4 or 8 modules (MW)
 With or without assembly unit
 With or without outlet installed
6. Possible supplementary
equipment
 Installation sets for degree of pro-
tection IP55
 Fixing and suspension
 Coding set

4 5

3
NSV0_00041

1 Busbar case
4 Directional
1 2Busbar case change component
2 Feeding change
3Directional unit component
3 Tap-off
4Feeding unit
unit
4 5Tap-off
Deviceunit
case
6Device case
5
Supplementary equipment
6 Supplementary equipment

Fig. 7.1/2: System components for BD01 system

7/5 7
BD2 system  cross unit 5. Device case
160 A –1,250 A  Flexible changes of direction in the  For 8 modules (MW)
busbar routing possible up to 800 A  With or without assembly unit
The BD2A/BD2C busbar trunking
system (aluminum/copper) is suitable 3. Feeding unit 6. Possible supplementary
for universal use. It has not only been  Feeding from one end equipment
designed to provide flexible power  Center feeding  End flange
supply and distribution for consumers  Stud terminal  For fixing:
in trade and industry, it can also be  Cable entry – universal fixing clamp for on edge
used for power transmission from one from 1, 2 or 3 sides or flat position
supply point to another. In addition,  Distribution board feeding – fixing elements for vertical
the BD2 busbar trunking system is phases, for fixing to walls or
4. Tap-off unit
ceilings
used as rising mains in multi-story  25 A to 630 A
 Terminal block
buildings, and since a large number of  With fuse, miniature circuit-breaker
changes of direction in the busbar (MCB) or fused outlet installed
routing are possible, it can be adapted
to the building geometries perfectly.

1. Trunking unit
 5-conductor (L1, L2, L3, N, PE, 5

optional with half N and/or with

half PE) 2

 Degree of protection: IP52, IP54,

IP55
 Busbar material: 5
copper or aluminum 2

 Rated current:
5
160 A, 250 A, 315 A, 400 A 3

4
(68 mm x 167 mm)
500 A, 630 A, 800 A, 1,000 A, 1
1,250 A (126 mm x 167 mm)
 Standard lengths:
3.25 m, 2.25 m and 1.25 m 3

 Lengths available: from 0.5 m to 4

3.24 m
 Tapping points: 4

– without
– on both sides 0.5 m apart
NSV0_00081

 Fire protection: fire safety class S90 5

and S120 in accordance with DIN
4102, pages 2 to 4 3

2. Directional change components 1 Busbar case

 On edge or flat position
1 Busbar case
2 Directional change component

2 3 Feeding unit
Directional change component
 With or without fire protection 3
4 Tap-off unit
Feeding unit
 Horizontal angle unit with or with-
5 Supplementary equipment
4 Tap-off unit
out user-configurable bracket 5 Supplementary equipment
 Z-unit
 T-unit
Fig. 7.1/3: System components for BD2 system

7/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires

LDA/LDC system  U-unit 4. Feeding unit

1,100 A – 5,000 A  T-unit  Cable feeding unit
 Universal terminal for transformers
The LD busbar trunking system is used 3. Tap-off unit
both for power transmission and  Degree of protection IP30 and IP54 5. Terminal boxes for connection to
power distribution. A special feature (IP55 upon request) distribution board
of the system is a high short-circuit  With fuse switch disconnector from  TTA distribution connection to the
strength and it is particularly suitable 125 A to 630 A SIVACON system from the top/bot-
for connecting the transformer to the  With circuit-breaker from 80 A to tom
low-voltage main distribution and 1,250 A  Terminals for external distribution
then to the subdistribution system.  Leading PEN or PE connector boards
When there is a high power demand,  Switching to load-free state follow-
6. Possible supplementary
conventional current conduction by ing defined, forced-operation
equipment
cable means that parallel cables are sequences
 End flange
frequently necessary. Here the LD  Coding bracket
 Terminal block
system allows optimal power distribu-
tion with horizontal and vertical phase
responses. The system can be used in
industry as well as for relevant infra-
structure projects, such as hospitals, 6

railroad stations, airports, trade fairs,

office blocks, etc.

1. Trunking unit
 4- and 5-conductor system 6

 Busbar material:
4
copper or aluminum
 Rated current:
1,100 to 5,000 A
1
– LDA1 to LDC3 (180 mm x 180 mm)
– LDA4 to LDC8 (240 mm x 180 mm)
6
 Degree of protection:
IP34 and IP54
(IP36 and IP56 upon request) 4 2 4
 Standard lengths:
1.6 m, 2.4 m and 3.2 m
 Lengths available: 5

from 0.5 m to 3.19 m

 Tapping points:
– without
– with user-configurable tapping
points
 Fire protection partitions: fire resist-
ance class S120 in accordance with 3
1 Busbar1 case
Busbar case
DIN 4102-9 2 Directional change
2 Directional component
change component
3 3 Feeding
Feeding unit unit
NSV0_00685

4 Tap-off unit
2. Directional change components 4 Tap-off unit
5 Distribution board connection
 With or without fire protection 5 Distribution board connection
6 Supplementary equipment
6 Supplementary equipment
 Horizontal angle unit with or with-
out user-configurable bracket
 Z-unit Fig. 7.1/4: System components for LDA/LDC system

7/7 7
LXA/LXC system
from 800 A – 5,000 A
The LX busbar trunking system is used
both for power transmission and
power distribution. Special features of
the system include high flexibility and
position insensitivity, and it is particu-
larly suitable for power distribution in
multi-story buildings. The high degree
of protection IP54, which is standard
for this system, and tap-off units up to
1,250 A also guarantee a safe supply
if there is a high energy demand. It
can be used in industry as well as for
relevant infrastructure projects such
as hospitals, railroad stations, air-
ports, data centers, office blocks, etc.
1. Trunking unit
4- and 5-conductor system in various
conductor configurations, including
separate PE or double N
 Busbar material:
copper or aluminum
 Rated current: 800 up to 5,000 A
Size (mm) Aluminum Copper
137 x 145 up to 1,000 A up to 1,250 A
162 x 145 up to 1,250 A up to 1,600 A
207 x 145 up to 1,600 A up to 2,000 A
287 x 145 up to 2,500 A up to 3,200 A
439 x 145 up to 3,200 A up to 4,000 A
599 x 145 up to 4,500 A up to 5,000 A
3. Tap-off unit 4. Feeding unit
 Degree of protection IP54  Cable feeding unit
 With fuse switch disconnector from  Universal terminal for transformers
125 A to 630 A
5. Terminal boxes for connection to
 With circuit-breaker from 80 A to
distribution board
1,250 A
 TTA distribution connection to the
 Pluggable while energized up to 630 A
SIVACON system from the top/bottom
 Fixed installation up to 1,250 A
 Terminals for external distribution
(on terminal block)
boards
 Leading PEN or PE connector
 Switching to load-free state following 6. Possible supplementary
defined, forced-operation sequences equipment
 Coding bracket  End flange
 Flange for degree of protection
increased from IP54 to IP55
 Terminal block
4
4
1 6

 Degree of protection: IP54 (IP55 6

optional) 2

 Standard lengths: 1 m, 2 m and 3 m

 Lengths available: from 0.35 m to
2.99 m
 Layout: horizontal and vertical 5

without derating
NSV0_01246

 Tapping points:
– on one side
– on both sides
 Fire protection partitions: 3

fire resistance class S120 1 Busbar case

in accordance with DIN 4102 Part 9
2. Directional change components
 With or without fire protection
 Horizontal angle unit with or with-
out user-configurable bracket
 Z-unit
 U-unit
 T-unit
1 Busbar case
2 Directional change component
3 Feeding unit
2 Directional change component
4 Tap-off unit
3 Feeding5 unit
Distribution board connection
4 Tap-off 6unit
Supplementary equipment
5 Distribution board connection
6 Supplementary equipment
Fig. 7.1/5: System components for LXA/LXC system

7/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires

LRC system 1 LR – LX adapter

from 630 A – 6,300 A 2 Encapsulated link component
3 Straight
1 LR – LXbusbar
adaptercomponent
The LRC busbar trunking system is 4 Directional
2 Encapsulatedchange component
link component
used for power transmission. A special 5
3 Straight busbar component
Expansion unit
4 Directional change component
feature of the system is high resist- 6 Connector
5 Expansion unit
ance to external influences of chemi- 7 Fire
6 barrier
Connector
cal and corrosive substances, and it is 8 7 Fire barrier
Connector for distribution board connection
8 Connector for distribution board connection
particularly suitable for use in the 9 Fixing component
9 Fixing component
open air and in environments with 10 Tap-off point
10 Tap-off with
point with tap box
tap box
11 Cable
Cable feedingunit
feeding unit
high air humidity. The high degree of 11
protection IP68 is guaranteed with the 11
encapsulated epoxy cast-resin casing
and serves to provide reliable power 1

transmission when there is a high

energy demand. The system can be
used in industry as well as for relevant
2
infrastructure projects such as railroad
3
stations, airports, office blocks, etc.
4

1. Trunking unit
4- and 5-conductor system
 Busbar material: copper 5

 Degree of protection: IP68

 User-configurable lengths:
from 0.30 m to 3.00 m
 Layout: horizontal and vertical
without derating
 Fire barriers: 10

fire resistance class S120 in

accordance with DIN 4102 Part 9
8
2. Directional change components 9

 With or without fire protection 6

 Horizontal angle unit with or with-

out offset
 Z-unit 7
 T-unit
3. Feeding unit and distributor
units
 Universal terminals for Fig. 7.1/6: System components for LRC system
transformers, external distributors
and cable connection
4. Possible supplementary
equipment
 End flange
 terminal block

7/9 7

7.2 Cables and
Wires
We read more and more reports in the
daily press about major fires in hotels,
high-rise buildings, large industrial
plants and office buildings, which very
often entail dramatic rescue opera-
tions to save people’s lives. Spectacu-
lar fires like in the London Under-
ground, in Dusseldorf airport, in the
Channel Tunnel or in Mont-Blanc
tunnel resulted in numerous casual-
ties and economic losses of billions.
According to current estimates, there
have been approximately 5 million
fires in the industrial sector world-
wide. These have resulted in esti-
mated losses amounting to well over
100 billion US dollars (= ca. 75 billion
euros).
The main hazard with such fire catas-
trophes is the thick smoke emission
and the release of poisonous combus-
tion gases such as carbon dioxide
(CO2), carbon monoxide (CO) and –
especially in closed rooms – the fall in
the level of atmospheric oxygen (O2)
which is vital for human beings and
animals. The extremely opaque fumes
stop people from being able to see
and find their way in rooms full of
smoke and thus prevent them from
escaping and surviving. The conse-
quences are dramatic: death through
suffocation or poisoning – as hap-
pened with the airport fire in Dussel-
dorf. In addition to this, fire-fighting
water contaminated with toxins
(including dioxin) and corrosive and
poisonous flue gas cleaning residues
pollute the environment. This damage
can only be rectified in an environ-
mentally compatible way at great
expenditure, and even then only to
some extent. Through the diffusion of
corrosive fire gases, particularly from
industrial fires, serious secondary
damage is also incurred.
7/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
However, cables and wires are only
seldom the cause of fires, as the
report on the fire catastrophe in
Dusseldorf airport also established.
But fire can quickly spread to the
cable routes installed in buildings. If
fire protection (fire barriers) is not
carried out by an expert, the fire can
spread to other rooms and other
stories. This behavior is described as
fire propagation. Consequently, cables
are classified according to their fire
propagation characteristics.
Fire risk of PVC cables
Planned and installed by experts,
installations with conventional cables
made of PVC present no increased fire
risk. With PVC-insulated cables, how-
ever, very corrosive and toxic gases
(with a poisonous effect) can be
released in the event of a fire. These
gases – not combustible themselves –
displace the atmospheric oxygen at
the seat of the fire and thus affect the
slow-burning property or the flame
retardance of the halogen-containing
material.
The escaping hydrohalogen gases
react with water, e.g. air humidity, to
form electroconductive substances.
This leads to an accelerated break-
down of the insulating property. For
this reason, halogen-containing
materials are not suitable or to be
recommended as insulating material
for cables if the cables are still to be
operational after a longer exposure to
flames. In order to pass the functional
test during or after exposure to
flames, the combustion residues of
wire insulation must not be conduc-
tive. Halogen-free materials do not
have the above-mentioned disadvan-
tages. Even when halogen-free mate-
rials are combined, it has to be taken
into consideration that conductive
substances such as acetic acid can be
formed.
Halogen-free cables with improved
fire behavior and functional
endurance
In order to reduce risks and damage,
the cable industry has developed fire-
resistant, halogen-free cables and
wires that meet more stringent safety
requirements and thus fulfill the
prerequisites for a forward-looking
electrical installation. These safety
cables and wires have a number of
significant advantages:
 No fire propagation in the event of
local flame exposure
 Optional: functional endurance in
the event of flame exposure of
800 °C, at least 20 minutes up to a
maximum of 180 minutes in accor-
dance with IEC 60331 and
VDE 0472-814 (previously
“insulation integrity”)
 Optional: functional endurance E30
or E90 of the entire cable system in
accordance with DIN 4102-12
 Proven low flue gas and smoke
development
 Low emission of corrosive sub-
stances and gases
 Low poisonousness (toxicity) of the
flue gases
The areas of application of these
cables and wires can be divided into
two categories:
 Premises where the protection of
persons is the main concern, such
as hospitals, hotels, department
stores, subways, office blocks,
public buildings, etc.
 Premises where the protection of
assets is the main concern, such as
industrial plants, premises with data
processing equipment, power
plants, nuclear power plants, mili-
tary facilities, etc.

7.2.1 Requirements for
the Fire Behavior of
Cables and Wires
Apart from the properties described,
the safety cables and wires must have
a few other dominant characteristics,
which will be described in detail
below.
Since the terms used with reference to
cables and wires with special burning
behavior are not standardized, their
meanings are defined below with
respect to the relevant test procedure.
Here a distinction must be made
between material-related and product-
related definitions:
Material-related definitions
Halogen-free properties
(corrosivity of the combustion
gases)
In the event of burn-off of halogen-
containing cables and wires, depend-
ing on the halogen content, very
corrosive (acid) gases are produced
that destroy easily corrodible parts in
the vicinity of the seat of the fire
without these being caught by the
fire.
Standards concerning the halogen-
free properties of cables and wires are
to be found in
 IEC 60754-1 / DIN VDE 0482-267-2-1
regarding the quantitative determi-
nation of the halogen level and
 IEC 60754-2 / DIN VDE 0482- 267-2-2
regarding the corrosivity and elec-
troconductivity of the combustion
gases.
Toxicity of the combustion gases
(poisonous combustion gases)
All combustion gases resulting from
insulating materials are toxic. This is
caused by the level of carbon monox-
ide alone. The relevant standard is the
French NES 713 / NF C20-454. (IEC
standard is being drafted.)
Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires
Here the level of a number of differ-
ent toxicologically relevant substances
is ascertained and compared with
corresponding limit values.
Critical oxygen content,
LOI (Limited Oxygen Index)
So as to make it possible to assess the
fire behavior of cable and line materi-
als, the test procedure standardized
under ASTM D2863-70 was selected,
which indicates the lowest oxygen
content in terms of percentage of an
oxygen/nitrogen mixture whereby a
material set alight still burns. Air is
known to have an oxygen content of
21%, from which it may be concluded
that materials with an LOI < 21 burn.
Flue gas density
Material
PE
PTFE
PC (compound fire-resistant)
Fig. 7.2/1: Examples of the LOI value of
insulating materials
Flue gases arising from a fire can
make it difficult to recognize escape
routes, so the materials for cables and
wires must be designed to be low
fuming.
For measuring the flue gas density,
the procedure normally used is the
American one for measuring the light
absorption in the waste gas duct of
the furnace when a defined test piece
is exposed to flames.
Inspection standards:
IEC 61043-1 and -2/VDE 0482-268-1
and VDE 0482-268-2
Product-related definitions
Flame retardance
The test for flame retardance is a
“normal” fire test to determine the
self-extinguishing capability of a cable
or wire after exposure to flames in
accordance with IEC 60332-1 / DIN EN
50265-2-1 / VDE 0482-265-2-1.
Examples: ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 100;
NSSHÖU, NSLFFÖU, HO7RN-F,
HO5VV-F, etc.
If requirements are not as high, a test
in accordance with IEC 60332-2 / DIN
EN 50265-2 / VDE 0482-265-2-2 is
also possible. These test methods are
not used for fire-resistant cables and
wires.
Low flammability
The test for low flammability is a
LOI
multi-cable fire test in accordance
with VDE 0482-266-2-4 / DIN EN
18
50266-2-4 / HD 405.3 / IEC 60332-3-
24. The procedure is that in a furnace
> 90 a vertically mounted bunched cable
tied to a ladder is fired with a flame of
> 30 800 °C for 20 minutes. After the flame
has been turned off, the cable bundle
must extinguish itself before the fire
has reached the top end of the cable.
These tests are also known as “cable
bundle tests.” Cables which pass this
test are then classified as having the
property ”no fire propagation in
accordance with IEC 60332-3“.
Examples: ÖLFLEX 100 H; ÖLFLEX
110H and -110CH and ÖLFLEX 130 H,
LAPPTHERM 145, H05Z-K/H07Z-K.
7/11 7
Functional endurance of cables and
wires in the event of exposure to
flames
The functional endurance (previously
known as insulation integrity) of
cables and wires indicates how long a
cable exposed to fire remains electri-
cally reliable.
The test method used here is the
standard VDE 0472 / DIN 57472-804
derived from IEC 60331. A 1.2 m-long
cable test specimen is fired with a
flame of 800 °C (± 50 °C) for the
duration of 20 minutes, while power
cables are supplied with 400 V and
communication cables with 110 V
alternating voltage during exposure to
flames. In this test, up until January
1991 the test specimen was only
tested for insulation integrity, and this
was done by monitoring for short
circuit between the wires.
Note: The modified standard DIN VDE
0472-814: 1991-01 stipulates testing
the copper conductor for interruption
since the function of the line is only
ensured if there is no interruption or
short circuit during the required time
of exposure to flames. The functional
endurance in accordance with DIN VDE
0472-814 is indicated on the line by
means of an additional label FE for
functional endurance of at least 20
minutes or with additional information
(time class), e.g. FE 90 for functional
endurance of at least 90 minutes. The
usual time classes are FE (2); FE 30; FE
60; FE 90; FE 120; FE 180.
However, in practice, electric lines
tested as above have often failed in
the event of real fires much earlier
than as defined by the functional test,
so that, for example, emergency
lighting, signs for fire exits and smoke
extraction systems, etc. have prema-
turely failed to function. This has
often had serious consequences for
people and assets.
7/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Functional endurance of the cable
system
For a long time, therefore, the author-
izing agencies had called for a realistic
test for these types of line to be
devised that corresponds much more
closely to the actual conditions in the
event of fire. It was very soon realized
that, for example, the cable fixing
plays a decisive role in maintaining
the electrical function, and the fire
test conditions must be made more
stringent. These requirements have
been fulfilled with the standard
DIN 4102-12: 1991-01. It applies to
assessing the fire behavior of con-
struction materials and structural
elements of electric cable systems. In
order to distinguish the functional
endurance in accordance with DIN
VDE 0472-814, the functional
endurance classes E30, E60 and E90
for the functional endurance of a
cable system have been created.
Cables and wires that are in accor-
dance with the test specification DIN
4102-12 receive the much sought-
after type-examination certificate
(IBMB) only in conjunction with
approved, tested cable fixing systems
(e.g. by OBO). Since the building
authorities in Germany act in accor-
dance with DIN 4102 regarding
requirements for cable systems, the
previous VDE test in accordance with
0472-814 has become much less
important.
There are also other functional
endurance tests in other countries.
Here it is worth mentioning the test
methods used in Belgium in accor-
dance with NBN-C 30-004F3, where
the test specimen is exposed to an
additional firing mechanism, and the
French test method in accordance
with NF C32-070 CR1, where the
flame temperature is 900 °C and the
time exposure to flames is 15 min-
utes.
Fire load
The fire load of cables and wires is
determined by measuring the energy
released per meter of line for total
combustion of all organic substances.
This is a theoretical value which is
calculated from the sum of the individ-
ual components used in the cable. The
figures are in kWh/m or MJ/m.
What should also be mentioned regard-
ing measurement of the fire load is the
comparison between PVC cables and
wires and fire-resistant cables and wires.
This is used to ascertain that the fire
load with PVC cables is lower than fire-
resistant cables; but this comparison is
inappropriate since the flashing time is
not defined here. If the flashing time of
PVC cables was taken as a basis, it
would be established that the fire-
resistant cables are not yet burnt and
thus had released less energy than PVC
cables. There is no valid measuring
method for this.
Note:
The fire safety classes standardized in
DIN 4102 indicate fire resistance
classes according to a fire resistance
rating in minutes. F90 means fire
resistance rating = 90 minutes. This
standard also indicates classifications
for non-combustible construction
materials (A1, A2) and combustible
construction materials with the
classes B3 – highly inflammable, B2 –
normal flammability and B1 – low
flammability (flame-retardant). This
information cannot be applied to the
provisions for cables and wires, since
in DIN 4102, fire propagation is the
main concern, i.e. the fire shielding
time in the event of a fire potentially
spreading.
There is only a link between fire
safety classes and the provisions for
cables and wires with special fire
behavior concerning the building
regulations on fire barriers for cable

penetration, which is to be found with
details of the fire resistance classes,
e.g. F90 and with relevant details
about size of the wall openings,
minimum wall thicknesses and other
established points.
Construction of cables and wires
with functional endurance
Bare copper conductors, which
according to requirements (up to
three hours’ functional endurance)
can be covered with a layer of insulat-
ing mica, and then insulation made of
flame-retardant, halogen-free, cross-
linked polyolefin. A layer of fiber glass
is normally used over the coating of
the stranded wires as a flame protec-
tion layer. A material made of flame-
retardant, halogen-free, cross-linked
polyolefin is also used as an outer
sheath.
These construction characteristics
mean that all the requirements for
properties described in the introduc-
tion can be fulfilled.
Construction of cables and wires
with particular burning behavior
For cables and wires with particular
burning behavior in halogen-free or
low-halogen versions, the same
construction principles apply as
to the standard cable types.
Effects of flame-retardant additives
in halogen-free materials
The fundamental effect is demonstrated
below through the example of an EPR
compound and the additive aluminum
hydroxide:
 At fire temperatures, considerable
quantities of heat are consumed
through the decomposition of
aluminum hydroxide and thus
extracted from the combustion
process of the rubber. This slows
down the speed of the burn-off of
Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires
the rubber compound and the
formation of combustible decompo-
sition products.
 The steam vapor produced from the
decomposition of the aluminum
hydroxide forms an oxygen-dis-
pelling protective gas.
 A crust is formed on the surface of
the rubber from the carbonizing
products and aluminum hydroxide
which limits further progress of the
combustion.
Multi-cable fire test with respect to
compound development
Experience during development of
these cables has shown that a furnace
and test equipment for testing the fire
propagation to cable groupings in
accordance with IEC 60332-3 are
essential for the development of fire-
resistant cables and wires. For it has
emerged that with compound devel-
opment it is only possible to assess
the burning behavior of cables only
for the respective test methods and
when even apparently inconsequen-
tial boundary conditions are observed.
A change in the air exchange rate
during the multi-cable fire test can
turn the test result completely upside
down.
Experience to date has shown that on
the basis of the combustibility of a
material established under laboratory
conditions, for example, measured as
LOI value, is in no way an indication
of the course of the multi-cable fire
test.
This can be clearly illustrated taking
the example of an ethylene vinyl
acetate (EVA) based rubber com-
pound with an LOI value > 40, since it
fails as a sheathing compound in the
multi-cable fire test; a flame-retardant
influence is not observed.
Consequence: There is virtually no
point in attempting to relate the
results from different burning tests in
order to draw conclusions from the
result of one test procedure on the
probable result of another fire test.
Assessments within a material or
compound group are only to be made
for burning tests actually conducted
with the same boundary conditions.
7.2.2 Types of Safety
Cables and Wires and
their Areas of Application
Fixed installation
 0.6/1 kV NHXH power cable
 0.6/1 kV N2XH; N2XCH power cable
 0.6/1 kV (N)HXH power cable
E30, -E90 for safety circuits
 0.6/1 kV (N)HXCH E30, -E90 power
cable for safety circuits
 H(St)H light-current cable
 JH(St)H light-current cable
E30,-E90 for safety circuits.
These cables are suitable for fixed
indoor installation, in cable ducts and
sometimes also outdoors. Areas of
application are facilities with high
requirements for safety and protection
of persons and concentration of assets.
Examples: industrial plants, premises
with data processing equipment,
nuclear power plants, military facili-
ties, multi-story buildings, ware-
houses, building services, mobile
drilling platforms, ships, mines,
underground installations, tunneling,
hospitals, etc.
 NHXMH installation lines
These lines are to be used preferably
for fixed installation, for the indoor
wiring of buildings with increased
safety requirements, where protection
of persons is the main concern and
there are limited escape routes in the
event of a fire.
7/13 7
Examples: hospitals and department
stores, hotels, high-rise apartment
blocks, theaters, administrative build-
ings, terminal buildings at airports,
emergency power systems for lighting
escape routes, ventilation systems,
etc.
Flexible round cables
These cables are suitable for laying in
dry, damp and wet rooms, and some
also outdoors. Areas of application are
machines and industrial plants with
increased safety requirements where
protection of assets is the main con-
cern. For cables used in this type of
capacity, there are frequently further
requirements regarding flexibility, oil ings. Outside of buildings (in air or in
resistance, no substances harmful to ground) VDE 0276-603 also applies.
lacquers,* etc.
An overview is to be found in the
product information on halogen-free
Examples: connection and control line
cables in the latest LAPPKABEL cata-
of and in machine tools, conveyors,
log.
large machinery, if the cables are
subject to bending. Depending on www.lappkabel.de
requirements regarding flexibility,
these are ÖLFLEX 110H, ÖLFLEX
130H, ÖLFLEX 440P, ÖLFLEX-FD 855P.
Example of application of ÖLFLEX 130H:
baggage handling systems in airports.
Note:
VDE 0298-4 applies to the correct
dimensioning of the current carrying
capacity of cables and wires in build-

* Materials used should be free of substances

harmful to the application of lacquers

Halogen-free cables
with burning behavior in accordance with IEC 60332-1 (flame-retardant) or IEC 60332-3 (highly flame-retardant)

Product name Burning behavior Characteristics Type of installation

ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 100 H highly flame-retardant connecting cable, oil-resistant, free of substances harmful to lacquers, hydrolysis-resistant fixed/flexible
ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 110 H highly flame-retardant control cable, oil-resistant, free of substances harmful to lacquers, hydrolysis-resistant fixed/flexible
ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 110 CH highly flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 110 H plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible
ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 120 H flame-retardant control cable, oil-resistant, free of substances harmful to lacquers, hydrolysis-resistant, increased flexibility fixed/flexible
ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 120 CH flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 120 H plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible
ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 130 H highly flame-retardant inexpensive control cable, free of substances harmful to lacquers, hydrolysis-resistant fixed/flexible
ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 135 CH highly flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 130 H plus Cu braided screen (without inner sheath) fixed/flexible
ÖLFLEX 440 P flame-retardant PUR control cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant, VDE registered flexible
ÖLFLEX 440 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX 440 P plus Cu braided screen flexible
ÖLFLEX 540 P flame-retardant power cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant, VDE registered flexible
ÖLFLEX 540 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX 540 P plus Cu braided screen flexible
SPIREX coiled cable flame-retardant coiled cable made of ÖLFLEX 540 P with high recoiling forces flexible
ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 755 P flame-retardant PUR servomotor cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant highly flexible
ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 755 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 755 P plus Cu braided screen highly flexible
ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 760 CP flame-retardant feedback cable (speedometer cable) highly flexible
ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 770 CP flame-retardant resolver, encoder, sensor cable highly flexible
ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 781 P flame-retardant PUR servomotor cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant, low-capacity highly flexible
ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 781 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 781 P plus Cu braided screen highly flexible
ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 785 P flame-retardant PUR servomotor cable, resistant to cold, oil-resistant, low-capacity, 0.6/1 kV highly flexible
ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 785 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX SERVO FD 785 P plus Cu braided screen highly flexible
ÖLFLEX FD 820 H flame-retardant power chain cable, resistant to cold, optimal very small diameters highly flexible
ÖLFLEX FD 820 CH flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX FD 820 H plus Cu braided screen highly flexible
ÖLFLEX FD 855 P flame-retardant power chain cable for long distances to be traversed, resistant to cold, UV-resistant highly flexible
ÖLFLEX FD 855 CP flame-retardant as ÖLFLEX FD 855 P plus Cu braided screen highly flexible

Table 7.2/2: Connecting and control cables for machines and industrial plants (Source: LAPPKABEL)

7/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables and Wires

Product name Burning behavior Characteristics Type of installation

LAPPTHERM 145 lines highly flame-retardant electron beam cross-linked line, thermally particularly resistant, unsusceptible to welding beads fixed/flexible
LAPPTHERM 145 C lines highly flame-retardant as LAPPTHERM 145 line plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible
H05Z-K, H07Z-K 90° flame-retardant halogen-free single-core, max. temperature range on the conductor +90 °C fixed
H05Z-K, H07Z-K 110° highly flame-retardant halogen-free single-core, max. temperature range on the conductor +110 °C fixed
SILFLEX SiF, SiF/GL, SiD, SiZ, FZLSi flame-retardant silicone single-core for operating temperature range from –50 °C to +180 °C fixed
SILFLEX SiHF flame-retardant silicone control and connecting cable, temperature range from –50 °C to +180 °C fixed/flexible
SILFLEX SiHF/GLS flame-retardant as SILFLEX SiHF but with steel wire armoring fixed/flexible
SILFLEX H05SS-F EWKF flame-retardant silicone control and connecting line with HAR approval, notch-resistant fixed/flexible
SILFLEX UL/CSA flame-retardant silicone control and connecting line with UL/CSA approval fixed/flexible
SILFLEX EWKF flame-retardant silicone control and connecting line, notch-resistant fixed/flexible
SILFLEX EWKF C flame-retardant as SILFLEX EWKF plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible
ZERO-FLAME SC 350 flame-retardant single-core made of glass filament for high temperatures: –50 °C to +350 °C fixed/flexible
ZERO-FLAME MC 350 flame-retardant cable made of glass filament for high temperatures: –50 °C to +350 °C fixed/flexible
ZERO-FLAME SC 1565 flame-retardant single-core for extreme temperatures from –195°C to +400 °C, for a short time up to +1565 °C fixed/flexible
ZERO-FLAME MC 1565 flame-retardant cable for extreme temperatures from –195 °C to +400 °C, for a short time up to +1565 °C fixed/flexible

Table 7.2/3: Connecting and control cables for machines and industrial plants (Source: LAPP CABLE)

Product name Burning behavior Characteristics Type of installation

(N)HXMH highly flame-retardant high-current installation cable fixed
J-H(ST)H …BD highly flame-retardant installation cable for telephone, measurement and signal transmission fixed
J-H(ST)H …BD fire alarm cable highly flame-retardant fire alarm cable for telephone, measurement and signal transmission in accordance with VDE 0815 fixed
UNITRONIC LAN UTP/S-H 200 MHz-CAT.5e flame-retardant Class D LAN cable for structured cabling fixed/flexible
UNITRONIC LAN UTP/S-H 250 MHz-CAT.6 flame-retardant Class E LAN cable for structured cabling fixed
UNITRONIC LAN STP/S-H PiMF 250 MHz-CAT.6 flame-retardant Class E LAN cable for structured cabling, pairs in metal foil fixed/flexible
UNITRONIC LAN STP/S-H PiMF 600 MHz-CAT.7 flame-retardant Class F LAN cable for structured cabling, pairs in metal foil fixed
UNITRONIC LAN 1.2 GHz flame-retardant LAN cable meeting the requirements of draft standard prEN 50288-4-1 fixed
HITRONIC POF SIMPLEX PE-PUR flame-retardant OWG for transmissions up to ca. 60 m for 660 nm wavelength, adhesive-free fixed
HITRONIC POF SIMPLEX S PE-PUR/S PA-PUR flame-retardant as HITRONIC POF SIMPLEX PE-PUR, also SERCOS compatible fixed
HITRONIC POF SIMPLEX FD PE-PUR flame-retardant OWG for transmissions up to ca. 60 m for 660 nm wavelength, adhesive-free highly flexible
HITRONIC POF DUPLEX FD PE-PUR flame-retardant OWG for transmissions up to ca. 60 m for 660 nm wavelength, adhesive-free highly flexible
HITRONIC HUN LWL flame-retardant fiber glass cable for use indoors and outdoors for high mechanical loads fixed
HITRONIC HDH I-V(ZN) H flame-retardant mini-breakout fiber glass cable for short to medium distances indoors fixed
ETHERLINE H CAT.5 and CAT.5e flame-retardant fast Ethernet lines with transmission rate 100 Mbit/s fixed
ETHERLINE H Flex CAT.5 flame-retardant fast Ethernet line with transmission rate 100 Mbit/s flexible

Table 7.2/4: Cables and lines, data lines, optical fiber for building installation (Source: LAPP CABLE)

Product name Burning behavior Characteristics Type of installation

UNITRONIC LiHH flame-retardant data line with DIN 47100 color code fixed/flexible
UNITRONIC LiHCH flame-retardant as UNITRONIC LiHH plus Cu braided screen fixed/flexible
UNITRONIC LiHCH (TP) flame-retardant as UNITRONIC LiHCH, paired fixed/flexible
UNITRONIC FD P plus UL/CSA flame-retardant data line for power chain use, UL listed, low-capacity, resistant to cold highly flexible
UNITRONIC FD CP plus UL/CSA flame-retardant as UNITRONIC FD P plus UL/CSA but with Cu braided screen highly flexible
UNITRONIC FD CP (TP) plus UL/CSA flame-retardant as UNITRONIC FD CP plus UL/CSA, paired highly flexible
UNITRONIC BUS P COMBI IBS flame-retardant installation remote bus cable INTERBUS 100 ø, color-coded in accordance with DIN 47100 fixed
UNITRONIC BUS FD P IBS flame-retardant remote bus cable INTERBUS 100 ø for power chain use highly flexible
UNITRONIC BUS FD P COMBI IBS flame-retardant installation remote bus cable INTERBUS 100 ø for power chain use highly flexible
UNITRONIC BUS L2/FIP 7-wire flame-retardant PROFIBUS line for higher requirements, oil-resistant fixed
UNITRONIC BUS HFFR L2/FIP FC highly flame-retardant PROFIBUS line for higher requirements, oil-resistant fixed

Table 7.2/5: Data and bus lines for machines and industrial plants (Source: LAPP CABLE)

7/15 7
7/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Subdistribution Systems

chapter 8
8.1 General 8.4 Small Distribution Boards and
8.2 Configuration Wall- or Floor-Mounted Distribution Boards

8.3 Selectivity and Back-up Protection 8.5 Circuit Protection Devices

8 Subdistribution Systems
8.1 General
Subdistribution systems, as an essen-
tial component for the reliable power
supply to all consumers of a building,
are used for the distributed supply of
circuits. From the subdistribution
boards, cables either lead directly or
via ground contact outlets to the
consumer. Protective devices are
located within the subdistribution
systems.
These are:
 Fuses
 Miniature circuit-breakers
 RCD (residual current devices)
 Circuit-breakers
 Overvoltage protection
They provide protection against
personal injury and protect:
 Against excessive heating caused by
non-permissible currents
 Against the effects of short-circuit
currents and the resulting mechani-
cal damage.
In addition to the protective devices, a
subdistribution system also contains
devices for switching, measuring and
monitoring. These are:
 Isolators
 KNX/EIB components
 Outlets
 Measuring instruments
 Switching devices
 Transformers for extra-low voltages
 Components of the building control
systems
8/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
8.2 Configuration
The local environmental conditions
and all operating data have utmost
importance for the configuration of
the subdistribution systems. The
dimensioning is made using the
following criteria:
Ambient conditions
 Dimensions
 Mechanical stress
 Exposure to corrosion
 Notes concerning construction
measures
 Wiring spaces
 Environmental conditions
Electrical data
 Rated currents of the busbars
 Rated currents of the supply circuits
 Rated currents of the branches
 Short-circuit strength of the busbars
 Rating factor for switchgear assem-
blies
 Heat loss
Protection and installation type
 Degree of protection
 Observance of the upper tempera-
ture limit
 Installation type (free-standing,
floor-mounted distribution board,
wall-mounted distribution board)
 Protective measures
 Accessibility, e.g. for installation,
maintenance and operating
Type of construction
 Number of operating faces
 Space requirements for modular
installation devices, busbars and
terminals
 Supply conditions
The number of subdistribution boards
in a building is determined using the
following criteria:
Floors
A high-rise building normally has at
least one floor distribution board for
each floor. A residential building
normally has one distribution system
for each apartment.
Building sections
If a building consists of several sec-
tions, at least one subdistribution
system is normally provided for each
building section.
Departments
In a hospital, separate subdistribution
systems are provided for the various
departments, such as surgery, OP
theater, etc.
Safety power supplies
Separate distribution boards for the
safety power supply are required for
supplying the required safety equip-
ment. Depending on the type and use
of the building or rooms, the relevant
regulations and guidelines must be
observed, such as VDE 0100-710 and
-718 and the MLAR (Sample Directive
on Fireproofing Requirements for Line
Systems).
8.2.1 Standards to be
Observed for
Dimensioning
 IEC 60364-2-20, DIN VDE 0100-200
Low voltage installations; Part 200
Definitions
 IEC 60364-3-30, DIN VDE 0100-300;
Assessment of general characteris-
tics of installations

 IEC 60364-4-41, DIN VDE 0100-410
Protection against electric shock
 IEC 60364-4-30 / DIN VDE 0100-430
Protection against overcurrent
 IEC 60364-5-51 / DIN VDE 0100-510
Selection and erection of electrical
equipment; common rules
 IEC 60364-5-20 / DIN VDE 0100-520
Wiring systems
 DIN VDE 0298-4 Recommended
values for the current carrying
capacity of sheathed and non-
sheathed cables
 DIN VDE 0606-1 Connecting materi-
als up to 690 V; Part 1 – Installation
boxes for accomodation of equip-
ment and/or connecting terminals
 DIN 18015-1 Electrical systems in
residential buildings, planning
principles
8.2.2 Selection of the
Protective Devices and
Connecting Lines
The selection and setting of the
protective devices to be used must
satisfy the following three conditions:
 Protection against non-permissible
contact voltage for indirect contact
(electric shock)
 Overload protection
 Short-circuit protection
Detailed information for the three
conditions, see Section 2.2 “Dimen-
sioning of Power Distribution Sys-
tems”.
An exact protective device selection
and thus the dimensioning of subdis-
tribution systems requires extensive
short-circuit current calculations and
voltage drop calculations. Catalog
data for the short-circuit energies, the
selectivity and the back-up protection
of the individual devices and assem-
blies must also be consulted. In addi-
tion, the appropriate regulations and
standards must be observed. At this
point, a reference should be made to
the SIMARIS design dimensioning tool
that automatically takes account of
the above mentioned conditions,
catalog data, standards and regula-
tions, and consequently automatically
makes the device selection.
8.3 Selectivity and
Back-up Protection
Rooms used for medical purposes
(VDE 0100-710) and meeting rooms
(DIN VDE 0100-718) require the
selection of protective devices in
subareas. For other building types,
such as computer centers, there is an
increasing demand for a selective
grading of the protective devices,
because only the circuit affected by a
fault would be disabled with the other
circuits continuing to be supplied with
power without interruption (see also
Section 2.3 “Power System Protection
and Protection Coordination”).
Because the attainment of selectivity
results in increased costs, it should be
decided for which circuits selectivity is
useful. Back-up protection is the
lower-cost option. In this case, an
upstream protective device, e.g. an LV
HRC fuse as group back-up fuse,
supports a downstream protective
device in mastering the short-circuit
current, i.e. both an upstream and a
downstream protective device trip.
The short-circuit current, however,
has already been sufficiently reduced
by the upstream protective device so
that the downstream protective
device can have a smaller short-circuit
breaking capacity. Back-up protection
should be used when the expected
solid short-circuit current exceeds the
Subdistribution Systems
breaking capacity of the switching
device or the consumers. If this is not
the case, an additional limiting protec-
tive device unnecessarily reduces the
selectivity or, indeed, removes it.
The following scheme should be
followed for the selectivity or back-up
protection decision:
 determine the maximum short-
circuit current at the installation
point,
 check whether the selected protec-
tive devices can master this short-
circuit current alone or with back-
up protection using upstream
protective devices,
 check at which current the down-
stream protective devices and the
upstream protective devices are
selective to each other.
Selectivity and back-up protection
exemplified for a data center
Computer centers place very high
demands on the safety of supply. This
is particularly true for the consumers
attached to the uninterruptible power
supply and ensure a reliable data
back-up in case of a fault and service
interruption. Those solutions provid-
ing selectivity and back-up protection
relying on the previously mentioned
SIMARIS design configuration tool
should be presented at this point.
Photo 8.3/1 shows a subdistribution
system in SIMARIS design. A SENTRON
3WL circuit-breaker as outgoing
feeder switch of the main distribution
is upstream to the subdistribution
system shown here. The following
figures show the selectivity diagrams
for the considered subdistribution
system automatically generated by
SIMARIS design (Photo 8.3/2). SIMARIS
design specifies the characteristic
curve band of the considered circuit
(yellow lines), the envelope curves of
8/3 8
Photo 8.3/1: Subdistribution in a data center, display in SIMARIS design
all upstream devices (blue line) and all
downstream devices (red line). In
addition to the specification of the
minimum and maximum short-circuit
currents, any selectivity limits for the
individual circuits are also specified.
Photo 8.3/3 shows the selective grad-
ing of the 3WL circuit-breaker from the
main distribution system and the group
back-up fuse (125 A LV HRC fuse) of
the subdistribution system. The con-
sumers critical for functional
endurance which are installed in a
redundant manner in the subdistribu-
tion system should not be protected
with the same back-up fuse but rather
be assigned to different groups.
The selectivity diagram shows the
circuit diagram of a single-phase
consumer in the subdistribution
system. This circuit diagram is pro-
tected with a 10 A miniature circuit-
breaker with characteristic C and for a
8/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
maximum short-circuit current of current (Isel kurz) the protective devices
9,719 kA selective for the 125 A are selective to each other.
group back-up fuse.
The same subdistribution system also
contains an example for back-up
protection. Photo 8.3/4 shows the
selectivity diagram for the combina-
tion of the group back-up fuse with a
10 A miniature circuit-breaker of the
characteristic B. Up to the breaking
capacity of the 15 kA miniature cir-
cuit-breaker, the two protective
devices are selective to each other.
Above this value, the current is limited
by the fuse and the miniature circuit-
breaker protected by a fuse; both
devices trip.
SIMARIS design automatically gener-
ates these characteristic curves to
provide exact information about the
maximum and minimum short-circuit
currents of the associated circuit.
Photo 8.3/4 also shows up to which
 Subdistribution Systems

Photo 8.3/2: Selectivity of the group back-up fuse to the upstream Photo 8.3/3: Selectivity of the group back-up fuse / miniature circuit-diagram
protective devices combination

Photo 8.3/4: Back-up protection of the group back-up fuse / miniature

circuit-breaker

8/5 8

8.4 Small Distri-
bution Boards and
Wall- or Floor-
Mounted Distri-
bution Boards
All power consumers of a residential
building, an administrative building or
a factory should be supplied reliably
with electricity. In accordance with
the operational requirements for all
network nodes, low-voltage
switchgear, low-voltage distribution
boards or controlgear should be
configured so that they satisfy the
associated conditions of their site of
installation, and from which both the
connected consumers and also the
cable and wires are switched, pro-
tected and monitored.
The following items are particularly
important for the configuration:
Ambient and installation
conditions
Mechanical stress
 Degree of protection in accordance
with DIN EN 60529 Direct contact
protection, dust and water protec-
tion
 Ambient temperature and climatic
conditions
 Corrosion exposure
 Type of installation and fastening
(e.g. free-standing, wall attach-
ment)
 Cover or doors, possibly transparent
or non-transparent
 Dimensions, maximum permitted
exterior dimensions of the
switchgear
8/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Maximum permitted dimensions of
the switchgear for transport and
 Protection against direct contact for
installation on site
 Cable ducts, possibly base cover
 Cable entry
 Type of cable installation (cable
 Protection against indirect contact
duct, racks and similar)
 Device installation (fixed or inserts
or withdrawable units for fast
replacement)
 Accessibility of the devices: parts to
be accessed during operation, such
as fuses, miniature circuit-breakers,
etc., should be grouped and
arranged within the switchgear
assemblies so they are accessible
(e.g. using a quick-acting cover).
Contactors and fuses should be
placed in separate enclosures.
Type of installation, accessibility
So that the most economical construc-
tion can always be selected, before
specifying construction measures, the
characteristics of the switchgear and
distribution boards should be com-
pared with each other and then a
decision made. Such characteristics
include:
 Open or closed construction (type
of operating area)
 Self-supporting installation: free-
standing in the room, on a wall, or
in a niche
 Non-self-supporting installation: for
fastening on the wall, on a mount-
ing structure or in a wall niche
 Type of access, e.g. for installation,
maintenance and operating
 Dimensions (height, depth, width)
 Notes concerning construction
measures
Protective measures
an open door in the installation
distribution board using contact
protection covers, IP30 degree of
protection
on all frame and covering parts with
safety class 1 (protective conductor
connection)
– Safety class 1
(protective conductor connection)
Encapsulations and parts of the
weight-bearing metal structure
are protected against corrosion
using a high-quality surface-
protecting coating. Metal parts for
switchgear and distribution
boards must be included in the
protective measures using a
protective conductor.
– Safety class 2
(protective insulation)
If switchgear or distribution
boards of safety class 2 are used,
ensure that the protective insula-
tion applied in the factory is not
penetrated by conducting metal
parts such as switch shafts, metal-
lic conductor glands, etc. The
inactive metal parts within the
protective insulation, such as
mounting plates and housing of
devices may never be connected
with the PE conductor or PEN
conductor, even when they have a
PE connection terminal. If covers
or doors can be opened without a
tool or key, all touchable conduc-
tive parts inside must be placed
behind an insulated cover in the
IP2X degree of protection. These
covers may only be removed
using a tool. The looping-through
of PE conductors is permitted.

Space requirements for modular
installation devices , busbars and
terminals
For the configuration of rack-mounted
modular installation devices in encap-
sulated switchgear and distribution
boards, in particular for box-type
distribution boards, in addition to the
space required for the devices them-
selves, sufficient space must be pro-
vided for:
 The voltage distance (clearance in
air) to the encapsulation
 The heat dissipation of the individ-
ual devices
 Any required blow out space for
switchgear
 The wiring
 The connection of the outer ingoing
and outgoing cables (connection
space)
 The device identification
A clear designation of the associated
devices should be used both in the
project documentation and in the
completed switchgear assemblies.
This is true, for example, also for the
association of the fuses to the circuits.
Meters/counters and measuring
instruments should be placed at eye
level. All devices requiring manual
intervention should be placed at arm's
reach (roughly at a height between
0.6 and 1.8 m).
* Also see Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution
SIRIUS – SENTRON – SIVACON; Catalog LV 1
Order no. E86060-K1002-A101-A6
Subdistribution Systems
Number of main circuits
2 and 3
4 and 5
6 to (including) 9
10 and more
Table 8.4/1: Rated load factors (DIN VDE 0660-500 Section 4.8, Table I)
Under some circumstances restric-
tions that result from the use of a
device in an encapsulation must be
observed, e.g. for the rated current
and the switching capacity.*
Wiring space
After installing the switchgear and
distribution boards, the available
wiring space for outgoing cables and
wires both inside and outside is deci-
sive for the efficient execution of the
wiring work. A particularly small
encapsulation would initially appear
to be very economical to purchase,
however, the restrictive wiring space
can require such a high installation
cost for the initial and later connec-
tion of cables that the low price
advantage becomes lost.
For cables with a large cross section
ensure that sufficient space for
spreading out the cores and routing is
available.
Special requirements
Special requirements, such as explo-
sion protection, protection against
aggressive atmospheres and shocks
must be taken into consideration in
accordance with the appropriate
specifications or as additional agree-
ments.
Rated load factor
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
Selection of the electrical equip-
ment
For the equipment installed in the
switchgear assemblies, the following
must be considered:
 Its associated device specifications
 The suitability with regard to the
rated data, in particular short-circuit
strength and capacities
 Current-limiting protective devices
may need to be installed.
Rated load factor
To prevent an uneconomical over-
dimensioning of the housing and
resources, we recommend the use of
the rated load factors (Table 8.4/1)
(unless other data has been agreed).
The rated load factor must be consid-
ered for the determination of the test
currents for the temperature-rise test
and for the dimensioning of the
current paths and devices of the
infeed and busbars.
Electrical equipment in switchgear
and distribution board systems dissi-
pate their heat losses to the surround-
ing air. To ensure the correct function
of this equipment, the prescribed limit
temperatures in switchgear must be
observed.
DIN VDE 0660-507 contains calcula-
tion methods, applications, formulas
and characteristic data for maintain-
ing the upper limit temperature.
8/7 8
The observance of the upper limit
temperature within switchgear cabi-
net systems is proved using
 EN 60439-3 / DIN VDE 0660-504
Start
 IEC 60890 / DIN VDE 0660-507
These standards contain calculation Selection of an appropriate switchgear
methods, applications, formulas and cabinet system with adequate space for
characteristic data for maintaining the the resources to be installed (e.g. using
the catalog)
upper limit temperature. Figure 8.4/1
shows the general procedure. The
correct selection of the various Determine the effective heat loss Pv eff in
devices to be installed plays a signifi- in the switchgear cabinet system
cant role for the dimensioning of
subdistribution boards. The following
Specify the permitted upper air
checklists provide help for this impor- temperature ∆t in the switchgear cabinet
tant decision. The required parame- system (e.g. ∆t = 20 K)
ters from the checklist allow the Caution: observe the max. operating
temperature of the installed equipment!
correct device selection for each
circuit.

Select a larger switchgear cabinet

No or divide into two or more
Selection/specification,
panels.
whether the selected switchgear
cabinet system is suitable for Other changes to influence the
Ps ≥ ∑Pv radiating heat loss Ps
(switchgear cabinet) by
– air conditioning of the
switchgear cabinet system
Yes
– low-loss construction*

Proof of observance of the upper * Increase the Cu cross-section for

temperature limit busbar systems and wiring of the
switchgear

End

Ps Max. heat radiation loss of the switchgear cabinet

∑Pv Total of the heat loss of the installed switchgear and lines

Figure 8.4/1: Steps for determining and maintaining the limit temperature

8/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Subdistribution Systems

8.4.1 ALPHA SELECT

Planning and configuration
support from the TIP tool platform
ALPHA SELECT is the tool for the
electrician and switchgear panel
builder for building installations.
Support is provided for planning,
configuring, cost estimating, tender-
ing, order processing and the con- Photo 8.4/1: Selection of the distribution board Photo 8.4/2: ALPHA distribution board assembly
system
struction of the various distribution
boards.
ALPHA SELECT allows the fast and
simple selection of SIMBOX small
distribution boards, ALPHA meter
cabinets, ALPHA distribution boards
and ALPHA 8HP insulated distribution
systems, including quick-assembly
kits, assembly kits, the associated
accessories and BETA modular instal-
lation devices. Products can also be Photo 8.4/3: ALPHA 8HP insulated distribution Photo 8.4/4: ALPHA 400-ZS meter cabinet
board assembly
chosen from the A&D EGH catalog and
the CA01 electronic catalog. ALPHA
meter cabinets can be chosen in
accordance with the regulations of
the local power supply network opera- the printing of drawings with frame in
the formats DIN A3 or DIN A4 are
8.5 Circuit
tors or also based on technical
criteria. available as output. Protection Devices
The possibility to hide and display It is also possible to include the con- The correct selection of the various
struction structure in the data output. devices to be installed plays a signifi-
levels (layer display) gives the user an
This can be used, in principle, as a cant role for the dimensioning of
overview of the equipment assign-
construction plan for building up the subdistribution boards. The following
ment of the distribution board. In the
checklists provide help for this impor-
resulting bill of materials, discounts distribution board.
tant decision. The required parame-
for individual items or products can be ters from the checklist allow the
assigned and markups for the installa- You can obtain further information
correct device selection for each
tion effort calculated. The output to a from your Siemens contact.
circuit.
project can be customized as required. ALPHA SELECT can be downloaded
Electronic export formats (bill of from
materials as CSV file, graphics as
WMF, complete output as PDF), the www.siemens.de/alpha-select
printing of a tender (optionally with –> Support
or without integrated drawings) and

8/9 8
Checklist

Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker (RCCB)

Project name
.........................................................................................
Owner/developer
.........................................................................................
Planning engineer
.........................................................................................

Power supply system

(RCCB cannot be used in the TN-C system) ........................

Rated voltage
Un of RCCB c 230 V
c 400 V
c 500 V
Rated current
In of RCCB c 16 A
c 25 A
c 63 A
c 80 A
c 125 A

Rated residual current

I∆n of the RCCB
Protection against direct contact (additional protection) c ≤ 30 mA
Protection against indirect contact (fault protection) c ≥ 30 mA
Fire protection (for ground fault current) c ≤ 300 mA

Disconnect condition
in the TT system satisfies the grounding resistance ........................

Number of poles c 2
c 4

Selectivity requirements c Yes c No

Tripping behavior of the RCCB
Instantaneous – standard c
Short-time-delay – super resistant c
Selective – staggered arrangement of RCCBs c
Back-up fuse checked / back-up protection ensured ........................ / ........................

8/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Subdistribution Systems

Checklist

Residual current form

Tripping range / sensitivity of the residual current device
Type A – pulse-current sensitive c
Type B – universal current sensitive, SIQUENCE c
Special installation requirements
Harsh environmental conditions, SIGRES c
Frequency range 50 to 400 Hz c

Possibly miniature circuit-breakers selection – see CB checklist ..............................................................................

Result of residual-current-operated circuit-breaker selection ..............................................................................

Series Rated residual current [mA] Pins Rated current [A] Characteristic
Special versions
500 V 2-pin Frequency 50-400 Hz SIGRES 24…125 V AC N-connection
SIQUENCE SIQUENCE
Type A* S K left
10 30 100 300 500 1000 1P+N 3P+N 3P+N 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 Type A* Type B K Type B S 100/125 A
1 1 1 -6
3 1 1 2 4 6 7 -6
4 6 1 2 4 6 7 -6
4 1 6 -8
6 1 4 6 7 -8
3 1 2 4 6 -6 KK01
6 1 6 -6 KK01
3 4 6 1 8 5 -6 KK
3 1 1 -6 KK13
3 1 2 4 6 7 -6 KK12
3 6 4 2 4 6 7 5 -6
4 4 4 6 5 -6
7 4 2 4 6 5 -6
5SM3 4 4 4 6 -8
6 4 4 6 7 5 -8
7 4 5 -8
8 4 6 -8
3 6 4 2 4 6 7 -4
6 7 4 6 7 -4 -5
3 6 5 2 4 6 -6
3 6 4 2 4 6 7 -6 KL
3 4 2 4 -6 KK03
3 4 2 4 6 7 -6 KK12
3 4 2 4 6 -6 KK01
6 4 4 6 7 -6 KK01
6 4 4 6 -6 KK12
6 4 6 -8 KK12 KL

5SM3 3 4 4 -6 KK01
K
FI 30 mA 4-pin 63 A Type A

Type A: AC and pulse- S K

* current-sensitive fault Version for selective tripping Super-resistant version
current acquisition

8/11 8
Checklist

RCCB module

Project name
.........................................................................................

Owner/developer
.........................................................................................

Planning engineer
.........................................................................................

Power supply system

(RC cannot be used in the TN-C system) ........................

Rated voltage

Un of the residual current device c 230 V

c 400 V

Rated current

In of the residual current device c 0.3 to 16 A

c 0.3 to 40 A
c 0.3 to 63 A
c 80 to 100 A

Rated residual current

I∆n of the residual current device

Protection against direct contact (additional protection) c ≤ 30 mA

Protection against indirect contact (fault protection) c > 30 mA

Fire protection (for ground fault current) c ≤ 300 mA

Disconnect condition

in the TT system satisfies the grounding resistance ........................

Number of poles c 2

c 3

c 4

Selectivity requirements c Yes c No

Tripping behavior of the RCCB

Instantaneous – standard c
Short-time-delay – super resistant c
Selective – staggered arrangement of RCCB modules c

8/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Subdistribution Systems

Checklist

Residual current form

Tripping range / sensitivity of the residual current device
Type A – Pulse-current sensitive c

Miniature circuit-breaker selection – see MCB checklist .........................................................................................

Result of RCCB module selection .........................................................................................

RCCB module: selection table for order no. details

Series Rated residual current [mA] Pins Rated current [A] Characteristic Special
construction

10 30 100 300 500 1000 2 3 4 6...16 1) 6...401) 6...631) 80...1002) Type A 3) Type A 3) S K
1 2 1 -6
3 6 2 3 4 2 -6
3 4 6 7 2 3 4 5 -6
3 2 3 4 2 5 -6 KK01
5SM2 6 2 2 5 -8
6 7 8 3 4 5 -8
3 6 2 4 7 -6
6 2 4 7 -8
8 4 7 -8

5SM2 3 4 2 -6 KK01
Order no. (MLFB) e.g.

RCCB module 30 mA 4-pin 6..40 A K

1)
2 pins = 2 MW (36 mm); 3 and 4 pins = 3 MW (54 mm); plus the pole number per CB each 1MW
2)
2 pins = 3.5 MW (63 mm); 4 pins = 5 MW (90 mm); plus the pole count per CB each 1.5MW
3)
Type A: AC and pulse-current-sensitive fault current acquisition

S Version for selective tripping

K Short-time delayed, super-resistant

8/13 8
Checklist

RCBO – residual-current-operated circuit-breaker with integral

overcurrent protection
Project name
.........................................................................................
Owner/developer
.........................................................................................
Planning engineer
.........................................................................................

Power supply system

(RCBO cannot be used in the TN-C system) ........................

Rated voltage
Un of the RCBO c 230 V
c 400 V
Rated current
In of the RCBO c 6A
c 8A
c 10 A
c 13 A
c 16 A
c 20 A
c 25 A
c 32 A
c 40 A
c 100 A
c 125 A

Rated residual current

I∆n of the residual current device
Protection against direct contact (additional protection) c ≤ 30 mA
Protection against indirect contact (fault protection) c > 30 mA
Fire protection (for ground fault current) c ≤ 300 mA

Disconnect condition
in the TT network satisfies the grounding resistance ........................

Conditions/consumers in the circuit

Outlets, non-stationary consumers c B
Motors, lamps c C
Transformers, inductances, capacitors c D

Number of poles c 2
c 4

8/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Subdistribution Systems

Checklist

Selectivity requirements c Yes c No

Tripping behavior of the residual current device
Instantaneous – standard c
Short-time-delay – super resistant c
Selective – staggered arrangement of RCBOs c
Back-up fuse checked / back-up protection ensured ........................ / ........................

Residual current form

Tripping range / sensitivity of the residual current device
Type A – Pulse-current sensitive c
Type B – Universal current sensitive, SIQUENCE c

Result of RCBO selection .........................................................................................

RCBO: selection table for order no. details

Pin Switching CB characteristic / RC type Version Rated current
Rated residual current [mA]
capacity [kA] [A]
Series
Standard
10 30 300 1000 1+N 2 4 6 10 B/ Type A1) C/ Type A1) C/ Type A1) K B/ Type A1) S C/ Type A1) S C/ Type B2) K D/ Type B2) K C/ Type B2) S D/ Type B2) S (230 V or 400 V) 480 V 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 100 125

1 5 4 -6 -7 KK 06 10 13 16
3 6 5 6 4 -7 KK 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40
3 6 5 6 4 -6 KK 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40
3 5 4 -7 VK 10 16 20 25
3 6 2 4 -6 -7 KK 82
3 2 4 -6 -7 FA 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40
5SU1 6 2 4 4 -6 -7 WK 82
3 6 8 4 4 -6 -7 KK 82
3 6 7 4 -7 AK 81 82
3 6 7 4 -8 AK 81
6 7 4 -7 CK 81 82
6 7 4 -7 BK 82
6 7 4 -8 BK 81

5SU1 3 5 6 -6 KK 10
Order no. (MLFB) e.g.

RCBO 30mA 1+N 6 kA A-Char. 10 A

1)
Type A: AC and pulse-current-sensitive fault current acquisition

2) SIQUENCE Type B: residual current acquisition for: AC, pulse currents und smooth DC fault currents

S Selective

K Short-time delayed, super-resistant

8/15 8
Checklist

Miniature circuit-breaker (MCB)

Project name
.........................................................................................
Owner/developer
.........................................................................................
Planning engineer
.........................................................................................

Rated cross section of the circuit ........................ mm2

Iz in accordance with DIN VDE 0298 T4
(Observe reduction factors with regard to the installation type, bundling and ambient temperature)

Rated current of the MCB ........................ A

Short-circuit current at the mounting location of the MCB

Site of installation accessible for ordinary people (EN 60898)
Icn of the MCB c 6 kA
c 10 kA
c 15 kA
Site of installation not accessible for ordinary people – Industry (EN 60947-2)
Icn of the CB switch c 25 kA

Conditions/consumers in the circuit

Recommendation for the tripping characteristic
Semiconductor, long cable lengths c A
Outlets, non-stationary consumers c B
Motors, lamps c C
Transformers, inductances, capacitors c D

Number of conductors
(Number of poles, 1, 1+N, 2, 3, 3+N, 4) ........................

Selectivity requirements c Yes c No

Back-up protection ensured ........................

Protection measure / disconnect condition ........................ / ........................

If required,selection of the RCCB –
See RCCB checklist .........................................................................................

Result of the miniature circuit-breaker selection .........................................................................................

8/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Subdistribution Systems

Checklist

Rated Rated current In of the Iz (line)

cross-section qn MCB for protection of Permitted continuous load current for
2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load 2 conductors under load 3 conductors under load
mm2 A A A A

1.5 16 16 19.5 17.5

2.5 25 20 27 24
4 32 32 36 32
6 40 40 46 41
10 63 50 63 57
16 80 63 85 76
25 100 80 112 96
35 125 100 138 119

Table 8.5/1: Assignment of miniature circuit-breakers to conductor cross-sections

Example: Ribbon cable, multi-core line on or in the wall, installation type C*) at + 30 ºC ambient temperature

* Installation type C in accordance with IEC 60364-5-52 / DIN VDE 0298-4.

The lines are attached so that the separation between them and the wall
surface is less than 0.3-times the external diameter of the lines.

Series Depth [mm] Switching capacity [kA] Pins Rated current [A] Char. Suffix

Icn Icu *_ 1+N in

55 70 6 10 15 25 1 2 3 4 1+N 1MW 3+N 0.3 0.5 1 01. Jun 2 3 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 A B C D
5S J*_ 6 1 2 3 5 10 13 16 20 -6 -7 KS
Y 6 1 02 04 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -6
Y 6 2 3 4 5 6 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -6
5S Y 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 14 05 01 15 02 03 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -7 -8
Y 6 0 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 -6
Y 6 0 02 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 -7
Y 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 01 15 02 03 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -5
Y 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 -6
5S
Y 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 14 05 01 15 02 03 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 -7
Y 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 14 05 01 15 02 03 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -8
Y 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -6
5S
Y 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 14 05 01 15 02 03 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -7 -8
5S Y 8*_ 1 2 5 14 05 01 15 02 03 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -7 -8
Y 5*_ 1 02 04 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -6
5S Y 5*_ 2 06 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -6
Y 5*_ 1 2 14 05 01 15 02 03 04 06 08 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 -7
P 4 1 2 3 4 80 91 92 -6 -7
5S P 4 1 2 3 4 80 91 -8
P 5*_ 1 2 3 4 80 91 92 -7

5S Y 4 1 16 -7

Series 70 mm 10 kA 1-pin 16 A C-Char Suffix

*_ Types with special construction for residential buildings

*_ Series with high switching capacity up to 70 kA in accordance with EN 60947-2

*_ Universal current version

8/17 8
Checklist

Fuses

Project name
.........................................................................................
Owner/developer
.........................................................................................
Planning engineer
.........................................................................................
(observe standards, certifications, approvals)

System voltage
AC DC
up to 400 V c c
up to 500 V c c
up to 690 V c c
> 690 V c c
Utilization category
gG – line protection, general protection .........................................................................................
aM – motor circuits, switchgear protection .........................................................................................
quick – line protection, general protection .........................................................................................
slow – line protection, general protection .........................................................................................

aR/gR/gS semiconductor protection super quick, see SITOR checklist

Rated voltage of the fuse AC ........................ V DC1 ........................ V

Short-circuit current at the mounting location ............................. kA

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the fuse AC ........................ kA DC1 ........................ kA

System Size Rated current strength

NH 000, 00, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 4a 2–1,250 A

D (DIAZED) DII, DIII, DIV, NDz 2–100 A

D0 (NEOZED) D01, D02, D03 2–100 A

Cylinder fuses 10 x 38, 14 x 51, 22 x 58 2–100 A

Selectivity requirements tested ........................

Protection measure / shutdown condition tested ........................ / ........................

8/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Subdistribution Systems

Checklist

Installation of the fuse

Devices without switching function .........................................................................................

Fuse holder, fuse socket, fuse bases .........................................................................................

Devices with switching function 2 .........................................................................................

Fuse-disconnectors, fuse switch disconnector,
switch disconnector with fuse .........................................................................................

Have the operating conditions of the selected

protection components been observed? ........................

Is derating required? ........................

Result of the fuse selection .........................................................................................

1 The DC values normally lie below the AC values

2 Observe the rated making and breaking capacity of the switchgear

8/19 8
Checklist

SITOR semiconductor safety fuses

Project name

.........................................................................................

Owner/developer

.........................................................................................

Planning engineer

.........................................................................................

(observe standards, certifications, approvals)

Operating voltage

AC DC

up to 690 V c c
up to 1,000 V c c
> 1,000 V c c

Limit load integral of the object to be protected (i2t) .........................................................................................

Switch-off integral of the SITOR – fuse (i2tA) .........................................................................................

Utilization category

C aR – partial-range semiconductor protection .........................................................................................

C gR – full-range semiconductor protection .........................................................................................

C gS – full-range semiconductor protection

and cable and line protection .........................................................................................

Rated voltage of the fuse AC ........................ V DC1 ........................ V

Short-circuit current at the mounting location ............................. kA

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the fuse AC ........................ kA DC1 ........................ kA

System Size Rated amperage

NH 000, 00, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 4a 16–1,250 A

D (DIAZED) DII, DIII, DIV 16–100 A

D0 (NEOZED) D01, D02 10–63 A

Cylinder fuses 10 x 38, 14 x 51, 22 x 58 1–100 A

Selectivity requirements tested ........................

8/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Subdistribution Systems

Checklist

Installation of the fuse

Devices without switching function .........................................................................................

Fuse holder, fuse socket, fuse bases .........................................................................................

Devices with switching function 2 .........................................................................................

Fuse-disconnectors, fuse switch disconnector,
switch disconnector with fuse .........................................................................................

Direct installation on busbars ........................

Has the derating of the

fuse link – device combination been observed? ........................

Operating conditions
Varying load of the consumer
Varying load factor / derating of the SITOR fuse .........................................................................................
Temperature range
Heat dissipation and cooling adequate .........................................................................................

Result of the fuse selection .........................................................................................

1 The DC values normally lie below the AC values

2 Observe the rated making and breaking capacity of the switchgear

8/21 8
Checklist

Lightning current and overvoltage protection (LCO)

Project name
.........................................................................................
Owner/developer
.........................................................................................
Planning engineer
.........................................................................................

Risk analysis in accordance with DIN EN 62305-2 performed ........................

3-level protection concept with LCO Type 1 / 2 / 3 c
or 2-level protection concept with LCO Type 2 / 3 c
Number of feeding systems / main distribution boards (MD) ....................... items
Mind connection to ground at the infeed / MD!

Total number of subdistribution boards (SD) ....................... items

Mind connection to ground in SD!

Number of the
consumers / final circuits that require special protection ....................... items

Lightning current and overvoltage protection Type 1

Number of poles for TN-C systems c3

for TN-S and TT systems c4

Each MD must be tested whether in addition to the main fuse, an additional back-up fuse
is required for the overvoltage protection device. Where:

Main fuse available?

c Yes > 315 A gG; additional back-up fuse ≤ 315A gG required –
spur line wiring, recommended 125 gG

c Yes ≤ 315 A gG; no additional back-up fuse required –

V wiring

The devices are normally installed in the MD upstream or downstream of the meter.
Installation upstream of the meter requires the agreement of the supply system operator.

Lightning current and overvoltage protection Type 2

Number of poles for TN-C supply systems c3

for TN-S and TT supply systems c4

8/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Subdistribution Systems

Checklist

Each SD must be tested whether in addition to the main fuse, an additional back-up fuse
is required for the overvoltage protection device. Where:

Fuse available?
c Yes > 125 A gG; additional back-up fuse ≤ 125A gG required
c Yes ≤ 125 A gG; no additional back-up fuse required

Lightning current and overvoltage protection Type 3

A Type 3 surge arrester must be used for each end consumer/circuit that requires special protection.
The overvoltage protection devices should be installed as near as possible to the device to be protected.
Number of poles for 1 phase c 2
for all 3 phases c 4

For each Type 3

The surge arrestor must be tested whether in addition to the plant fuse an additional back-up fuse is required for the
overvoltage protection device. Where:
Fuse / CB 25A B/C present?
c Yes > 25 A gG; additional back-up fuse ≤ 25A gG required
c Yes ≤ 25 A gG; no additional back-up fuse required

Result of the device selection for lightning

current and overvoltage protection .........................................................................................

Fig. 8.5/1: Installation of the overvoltage protection equipment in the Fig. 8.5/2: Installation of the overvoltage protection equipment in the TN-C-S
TT system (VDE 0100 T534) system (VDE 0100 T534)

8/23 8
8/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Power Consumers

chapter 9
9.1 Starting, Switching and 9.2 Lighting
Protecting Motors 9.3 Elevator Systems
9 Power Consumers
9.1 Starting,
Switching and
Protecting Motors
For the planning and selection of the
control system and the protection of
motors, the relevant standards and
regulations have to be observed.
These are primarily IEC 60947 (Low-
voltage switchgear and controlgear),
VDE 0100, EN 60204-1 and the stan-
dards for EMC, EN 61000-3-2 and
EN 50082.
If switching devices for motors are
used in an area in which persons
might be endangered, the relevant
regulations (safety regulations for
workplaces) are to be observed.
For further information on the
“Requirements for safety at the work-
place”, please refer to the Federal
Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health at
www.baua.de/baua/index.htm
An overview of the harmonized EU
standards is to be found at
www.newapproach.org
Selection of protective and
monitoring devices
In a motor feeder, the protective
devices have to ensure the protection
of the line and the motor. This can be
accomplished with separate devices or
with a combined device fulfilling both
functions.
Motor protection can be accomplished
with
 an overcurrent release (motor
protection in acc. with IEC 60947),
or
 a temperature sensor (always in the
motor winding), or
 electronic motor protection devices
(SIMOCODE).
9/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Selection of the switching
devices
Configuration
There are the following types of
A combination of centralized and distrib-
uted components is absolutely reasonable.
switching devices: In the case of a compact arrangement of
motors to be switched, the centralized
 Load feeder (protective and
configuration is advantageous.
switching device, mostly circuit-
breaker and contactor) For the wiring of switching devices and
 Motor starter (protective and motors, devices with a standardized
switching device in a casing) connection method such as, for example,
 Soft starter in ISO 23570, Part 2 and 3, are a mainte-
 Frequency converter nance-friendly solution. The individual
components can be rapidly installed and
Except for the load feeder, the
replaced. Standardized interfaces remark-
switching devices are available for a
ably reduce the error rate during installa-
centralized configuration (mostly
tion; moreover, the downtimes during
IP20) as well as for a distributed one
operation are reduced.
(IP54 to IP65).
Device Advantages Disadvantages Bus-capable
Direct starter, reversing High starting torque High starting current Yes
starter (load feeder, Fast start-up
motor starter) AC motors can be operated
Soft starter Starting current is limited Low starting torque Yes
Only three-phase motors
Frequency converter Starting current is limited System perturbations
Speed variable at constant Only three-phase motors Yes
torque
Table 9.1/1: Switching and protective devices for motors
Alternating voltage
Category
AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors: switching on / off during operation
AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors: switching on, plugging, reversing, jogging
AC-53a Controlling a squirrel-cage motor with semiconductor contactors
Direct voltage
Category
DC-3 Shunt motors: switching on, plugging, reversing, jogging,
dynamic braking
DC-4 Series motors: switching on, plugging, reversing, jogging,
dynamic braking
Table 9.1/2: Protective and switching devices according to utilization categories
 Power Consumers

Selection according to utilization In the case of requirements not cov-

categories ered by a category, one speaks about
a mixed operation. For that, an
The utilization categories are defined
approximative calculation of the
in IEC 60947-4-1, VDE 0660-102.
service life of the switching devices * Also see:
These categories are primarily suitable can be carried out.* Siemens AG (Ed.): Switching, Protection and
Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks, 4th
for the switching of motors. Edition, Publicis, Erlangen, 1997
Normal starting CLASS 10 (up to 20 s with 350% In Motor)
The soft starter's output can be the same as that of the implemented motor
Powered
Application Conveyor belts Compressors Small ventilators Pumps Hydraulic pumps
rollerconveyors
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current limiting
– Start voltage (%) 70 60 50 30 30 30
– Starting time (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10
– Current limit value Deactivated Deactivated 4 x IM 4 x IM Deactivated Deactivated

• Torque ramp
– Start torque 60 50 40 20 10 10
– End torque 150 150 150 150 150 150
– Starting time 10 10 10 10 10 10
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode Soft stopping Soft stopping Coasting down Coasting down Pump stop Coasting down

Heavy starting CLASS 20 (up to 40 s with 350% In Motor)

The selected soft starter must have a power class that is 1 class higher than that of the implemented motor
Application Stirrers Centrifugal machines Milling machines
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current limiting
– Start voltage (%) 30 30 30
– Starting time (s) 30 30 30
– Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM

• Torque ramp
– Start torque 30 30 30
– End torque 150 150 150
– Starting time 30 30 30
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down or DC braking

Very heavy starting CLASS 30 (up to 60 s with 350% In Motor)

The selected soft starter must have a power class that is 2 classes higher than that of the implemented motor
Application Large fans Mills Crushers Disk saws/ribbon saws
Anlaufparameter
• Voltage ramp and current limiting
– Start voltage (%) 30 50 50 30
– Starting time (s) 60 60 60 60
– Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM

• Torque ramp
– Start torque 20 50 50 20
– End torque 150 150 150 150
– Starting time 60 60 60 60
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) 80%; 300 ms 80%; 300 ms Deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down

Table 9.1/3: Start-up modes and start-up parameters for soft starters in selected applications

9/3 9

A decisive criterion in the selection of the
switches is the communication capability
of the devices (instabus KNX/EIB,
PROFIBUS, PROFINET, AS-Interface etc.)
and thus the possible integration into
a process control system.
Further points to be considered in the
selection of switching devices are the
switching frequency (operating
cycles/hour) as well as the intermit-
tent service and the start-up mode
(direct on-line starting, soft starting).
The standard decisive to that is
DIN EN 60034-1 Rotating electrical
machines – Part 1: Rating and per-
formance.
This standard applies all rotating
electrical machines except for those
being subject to other standards. In
the rating and selection of rotating
electrical machines, the specification
of the load including start-up, electri-
cal braking, no-load operation and
breaks as well as their duration and
chronological order are especially
important.
Load feeder and motor starter
(direct on-line and reversing
starter)
These devices are a cost-effective
solution for the switching of motors.
They ensure a short acceleration time
and a high starting torque.
There are two variants
 Electromechanical switching
devices
 Electronic (semiconductor) switch-
ing devices
With electromechanical switches, the
operating mode in acc. with DIN EN
60034-1 (continuous, short-time,
intermittent operation, etc.) also has
to be observed. If the on-time of the
motor is short compared with the
start-up time, the load is higher and
the switching device therefore has to
9/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Start-up mode Meaning
Direct on-line With the direct start-up mode set, the voltage at the motor is
immediately increased almost to line voltage upon the start
command. This corresponds approximately to the start
behavior with a contactor.
Voltage ramp The terminal voltage of the motor is increased from a
paremeterizable starting voltage to line voltage within an
adjustable start-up time.
Torque control With torque control, the torque generated in the motor is
linearly increased from a parameterizable starting torque to
a parameterizable end torque within an adjustable torque
starting time.
Voltage ramp + current In combination with the voltage ramp start-up mode, the
limitation starter continuously measures the phase current via an
integrated current transformer. A current-limiting value (IB)
can be set on the soft starter during the motor ramp-up.
When this value is reached, the motor voltage is regulated by
the soft starter in such a way that the current does not
exceed the set value. Current limitation superimposes the
voltage ramp start-up mode.
Torque ramp + current In combination with the torque control start-up mode, the
limitation starter continuously measures the phase current via an
integrated current transformer. A current-limiting value can
be set on the soft starter during the motor ramp-up. When
this value is reached, the motor voltage is regulated by the
soft starter in such a way that the current does not exceed
the set value. The current limitation superimposes the
torque control start-up mode.
Motor heating If IP54 motors are used outdoors, their cooling down leads to
(supporting function) a condensation of water in the motor (e.g. over night or in
winter). This might lead to leakage currents or short circuits,
when they are switched on. In order to heat the motor
winding, a “pulsating” direct current is supplied without the
motor rotating.
Table 9.1/4: Start-up modes for soft starters and their meaning
be dimensioned larger. ated in star-connection during ramp-
up and then switched over to delta-
Since the service life of electro-
connection. Compared to the direct
mechanical switching devices is
switch-on, the starting current is
limited by the number of operating
limited to 2/3.
cycles, it is recommended to use
electronic switching devices in the It has to be ensured that the motor
case of a high number of operating has the required voltage endurance
cycles (continuous switching fre- for the delta-connection.
quency > 200 operating cycles/hour).
Soft starters
Since the inrush currents during the Another option for limiting the start-
start-up of larger motors are very high ing current is the use of soft starters.
with these devices, there are also star- Soft starting has the following advan-
delta startings used for three-phase tages compared with a load
motors. For that, the motor is oper- feeder/motor starter:

 Current peaks during the start-up
are relieved
 Bumpless start-up
 Mechanical stress for the load is
reduced
There must not be any capacitive
elements in the motor feeder
between the soft starter and motor
(e.g. no reactive power compensation
system). In order to prevent any
failures in the compensation system
and/or the soft starter, neither static
systems for reactive power compensa-
tion nor dynamic PFC (Power Factor
Correction) must be used during the
start-up and coasting of the soft
starter.
For the selection of the soft starter it
is important to look into the applica-
tion in depth and take into account
the start-up time of the motor. Long
start-up times mean a thermal load
for the soft starter. With the selection
and simulation software “Win-Soft
Starter”, all Siemens soft starters can
be simulated and selected, taking into
account different parameters, such as
system conditions, motor data, load
data, special application require-
ments, etc. This software is a valuable
tool, its application makes tedious and
extensive calculations for determining
the suitable soft starters obsolete.
Table 9.1/3 suggests sample setting
values and device dimensions; these
are for information purposes only and
not binding. The setting values
depend on the application and have
to be optimized during the commis-
sioning.
Since the soft starter has a reduced
starting torque during ramp-up, it is
not suitable for all applications. The
starting torque of the load has to be
smaller or at the most equal the
starting torque of the motor.
Power Consumers
Coasting mode Meaning
Free coasting With free coasting, the energy supply to the motor is
interrupted via the soft starter upon the cancellation of the
on-command. The motor coasts freely, only driven by the
mass inertia (centrifugal mass) of the rotor and the load.
Torque ramp With torque ramp, the free coasting is extended. This
function is set if an abrupt shut-down of the load is to be
prevented. This is typical for applications with a small mass
inertia or a high load torque (e.g. conveyor belts).
Pump coasting Pump coasting is set if the surge pressure upon the switch-
off of the pump is to be prevented. Any noise nuisance and
mechanical stress to the pipe system and e.g. throttles
located in it is reduced.
Direct current (DC) With DC braking, the free coasting is shortened. For
braking applications with larger mass inertias, use the following
formula: Jlast ≤ 5 x JMotor
Dynamic direct current With dynamic DC braking, free coasting is shortened. For
(DC) braking applications with smaller mass inertias, use the following
Combined braking formula: Jlast ≤ JMotor
Table 9.1/5: Coaching modes for soft starters and their meaning
Typical applications are, for example: age switching frequency is approx.
 Conveyor belts, transport systems: 20 operating cycles/hour.
– jerk-free starting
For soft starters, different start-up and
– jerk-free braking
coasting modes may be parameter-
 Rotary pumps, piston pumps:
ized.
– prevention of pressure surges
– extension of the service life of the The specific regulations of the device
pipe system manufacturer have to be observed for
 Agitators, mixers: the planning. These refer to installa-
– reduction of the starting current tion notes, selection of the higher-
 Large fans: level switching and protective devices.
– protection of the gears and
v-belts
When using fuses as upstream protec-
tive devices semiconductor safety
fuses are to be used. In the case of an
increased switching frequency, the
technical data of the manufacturer are
to be observed at any rate. The aver-
9/5 9
 A further advantage of frequency
Motor torque (M)
converters is the option of regenera-
Nm
tive feedback into the system.
M Direct on-line starting
(maximum torque
that can be generated) Note:
Frequency converters are also avail-
able for single- and two-phase
AC motors.

M Nom 1
Peculiarities of frequency
Parameterizable 2
converters
start voltage
3 Acceleration torque System perturbations
Speed (n)
The harmonic currents and voltages
min -1 generated in the converter distort the
1 M Soft start Motor has run up and is sine curve of the voltage. Since the
Short ramp time Parameterizable in nominal operation ( n Nom ). loads are designed for sinusoidal
2 M Soft start torque starting time The runup is detected and
Longer ramp time the bypass contacts close. voltages, a distortion of the voltage
3 M Load (e. g. Fan) might lead to interferences and even
the destruction of loads and electrical
Fig. 9.1/1: Function principle of voltage ramp / torque curve equipment. Therefore, the respective
standards specify limit values for the
Motor torque (M) individual harmonics as well as for the
Nm total distortion factor THD. Some
M Direct on-line starting standards only state limit values for
(maximum torque
that can be generated) the voltage (e.g. EN 61000-2-2 and
EN 61000-2-4), others for voltage and
current (e.g. IEEE 519).

Parameterizable Due to the continuously increasing

limiting torque
M Nom
Parameterizable
start voltage
1 M Soft start
Torque-controlled and limited
2 M Soft start
Torque-controlled
3 M Load (e.g. Fan)
Fig. 9.1/2: Function principle of torque control
Frequency converters
Frequency converters are used for
adapting the speed in order to protect
the mechanics or to reduce the cur-
rent peaks, as with the soft starter.
Frequency converters are also more
suitable for dynamic processes than
1 evaluation of system perturbations
2
3
Acceleration torque
Time (t)s
Motor has run up and is
Parameterizable in nominal operation ( nNom ).
ramp time The runup is detected and
the bypass contacts close.
soft starters. The speed of the con-
nected motor can be changed contin-
uously and almost loss-free by varying
the voltage and frequency. Moreover,
with a frequency converter, a motor
can be operated beyond the rated
speed without the torque sinking.
use of variable-speed drives, the
becomes more and more important.
The operators of supply networks as
well as those of variable-speed drives
increasingly demand statements on
the harmonic behavior of the drives
so they can check already at the
planning and configuring stage if the
limit values required by the standards
are kept to.
For a limitation of the system pertur-
bations, line reactors or active filters
are to be used. Line reactors are
usually required for
 systems with a high short-circuit
load (no impedance),
 several converters at one common
system connection point,

9/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


IPE without line filter (Category C4)
Ø Ø
IPE
Fig. 9.1/3: High-frequency leakage or interference currents on the line-side PE connection subject to the line filters
 converters in parallel operation,
 converters equipped with line filters
for radio interference suppression.
Active Front End (AFE) converters
generate hardly any system perturba-
tions. They are the ideal solution for
utility companies and operators with
high system requirements. The per-
formance range is 37 to 6,000 kW.
High-frequency radiation and EMC
In accordance with the definition of
the EMC Directive, the electromag-
netic compatibility describes “a
device's capability of working satisfac-
torily in an electromagnetic environ-
ment without causing any electro-
magnetic interferences itself which
would be unacceptable for other
devices existing in this environment”.
As to ensure that the relevant EMC
regulations are complied with, the
devices need to have a sufficiently
high interference immunity on the
one hand and on the other hand the
interference emission has to be lim-
ited to agreeable values.*
The EMC requirements for variable-
speed electrical drives are defined in
EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electri-
cal power drive systems – Part 3: EMC
requirements and specific test meth-
IPE with line filter (Category C3)
IPE
ods. A variable-speed drive system
(Power Drive System, PDS) in the
sense of this standard consists of the
propulsion converter and the electric
motor including the connecting
cables. The driven machine is not part
of the drive system. The EMC product
standard EN 61800-3 defines different
limit values depending on the installa-
tion site of the drive system. For a
reduction of the radiations, line filters
are used. The line filters also limit the
system perturbations. As to ensure
that the line filters achieve the high-
est impact, the installation has to be
made in accordance with the EMC
requirements. So that the interference
currents can flow back to the con-
verter again on a low-inductive path,
a shielded cable between the con-
verter and motor is required. The
motor cable should have a symmetri-
cal conductor design for that.
The magnitude of the high-frequency
leakage currents depends on numer-
ous drive parameters. The most
important influencing factors are the
following:
 Magnitude of the intermediate
circuit voltage UZK of the converter
 Rate of voltage rise du/dt when
switching
Power Consumers
IPE with line filters (Category C2)
IPE
Ø
 Pulse frequency fP of the inverter
 Converter output with or without
motor choke or motor filter
 Characteristic impedance ZW or
capacity C of the motor cable
 Inductivity of the grounding system
and all grounding and shielding
connections
The length of the motor cable should
also be paid attention to. The cable
capacitites which are increasing with
the length, especially with shielded
cables, cause additional current
peaks. This current then has to be
supplied additionally by the frequency
converter, which might lead to a shut-
down of the converter.
* For further information on the EMC:
Siemens AG (Ed.):
Totally Integrated Power
Application Manual –
Basic Data and Preliminary Planning, 2006
9/7 9

9.2 Lighting
9.2.1 People in the
Office – Development of
New Office Forms
In a fast moving world of labor and
business, the spatial situation as well
as the requirements of the persons
using the rooms are changing as
rapidly. At many workplaces,work-
stations are configured and changed
subject to the composition of the
team. Flexible working hours and
flexible job locations, non-territorial
offices and mobile workstations make
new demands on the architecture of
our workplaces. The company build-
ing becomes more and more a com-
munication site, a place where
employees can meet and exchange
information. Coming to the fore are
meeting zones, conference rooms and
catering areas, in which teams can get
together for formal or informal meet-
ings.
Photo 9.2/1: Telenor – non-glaring ELDACON
microprism technology
9/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Administrative buildings have thus
become more complex. Furthermore,
building owners always demand the
homogeneous overall appearance of
their building architecture matching
the corporate design. From the build-
ing face to the reception area, from
cellular to open-plan offices, from the
areas with public traffic to the repre-
sentative manager's office, all zones
have to match the company.
Architects become all-rounders who
have to plan the colors, furniture,
light and climatic conditions of the
whole system. In this system, the
focus is on an efficient work situation.
The employees are to find a motivat-
ing and performance-enhancing
atmosphere. Part of that is of course
also a functional as well as attractive
work and experience environment.
Therefore, flexibility is also required
for the development of lighting con-
cepts. Lighting, after all, is an impor-
tant part of the overall system of
“office building”. It allows for a good
Photo 9.2/2: Infineon Campeon – lighting
solution for flexible room use
vision and well-being at work and
influences the sensual experience
character of the architecture and the
individual rooms.
9.2.2 Light Quality for a
Flexible World of Labor –
Lighting of Workplaces in
Interior Rooms
In recent years, the recommended
standard values for the illuminance of
indoor workplaces have been in-
creased considerably, also because it
is easier today to implement better
vision conditions at work cost-effec-
tively, with improved lamps and their
operating devices, luminaires and
system engineering. This was com-
bined in several DIN 5035 standards
“Artificial Lighting” as well as since
2003 in the European standard DIN
EN 12646 “Lighting of Workplaces”.
In order to ensure the quality of
lighting, the visual function, the visual
comfort and the visual ambiance have
to be harmonized with each other and
with the room use. The visual function
is influenced by the illuminance level
and the glare limitation. For the visual
comfort, especially color rendering
and harmonious brightness control
play a role. The visual ambiance is
determined by the light color, the
light direction and the shadiness.
In order to be and remain flexible, it is
also important today to take measures
ensuring the employees' safety and
health at work, no matter where and
how they work.
 Power Consumers

9.2.3 Light Between the

Priorities of Energy
Efficiency and Light
Quality
The combination of flexibility, health
and well-being is connected with a
holistic concept of light quality – a
concept which takes into account not
only the compliance with the require-
ments of lighting technology but also
esthetic, ergonomic and architectural
criteria as well as the individual emo-
tional expectations of the people.
The separate switchability and dimmabil-
ity of individual components, for exam-
ple, provides for modifiable light
ambiances in interior rooms. Here, the
first lighting component is the room
light which is defined as light reflected
by ceiling and wall areas. The second
component is the directly radiating light
for functional and work surfaces. Switch-
ability and dimmability mean that a
modification of the illuminance and light
colors is achieved. These basic compo-
nents take into account the interaction
of light, room and people.
The following requirements for the
lighting system have to be taken into
account:
Photo 9.2/3: High illuminances with a light
effect similar to daylight
 Adequate illuminance
 Sufficient uniformity of brightness
 Favorable shadow effect
 Prevention of glare
 Matching light color and color
rendering
Adequate illuminance
The illuminance depends on the type
of visual task. Precision work requires
higher illuminances than rough work,
dark objects a higher one than bright
objects. In general, performance and
work pleasure increase with the
illuminance increasing, while acci-
Photo 9.2/4: Light bands running in parallel are
mounted above assembly lines. They
ensure a uniformly high illuminance
level in the assembly area and provide
an incidence of light which prevents
irritating reflected glare on the metal
surfaces.
dents, faults and scrap decrease and
the fatigue diminishes.
The Workplace Regulation “Artificial
Lighting” (ASR 7/3) specifies the
minimum values for the nominal
illuminance depending on the type of
room or work (see Appendix A6).
A rough estimate of the illuminance is
possible with the installed power of
the lighting fittings or lamps. Table
9.2/1a shows how much Watts per
square meter of the base area of a
room have to be installed approxi-
mately when using fluorescent lamps

Nominal Lamp type Factor

Installed power/base area of the room
illuminance
(W/m2) Incandescent lamp 4
(lx)
Halide lamp 1.6
Lights approx. 2 m above Lights approx. 3 m above Lights approx. 4 m above
the area to be illuminated the area to be illuminated the area to be illuminated Fluorescent lamp 1

1,000 50 60 64 High-pressure
0.8
mercury-arc lamp
750 38 45 48
Indium-amalgam
500 25 30 32 fluorescent lamp 0.6
(3-band lamp)
300 15 17 19
High-pressure
200 10 11 13 0.5
sodium-vapor lamp
100 5 6 6
Halide metal-vapor
0.5
50 3 3 4 lamp

Table 9.2/1a: Nominal illuminance subject to the installed power/m2 when using fluorescent lamps Table 9.2/1b: Factor subject to the lamp type

9/9 9
(not 3-band lamps) in order to obtain
the required illuminance. In the case
of an illumination with other lamp
types, the value calculated with this
table has to be multiplied with a
corresponding factor (Table 9.2/1b).
The general illumination is deter-
mined as the average value of evenly
distributed reading points at a meas-
uring height of 0.85 m. In walkways,
the measurement is carried out on the
floor or up to a maximum of 0.2 m
above that at several points along the
way – namely along the center line.
Uniformity of brightness
Favorable viewing conditions exist
when the environment of the work-
station is slightly less bright than the
workstation itself. In accordance with
DIN 5035, the brightness differences
in the closer area of the visual object
are not to be bigger than 1:3. A local
uniformity is achieved with a suffi-
cient number of lamps at not too
great distances to each other and at a
height as large as possible. A bright
wall and ceiling paint adds to that.
Very suitable for that are fluorescent
lamps arranged as light bands. These
should be installed in viewing direc-
tion. With a sufficient, uniform gen-
eral illumination, additional workplace
illumination is often unnecessary. If
each point of the room is to be avail-
able as workplace, a high degree of
uniformity across the entire room is to
be striven for. The illuminance is not
to be less than 60% of the nominal
value at any of the workplaces. Bright-
ness differences due to different
reflectance coefficients in the work-
space are absolutely desired with a
uniform illuminance, they are impor-
tant for information purposes.
9/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Shadow effect Glare
The shadow effect supports the recog- Too high differences in luminance in
nition of an object and its surface the visual field create a glare. A dis-
structure. Therefore, the illumination tinction is made between direct and
should not be too poor in shadows, reflected glare. The reflected glare
the shadow depth (shadiness) should should be prevented especially at
nevertheless be low. The shadow computer-screen workstations. Suit-
edges are to taper off softly. Drop able for that are particularly lamps
shadows – these are points at the whose luminous flux is emitted by a
workplace which do not get any direct larger surface, e.g. fluorescent lamps
light at all – are to be strictly avoided. in connection with covers based on
The use of lamps with a large lumi- the ELDACON technology.
nous surface, supported by the reflec-
Glare can be prevented or reduced by
tion of the light at bright ceilings and
the following:
walls, complies with this requirement.
 Arrangement of the light source as
The differences of the brightnesses in
far outside the viewing direction as
the shadow area and in the adjacent
possible
surface directly irradiated by the light
 Lamps with a scattering casing, e.g.
are usually so big that the visual
grid surfaces, frosted glass, soft-
function is clearly reduced in the
boxes
shadow area.
 Arrangement of the fluorescent
A completely diffuse illumination as lamps light bands in parallel to the
workplace lighting is to be objected to viewing direction
since it does not provide any shadi-  Selection of lamps with a low lumi-
ness and therefore impedes the nance, e.g. fluorescent lamps
recognizability of surface structures. instead of incandescent lamps
The main part of the light at the  Use of matt surfaces (prevention of
workplace is to incident sidewise from reflected glare)
the top in order to prevent annoying
shadows of the body. With workplaces
predominantly oriented to daylight,
the direction of the incidence of light
and the light distribution of the artifi-
cial lighting are to be designed in
accordance with the day lighting, e.g.
same direction of the incidence of
daylight and artificial light.
In only a few areas of application,
the disadvantages of a shadeless
lighting have to be accepted in order
not to put at risk successful work, e.g.
when checking the color differences
in the graphic arts industry. Here,
directed lighting might lead to the
formation of gloss and thus impede Photo 9.2/5 The combination of directly and
the checking. indirectly radiating illumination
creates a comfortable light
atmosphere of room and working
light
 Power Consumers

Light color – color rendering Light color Area of application

The human eye is adapted to the Warm white High red proportion, similar to incandescent lamp
natural sunlight with respect to the Neutral white Suitable for workrooms, offices and sales rooms
color assessment. For this reason, the
Daylight white To be used with high illuminances
objective of the lighting technology
has to be the imitation of the spectral
Table 9.2/2: Light colors for fluorescent lamps in acc. with DIN
composition of daylight by artificial

Lamp Positive Negative

Lamp technology Efficient lamps, e.g. T16 fluorescent lamps, halide Incandescent lamps
metal-vapor lamps

Operating devices Electronic ballast (EB) Magnetic ballast (MB)

Service & maintenance Lamps easy to clean, Lamp with high soiling tendency
low soiling tendency

Operating efficiency Efficient optics, e.g. ELDACON Inefficient optics

Light management Positive Negative

Switchability of the system Switchable in groups Only switchable as a whole

Dimmability of the system Daylight-dependent constant light regulation Fixed artificial light setting

Presence of persons Presence/motion detector switching Static switching

Variable light packages Multipower operation Fixed light packages

Building management technology Integration into facility management system Isolated maintenance group

Daylight Positive Negative

Room surfaces White/bright surfaces, clean rooms Dark surfaces, dirty rooms

Incidence of daylight Daylight can be dosed and directed (e.g. sunblinds) Simple, static darkening (e.g. sunscreen, simple
blinds)
Daylight systems (full-time non-glaring exploitation of the Closed architecture
daylight): prismatic and reflective systems

Table 9.2/3: Quick check for energy efficiency

lighting. An illuminated object can
only appear in its natural color if the
corresponding color components are
contained in the inceding light. The
comfortableness is subject to the light
color. White light creates a more
active day feeling. Decisive for the
light color is the color temperature,
measured in Kelvin (K).
The higher the color temperature, the
larger the blue portion of the light. This
is the reason why incandescent lamps with illuminances of more than
seem more yellow up to red compared 1,000 Lux are required. Different light
to daylight. With fluorescent lamps, the colors in the same or in adjacent rooms
light color depends on the type of are to be avoided.
luminescent material. For workrooms, a
neutral white light color is preferred. Energy efficiency
Bright, warmly toned walls support the
Intelligent lighting starts in the head:
good color impression of a room. With a
energy-conscious building and reno-
very low illuminance, a warm light color
vating – in view of the necessity of
is more suitable than a cold one. In order
economically and ecologically sensible
to receive a rendering similar to daylight,
action, this task concerns all of us.
the color daylight white in connection

9/11 9
 Light management Positive Negative

EM (illuminance) Adequate illuminance Illuminance too low

Glare No glare Direct and reflected glare

Shadiness Balanced shadiness conditions Drop shadows, purely diffuse light

Luminance conditions Balanced Strong bright-dark transitions

Color rendering Natural colors (as in daylight) Falsified colors

Comfortable light atmosphere, e.g. due to a balanced ratio of Unpleasant “cave effect”, unexpected light color
Light atmosphere, light color
direct and indirect light (evening blue)

Individuality User setting options (privacy) Preset, no individual setting

Table 9.2/4: Quick quality check

There is a need for action in most buildings. It is especially important to Technology

cases: the lighting systems either
waste energy or run counter to basic
ergonomic and thus qualitative rules.
The European Directive
2002/91/EC
An important basis for energy saving
is the evaluation of the total energy
performance of buildings, requested
in the European Directive 2002/91/EC
and to be put into national legislation.
In Germany, the prestandard DIN V
18599 on the “Energetic evaluation of
buildings” was developed in prepara-
tion for the energy conservation
ordinance EnEV 2006.
For the opening up of the energetic
savings potential, Siteco has devel-
oped concepts and solutions matched
specially to the implementation of
the EU Directive 2002/91/EC. Light
solutions going hand in hand with
the legislation and at the same time
taking to heart further quality criteria
such as ergonomics, glare effect,
color rendering and illuminance. The
Siteco Energy Quick Check gives first
recommendations in this respect.
The quality of the luminous flux is of
prime importance for new buildings
and the redevelopment of older
make sure that the daylight and A high illuminance level and at the
artificial light form a sensible unit, same time nonglaring light are desir-
increasing the energy efficiency. able but seem to be opposed require-
ments. The ELDACON technology
When selecting the illuminants, it is
combines both by a patented light
important that their light efficiency
conduction method via high-precision
per unit is as high as possible (Lm/W) microprism structures.
and they therefore achieve a good
The light of high-efficient 16 mm
luminosity at a low energy consumption.
fluorescent lamps is distributed non-
glaringly in the room. At the same
9.2.4 Innovative Light time, ELDACON allows for a geometric
Technology
Light conduction
The ELDACON light conduction tech-
nology ensures a high degree of
illuminance at the workplace without
the source of light appearing dazzling.
The light of two T16 fluorescent
lamps (T5) is conducted from the
optical system directly to the work
surface via a precise microprism
structure. Reflected glare and direct
glare are reduced to a minimum. The
luminous surfaces appear homoge-
nous and convey a crystal-clear, bright Photo 9.2/6: The ELDACON light conduction
technology ensures a high degree of
and brilliant esthetic impression. illuminance at the workplace
without the source of light appearing
dazzling

9/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


format which sets new standards in so
far as the height is concerned. ELDA-
CON was developed specially for
trendsetting office lighting solutions.
Application
Happy light for life and work: opti-
mum lighting conditions obey certain
principles subject to the work situa-
tion and room characteristics. The
quality of the artificial light is espe-
cially important at places where there
is hardly any daylight or where people
also work at night. Light solutions
based on the ELDACON technology
create lighting conditions which
increase the job performance and lift
the spirits. And since nowadays flexi-
bility and variation at the workplace
are in demand, lamps with ELDACON
and the furniture can be arranged in
the room absolutely freely – and that
with a light quality at a constantly
high level. For rooms with high
requirements for the direct glare
limitation, Siteco developed the High
Definition Prismatics (HDP). Apart
from the use in offices, HDP lamps are
most of all suitable for the lighting of
communication areas, workshops,
charge offices, libraries, catering
areas, or waiting zones as well as
classrooms and auditoriums. The HDP
technology is therefore designed for
normative UGR (Unified Glare Rating)
values of 19 or less.
Mirrortec mirror-projector
technology
The principle is simple: the light of a
projector is focused to a facet mirror.
The curved mirror surfaces reflect the
light non-glaringly to the surface to
be illuminated. Siteco first imple-
mented this technology under the
name “Mirrortec” and has developed it
further for a number of applications in
the meantime.
Mirror-projector systems consist of
the following:
Photo 9.2/7: Light conduction via Mirrortec
technology
 A mirror as (facet) secondary
reflector
 At least one high-power spotlight
 A pole or system beam
Projector
In order that the light exactly hits the
mirror or reflection surface and does
not radiate beyond that, the projec-
tors need to have both a bundling
characteristic and a high degree of
efficiency.
Mirror reflector
With the reflection via convex or
concave reflector facets, the light can
be distributed very exactly.
Aluminum-coated calottes are used as
reflector material.
Fresnel technology
For an exact light distribution as well
as maintenance and installation,
Siteco developed new reflection
surfaces based on vaporized
microstructures. This Fresnel technol-
ogy allows for reducing three-dimen-
sional mirror facets to almost two-
dimensional structures. Reflectors
with 30 to 40 mm high facets can
thus be replaced by a 2 mm thin
plastic plate made of polymethyl
Power Consumers
Photo 9.2/8: Conventional reflector technology
(left) – microstructure of the
Fresnel mirror (right.)
methacrylate (PMMA) – the reflector
is thus almost plane.
An anti-scratch coating ensures long-
term protection; moreover, the
smooth surface of the reflection
surface can be easily cleaned. At the
same time, reflectors in Fresnel tech-
nology are a compact, easy-to-install
solution with an exact and uniform
light distribution. The mirror with the
plane PMMA microstructure is precon-
figured for the most different lighting
situations. The material is very thin
and light. The reflection surface is
brilliant and conveys a high value.
The microstructure allows for new,
fascinating design options for the
light fitting, for light and shadow as
well as for the light distribution. With
the Fresnel technology, the distribu-
tion around the pole known from the
lighting planning is an ideal quadrati-
cally illuminated surface. High-preci-
sion illumination is no problem with
this technology.
Application
Since the light source and reflector
are separated, the mirror-projector
systems offer a variety of options in
large rooms and also outdoors –
9/13 9
Photo 9.2/9: Barajas airport, Madrid: here, the
Fresnel technology was used
successfully for the first time.
Richard Rogers' design was about a
ceiling doing without any revision
areas. A flat and light secondary
mirror in the skylights performs the
illumination of the terminal areas.
functional as well as esthetical. There-
fore, the mirror-projector technology
is more and more often used where
sophisticated and architecturally inte-
grated light solutions are demanded.
Daylight systems
In architecture, the natural daylight is
rated high. In architectural concepts,
this appears with an increased use of
the daylight via fully glazed fronts,
glass-roofed inner courtyards and
skylights. This development is carried
by realizations on the human well-
being in the daylight and its health
effect as the pulse generator for the
biological rhythm. Various aspects of
energy saving also play a role here.
At the same time, the increased use of
the daylight results in increased
requirements for the sun protection of
a building and the glare protection for
workplaces. Daylight systems direct
diffuse light into the depth of the
buildings and create a uniform illumi-
nance in the room. They protect
9/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Photo 9.2/10: New country house in Tyrolia,
Innsbruck: the daylight reaches
even the most bottom floors by
using a mobile prism system and
micro sunscreen rouvers.
against direct solar radiation and thus
against a high entry of heat energy,
especially in the summer months.
After all, they prevent glare at the
workplace via luminance reduction
and allow for a high-quality illumina-
tion of computer-screen workstations.
Fundamental idea
The light of the sun is a basic require-
ment for any life. It determines our
rhythm of life and supports the well-
being. Daylight imparts important
knowledge on climate, space and time.
Only in the daylight can we see objects
in their natural color. Light and shadow
create space but also point up the time
over the day and year. Nevertheless,
daylight also means heat which leads
to unpleasant room temperatures
especially in the summer. It has
extreme variations in brightness which
are hard to compensate for. The high
daylight densities create glare which
especially impairs work at computer
screens. Daylight systems exploit the
advantages of the daylight and com-
pensate for its disadvantages. They
Photo 9.2/11: The plenar hall in the
Maximilianeum, Munich: a highly
effective, prismatic daylight
system was installed in the
470 m2 glass roof. It reflects the
“hot” direct sunlight and thus
prevents any glare effects and an
impairment of the room climate.
make daylight calculable without
destroying its information content.
System advantages
 Daylight systems create a comfort-
able room climate via
– limitation of the room heating in
the summer,
– limitation of the glare without
darkening the room,
– improvement of the light distribu-
tion.
 Daylight systems help to save
energy via
– reduction of the on-times of
lamps,
– low expenditure for ventilation
and air-conditioning.
 Daylight systems offer new creative
options.
The reasonable integration of the
daylight not only reduces the energy
consumption but also increases our
well-being at the workplace. Natural
and artificial light complement one
another in terms of a comfortable,
harmonic atmosphere.
 Power Consumers

LED – the new light source white. With that, LEDs today provide
light efficiencies higher than those of
A new light source establishes itself
halide lamps. In the near future, LEDs
step by step in more and more light
will be available with ratings in the
applications: the light-emitting diode
range of 100 lm/W and will thus
(LED). The luminous semiconductor
almost reach the power of fluorescent
chip has already established itself for
lamps.
example in the dashboard lighting of
cars, illuminated billboards, or as Since LEDs radiate their light only in a
status and signal displays in electric half space and conventional light
and electronic devices. Nevertheless, sources in most cases require an Photo 9.2/12: LEDs in the office area for more
energy efficiency and more
the lighting of traffic facilities, repre- additional reflector which clearly atmosphere: warm-white light
sentative buildings, in department limits the degree of efficiency of these reaches work and action areas
stores or hotels also gains in impor- systems, the actual light efficiency of while daylight-white, cooler light
radiates indirectly to the top. The
tance steadily. LEDs are increasingly the LEDs is far higher than that of external effect of buildings at
used for the illumination of offices conventional light sources. night can be designed with
additional low-power LEDs.
and in the private living area. Special
office lamps with an integrated LED
technology can light with a uniformly
illuminated light surface in any num-
ber of dynamically changing colors.
The color change mode can be set
individually. Flexible tube LEDs set a
purposeful accent by creating curved
lines of colored light and can be
integrated in architectural elements in
this form.
Extraordinary features
The small size of the LEDs results in a
high degree of design freedom in the
development of lamps. The control of
the radiation angle can be imple-
mented very efficiently with small
optics. LEDs are today manufactured
with a light efficiency of up to 75
lumens per Watt (lm/W) in the color

Before After
Retrofitting 4 x 18 W T26, KVGTD 3 x 14 W T16, ECG
Illuminance 490 lx 515 lx
Lamp service life 7,500 h 16,000 h
Operating time p.a. 1,800 h 1,800 h
Connection value 3.31 kW 1.67 kW
Number of lights 36 36
Relative current costs 100% 51%
Energy-saving with better lighting conditions: 49%

Table 9.2/5: Modern energy efficiency with respect to light quality

9/15 9
9.2.5 Room and Light
Types of lighting for offices and
administrative buildings
Light illuminates and stages rooms;
lighting types are tools for that. Apart
from the compliance with technical
and functional rules, standards and
guidelines, lighting is also about
creating an esthetic environment,
generating good moods, and increas-
ing the well-being of the people. The
modern working environment with its
mobile team work, recreation areas
and flat screens requires new light
solutions.
Today, there are numerous light
systems with various light effects
available for good illumination in
office and administrative buildings:
from the classical, directly radiating
recessed luminaire via directly/indi-
rectly radiating surface-mounted
luminaires, pendent luminaires or foot
lamps with a variable light distribution
up to computer-controlled light sys-
tems. When selecting the appropriate
type of lighting, the connection of
visual function, visual comfort and
visual ambiance have to be taken into
account. There are three lighting
concepts used for the illumination of
offices. These concepts can be imple-
mented via different types of lighting.
Lighting concepts
Room-related lighting
Uniform lighting of the entire room: this
is to be preferred if the arrangement of
the workspaces is not known in the
planning phase or if the arrangement of
the workspaces is to be flexible.
Light variants: directly radiating ceiling
light, directly/indirectly radiating pen-
dent light.
Workspace-related lighting
A different illumination of workspaces
9/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
and the immediate surroundings is to
be preferred if several workspaces of a
room have different viewing tasks and
therefore require a different illumi-
nance level. Also suitable if “work
islands” are to be separated from each
other optically.
Light variants: directly radiating
ceiling lights, directly/indirectly radiat-
ing pendent lights, workspace-ori-
ented lights with a special ELDACON
light technology, indirectly radiating
illumination with directly radiating
single-user lamps / foot lamps and
table lamps.
Subarea-related lighting
In addition to a workspace-related or
room-related “basic lighting”, work-
space lights can be used to implement
an illuminance level in a subarea
adapted to the viewing task or individ-
ual wishes. DIN 5035-8 contains
requirements/recommendations for
workspace lights. Based on these
specifications, workspace-oriented
lights with a special ELDACON light
technology, indirectly radiating illumi-
nation with directly radiating single-
user lamps / foot lamps and table
lamps are especially suitable here.
Application examples
Office workplaces
Flexible lighting with a non-glaring
Siteco ELDACON technology for the
Infineon headquarters Campeon, a
center of the information and science
society.
The design and arrangement of the
Campeon buildings reflect Infineon's
ambition as an IT company with a
partly virtual character. A flexible
room design and communication
were the core demands on the interior
design. And also on the lighting:
Siteco's complete solution is based on
the principle of freedom and high-
Photo 9.2/13: Infineon headquarters Campeon
value light quality. The name
Campeon stands for a concept of work
in the future – an open, functional
environment with a campus character
allowing for the fast exchange of
knowledge. Many of the employees
work in teams whose members are
distributed all over the world, working
together via electronic data connec-
tions and staying in the Campeon
often only for a limited time. Due to
changing team compositions and a
flexible arrangement of the furniture,
the decision was made in favor of
lights with ELDACON technology for
the offices.
The light of approx. 6,700 foot lamps
and approx. 1,800 pendent luminaires
with ELDACON technology is con-
ducted from the optical system
directly to the work surfaces via
precise microprism structures – and
that non-glaringly. Each workplace
has a foot lamp standing next to it
which can be freely arranged in the
room – and with a light qualitity at a
constantly high level (Photo 9.2/15).
Together with the foot lamp, the light
modules with an angular aluminum
profile form a creative unit and an
efficient illumination supporting
innovation, i.e. responding to the
light requirements of the individual
persons. All meeting zones in the core

Room-related lighting
Workspace-related lighting
Subarea-related lighting
Photo 9.2/14: The planning of a lighting system requires detailed technical knowledge and a structuring of the building in various areas,
utilizations and requirements.
areas of the modules come up with
the ultra-flat light modules in presti-
gious design, also relying on the
suspended mounting variant. This
solution also allows for a completely
free arrangement of the lights in the
room, irrespective of the arrangement
of the furniture (Photo 9.2/16).
In the computer centers, louvered
lamps with a BAP65 mirror louver
provide for a comfortable room
Power Consumers
atmosphere and at the same time for
high luminances. Translucent, illumi-
nated end caps create an interesting
light effect. The BAP65 mirror louver
with a direct/indirect light distribution
(30% indirect proportion) enriches the
9/17 9
Photo 9.2/15: ELDACON technology … Photo 9.2/16: … for non-glaring light
illumination of the areas surrounding
the workplace. Recessed luminaires
with diffuser optics provide light for
the sanitary facilities.
Industrial workplaces
In the Audi plant in Ingolstadt, modu-
lar light band systems, hall area lights
(4 x 80 W) and modern mirror-projec-
tor technology create very good,
balanced lighting conditions. Refer-
ring to a hall in the car body construc-
tion, 15,900 m2 of logistics and
production area each plus offices,
social rooms and staircases are illumi-
nated energy-efficiently and at the
same time with a high-quality lighting
technology. The assembly areas were
supposed to be illuminated from the
driveways as far as possible in order to
ensure continuous assembly work.
Therefore, the decision was made in
favor of the use of 4-lamp hall area
lights (4 x 80 W) mounted at a height
of eight meters. Thus, assembly areas
with a width of up to eight meters can
be illuminated with 300 lx from both
sides of the driveways. Therefore,
only the storage places and the wider
hall areas or areas with platforms
have to be equipped with additional
assembly line lights (Photo 9.2/17).
9/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
Photo 9.2/17: Modular light band systems
The combined use of DUS assembly
lights and hall area lights in the pro-
duction area as well as the use of light
bands also create balanced lighting
conditions via a high vertical portion
of the light in the logistics area (DUS
IP20) and in the offices (DUS Plus).
In the open, lobby-like architecture of
the offices with the connected stair-
case, the Mirrortec technology
ensures highest degrees of efficiency
and a uniform illumination in the
radiation area. With their high-quality,
reduced design, the projector 400 and
the mirror 5NW139 with Fresnel
technology constitute a formal unit
and allow for an exact definition of
the radiation area. Downlights with
VirtualSource reflector technology
provide an additional visual comfort in
this building area at a high degree of
efficiency (Photo 9.2/18).
Apart from the compliance with the
normative requirements, the lighting
solution with relatively high, uniform
illuminance levels and high vertical
surfaces adds to increasing the well-
being of the employees and to posi-
tively influence the productivity of
their work.
Photo 9.2/18: Mirrortec technology for a
uniform illumination
 Power Consumers

9.3 Elevator ever, this should not be the sense of

Systems
9.3.1 Overview of the
Planning
The timely planning of the conveying
systems for large and complex build-
ings has a great importance for the
total planning. It is often the case that
although elevators complying with
the building regulations and stan-
dards are planned, in many cases a
later traffic analysis states that the
planned elevator capacity is not
sufficient for a satisfactory
conveyance of persons and freight.
Nevertheless, in most cases the plan-
ning has already advanced so far that
the required changes are no longer
possible and no more than compro-
mise solutions can be found. How-
planning.
9.3.2 Configuration of
Elevator Systems
The functionality of a building is
determined most of all by the con-
veyor systems. The correct dimension-
ing and arrangement of passenger or
freight elevators contributes consider-
ably to the attractiveness and rentabil-
ity of the building. OTIS provides
competent and comprehensive con-
sultancy for the selection of the
conveyor system.
Elevators or escalators?
For the conveyance of persons, the
question is when to use elevators,
escalators, or moving walkways
complementing one another.
For overcoming large conveyor
heights, e.g. in office and administra-
tive buildings or hotels, elevators are
used. With high volumes of traffic and
small conveyor heights (department
stores, railroad stations, exhibition
grounds, or airports), escalators and
moving walkways provide a continu-
ous operational readiness and a high
conveyor capability. A practical combi-
nation with elevators for the con-
veyance of older or handicapped
people and baby carriages ensures a
smooth traffic flow.
Determination of the required
conveyor capacity
Especially for complex buildings, the
required conveyor capacity (number
of persons to be transported within a
five-minute interval based on the total
occupancy of the building) should be
determined at an early planning stage
with a traffic analysis. This ensures

Passenger elevators Passenger elevators

Type of building
without machine room with machine room Escalators Moving walkways
Product Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 Gen2 OTIS Individual Bed Freight Goods ele- Small OTIS OTIS OTIS OTIS
Comfort Flex Premier Premier Lux 2000 H eleva- eleva- eleva- vators and goods 506 NCE 513 NPE 606 NCT 610 NPT
recommendation underground
ED tors tors tors elevators elevators

Residential buildings ••• •• •  

Premium residential
buildings • •••  

Existing buildings •• ••• • •  

Office and adminis-

trative buildings •• • ••• ••• ••• •• ••   •••

Hotels •• • ••• ••• ••• •• ••   •••

Hospitals, senior
citizens’ homes • ••• ••• ••• ••   •••
Department stores,
shopping centers • ••• ••• • •• •••   ••• •••
Industrial buildings
and warehouses • • •• •• •••  

Community facilities,
parking garages ••• ••  

Public traffic areas ••• ••• ••   ••• •••

••• Optimal solution •• Just recommendable  Universally applicable systems

Table 9.3/1: Selection criteria for OTIS passenger elevators, escalators and moving walkways

9/19 9
that the planned number and per-
formance (load-carrying capacity,
rated speed and group arrangement)
of the elevator systems assures an
optimum conveyance of persons and
freights in the building.
In Austria, for example, a conveyor
capacity calculation is mandatory.
Basic data for a traffic analysis are the
building type and height, number of
floors and their use as well as the
maximum number of persons in the
building. A simplified traffic analysis
for a project can be carried out with
e*direct = “Online planning” at
www.otis.com. You will receive a first
recommendation for the number and
type of elevators of the OTIS product
range. Furthermore, OTIS provides
personal, individual and competent
support.
Further planning steps
Not only the number and capacity of
the elevators play a role in the eleva-
tor planning. Also the shaft situation,
drive type, door design and control
are to be determined individually.
Moreover, the relevant regulations
and guidelines have to be observed.
9.3.3 Regulations and
Guidelines – Overview
Safety always comes first with eleva-
tors. This applies to the elevator users
as well as to the elevator as a work-
place. In Germany, there are binding
regulations on the erection and opera-
tion of elevator systems. The most
important regulations are described in
the following.
Ordinance on Industrial Safety and
Health (BetrSichV)
The BetrSichV regulates requirements
for the erection and operation of
elevator systems and substantiates
especially the following operator
obligations:
9/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Registration of elevator systems at
the respective authority via a cen-
tral regulatory agency
 Implementation of a safety-related
evaluation (e.g. acceptance of a
new system or inspection of exist-
ing systems)
 Determination of the maintenance
intervals / inspection periods
 Determination of the intended use
of elevator systems
 Notification of the respective
authority in the case of accidents
Elevator Directive (95/16/EC)
European directive (law) regulating
the minimum requirements for eleva-
tors newly put in circulation. This
directive has been implemented in
Germany as the Twelfth Ordinance
Regulating the Equipment Safety Act
(12. GSGV) and in Austria as Ordi-
nance Regulating the Safety of
Elevators (ASV 96).
Machinery Directive (98/37/EG)
European directive (law) for the
erection of, for example, hoisting
platforms and elevators in accordance
with the guidelines for handicapped
persons. In Germany, it has been
implemented as the Ninth Ordinance
Regulating the Equipment Safety Act
(9. GSGV) and in Austria by the Ordi-
nance Regulating the Safety of
Machinery.
EN 81
Safety-related rules for the construc-
tion, erection and operation of eleva-
tor systems.
Building regulations of the federal
states
In Germany and Austria, each federal
state regulates the constructional
implementation such as, for example,
the smoke exhaust openings of eleva-
tor shafts , the engine room design,
when to install an elevator and which
size it has to have. These specifica-
tions differ from state to state.
Federal Water Act (WHG)
This German act states rules, require-
ments and tests which have to be
complied with when handling water-
endangering substances.
Energy Conservation Ordinance
(EnEV)
This ordinance demands a closure of
the building envelope. This means
that, for example, smoke exhaust
openings of elevator shafts must be
closed until the time when an open-
ing is mandatory in the case of a fire.
Sample Directive on Fireproofing
Requirements for Line Systems
(MLAR)
The Directive on Fireproofing Require-
ments for Line Systems (MLAR) is to
be observed when installing the
elevator control in escape and rescue
routes (corridors or staircases). It
demands a separation of the control
via components made of non-com-
bustible material with a (proven) fire
resistance rating of 30 minutes. This is
achieved, for example, with
 a fire-resisting housing of the eleva-
tor control, or
 the installation of the elevator
control in a niche of the building
closed with a fire-resisting door.
Fire protection
European guidelines and the various
building regulations of the federal
states regulate the fire protection in
elevator construction. Measures for
fire protection in elevator systems are
always required when the shaft sepa-
rates fire areas.
Elevator shaft
In accordance with DIN 4102, the
shaft has to be surrounded by walls

corresponding to the fire resistance
rating F90 (and therefore withstand a
fire for 90 minutes). At the same time
this means that glazed elevators do
not comply with the requirements of
fire protection.
It is additionally demanded that the
transmission of smoke to other floors
via the shaft is prevented. This is
achieved via a shaft ventilation; the
EnEV is to be observed for that. In most
cases, a shaft head opening of at least
2.5% of the shaft base or at least
0.1 m2 is considered to be sufficient.
Fire resistance of shaft doors
EN 81-58 constitutes test methods for
the determination of the fire resist-
ance of shaft doors. The objective is to
prevent the propagation of fire via the
elevator shaft.
Shaft doors made of glass are unsuit-
able as fire protection doors.
Elevator car
In order to prevent the propagation of
fire via the elevator car, the material
selection for the lining of the elevator
car is stipulated in an amendment to
DIN 18091:
 The highest permissible amount of
combustible material is 2.5 kg/m2 of
the interior surface of the elevator
car.
 The materials used have to comply
with at least fire protection class B
in accordance with DIN 4102-1.
Firemen's elevators
Apart from the regulations of the
regional fire departments, EN 81-72
states safety rules for the construction
of firemen's elevators. The require-
ments given here substitute the details
of the TRA 200 marked with (F).
Note: In the case of a fire, the fire-
men's elevators are no rescue eleva-
tors for persons within the building,
but are only used by the firemen for
firefighting especially in high-rise
buildings. It is recommended to
contact the responsible fire depart-
ment before installing any firemen's
elevators to be able to observe local,
extended fire regulations.
Behavior of elevators in the case of
fire
EN 81-73 regulates the behavior of
elevators in the case of a fire. The
objective of this standard is to inform
the firemen that no persons are
trapped in the elevators and exposed
to smoke and fire. The general rule is
that elevators must not be used in
case of a fire.
Noise protection
Elevator systems make operating
noise that generates airborne and
structure-borne sound in the building.
In order to achieve a sufficient noise
protection, special demands are made
on the building construction and the
elevator system. In order to imple-
ment a sufficient and at the same
time economically acceptable noise
protection, a close cooperation
between the contractors responsible
for the planning and execution of
construction work and the elevator
manufacturer is required already in
the planning phase.
Note: The OTIS elevator systems
comply with DIN 4109 for housing
technology systems if the shaft walls
have been designed in accordance
with this standard by the customer
and if VDI guideline 2566 has been
observed.
DIN 4109 – noise protection in
building construction
DIN 4109 regulates the permissible
maximum values for noise pressure
levels in buildings and contains speci-
fications for the building construction.
Power Consumers
VDI 2566 – noise reduction in
elevator systems
This guideline consists of two parts
applying to elevators with (Part 1) or
without a machine room (Part 2). In
accordance with that, the elevator
manufacturer is obliged to observe
the specified values for the airborne
and structure-borne sound for the
sound emissions caused by the eleva-
tor system. The objective of this
guideline is also to specify measures
for reducing the propagation of
airborne and structure-borne sound.
VDI 4100 – noise protection in
apartments
This guideline defines higher require-
ments on rooms in need of protec-
tion. In accordance with that, living
rooms or bedrooms should not adjoin
directly to elevator shafts or machine
rooms.
Further regulations and guidelines
The construction and installation of
new elevator systems are regulated by
further laws apart from the ones
stated so far. These are, among others:
DIN EN 81-28
This standard which is valid all over
Europe stipulates features for emer-
gency call systems. It has to be
ensured that an emergency call is
forwarded to a permanently manned
place via a 2-way communication
system and that the trapped person
does not have to take any further
action.
Note: The OTIS REM emergency call
system complies with all require-
ments stated here and at the same
time improves the safety and reliabil-
ity of the elevator system, as it is a
remote monitoring system.
9/21 9
 the safe operation of their elevator
Duty Drive (without control)
Gen2 Comfort kg m/s input power in kW
systems.
4 320 1 3.0 DIN EN 13015
6 500 1 4.4
This standard stipulates the require-
ments a maintenance company
8 630 1 5.1
should fulfill. Only companies certi-
12 920 1 7.8 fied in accordance with this standard
13 1,020 1 8.6
can ensure a qualified maintenance of
elevator systems. OTIS is certified by
Duty Drive (without control) RWTÜV.
Gen2 Premier kg m/s input power in kW
8 630 1 5.8
9.3.4 Configuration of
8 630 1.6 8.6
Escalators and Moving
10 800 1 7.2
Walkways
10 800 1.6 10.5
The functionality of a building is
13 1,000 1 8.7 determined most of all by the con-
13 1,000 1.6 12.8 veyor systems. The correct dimension-
ing and arrangement of escalators
Duty Drive (without control)
Gen2 Premier ED and moving walkways contributes to
kg m/s input power in kW
the attractiveness and thus the
17 1,275 1 11.3
rentability of a building.
17 1,275 1.6 – 1.75 19.1
Areas of application
21 1,600 1 12.4 Due to the different requirements,
21 1,,600 1.6 – 1.75 20.9 escalators and moving walkways are
24 1,800 1 13.2
designed for two areas of application:
industrial buildings (department
24 1,800 1.6 – 1.75 21.9
stores or the like) and public traffic
26 2,000 1 16.3 areas (e.g. railroad stations). The
26 2,000 1.6 24.9
latter makes clearly higher demands
due to longer periods of operation
26 2,000 1.75 26.8
and more severe operational
demands.
Table 9.3/2: Electrical parameters
Determination of the required
conveyor capability
EN 18030 (Draft) equipment of elevator systems. It The required conveyor capability of
This regulation draft is to substitute applies to new as well as to existing escalators and moving walkways
the old DIN 18024/25 as regards systems and is to provide more mobil-
should be determined at an early
elevators. It partly stipulates specifica- ity for handicapped people.
planning stage with the help of a
tions deviating from DIN EN 81-70. In
Ordinance on Industrial Safety and traffic analysis. In that, first of all the
detail, it has to be checked exactly
Health theoretical conveyor capability is
which specifications have to be
The Ordinance on Industrial Safety taken. This results from the rated
observed for the implementation of
and Health not only applies to new speed of the system and the step
the elevator system.
systems but especially to operators of or pallet width. With a width of
DIN EN 81-70 elevator systems. The operator obliga- 1,000 mm and a speed of 0.5 m/s, the
This standard deals with the require- tions have been tightened seriously, theoretical conveyor capability is
ments for the handicapped-accessible since the operators are responsible for 9,000 persons per hour. Nevertheless,

9/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


the actual conveyor capability
depends on the user behavior when
entering the escalators or moving
walkways. At a speed of 0.5 m/s, it is
approx. 70% of the theoretical value.
Note:
For industrial buildings, a simplified
traffic analysis can be carried out with
e*direct “Online planning” at
www.otis.com, with a first recom-
mendation for the number and
arrangement of the escalators of the
OTIS product range. OTIS also pro-
vides personal help for detailed
technical planning.
Further planning steps
Not only the area of application and
the conveyor capability of the escala-
tors and moving walkways play a role
in the planning but also the arrange-
ment or the operating mode. More-
over, also regulations and guidelines
have to be observed.
Regulations and guidelines
Regulations and guidelines not only
affect the actual products but also the
local environment in order to ensure
the highest possible degree of safety
of the users. OTIS escalators and
moving walkways comply with all
national and international safety
requirements (EN 115 / ANSI / CSA) as
well as the national standards in
Germany.
Machinery Directive
Escalators and moving walkways are
machines in the sense of the European
Machinery Directive 98/37/EC and have
to meet the safety requirements speci-
fied in it. In Germany, this directive
was put into national legislation in the
Ninth Ordinance Regulating the Equip-
ment Safety Act (9. GSGV).
Power Consumers
European standard DIN EN 115 –
Safety rules for the construction
and installation of escalators and
moving walkways
The objective of this standard is to
stipulate safety rules in order to
protect persons from accident risks
during operation and during mainte-
nance and monitoring works. This
standard applies to all escalators and
moving walkways to be newly
installed.
ZH1/4845 – Guidelines for
escalators and moving walkways of
the Association of commercial and
industrial workers' compensation
insurance carriers
These guidelines address the opera-
tors of escalators and moving walk-
ways. They contain protection goals
and safety measures.
Workplace Ordinance
Building regulations of the federal
states
The building regulations of the indi-
vidual federal states stipulate addi-
tional requirements for the environ-
ment of the system, e.g. the installa-
tion of handrails by the customer.
BGVR: Regulations and rules for
safety and health at work by the
workers' compensation insurance
carriers
Extensive information on and tools for the
configuration and planning of elevators and
escalators
www.otis.com
9/23 9
OTIS GeN2™ Comfort
The elevator for residential buildings and functional office buildings

The machine-room-less GeN2 Comfort is based on the

innovative concept of steel-core-sheathed polyurethane
(PU) belts.This high-quality elevator system is very
economic, comfortable and extremely reliable. Due to the
very good cost/performance ratio, it is perfectly suitable for
functional residential and commercial buildings. The GeN2
Comfort provides ride comfort at a low energy demand.
It is environmentally friendly, reliable and safe and
optionally also provides a reduced shaft head of 2,500 mm
or 2,600 mm.

Your advantages:

 Smooth, comfortable elevator rides

 Reduced shaft head of 2,500 mm or 2,600 mm possible
at low construction costs and without any optically
distracting building superstructures
 High, load-independent stopping accuracy (± 3 mm), no
trip hazards for passengers
 Gearless drive
 More economic than elevators with gear drive machines
 Very good cost/performance ratio
 Very environmentally friendly
 Reduced wear at a considerably longer service life of the
belts compared to conventional steel ropes
 Saving of the machine room
 Highest possible safety via an electronic belt monitoring
(PULSE™ system) around the clock
 Optimized integration in the building
 Minimized structure-borne noise transmissions
 Reduction of the static load of the shaft walls
 Fast installation process
 Automatic rescuing of persons in the case of a power
failure (optional)

Load capacity:
320 – 1,020 kg (4 – 13 persons)
Speed:
1.0 m/s
Max. travel height:
45 m with up to 16 stops

9/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power Consumers

Telescopic sliding door, opening to the right (mirror-inverted door design possible)

Access from one side Accesses on both sides

Other floors Other floors
TF / TRF – door portals TF / TRF – door portals

Floor with control unit

TF / TRF – door portals

MRF – door frame MRF – door frame MRF – door frame

*
Control unit

SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame

Centrally opening sliding door

Access from one side Accesses on both sides

Other floors Other floors
TF / TRF – door portals TF / TRF – door portals

Floor with control unit

TF / TRF – door portals

MRF – door frame MRF – door frame MRF – door frame

*
Control unit

SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame

* Flexible arrangement possible after consulting OTIS.

Table 9.3/2: Layout diagrams for GeN2 Comfort

9/25 9
 Car dimensions
Elevator size Car dimensions Door Shaft dimensions
handicapped-accessible

Clear Clear Clear In acc. with In acc. with EN 81-70

Clear car Clear car Clear
shaft shaft shaft (DIN 18024/25) Type 1:
Load capacity and width depth passage
Type width depth depth or 1,000 mm x 1,250 mm
number of persons LKB LKT LD
LSB LST1) (mm) LST1) (mm) DIN 18030 Type 2:
(mm) (mm) (mm)
(mm) 1 access 2 accesses LBO 1,100 mm x 1,400 mm

4 pers., deep car

320 kg, 800 1,100 TLD 700 1,340 1,340 1,440
1 and 2 accesses
6 pers., standard car TLD 800 1,530
450 kg, 1 access 1,000 1,250 1,490 1,590 Type 1
480 kg, 2 accesses CLD 800 1,800
6 pers., deep car 800 1,530
480 kg, 1 access 1,000 1,300 TLD 850 1,580 1,540 1,640 Type 1
500 kg, 2 accesses 900 1,670
800 1,600
8 pers., deep car TLD
900 1,670
630 kg, 1,100 1,400 1,640 1,740 Type 2
800 1,800
1 and 2 accesses CLD
900 1,990
12 pers., wide car TLD 1,900
900 kg, 1 access 1,400 1,500 900 1,740 1,840 Type 2
920 kg, 2 accesses CLD 2,000
800 1,600
13 pers., deep car TLD
900 1,670
1,000 kg, 1 access 1,100 2,100 2,340 2,440 Type 2
800 1,800
1,020 kg, 2 accesses CLD
900 1,990

Table 9.3/3: Shaft dimensions GeN2 Comfort Counterweight with and without gripping device

1) Clear shaft depths apply to doors on the floor; if

doors in the shaft:
+ 100/150 mm with access from one side
+ 200/300 mm with accesses on both sides
after selection of the door model and consulting OTIS

Abbreviation Designation

LKB Clear car width

LKH Clear car height
LKT Clear car depth
LSB Clear shaft width
LST Clear shaft depth
LD Clear passage
LTH Clear door height
DR Outside call
TLD Telescopic door
CLD Centrally opening door
K Shaft head
S Pit

Elevator in accordance with Lifts Directive 95/16/EC

9/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power Consumers

Max. travel height

Speed (m/s)
(m)
1.0 45

Clear door
Clear car height
height
LKH (mm)
LTH (mm)
Shaft head K*

2,000 2,100 2,200

2,100 2,200 2,300

Speed (m/s) K (mm)

1.0 LKH + 1,200

Number S min. S max. F

of persons (mm) (mm) (kN)

4 pers. 1,150 30.0

6 pers. 36.5
Travel height

8 pers. 1,400 45.5

1,050
12 pers. 57.0
13 pers. 63.0
F = largest concentrated load

Table 9.3/4: Dimensions GeN2 Comfort

Counterweight with gripping
device for accessible spaces below
the shaft

Door on the floor

Pit S

Door at the pit

*) Reduced shaft head (2500 mm or 2600 mm)

possible on request

Elevator groups
Elevator groups with up to three individual
elevators possible: for further details, please
contact your OTIS contact person.
Fig. 9.3/3: Vertical section GeN2 Comfort

9/27 9
OTIS GeN2™ Premier
The elevator for the highest demands in exclusive hotels and exalted residential and office buildings

GeN2 Premier, the machine-room-less elevator of the

second generation: steel-core-sheathed polyurethane (PU)
belts have superseded conventional steel ropes. The result is
an elevator with extremely smooth, comfortable and quiet
rides providing a unique ride comfort at a low energy
demand. The GeN2 Premier meets the highest demands and
sets new standards with respect to comfort, economic
efficiency, reliability and safety.

Your advantages:

 Silent and smooth elevator rides

 Optimum ride comfort
 High, load-independent stopping accuracy (± 2 mm),
no trip hazards for the passengers
 Reduced shaft pit possible
 Gearless drive
 Up to 50% more economical than elevators with gear
drive machines
 Very environmentally friendly
 Reduced wear at a considerably longer service life of the
belts compared to conventional steel ropes
 Saving of the machine room
 Highest possible safety via an electronic belt monitoring
(PULSE™ system) around the clock
 Minimized structure-borne noise transmissions
 Large performance range
 Three-dimensional door zone monitoring possible
 Automatic rescuing of persons in case of a power failure
(optional)
Load capacity:
630 – 1,025 kg (8–13 persons)

Speed:
1.0 m/s and 1.6 m/s

Max. travel height:

75 m with up to 24 stops

9/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power Consumers

Telescopic sliding door, opening to the right (mirror-inverted door design possible)

Access from one side Accesses on both sides

Other floors Other floors
TF / TRF – door portals TF / TRF – door portals

Floor with inspection

panel

TF / TRF – door portals

*
MRF – door frame Inspection panel MRF – door frame MRF – door frame

SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame

Centrally opening sliding door

Access from one side Accesses on both sides

Other floors Other floors
TF / TRF – door portals TF / TRF – door portals
Floor with inspection
panel

TF / TRF – door portals

*
MRF – door frame Inspection panel MRF – door frame MRF – door frame

SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame SF wall connection frame

* Flexible arrangement possible after consulting OTIS.

Fig. 9.3/5: Layout diagrams for GeN2 Premier

9/29 9
 Car dimensions
Elevator size Car dimensions Door Shaft dimensions
handicapped-accessible

Clear Clear In acc. with (DIN In acc. with

Clear car Clear car Clear
Clear shaft shaft 18024/25) EN 81-70
Load capacity and width depth shaft
Type passage depth depth or Type 2:
number of persons LKB LKT width
LD (mm) LST1) (mm) LST1) (mm) DIN 18030 1,100 mm x
(mm) (mm) LSB (mm)
1 access 2 accesses LBO 1,400 mm
800 1,600
8 Pers., deep car TLD
900 1,670
630 kg, 1 access 1,100 1,400 1,660 1,780 Type 2
650 kg, 2 accesses 800 1,800
CLD
900 2,000
10 Pers., wide car TLD 900 1,900
800 kg, 1 access 1,350 1,400 800 1,900 1,700 1,780 Type 2
CLD
820 kg, 2 accesses 900 2,000
800 1,600
13 Pers., deep car TLD
900 1,670
1,000 kg, 1 access 1,100 2,100 2,380 2,480 Type 2
800 1,800
1,025 kg, 2 accesses CLD
900 2,000
13 Pers., wide car 900 2,150
1,000 kg, 1 access 1,600 1,400 CLD 1,700 1,780 Type 2
1,025 kg, 2 accesses 1,100 2,400

Table 9.3/5: Shaft dimensions GeN2 Premier Counterweight without gripping device

1) Clear shaft depths apply to doors on the floor; if doors in

the shaft:
+ 100/150 mm with access from one side
+ 200/300 mm with accesses on both sides
after selection of the door model and consulting OTIS.

Abbreviation Designation

LKB Clear car width

LKH Clear car height
LKT Clear car depth
LSB Clear shaft width
LST Clear shaft depth
LD Clear passage
LTH Clear door height
DR Outside call
TLD Telescopic door
CLD Centrally opening door
K Shaft head
S Pit

Elevator in accordance with Lifts Directive 95/16/EG.

9/30 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power Consumers

Speed Max. travel height

(m/s) (m)
1.0 402)

1.6 75

Clear door height Clear car height

Shaft head K*

LTH (mm) LKH (mm)

2,000 2,200

2,100 2,300

Speed
K (mm)
(m/s)

1.0 LKH + 1,180

1.6 LKH + 1,400

S min.3) S max.3)
Number F
Travel height

(mm) (mm)
of persons (kN)
1,0 m/s 1,6 m/s
8 67.1
10 1,120 2) 1,400 86.8
13 100.0
F = largest concentrated load

Table 9.3/6: Dimensions GeN2 Premier

Counterweight without gripping
device
Door on the floor
3)
Pit S

Door at the pit

2) If travel height > 40 m at 1 m/s, please contact

OTIS.
3) Reduction of the pit possible on request.

Elevator groups
Elevator groups with up to three individual
elevators possible: for further details, please
contact your OTIS contact person.
Fig. 9.3/6: Vertical section GeN2 Premier

9/31 9
OTIS GeN2 Premier ED
The elevator for the highest demands with high load capacities as of 1,275 kg

GeN2 Premier ED is the large elevator of the second gener-

ation that doesn’t require a machine room: steel-core-
sheathed polyurethane (PU) belts have superseded con-
ventional steel ropes.
The GeN2 Premier ED without machine room provides
superior technology at a load capacity of 1,275 kg and
more. Apart from extremely smooth and quiet rides as well
as the unique ride comfort, it provides flexible door and
car heights and variable car dimensions. The GeN2 Premier
ED meets the highest demands and sets new standards
with respect to comfort, economic efficiency, reliability
and safety.

Your advantages:
 Silent and smooth elevator rides
 Optimum ride comfort
 High, load-independent stopping accuracy (± 2 mm),
o trip hazards for the passengers
 Gearless, regenerative drive
 Up to 50% more economic than elevators with gear drive
machines
 Flexible door and car heights
 Variable car dimensions
 Very environmentally friendly
 Reduced wear at a considerably longer service life of the
belts compared to conventional steel ropes
 No machine room required
 Highest possible safety via an electronic belt monitoring
(PULSE™ system) around the clock
 Minimized structure-borne noise transmissions
 Reduction of the static load of the shaft walls
 Large performance range
 Three-dimensional door zone monitoring possible
 Three speeds selectable

Load capacity:
1,275 – 2,000 kg (17–26 persons)
Speed:
1.0 m/s; 1.6 m/s and 1.75 m/s
Max. travel height:
75 m with up to 24 stops

9/32 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power Consumers

Telescopic sliding door, opening to the right (mirror-inverted door design possible)

Access from one side Accesses on both sides

Other floors Other floors
SF – door portals SF – door portals

Floor with inspection panel

Inspection panel

Centrally opening sliding door

Access from one side Accesses on both sides

Other floors Other floors
SF – door portals SF– door portals

Floor with inspection panel

Inspection panel

*
* Flexible arrangement possible after consulting OTIS.

Fig. 9.3/8: Layout diagrams for GeN2 Premier ED

9/33 9
 Car dimensions
Elevator size Car dimensions Door Shaft dimensions
handicapped-accessible

Clear Clear Clear In acc. with In acc. with EN 81-70

Clear car Clear car Clear
shaft shaft shaft (DIN 18024/25) Type 2:
Load capacity and width depth passage
Type width depth depth or 1100 mm x 1400 mm
number of persons LKB LKT LD
LSB LST1) (mm) LST1) (mm) DIN 18030 Type 3:
(mm) (mm) (mm)
(mm) 1 access 2 accesses LBO 2000 mm x 1400 mm

17 Pers., deep car

1,275 kg, 1,200 2,300 TLD 1,100 2,020 2,550 2,640 Type 2
1 und 2 accesses
17 Pers., wide car
2,700
1,275 kg, 1 access 2,000 1,400 CLD 1,100 1,650 1,740 Type 3
1,275 kg, 2 accesses 2,800
21 Pers., deep car
1,600 kg, 1,400 2,400 TLD 1,300 2,320 2,650 2,740 Type 2
1 und 2 accesses
21 Pers., wide car 2,000 1,700 2,700 1,950 2,040 Type 3
1,600 kg, CLD 1,100
1 und 2 accesses 2,100 1,600 2,800 1,850 1,940 Type 3
24 Pers., wide car
1,800 kg, 2,350 1,600 CLD 1,200 3,050 1,850 1,940 Type 3
1 und 2 accesses
26 Pers., deep car
2,000 kg, 1,500 2,700 TLD 1,300 2,370 2,950 3,040 Type 2
1 und 2 accesses
26 Pers., wide car
2,000 kg, 2,350 1,700 CLD 1,200 3,050 1,950 2,040 Type 3
1 und 2 accesses

Tabelle 9.3/7: Shaft dimensions GeN2 Premier ED Counterweight with and without gripping device

1) Clear shaft depths apply to doors on the floor; if

doors in the shaft:
+ 100/150 mm with access from one side
+ 200/300 mm with accesses on both sides
after selection of the door model and consulting OTIS.

Abbreviation Designation

LKB Clear car width

LKH Clear car height
LKT Clear car depth
LSB Clear shaft width
LST Clear shaft depth
LD Clear passage
LTH Clear door height
DR Outside call
TLD Telescopic door
CLD Centrally opening door
K Shaft head
S Pit

Elevator in accordance with Lifts Directive 95/16/EG.

9/34 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Power Consumers

Max. travel height

Speed (m/s)
(m)
1.0 452)

1.6 75

1.75 75

Clear door
height Clear car height
LTH LKH (mm)
(mm)
Shaft head K

2,000 2,200 3) 2,300 2,400 -

2,100 – 2,300 2,400 2,500

2,200 - - 2,400 2,500

2,300 – - 2,400 2,500

Speed (m/s) K (mm)

1.0 LKH + 1,350

1.6 LKH + 1,650

1.75 LKH + 1,750

Travel height

S min. (mm)
Speed Counterweight without
Door Counterweight with gripping device
(m/s) gripping device
1,275 kg 1,800 kg 1,275 kg
1,800 kg 2,000 kg
1,600 kg 2,000 kg 1,600 kg
CLD 1,420 1,420 1,420
1.0 2) 1,150 1,240
TLD 1,150 - 1,240
Door on the floor CLD 1,710 1,710 1,710
1.6 1,310 1,400
TLD 1,310 - 1,400
CLD 1,810 1,810 1,810
1.75 1,360 1,450
TLD 1,360 - 1,450
Pit S

2) If travel height > 45 m at 1 m/s, please

Number of persons F (kN)
contact OTIS.
17 125.0
3) If LKH 2200 mm, then S + 100 mm
21 147.0
Door at the pit 24 155.0
on angle bracket 26 161.0

Table 9.3/8: Dimensions GeN2 Premier ED

Counterweight without gripping device
Counterweight with gripping device for accessible spaces below the shaft

Elevator groups
Elevator groups with up to four individual eleva-
tors possible: for further details, please contact
your OTIS contact person.
Fig. 9.3/9: Vertical section GeN2 Premier ED

9/35 9
9/36 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering

chapter 10
10.1 Power Management with 10.4 Safety Lighting Systems
SIMATIC powercontrol 10.5 Robust Remote Terminal Unit for Extreme
10.2 Building Management System Environmental Conditions (SIPLUS RIC)
10.3 Energy Automation for the
Industry
10 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
10.1 Power
Management with
SIMATIC
powercontrol
Power management is an integrative
solution concept, that also makes
provisions for system expansion using
components that can be flexibly
combined. It permits operating cost
optimization by increasing the energy
efficiency. Taking account of chang-
ing internal and external operating
conditions, energy flows and energy
costs are analyzed with regard to their
ecological and economic aspects, and
savings potential is indicated.
Power management measures and
archives the consumption of various
Automation
Ethernet
PROFIBUS
Power distribution
Routing distribution board
Fig. 10.1/1: Power management with SIMATIC powercontrol; consistent data from the acquisition through to the analysis
10/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
energy types, such as electricity, gas,
water, heat, refrigeration, etc., pro-
duces status and fault reports, and
displays them in an operator control
and monitoring system.
10.1.1 Functions and
Advantages of Power
Management
Transparency of the complete
power distribution system
 Graphical display of the operating
states (switches, valves, …)
 Currently measured values online
Comprehensive overview of the
state of the power supply and its
switching states. Fast responses are
made to operational changes;
prompt response to changes of the
Bus-capable interface
operating state. The follow-up costs
for abnormal operating states are
kept as low as possible. Detailed
information on incidents and mal-
functions of the power distribution
within the plant/building permit fast
and targeted fault rectification.
 Documentation and archiving of
switching actions and energy flows.
Error and incident messages (e.g.
operating sequences) with the
precise date and time; logging
permits the subsequent analysis of
downtimes and fault patterns and
developments.
 Analysis possibilities for the opti-
mization of energy consumption
and cost
 Comparison possibilities of all
characteristic quantities using load
curves and reports
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering

The display of the mutual dependen-
cies creates transparency. Savings
potential can be determined by inter-
preting the minimum and maximum
values.
 Status-controlled maintenance
using limit value messages and
alarms
Signaling of maintenance intervals
using limit value messages and alarms
for maintenance-relevant measured
quantities and operating states.
 Energy cost allocation to organiza-
tional units or cost centers which
actually caused consumption, based
on the energy measurements, e.g.
for the further processing in analy-
sis programs
 Supported analyses with cyclical or
event-controlled reports
Monitoring and comparison, e.g. of
consumption values by means of
predefined standard analyses. Leak-
age losses, shrinkage, etc., with high  Directly acquired values: current,
follow-up costs consequently can be voltage, frequency
detected fast targeted, and at low in a  Calculated values: power,
fast and targeted way cost. cos ϕ, THD, etc.
– Pulse and analog inputs
 Data export or linking for further
 Current and voltage
processing (analysis tools, MES, …)
 Power consumption
10.1.2 Components of the Processing level
Power Management  SIMATIC powercontrol with automa-
System in Low-Voltage tion system SIMATIC S7-300,
SIMATIC S7-400 or SIMATIC WinAC
Applications
 Contiguous data acquisition
Power management in the electrical  Data conditioning and short-term
power distribution can be structured archiving
into three levels:
Visualization level
Acquisition level  SIMATIC powercontrol, SIMATIC
powercost based on SIMATIC WinCC
 Protective and switching devices
 Transparent display of energy flows
provide status information
and costs
 Switching and control devices are
 Currently measured values and
triggered
switching states
 Multifunction measuring equipment
 Analysis windows with load curve
provides comprehensive data
displays (e.g. year, month, freely
Status Switch configurable)
 Configuration dialog for parameteri-
Undervoltage release,

zation rather than programming

Withdrawable unit

included
Auxiliary switch

Auxiliary switch

Voltage release

ON/OFF/RESET
voltage release

Status Switch
 Supported first configuration
Alarm switch

Motor drive

 Very simple adaptation to changing

Released

OFF
ON/OFF

ON
plant conditions
OFF

OFF

ACB 3WL… 630 – 6,300 A X X X X X X Switchgear

MCCB
3VL… 16 – 1,600 A X X X X X X Siemens offers a comprehensive
3VF… 16 – 100 A X X X device range within the fuse-pro-
MPCB 3RV… 0.16– 100 A X X X X X X tected and circuit-breaker-protected
MCB
5SY… 0.3– 80 A X X X X X technology at the low-voltage level.
5SP4… 80 – 125 A X Options available include switching
RCCB 5SM3… 16 – 125 A X devices with (auxiliary/alarm)
3KA… 63 – 630 A X X  switches for the status acquisition and
SD
3KE… 250 – 1,000 A X X  release or motor drives for the switch-
 On request ing of the switching devices (see
Abbreviations: Table 10.1/1 and 10.1/2).
ACB Air Circuit-Breaker
MCCB Molded Case Circuit-Breaker
MPCB Motor Protection Circuit-Breaker
MCB Miniature Circuit-Breaker
RCCB Residual Current-Operated Circuit-Breaker
SD Switch-Disconnector

Table 10.1/1: Circuit-breaker-protected technology

10/3 10
 Status Switch 10.1.3 Typical
Auxiliary current switch
Implementation of

Auxiliary current switch

Withdrawable unit
Planning Tasks within the
Status Switch Fuse tripped
Alarm switch Power Distribution

Motor drive
OFF
Planning documents describe not only
ON/OFF

ON/OFF
ON
the devices to be used, but also the
quantities to be measured within an
3NP… 2 – 630 A X X
3NJ4… 2 – 1,000 A X electrical power distribution. There
FSD
3NJ5… 2 – 1,250 A X are various solution concepts for the
3NJ6… 2 – 630 A X implementation of these tasks in
3KL… 2 – 630 A X X switchgear cabinet design. These
SDF 3KM… 2 – 400 A X X  solution concepts reflect, for example,
5SG7… 16 – 100 A X
company guidelines, customer
5SG5… 16– 63 A
FB
5SF… 2 – 100 A
requirements, service aspects, cost
specifications.
 On request
Abbreviations: The following sections discuss out-
FSD Fuse Switch-Disconnector
SDF Switch-Disconnector-Fuse going circuits/supply circuits consist-
FB Fuse Block ing of a protective device and a
measurement system. Protective
Table 10.1/2: Communication-capable devices devices include all devices of the
fuse-protected and circuit-breaker-
protected technology. Measurement
Digital systems are all devices with communi-
Measurements
signals
cations capability plus current con-
verters. If a bus system is used, its
Status Switch Measurements specific requirements must be obser-
displacement

U L1-N L1
cos L1 PS
QS
ved.
Switching

OFF U L3-1 U L1-2 N

*
cos S
SS
Voltage

Current

W S Bezug
ON
Power
Status

Phase

U L3-N U L2-3 U L2-N W S Lieferung

Communication-capable circuit
Work

L3 L2 cos L3 cos L2

Spannung Strom Phasenverschiebung Leistung / Arbeit

breakers
Communication-capable SENTRON 3WL… mit COM15 X X X X X X X
circuit breakers SENTRON 3VL… mit COM10 X X X
Circuit-breakers with integrated
communication are the best solution
Motor protection and SIMOCODE DP X X X
for new systems. The acquisition of
control devices SIMOCODE pro X X X X X X X
the measured values is an integrated
Multifunction SENTRON X X X X X X part of the circuit breaker. The meas-
measuring instruments X X X X X X
ured values are displayed on the
Multifunction pro-
SIPROTEC X X X X X X X release and made available using the
tection with controller
communication function. The remote
Meter
Pulse output X control is also performed using this
Bus interface X X X X X communication function.

Table 10.1/3: Fuse-protected technology Other characteristics:

 No additional wiring expense for
The appropriate options can be used status monitoring and control
Metrology
to equip the devices with digital  High data efficiency coupled with
Siemens offers a comprehensive inputs and outputs for status good accuracy
device range within the metrology for acquisition and for actuating the
the medium- and low-voltage level. switching devices.

10/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering

Protective devices and formers connected next to the fused urement by a motor protection and
multifunction measuring supply voltage on the measuring control unit (SIMOCODE) are inde-
instrument instrument. The data is made avail- pendent from a device viewpoint, and
able using a plug-in communication are usually installed in the switchgear
System protection using the protec- cabinet. To measure the phase cur-
connection.
tive device and the measurement rents and voltages, the current/volt-
process using a multifunction measur- Other characteristics:
age acquisition modules that belong
ing instrument are independent from  Can also be installed with small to the SIMOCODE system must be
the device viewpoint. Multifunction wiring expense in existing systems installed and wired.
measuring instruments may or may  Highest data efficiency and highest
not be equipped with a display. Other characteristics:
accuracy for multifunction measur-
Devices with a display are normally ing instruments  No additional wiring expense for
installed in a 96 mm x 96 mm sized status monitoring and control
Circuit-breaker with motor
cut-out in the switchgear cabinet  High data efficiency and accuracy
door; multifunction measuring instru- protection and control unit
(SIMOCODE) Meter for billing
ments without display are installed on
the mounting rail. The phase currents The system motor protection using Besides switching and protective
are measured using current trans- the protective device and the meas- devices without communications

Requirement
SENTRON 3 WL Multifunction SIMOCODE
Single-pole
mit COM 15 measuring PRO
diagram instrument

U1,2,3
I 1,2,3
cos
P

U 1,2,3
I 1,2,3
U1,2,3 U1,2,3 U1,2,3 U1,2,3 U1,2,3 U1,2,3
I 1,2,3
cos
P
I 1,2,3
cos
P
I 1,2,3
cos
P
I 1,2,3
cos
P
I 1,2,3
cos
P
I 1,2,3
cos
P
cos
P

Requirement Requirement
SENTRON 3 VL Current SIMOCODE Counter
mit COM 10 measurement PRO (converter)
(converter)

I 1,2,3 W

Fig. 10.1/2: Various possible solutions of the planning tasks

10/5 10
capability, an electricity meter can be  Optimum implementation
equipped with a drum-type register or – energy management software for
a display for the acquisition of the the simple integration of a com-
power consumption. plete system consisting of typical
hardware components of the low-
In many cases, meters approved by
voltage power distribution range
the Physikalisch Technische Bunde-
– complete program of energy
sanstalt (PTB) are required for the
management functions in the full,
invoice preparation. This approval is
expanded version
granted only for a limited time. After
– simple parameterization (no
this time has expired, the meter must
programming) and commissioning
be approved again; this requires the
removal of the meter. Other than the
 Cost reduction during operation
power value, most electricity meters
– optimization of the operating
do not provide any additional data.
costs by the transparency of the
Power consumption can be read on
energy flows from the supply to
the display / drum-type register (man-
the consumption
ually). To minimize reading errors, an
– evaluation using energy-related
automatic consumption quantity
parameters based on the con-
transfer can be made using a pulse
sumption and costs
interface and a distributed peripheral
– increased efficiency (saving effect
device, or transfer data can be read at
5–20% depending on the current
an input of a multifunction measuring
situation) of the energy supply
instrument or using bus systems.
thanks to exact knowledge of the
 Other characteristics demand profile
– data acquisition with calibrated
measuring instruments to supply
billing information (approval
status monitoring!)
– high accuracy of the power con-
sumption metering

SIMATIC powercontrol is characterized by

 Planning assurance
– modular expandable system,
innovative, always state-of-the-art
in accordance with current stan-
dards and legal regulations
– minimized interface risk with a
coordinated portfolio of A&D
hardware and software products
as part of TIA and TIP
– high solution quality thanks to the
standardization and use of stan-
dards (e.g. standard hardware,
such as SIMATIC S7 and Industrial
Ethernet)
Further information:
 SIMATIC powercontrol at
www.siemens.de/simatic-powercontrol
 For products of the SIMATIC family at
www.siemens.de/simatic
 For the power management with SIMATIC
powercontrol see “Totally Integrated Power
Application Manual – Establishment of Basic
Data and Preliminary Planning”, 2006, Chapter 6,
page 6/4 ff.
 For the order numbers of the components and
software packages described here, consult the
current catalogs or contact your branch office
representative.

10/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering

10.2 Building their market introduction in 1991.

Management
System
The instabus KNX/EIB building man-
agement system favorably combines
simple installation, clear system
structure, modularity and flexibility. A
continually increasing product range
for lighting, sun protection, heating,
ventilation, refrigeration, safety and
energy management from all well-
known electrical installation suppliers
has contributed to the success of
building management systems since
Critical for the success was the manu-
facturer-independent, standardized
open system engineering with the
standards EN 50090 (in Europe), ANSI
EIA 776-5 (in USA) and ISO / IEC
14543-3 (international).
Cost reduction through the use of
structured room automation
The standardized building management
system forms the basis for the cost-
optimized operation of energy efficient
buildings as demanded by far-sighted
investors to ensure a value increase of
their property. Compared with conven-
tional electrical installation engineering,
the instabus KNX/EIB building manage-
ment system is characterized by cost
reductions in both the investment phase
and in the operating phase of a build-
ing. In the investment phase, the dis-
tributed system configuration of the
building management system allows
the reduction of power cabling com-
pared with solutions using conventional
electrical installation engineering. In the
operating phase, the simple reconfigur-
ing options simplify the adaptation to
changed space utilization. When the
overall costs are considered, the operat-
ing costs are ten times the investment
costs over the lifetime of a building.

Factor

10

4
The complete operation is more than
2 ten times more expensive than the
manufacturing costs
100%
0 10 20 30 40 50 Years

0%

Erection costs Operating/reconstruction costs

Fig. 10.2/1: Comparison of the erection costs to the operating costs

10/7 10
 compensated here by saving in the
building structure.
Costs
Building substation control systems / conventional
Note concerning the fire load:
The amount of saving results from the
1.3
Only local
comparison between the installation
switching with conventional technology and
using a building management system.
This depends on the specific project
1 and the associated extent of automa-
0.95
+ Central 0.90 tion. In Fig. 10.2/2, the use of a
switching + Time control 0.85 building management system
+ Dimming + Shutter
+ Constant-light 0.75
reduced the conventional wiring
control
control + Scene + Single room share from 60% (PVC) to 30% (PVC).
control control
+ Room divider The reduction of wiring also means less
control
space is required for cable ducts and
Functionality vaults. This helps to attain the goal of
optimizing the usable space with regard
to the complete volume of a building.
Fig. 10.2/2: Investment cost savings To permit the consistent distribution of
the building management system,
control units are available for installa-
10.2.1 Cost Reduction in communication with other bus devices tion in flush-mounted boxes.
the Investment Phase and the function of the bus device. If a conventional solution is used, more
This modularity of the building man-
The instabus KNX/EIB building manage- automation functions mean more
agement system forms the basis for
ment system is a fully distributed bus wiring. This is particularly true when
providing a system availability compa-
system. Each individual bus device has two or more installation systems are
rable with that of a conventional
a microprocessor that controls the combined to produce an integrated
electrical installation.
room automation. The placement of
Compared with solutions using con- actuators in floor-level distribution
120 115 ventional electrical installation engi- boards results in long cable lengths. A
%
100
100 97,5 neering, the distributed system config- construction with a distribution cable
90 uration provides the building manage- that supplies the electrical energy from
80 60 75 30 37,5 ment system with the possibility to the floor-level distribution boards to
60
reduce the power cabling. This reduces room distribution boards (in office
both the installation costs and also the buildings: installation in the corridor
40 fire load. Because the fire load affects above the suspended ceiling) already
40 40 60 60 not only the required fire protection
20 brings significant savings for the cable
measures but also the ceiling thick- lengths. The exact saving potential
0 nesses (concrete masses) of a building,
PVC halogen- PVC halogen- depends on the building geometry and
free free the reduction of the fire load is inter- the specific project. A busbar trunking
Conventional instabus EIB esting when the overall construction
system, from which flexible branches
costs are considered by the architects
Cabling Equipment can be made to room distribution
and the planners. When integrated
boards, can be used instead of one or
building planning is made, a significant
more distribution cables.
Fig. 10.2/3: Proportion of cost incurred by part of the investment costs in the
cabling and equipment building management system can be

10/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
10.2.2 Cost Reduction
During the Operating
Phase
The modular system structure of the
instabus KNX/EIB building manage-
ment system permits the implemen-
tation of a modular electrical installa-
tion that can be easily adapted to the
changed room utilization by reconfig-
uring. This means time and cost
savings already in the construction
phase. Once the building is in opera-
tion, room utilization can be changed
quickly and at low cost.
The instabus KNX/EIB building man-
agement system avoids the need for
large-scale changes of the electrical
installation in the case of new ten-
ants or organizational changes,
adaptation of room sizes or room
equipment. Costly periods of non-
occupation because of extensive
reconstruction measures are reduced
significantly. On average, depart-
ments in office buildings move to
other rooms every three years. Com-
pared with conventional electrical
installations, the additional costs for
the building system engineering pay
for themselves in just three years
merely by the faster adaptation to
the changed room utilization.
Note concerning the reduced costs
for changes in the room utilization:
Let us assume that in an office build-
ing the ceiling lighting is switched
together along axes. If walls are
moved, for conventional engineer-
ing, the cable from the switch
(assuming just one!) to the added
lights must be relaid and the cable to
the removed lights cut. In the most
favorable case, this can be done
using wiring blocks. With a building
management system, wiring blocks
are not needed and the new assign-
ment to the rooms is made by recon-
figuring the actuators and the associ-
ated pushbuttons. The time for this
change is just a few minutes rather
than one or more hours. This, how-
ever, assumes an appropriate plan-
ning of the electrical installation
designed for flexibility and modularity.
Constant light control example
A constant light control can keep the
illumination intensity at a predefined
level or at a level set by the user. This
utilizes the daylight while reducing
the energy costs. To combine the
utilization of daylight with sun pro-
tection, the louvers of the shutters
are regulated so that they allow
daylight into the room and block the
direct daylight depending on the sun
radiation angle. Shielding from direct
sunlight reduces the heating of the
room and thus the costs for the
climatic control of the room.
Costs
instabus KNX/EIB / conventional
1
Cost saving by reparameterization rather than reinstalling for change of use
0.9
Only local
0.85
switching + Central
switching
+ Time control
+ Dimming
+ Constant-light
control
Fig. 10.2/4: Operating cost reduction through the use of instabus KNX/EIB
Presence detector example
In combination with presence detec-
tors, the room functions can easily be
changed automatically from comfort
operation to standby or energy-
saving operation. This can also be
provided in combination with an
access control or with time control or
be controlled manually. Outside the
main utilization times, the illumina-
tion in corridors can be switched off
when nobody is present. Within the
main utilization times, the lighting
level is reduced to a set minimum
level when persons are present. This
achieves an optimum energy saving
coupled with a longer lifetime of the
lights.
Window contact example
While a window is open, the room
temperature control can automatically
enter protective operation mode so
that the control system becomes
Minimization of the energy cost
0.75
0.70
+ Shutter
control
0.60
+ Scene + Single room
control control
+ Room divider
control
Functionality
10/9 10
active again only for undershooting a
frost-protection temperature or over-
shooting a heat-protection tempera-
ture. At night, a central command can
be used to switch the temperature
control automatically to energy-saving
operation. These measures allow the
energy amount used for illumination
and for room temperature control to
be reduced over the complete opera-
tional time to half that for conven-
tional systems!
10.2.3 Energy Costs and
Optimization of the
Maintenance
In addition to satisfying the comfort
needs of the room occupants, i.e. the
occupants' satisfaction, the correct
assignment of operating costs and the
optimization of maintenance costs are
decisive for a building operator for the
profitable operation of a property. The
electricity meters or operating hours
counters provided for acquiring the
operating costs related to the associ-
ated department or tenant can be
read regularly over the bus. This
allows the operating costs to be
transferred monthly, daily or in any
other time intervals to a billing
department where they can be
processed for billing. To optimize
maintenance, the operating hours or
operating cycles of an item of equip-
ment (e.g. motor, pump, lamp) can be
recorded, and when a predefined
threshold is exceeded (e.g. 10,000
hours light duration), automatically
converted into a maintenance request
(requirement-controlled mainte-
nance).
Note:
The N343 operating hours and oper-
ating cycles counter is used to acquire
the operating hours. The N162
counter (direct connection up to 63 A)
10/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
and the N165 converter counter are
two alternatives for the acquisition of
the active energy consumption.
Power supply contracts can require
that a maximum amount of power is
not exceeded within a certain time
interval (typically: 15 minutes). The
observance of the power consumption
limits is ensured using the maximum-
demand monitor that uses predefined
rules to automatically remove or add
loads. This can significantly lower the
energy costs, even for smaller build-
ings.
Note
The N360 maximum-demand monitor
can be used to monitor maximum
power loads up to 1 MW.
Photo 10.2/1: Operating cycles counter N 343
10.2.4 Safety
The protection of persons and assets
plays an important role in the building
installation. The building manage-
ment system can effectively help to
prevent, or at least limit, damage.
Before a storm can damage shutters
and cause parts to fly through the air
as dangerous projectiles, the shutters
will be automatically placed in a safe
position.
If the corridor lighting operates pres-
ence-dependent, it always provides
Photo 10.2/2: Counter N 162
the correct amount of light when
required. On the other hand, no more
energy than required is consumed. ing mode to energy-saving operation
The same is true for exterior and path can also be used to report “window
lighting activated depending on the open” or “door open”. This can be
darkness, movement and time, and used to prevent the possibly major
always switched on when required. damage caused by frost, storm or
Damage caused by unsupervised rain.
electrical devices (copiers, printers) An interface of the fire detection
can be prevented by switching them system for the building management
off centrally at night.
system can be used to switch off
The same window contact used to specific electrical consumers before
switch the room temperature operat- they become an additional danger. At
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
the same time, the complete lighting
can be switched on to reduce the
danger of panic.
In case of danger, persons in the
building can be safely led outside
using an emergency and escape path
lighting in accordance with EN 1838.
Note:
The regulations for safety lighting
must be observed.
10.2.5 Other Applications
Conference and meeting rooms
require many functions:
 Switching and dimming lights
 Raising and lowering shutters
 Raising and lowering the projection
screen
 Switching the projector/beamer on
and off
 Switching loudspeakers on and off
For different situations (e.g. lecture,
discussion, presentation), these
various functions must be brought
into a certain state. For example, for a
lecture, the main lighting should be
switched off or dimmed, the projector
should be switched on, the projection
screen lowered and the shutters
closed. This scenario can be initiated
by pressing a single button. A push-
button, a touch panel or a PC can be
used as input device. Just as easily,
when the room is left, pressing a
button initiates an "everything off"
scenario so that no devices remain
switched on unnecessarily. In the
same manner as scenarios can be
initiated by pressing a button, an
event such as the overshooting of a
temperature threshold or a brightness
value can initiate a single scene or a
complete execution sequence.
10.2.6 Interfaces
instabus KNX/EIB provides a wide
selection of interfaces to other sys-
tems. These include interfaces to an
analog telephone, GSM, ISDN, DALI,
PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET, BACnet, OPC
and Internet Protocol (IP).
DALI (Digital Addressable
Lighting Interface)
DALI is an interface definition for
electronic control gear (ECG) for
illumination control. DALI permits the
control of up to 64 devices using a Photo 10.2/3: Maximum-demand monitor N 360
control unit. Only control units such
as the GE141 EIB/DALI interface or the
N141 KNX/DALI interface make full
use of the possibilities that DALI
offers. The combination of DALI and
building management system permits
the implementation of solutions that
previously were not possible, or only Photo 10.2/4: EIB/DALI interface GE 141
at considerable cost.
For example, the communication
possibilities provided by DALI allow
the failure of a single lamp or a single
ECG, the switching status and a cur-
rent dimming value to be reported.
This makes the operational state of
each lamp group and, indeed, each
lamp to always be available to the
building management system. This
data can be shown on a display or
with little effort forwarded to a
higher-level building management
system.
The DALI standard allows the assign- Photo 10.2/5: KNX/DALI interface N 141
ment of DALI devices to as many as 16
scenarios. The specific settings for The N141 KNX/DALI interface also
each scenario are stored in the indi- provides the possibility of effect
vidual DALI devices and can be initi- control, for example, for a running
ated with a single command. This light or color changes. This allows the
allows even complex scenarios or very combination of KNX/EIB and building
fast command sequences to be initi- management system with DALI to
ated by the building management achieve system capabilities compara-
system. ble with those for DMX.
10/11 10
EIBnet/IP
The complete linking of local and
worldwide networks has also opened
new possibilities for building manage-
ment systems. Even properties spread
throughout the world can be moni-
tored and controlled centrally at low
cost 24-hours a day from any location.
In particular, this is also true in con-
junction with the EIBnet/IP defined as
standard in EN 13321-2. EIBnet/IP
extends the building management
system in a system-conforming
manner and easily through the use of
existing local and worldwide data
networks. Using existing networks for
communication reduces the costs for
the creation, operation and mainte-
nance of the building management
system for commercial buildings and
real estates at differerent locations.
Control commands and data can be
exchanged with building manage-
ment systems much faster and in
larger volume. This large volume not
only permits a central monitoring and
greatly extends the operational possi-
bilities, but also significantly reduces
operating costs.
EIBnet/IP is an open standard for the
remote configuration, the remote
operation and the fast communication
between KNX/EIB lines and installa-
tions. The standard describes mainly
two different communication possibil-
ities: tunneling and routing.
Routing allows a KNX/EIB protocol
from an EIBnet/IP router to be for-
warded to several different routers.
This is the basis for the fast communi-
cation between lines, backbones or
complete installations. A device such
as the IP router N146, which imple-
ments EIBnet/IP routing, so corre-
sponds functionally to a line or back-
bone coupler.
In contrast, tunneling permits the
point-to-point communication with
EIBnet/IP devices. This replaces not
10/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
only the communication using a serial
interface, but, in addition to the
higher speed, allows location inde-
pendency. Any point in the IP network
can access the KNX/EIB installation.
With little effort, any status from the
building management system can be
transferred directly to a higher-level
building management system.
In buildings or split estates with very
high standardization of the building
management system, the same solu-
tion is often used at all building levels
or properties. This unavoidably leads
to an identical configuration in the
individual units. However, these
installations should still be managed
centrally and operated remotely. The
EIBnet/IP standard provides a user-
friendly name that can be individually
assigned to EIBnet/IP devices, such as
the IP interface N148/21, the IP router
Photo 10.2/6: IP router N 146
N146 or the IP controller N350E. This
device name is then used to identify
and distinguish the building levels or
requirements of the room occupants:
properties. In conjunction with the
room temperature and lighting bright-
ComBridge Studio visualization soft-
ness are set optimally for the associ-
ware written by IPAS GmbH based on
ated use situation. However, the room
the new EIBnet/IP standard, these
properties and subsystems are oper- occupants must always have the
ated centrally with a single applica- possibility to individually change their
tion. The manufacturer-independent work environment.
ETS3 configuration software can be Generally, the lighting brightness and
used to configure these systems using
the room temperature are not directly
a network connection.
coupled with each other. Artificial or
natural lighting, however, also causes
10.2.7 Cost Reduction a rise in the temperature of the
rooms, which, depending on the time
using Structured Room
of the year, is either desirable or
Automation undesirable. Sun protection systems
Increased demands placed on the affect the room temperature and
energy efficiency of buildings require brightness. Since conventional solu-
an optimization of the energy provi- tions for the control of the lighting,
sion, distribution and use. This goal sun protection and heating-ventila-
can only be achieved with automa- tion-refrigeration are each limited to a
tion. The instabus KNX/EIB building single type of installation, mutual
management system can be used to dependencies between the different
sensibly automate both the power installations cannot be taken into
distribution and the power consump- account. Only the use of a building
tion at an acceptable cost. Sensible management system permits an
automation considers the comfort integration of the control of different
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering

installations in the room at acceptable

cost.
The goal is the reduction of not only
the planning time and cost, but also
the construction and operating costs.
Planning with room modules is the
method of choice. Here, a room
module is considered to be the small-
est room unit (e.g. axis) and thus the
smallest planning unit. Each room
module has room functions (Fig.
10.2/1). Only a matched automation
of these room functions can optimize
the power consumption, whereas the
modularization minimizes the con-
Light  Occupancy control and control Temperature
struction costs and keeps the mainte-
 Lighting control of the room operating mode  Sun protection control
nance costs low.  Anti-glare control  Room access control  Heating
 Daylight control  Operation and display  Cooling
The room module is planned so that it  Sun protection control  Minimization of the energy  Ventilation
contains all required functions. The cost  Temperature and climatic control
following points must be considered:
Fig. 10.2/5: Room functions in the commercial buildings
 Use of daylight with anti-glare / sun
protection control Planning documents monitoring, display, reporting and
 Constant light regulation in con- operating of facilities. Siemens offers
Planning and tender documents are
junction with the use of daylight modular training courses for building
available at
 Lighting control (dimming) using management systems as training for
www.din-bauportal.de/siemens
the DALI interface the use of Siemens devices in these
 Temperature regulation in conjunc- application areas.
Training
tion with sun protection control
 Occupancy-dependent control of A comprehensive training program for
the room operating mode (comfort, KNX/EIB is available at
standby, night, protective opera- www.siemens.de/sitrain-et
tion)
 Operating elements for the user Literature
– Wall-mounted pushbuttons
– Telephone interface The principles and the system
– Browser interface (PC as operating properties of the KNX/EIB building
station) management system are discussed in
– Interface to the building manage- detail in the “Handbuch EIB Haus- und
ment system Gebäudesystemtechnik, KNX/EIB-
Grundlagen” published by ZVEI and
Such a planned room module is then ZVEH in German.
duplicated in accordance with the
building geometry. The EIBnet/IP The “Handbuch EIB Gebäudesystem-
technology permits an unrestricted technik, Anwendungen” published by
duplication of the room modules or ZVEI and ZVEH contains examples for
the several combination of room
the control of lighting, sun protection
modules. EIBnet/IP also permits a very
and heating-ventilation-refrigeration,
efficient interface to building manage-
for load management and for the
ment systems.

10/13 10

10.3 Energy
Automation for the
Industry
The task of energy automation is to
provide electricity reliably in a form
appropriate for the requirement.
Energy automation covers
 Network management for the
overall control of the energy
demand
 Substation automation for a cost-
effective control of operations
 Remote control for a secure and
user-friendly remote access to the
process
This task is not limited to pure power
utilities. After all, every industry is
dependent on the guaranteed avail-
ability of electricity at the lowest
possible cost, irrespective whether in
Total solutions
Control center
Spectrum PowerCC
Station automation and
remote control technology
SICAM PAS
ACP 1703
Field level
SIPROTEC
SIMEAS
Communication level
IEC 61850, PROFIBUS, Modbus, OPC, DNP
IEC 60870-5-101, -103, -104
Fig. 10.3/1: Energy automation at a glance
10/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
the mining industry, the processing
industry, transport companies, health-
care, etc. Although the general
demand for solutions may be univer-
sal, the individual solution must be
industry- and company-specific.
Competition leads to an increased
cost pressure that requires rationaliza-
tion measures, also for the electricity
supply. This can be, for example,
result in restrictions imposed on shift
work for network monitoring at night
or at the weekend.
The energy market, which is now
subject to increased dynamics and
complexity because of the market
liberalization, also affects power
supply in the industrial sector. Acqui-
sition, monitoring and control of the
energy purchases and the peak load
can reduce costs and optimize in-plant
power generation.
Energy automation means
 High quality and availability of the
power supply
 Optimum use of all resources with
minimized network losses
 Increased safety from blackouts and
damage by system protection
 Increased efficiency through the
minimization of downtimes as the
result of fast fault detection and
clarification
 Improved profitability because of
reduced operating and maintenance
costs
 Reduction of energy costs as the
result of consumption optimization
 High security of investment as a
result of detailed knowledge of the
associated state and behavior of the
power supply
 Expandable solutions thanks to
increased flexibility, scalability and
the use of standardized components
So that you…
… keep an eye on everything
… protect plant operation
… secure your
investment
… maintain the connection
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering

10.3.1 Spectrum PowerCC

Network Control System
Spectrum PowerCC is the comprehen-
sive and expandable system solution
for the economical and reliable oper-
ating control of power supply sys-
tems. The Windows-based control
system was developed using interna-
tional standards and de-facto stan-
dards.
With a comprehensive range of differ-
ent application possibilities, the
control system increases the effi-
ciency of power system operation and
adapts itself to these specific require-
ments.
The control system can be integrated
in existing IT environments and also
provides significant savings not only
for system administration and data
updating costs, but also for engineer-
ing. Spectrum PowerCC is Web-based
and can easily be connected to the
Internet.

Advantages of Spectrum PowerCC

at a glance
 Targeted and step by step invest-
ment
 Open and standardized interfaces
with modular architecture ensures
an optimum integration capability
and the expandability of the system
solutions
 Use of the latest standards (CIM
data model; IEC 61970) and indus-
trial de-facto standards (OPC -
Object Linking and Embedding for
Process Control) for connection to
the automation world, Microsoft
Office or SIMATIC WinCC for opera-
tor control and monitoring; this
provides access to office communi-
cation systems and the world of
industrial automation
Fig. 10.3/2: Spectrum PowerCC user interface
 Mobile access to all data with Web
access and Internet connection: This
allows, for example, remote system
administration, faster resupply and
an active participation on energy
trading
 The innovation of the individual
solution components increases the
lifetime of plants and the return on
investment
Application and functional scope
The Spectrum PowerCC functions are
tailored to the requirements of indus-
trial power supply both as a simple
computer system (all-in-one solution)
and a redundant multi-server version.
Basic functions
The basic SCADA functions contain,
among other things, operator control
and monitoring, logging, control,
adjustment, flagging and issuing of
alarms. This scope of performance is
complemented by alarm forwarding,
e.g. via “Cityruf” (city call), the operat-
ing and display possibility using
intranet/Internet, messages and values
created using linking rules, and auto-
matic command outputs.

10/15 10
User interface
The uniformity of the appearance and
the operating philosophy of Spectrum
PowerCC are supported by a Web-
capable user interface whose layout,
use of colors, operator prompting,
acoustic signals, etc., are identical for
all applications. Users familiar with
Microsoft Windows will find many of
the standardized Windows elements
in the user interface.
Spectrum PowerCC provides clear and
understandable displays, the visualiza-
tion of values – also graphically as bar
charts, curves, filling levels, etc. – the
logging of messages, powerful filter
functions for signaling lists and the
display of information outside the power
supply, e.g. from the production plant.
The operator receives alarms as optical
and/or acoustic indicators. Graphical
representation of the fault cause can be
selected directly from the message list;
messages can be classified according to
their importance.
Operating support
The operating support is used to
determine the fault location, topologi-
cal coloring, locking conditions,
determination of the fault location in
the supply network, display of net-
work sections with ground fault as the
result of messages of suitable protec-
tion equipment, localization of faulty
resources and the highlighting of
network sections without power.
Archive
With their data, archives are a pool of
experience gained from network
operation. They are the backbone of
online operations control, in particu-
lar, concerning higher-level optimiza-
tion and decision functions, the
wording of contracts for energy
purchase, as well as further opera-
tional requirements placed on archive
data (data mining).
Load management
Load management of power systems
by Spectrum PowerCC permits the

Spectrum Power PC

IEC 60870-5-101/104
or DNP V3.00
Remote
SICAM PAS CC
operation

SICAM PAS

Ethernet

PROFIBUS FMS
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 61850 Modbus/PROFIBUS DP

IEC 60870-5-104
… …

Distributed remote SIPROTEC Small remote SIPROTEC Measurement,

operation protection / operating unit protection / combi- SIMEAS power
BC 1703 ACP combi-protection TM 1703 mic protection quality

Fig. 10.3/3: Example of an energy automation concept with communication connections to the field level and the control center

10/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
optimum use of power purchasing
contracts taking account of the loads
or in-plant generating possibilities
that can be connected or discon-
nected from supply on the basis of
kWh rate periods. The load manage-
ment prevents the exceeding of
contractually agreed purchase limit
values taking account of the opera-
tional load and power generating
limitations, such as the minimum/
maximum operating time, availability,
downtime, etc. The load management
system can be expanded with dedi-
cated load forecasts (hours or days)
and resource planning (matching of
the demand and the generating
capability). The load management
system also provides an interface to
ripple control systems.
Process data acquisition and
interfaces
The PROFIBUS, IEC 60 870 5-101, -102,
-104 and SINAUT 8-FW standard proto-
cols simplify the process connection.
The OPC interface permits the simple
and efficient connection of industrial
communications standards such as
Industrial Ethernet.
Interfaces based on ODBC/OLE simplify
the integration of tools such as
Microsoft Excel. An SQL interface is
provided for archive information. A
simplified SQL interface permits data
access directly from the domain model
(e.g. plant data, process data or data
calculated in applications).
Communication via Internet and
intranet
The control system is often part of an
internal and external computer net-
work. Spectrum PowerCC permits
access to the system using the Inter-
net, for example, to give on-call or
mobile personnel operating capability
at night. Wide-band intranet access
from office workplaces or using an
extranet, also from remote work-
places, is also possible. The Internet
communication is protected against
unauthorized access using the appro-
priate security concepts.
10.3.2 Energy Automation
with SICAM PAS
SICAM PAS (Power Automation Sys-
tem) is the comprehensive solution
for distributed automation in switch-
gear, independent of whether power
distribution is for a large industrial
plant, a large consumer, or a facility,
such as an airport.
Energy automation – consistent
and open
Through the use of the IEC 61850, the
SICAM PAS substation control device
provides for expandable interoperable
plant construction. For example,
SICAM PAS is suitable for the inclusion
of field devices of all manufacturers
applying IEC 61850. The concept and
parameterization of SICAM PAS sup-
ports the direct data exchange at the
field level. This means no bottlenecks
in communication, for example. The
fastest Ethernet connections and a
“Station Unit” optimized for data
transmission and processing make
SICAM PAS a pioneering energy
automation system. Network capabil-
ity and open data interfaces such as
OPC permit a simple transfer of infor-
mation to the office and industrial
world. This facitilitates analyses, or
just the display of energy data, as
often needed for the manager respon-
sible for production.
Simple integration
PROFIBUS FMS, PROFIBUS DP or IEC
60870-5-103 allow existing plants at
the low-voltage level or in the indus-
trial process automation to be inte-
grated in a concept with IEC 61850.
IEC 60870-5-101 and 104 are pro-
vided for the remote communication.
The cooperation on the STA (Seamless
Telecommunication Architecture)
standardization project with the goal
of providing a consistent use of IEC
61850 down to the control center
level ensures the integration capa-
bility of SICAM PAS.
Central control and monitoring
All plant sections, starting with the
system supply and ending with the
low-voltage distribution, can be
centrally monitored and controlled
from SICAM PAS CC (Control Center).
This and a fast response provided by
the clear representation of the operat-
ing situation permit a cost-optimized
operation and a fast supply resump-
tion, should malfunctions occur in the
power system. SIMATIC WinCC as
basis of the operation ensures the
compatibility with the automation of
other industrial processes and reduces
training times to a minimum.
Fast standard configurations
The SICAM PAS UI intelligent parame-
terization system is designed so that
its operation conforms to DIGSI and
takes configuration data directly from
the field level. An XML data transfer
is provided for IEC 61850 and the
SIPROTEC 4 field devices. The stan-
dard configurations provided in a
library for other field devices can be
easily integrated as types. This pre-
vents duplicate inputs or input errors.
10/17 10
10.3.3 Remote Control,
Communicating and
Automating with
ACP 1703
There is the increasing demand to
locally acquire physically separated
information and to reliably transfer
this information to where the data is
needed for monitoring and analysis.
Just a few optical fiber cables rather
than many parallel signal cables
reduce the cost for installation and
maintenance, and also ensure high
reliability and interference immunity.
The ACP 1703 system family can be
used here.
High functionality and flexibility are
the basis for a modern remote control
system. This also includes comprehen-
sive possibilities for communication,
automation and the integration of
process signals. The various ACP 1703
components offer optimum scalability
depending on the number of inter-
faces and process variables. All are
based on the same system architec-
ture, use the same technology and
can be edited with the same tool,
Toolbox II.
In industrial processes in particular,
the boundary between remote control
and distributed control engineering
often cannot be defined unambigu-
Photo 10.3/1: ACP 1703
10/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
ously. The secondary technology must
also flexibly solve the required tasks
where they are needed. ACP 1703 and
SICAM PAS together cover the full
scope of possible tasks, and provide
solutions for every requirement,
featuring high performance as well as
profitability.
ACP 1703 consists of the following
components
AK 1703 ACP is the large automation
component for a flexible mix of
communications, automation and
peripherals. A scalable number of
serial and Ethernet interfaces,
redundancy concepts and high signal
density for local inputs/outputs
characterize these components
AK 1703 ACP can be used as a central
unit or as a remote control substation,
data node or front-end, automation
unit with stand-alone function groups,
and with local or remote peripherals.
TM 1703 ACP is the solution for com-
pact applications. This component
provides up to five communication
interfaces, an automation function
and peripheral connection using the
distributed TM terminal modules. The
mechanical construction is based on
intelligent terminal modules for
simple installation on 35-mm mount-
ing rails. TM 1703 ACP permits the
direct interface connection of actua-
Photo 10.3/2: TM 1703 ACP
tors and sensors with wire cross
sections up to 2.5 mm2. Modules for
binary input/output up to 220 V DC
also open up savings potential at the
coupling level. For the distributed
input/output, individual modules can
be installed at distances up to 200 m
from the control panel.
BC 1703 ACP is the robust component
for highest EMC compatibility and direct
peripheral interface connection up to
220 V DC. High switching capacity and
direct measuring transducer inputs
permit operation under harsh condi-
tions. Up to three communications
interfaces and integrated automation
function ensure the flexible use in
central and distributed configurations.
The BC 1703 ACP can also be expanded
with TM terminal modules.
TM 1703 mic, as small remote control
unit, assumes a special place. Option-
ally equipped with a serial or Ethernet
interface, it can use up to eight TM
terminal modules. IEC 60870-5-101
(serial) or IEC 60870-5-104 (using
TCP/IP) is available as protocol. The
included automation function can be
used for simple tasks. The integrated
Web server supports the simple con-
figuring using a standard Web
browser. The unit is installed easily on
mounting rails.
Photo 10.3/3: BC 1703 ACP
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
Common properties
All components of the ACP family are
based on the same system architec-
ture and, despite their different con-
structions, use the same technology.
As they also feature the same func-
tions, they can be combined with
each other as required and can be
used and both from a technical and
economic viewpoint, they can be used
optimally according to requirements.
For example, since all components
rely on the same communication
modules (other than TM 1703 mic),
they can use the available protocols.
Not only the standard protocols, such
as IEC 60870-5-101/103/104 and IEC
61850 are available, but also common
standards such as DNP 3.0 or Modbus,
together with many proprietary proto-
cols provided for interfacing existing
third-party equipment.
What is also common to all compo-
nents is the integrated flash memory
card for the reliable storage of all
parameters and the specific firmware.
This supports a problem-free replace-
ment of a component, simply by
exchanging the memory card. The
memory card can also be written
offline with the Toolbox II and then
added to the system.
Photo 10.3/4: TM 1703 mic
An integrated tool
Toolbox II provides all functions
required for integrated and consistent
engineering of the complete plant,
such as data collection, data model-
ing, configuring and parameteriza-
tion. Furthermore, it supports the
engineering of the process informa-
tion for the automation and mainte-
nance control systems, including the
creation of automation tasks using a
graphical function chart in accordance
with IEC 61131-3. Even the manage-
ment of the systems from third-party
manufacturers using their specific
parameters is possible with Toolbox II.
The data modeling is constructed
object-oriented and thus simplifies
data clarity and consistency, even
after several changes/extensions have
been made.
Toolbox II runs with all ACP 1703
subsystems and supports all sub-
processes of a remote control and
automation project. Data exchange
with DIGSI and SICAM PAS UI ensures
that even mixed configurations do not
require the same data to be entered
more than once.
Remote control is more
ACP 1703 always provides adequate
performance. The modular multi-
processor concept allows the proces-
sor power to grow with each system
expansion. The distributed architec-
ture and the principle of evolutionary
development ensure a durable system
with a long service life. This secures
investment in the long run. High
functional reliability is a matter of
course for the ACP 1703; its inte-
grated comprehensive self-monitoring
Further information:
function detects any problem immedi-
 Spectrum PowerCC:
ately, and informs the operational www.siemens.com/powerCC
management and service without  SICAM PAS:
delay. www.siemens.com/sicam
 ACP 1703:
www.siemens.com/sicam
10/19 10

10.4 Safety
Lighting Systems
The globalization and harmonization
process makes the international stan-
dards and regulations landscape not
only ever more complicated, but also
subjects it to continuous change.
Solutions considered to be fully legiti-
mate yesterday have been completely
rejected today and can no longer be
applied. New requirements are added
and, not infrequently, complicate the
planning and project implementativ.
To address this situation and to avoid
the need to continually catch up with
the latest development, the interested
observer has just one possibility. The
observer must become familiar with
the original concepts of safety lighting.
In other words, determine the protec-
tion goal and prepare its implementa-
tion for each specific application
situation. We must finally waive good-
bye to an ever-recurring myth: there is
no one piece of paper on which every-
thing is written describing how to
proceed. The aim of safety engineering
is to ensure that nothing happens
when something happens. This is the
only measure for the work of the safety
specialists.
Introduction
Safety lighting began its tender start
in the early days of industrialization
when the founding fathers of today's
corporate groups began to fetch many
labourers into their factories and
employ them in large production halls
without adequate daylight. When
power failures occurred, the employ-
ees were sometimes still standing
next to running machines and sud-
denly left without any lighting. This
resulted in many severe accidents
which gave rise to the call for safety
lighting. Every employer was required
10/20 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
to make provisions for his employees A safety lighting system built in accor-
to be led safely to the factory doors in dance with statutory regulations,
case of malfunctions. The safety properly maintained and functioning,
lighting successively entered other permits at least a safe exit from the
areas where persons gathered and building.
nowadays it is inconceivable that it is
A safety lighting system consists of
not needed in many application areas.
the safety power source, distribution,
Wherever people come together, a monitoring units, cable systems, lights
power failure brings major dangers. and rescue signs. To implement such
Rated operational duration (in hours) of
the power source for safety purposes
Illuminated or back-lit safety signs in
Power generating set with medium
Central power supply system – CPS
Specially-protected power supply
Power generating set with short
Power generating set without
interruption (≤ 0.5 seconds)
interruption (≤ 15 seconds)
Power supply system with
interruption (0 seconds)
Examples for building
Single-battery system
continuous operation
regulations in force for
Max. switchover time
buildings in which
power limit – LPS
people gather
Illuminance
system
([lx)
(s)
Gathering places,
theaters, cinemas
2) 1 3 • • • – • • – –
Exhibition buildings 2) 1 3 • • • – • • – –
Shops 2) 1 3 • • • – • • – –
Restaurants 2) 1 3 • • • • • • – –
Hotels, guesthouses,
senior citizen's homes
2) 1 1) 8 5) • • • • • • • –
Schools 2) 1 1) 3 • • • • • • • –
Parking buildings,
underground garages
2) 15 1 • • • • • • • –
Airports, railroad
stations
2) 1 3 6) • • • • • • – –
High-rise buildings 2) 1 1) 3 4) • • • • • • • –
Rescue routes in places
of work
2) 15 1 • • • • • • • •
Workplaces subject to
particular danger
2) 0.5 3) • • • • • • – •
Stages 3 1 3 • • • • • • – –
1) Depending on the panic risk, from 1 second to 15 seconds
2) Illuminance intensity of the safety lighting in accordance with DIN EN 1838
3) The time for which persons are subject to danger
4) For high-rise residential buildings, 8 hours, unless the switching operation satisfies the requirements of Section 4.7.6
5) Three hours are sufficient when the switching operation satisfies the requirements of Section 4.7.6
6) For above-ground areas of railroad stations, one hour is also permitted provided an appropriate evacuation concept exists
• permitted – not relevant
Table 10.4/1: Requirements placed on the electrical system for safety lighting systems
(source: E DIN VDE 0108-100: 2005-1 0)
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
a system, a number of building-
specific aspects must be considered
during the planning and implementa-
tion. The continually increasing share
of electronic components in our
buildings means the fault scenarios to
be considered become ever more
comprehensive. The basic task of a
safety lighting in any fault situation is
to ensure adequate lighting being
switched on in good time.
This requires that in case of failure,
the route of the power supply, from
the feeding point to the actually
installed general lighting, must be
substituted with safety lighting. The
nearer the emergency power source is
to the site of application, the less
expense is required for the cabling. If
bus systems are used to operate the
general lighting, they must also be
monitored. The possibility that some
circumstance causes both systems to
fail at the same time must also be
excluded. This could, for example, be
caused by a fire or excavation work at
cable channels.
10.4.1 Planning
For a detailed planning, we require
the following documents:
 Valid building permit
 Fire protection expertise with the
building’s fire areas
 Escape and rescue paths diagram
 Floor plans and sections
 Planning documents for the general
lighting
The fire protection concept specifies
the general outline for the scope of
the required safety lighting. However
the general standards and regulations
are often merely amended by special
additions. To determine the overall
scope of amendments, see Table
10.4/1.
After reading the documents, enter The fundamental decision should
the individual fire areas in the floor now be made whether the archi-
plans and draw the escape and rescue tect's general lighting is to be used
paths. Some state building regulations for the safety lighting, or whether
require that fire areas larger than separate safety lighting supplied
1,600 m2 be subdivided into so-called by a system manufacturer is to be
electrical fire areas. used. This question is decisive for
Characteristics CEAG data Explanation Satisfied
Operating voltage Possible battery voltage range in
range DC: 186 V - 275 V at -10 °C
backup operation
Switching time: System switching time: Typical CEAG system switching
from AC to DC 180 ms – 450 ms time
from DC to AC 180 ms – 450 ms
Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 60929 Electronic ballast for tubular
fluorescent lamps supplied with
alternating-current
Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 61347-2-3 Special requirements placed on
(incl. Appendix J) electronic ballast for fluorescent
lamps supplied with alternating-
current
Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 61000-3-2 EMC (electromagnetic
conformance) standard
Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 61547 EMC standard – electrical
interference, in particular for
emergency lighting lamps
Satisfies the standard*: DIN EN 55015 EMC standard – limit values and
(measurement for AC and DC) measuring procedures for radio
interference to electrical lighting
equipment
* The certification in accordance with VDE 0108 does not suffice because this is not any electronic ballast standard
Manufacturer
Characteristics CEAG data Explanation details:
No-load current of the
electronic ballast
Setpoint for use of:
2L-CG-S: <10 mA / <28 mA
Selection aid for lamps / ballast
monitoring modules, CEAG type:
(without or with 2L-CG (4–120 W): <10 mA 2L-CG, as specified in the catalog
defective illuminant) in 2L-CG (7–120 W): <25 mA
DC operation 2L-CG (11–120 W): <41 mA
Max. switch-on current Permitted total switch-on current for: Applies to a maximum permitted
per ECG in AC SKU 4 x 1 A (CG) => 60 A/ms switch-on current of the ballasts
per circuit in circuit in order to handle the
operation:
SKU 2 x 3 A (CG) => 120 A/ms maximum contact load of the
per circuit circuit switching operations.
SKU 1 x 6 A (CG) => 180 A/ms
SKU 2 x 3 A CG-S => 250 A/ms
per circuit
SKU 1 x 6 A CG-S => 250 A/ms
Rated current in AC Manufacturer-specific To determine the maximum
operation: number of ballasts per circuit
Rated current in DC Manufacturer-specific dito
operation:
Manufacturer-specific In battery operation for
Light flux ratio in DC
operation 186 V com- emergency light ballasts for the
ipared with 230 V light planning
Lights planned for use as safety lights must conform to the DIN EN 60598-2-22 standards.
Table 10.4/2: Requirements placed on third-party ECGs (request table with an e-mail to: info@ceag.de)
10/21 10
the further planning for three
reasons:
 Lamps for general lighting requires
higher wattages with the conse-
quence that fewer lights per circuit
can be connected. More circuits
(cabling and circuit modules) are
required.
 The lights and their fittings must
satisfy a number of standards. Table
10.4/2 summarizes the standards to
be satisfied and the required param-
eters for ECGs in safety lighting .
 The required battery capacity will be
much greater.
Converted architect lights often have a
“wild” interior. Important is that a light
that serves as a safety light must now
satisfy much stricter criteria. And the
more additional engineering (monitor-
ing module, separate ECGs for multi-
lamp lights, DALI modules) installed
on-site, the more difficult it is to satisfy
these standards. In the worst case, the
general lighting that was merely
Photo 10.4/1: Example of a project schedule (request project schedule as an Excel file with an e-mail to: info@ceag.de)
10/22 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
converted to safety lighting does not
function in an emergency. All persons
involved will have to carry the respon-
sibility. A better solution is to have the
manufacturer directly equip the
desired lights with the required emer-
gency light components. This retains
the warranty and the CE marking is
normally maintained.
The number of lights is now deter-
mined individually for each fire area.
To do this, enter the safety and rescue
path lights required in accordance with
EN 1838 in the floor plans and transfer
them to the project chart (Photo 10.4/1).
The circuits result from the fire areas
and the associated lights.
The correct system must now be cho-
sen. If permitted by the building condi-
tions, the equipping of fire area with
low-power systems (LP system, previ-
ously called group battery systems) is a
good choice. If this is not possible, the
use of a central power system (CP
system, previously called central bat-
tery system) is recommended. The final
circuit wiring from the LP and CP sys-
tems to the lights is made in accor-
dance with the Sample Directive on
Fireproofing Requirements for Line
Systems (MLAR). The advantage of
these systems lies in the relatively short
cable lengths, and the energy required
in an emergency is available from
batteries very near the place of use. No
complicated switchgear and cable
networks for distributing the emer-
gency power must be built and main-
tained (E30, E90).
When the safety lighting needs to be
activated, the safety light unit must
receive a switch-on signal. The extent
of the possible interference sources
that need to be detected and avoided
in an emergency must be considered.
The procedure here is simple. The
general distribution board is moni-
tored with voltage sensors so that on
occurrence of an incident, the com-
plete general lighting of a complete
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
area cannot fail undetected. This
obviously also includes lighting con-
trol and any bus systems. Irrespective
of whether the bus fails and the
general power supply is still opera-
tional or, the other way round, the
safety lighting must operate without
delay in any fault situation. This
obviously also applies to dimmed
safety lights.
Safety lighting with alternative
power sources
The installation of alternative power
sources for the safety lighting is
somewhat more difficult than for the
LP and CP systems. The effort for the
acquisition of a failure of the general
lighting remains the same as for the
LP and CP systems. The difficulty here
lies in the often long, including lines
between buildings transmission lines
of the emergency power supply in the
fact that power must be 100% pro-
vided in an emergency (take account
of the protection requirements). The
planner is responsible and must prove
that safety lighting is available with-
out delay when required, and not
interrupted for the prescribed nominal
operational duration. However,
because every electrical system is built
differently, this can develop into a
demanding task. A possible approach
could be mind-mapping: follow the
path of the emergency supply from
the point where the emergency power
source feeds in to the final circuits of
the safety lighting. Every place where
emergency power supply could be
hindered must be considered in
advance and precautions must be
taken to prevent such adverse effects.
Such areas also include possible
excavation work in the property, fire
in distribution boards or on cabling
sections, normal wear, usual power
failures in the public grid etc. The
inrush currents must not be underesti-
mated, which, in an emergency,
would load such alternative power
sources, in particular, when all con-
sumers are switched on at once. The
smallest and the largest possible
short-circuit current must be included
in all calculations. Selectivity and
absence of system perturbations must
be proved with calculations and
documented. In case of fire, possible
heating of the E30/E90 power cables
must be considered for calculating
appropriate cable cross sections.
Considerations are required when
exactly the emergency power source
should be connected into supply in an
emergency and how the system
recovery test could proceed. Whether
this effort is worthwhile compared
with LP systems and CP systems may
be different from case to case. The
step, however, must be considered
carefully from the beginning, because
a change from one system to another
system is not always possible.
Single battery lights
Although single battery lights are
easier to use, they are not economical
when more than approximately 15
units are involved. The purchase price
and the frequently-required battery
replacement mean they do not really
represent an alternative. The systems
should have at least an automatic test
log and a blocking function. There are
many reasons for and against the use
of single battery lights. Anyone who
has already used this technology
knows what problems are involved.
Such a solution can be recommended
only under very unusual
circumstances.
10.4.2 Where Is a Safety
Lighting System
Required?
E DIN VDE 0108-100: 2005-10;
Section 4.1
“The safety lighting ensures that
should the general power supply fail,
the lighting is made available without
delay, automatically and for a prede-
fined time in a specified area”. The
system must ensure that the safety
lighting satisfies the following func-
tions:
a) Illumination of the rescue path
signs
b) Illumination of the exit ways so
that the safe areas can be safely
reached
c) Adequate illumination of the fire
fighting equipment or alarm equip-
ment along the rescue paths
d) It should permit work associated
with safety measures.
To ensure that the safety lighting
system is configured to meet the
applicable standards, prior to config-
uring the system, drawings must be
provided that show the layout of the
buildings and all existing or suggested
rescue paths, fire-alarm call points
and fire protection equipment, and
indicate the position of all obstacles
that could impair escape.
The safety lighting must be active if
only parts of the general lighting fail.
Provisions must always be made to
ensure that, should the general power
supply fail, the safety lighting in the
affected faulted area is activated. This
can also mean that individual circuit-
breakers, ground leakage circuit-
breakers and control-circuit fuses for
bus systems or light control systems
are monitored.
At least two circuits and two safety
lights must be planned for every area
equipped with safety lighting.
10/23 10
Controllers and bus systems of the
electrical system for safety purposes
must be independent of the con-
trollers and bus systems of the build-
ing control systems. A coupling of
both systems is permitted only with
an interface that ensures a reliable,
electrical isolation of both systems
from each other.
The extent of a safety lighting
depends on the type and use of the
building. Further notes are contained
in Table 10.4/1.
10.4.3 MLAR – Sample
Directive on Fireproofing
Requirements for Line
Systems
Several high damage incidents in
recent years made it clear that a
power failure, etc., can also be the
result of a fire. Consequently, MLAR
guidelines must be considered during
the setup of safety lighting systems.
The functional safety of the whole
system must always be considered
when determining the system scope.
10/24 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens
MLAR: 2005-11, Excerpt:
5 Functional Endurance of Electrical
Cable Systems in Case of Fire
5.1 Basic Requirements
5.1.1 The electrical cable systems for
safety technology systems and equip-
ment prescribed by the building regula-
tions must be constructed or separated
by components in such a way that the
safety systems and equipment remain
functional (functional endurance) in
case of fire for an adequate period of
time. This functional endurance must
be ensured for possible interactions
with other systems, equipment or their
parts.
5.1.2 Other safety systems and equip-
ment required for operation may also
be connected to the distribution boards
for the electrical cable systems which
were installed for safety systems and
equipment prescribed by building
regulations. In this case, it must be
ensured that safety systems and equip-
ment prescribed by the building author-
ities are not impaired in any way.
5.2 Functional Endurance
5.2.1 Functional endurance of the
cables is ensured if the cables
a) satisfy the test requirements speci-
fied in DIN 4102-12:1998-11 (func-
tional endurance class E 30 to E90) or
are laid
b) on unfinished ceilings below the
floor screed with a thickness of at least
30 mm or if
c) they are buried in the ground.
5.2.2 Distribution boards for electrical
cable systems with functional
endurance in accordance with Section
5.3 must be
a) located in dedicated rooms not used
for other purposes that are separated
from other rooms by walls, ceilings and
doors with a fire resistance appropriate
for the required duration of the func-
tional endurance and, with the excep-
tion of the doors, with non-inflamma-
ble building materials,
b) separated with a housing for which
the operability of the electrical fittings
in the distribution board is proved in
case of fire for the required duration of
functional endurance by a usability
certification issued by the building
authorities (note: the party performing
the installation has the proof responsi-
bility) or
c) surrounded by components (includ-
ing their terminations) that have a fire
resistance appropriate for the required
duration of the functional endurance
and, with exception of the termina-
tions, are made of non-inflammable
building materials, whereby it must be
ensured that the operability of the
electrical fittings in the distribution
board is proved in case of fire for the
required duration of functional
endurance. (This requires a certified
system with building authorities
approval number of at least Z 86.2)
5.3 Duration of the Functional
Endurance
5.3.2 The duration of the functional
endurance of the wiring systems must
be at least 30 minutes for
a) safety lighting systems; excluded are
wiring systems used to supply power to
the safety lighting only within a fire
area at a floor level or only within a
staircase; the floor area of each fire
area must not exceed 1,600 m2,
b) passenger elevators with control
that allows use in case of fire; excluded
are wiring systems located within the
elevator shafts or the motor rooms laid
with functional endurance E30.
 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
10.4.4 Installation of a CP
System Battery System
For the installation of CP System
battery systems a number of regula-
tions and specifications apply, in
particular MLAR: 2005-11, DIN EN
50272-2 and LBO. Depending on the
building conditions, the previously
mentioned regulations and specifica-
tions provide the following possibili-
ties for placement:
 Main distribution board of the
general power supply (MD-GPS) and
main distribution board of the
safety power supply (MD-SPS) in an
electrical operating area. Ensure
here that MD-GPS and MD-SPS are
separated from each other with
30 minutes functional endurance
(Fig. 10.4/1a).
 MD-SPS including battery in a
separate electrical operating area.
Ensure here that MD-GPS and
MD-SPS are separated from each
other with 90 minutes functional
endurance (Fig. 10.4/1b).
10.4.5 Final Circuits in the
Fire Area
The requirements placed on fire
protection have resulted in a greatly
increased installation effort. To
address this development in the final
circuits, in addition to the previously
mentioned three circuit types, a
fourth circuit type has been developed
– allowing free programming in the
circuit. In this case, only two final
circuits are required for each fire area.
Permanent, standby or switched lights
can be attached at any point of such a
circuit. Power is always present at all
lights and the system module in the
lights blocks or releases the power to
the ECG. The installation is made in
the conventionally installed safety
lighting circuits without additional
Fig. 10.4/1b: Placement of CP System battery
systems, battery systems in the
HV-SV
Fig. 10.4/1a: Placement of CP System battery
systems with substation
expense. The requirements placed on Switched permanent light (DLS)
fire protection in accordance with Safety lights switched in “switched
MLAR: 2005-11 remain effective. permanent light” illuminate when the
general lighting is switched on, the
Circuitry types of the safety general lighting fails or for a manually
lighting or automatically activated continuous
operation test. This circuit type allows
Permanent light (DS)
the safety lighting to be integrated
Safety lights in “permanent light”
seamlessly in the general lighting.
illuminate in every operating state. In
power system operation, the lights User-configurable circuit (STAR)
are supplied with 230/240 V, 50/60 Safety and rescue sign lights in the
Hz. In battery operation, the switching DS, BS, DLS circuit types are operated
unit installed in the safety lighting using a patented technology on the
system supplies power to the safety usual 3-pole power cable. Software
lights. that runs on the Windows user inter-
face is used to program the CEAG
Standby light (BS)
products.
Safety lights switched in “standby”
illuminate when the normal lighting
fails (power failure) and for a manu-
ally or automatically activated contin-
uous operation test. Should the power
system fail, the control unit switches
to battery operation. The direct cur-
rent fed over the switching unit
supplies the lights, until the power
system is restored or the exhaustive
discharge protection is activated.
10/25 10
 6 circuits

BS DLS
BS
BS DLS

DS

Fig. 10.4/2: Traditional installation with the DS,

BS, DLS circuits; two circuits are
prescribed for each type (a total of
six circuits)

2 circuits

Fig. 10.4/4: Safety lighting system with the appropriate E30 wiring using three fire areas in a building.
BS DLS The hybrid circuits (STAR) reduces the wiring effort by 50% for each of the two supply leads.
BS
BS DLS

DS

tion (transient system fault) at the Informationstechnik, German Com-

Fig. 10.4/3: Installation with user-configurable
circuits (STAR hybrid circuit) requires
only two final circuits for all circuits.
Subsequent change to the circuit type
is possible without any problems.
10.4.6 Test of a New
System
To ensure that the safety lighting has
been installed correctly, a test by an
authorized expert must be made prior
to the initial commissioning. The
expert must certify the effectiveness
and operational reliability of the
system. The test inspector must test at
least the following parameters:
For all systems
 Nominal illuminance
including an ageing allowance
(E DIN VDE 0108-100; 2005-10)
 Measurement of the lighting system
values in accordance with
DIN 5035-6
 Power system recovery and reactiva-
end of 2/3 of the nominal operating mission for Electrical Engineering,
time. Electronics, Information Technology)
in the DIN and VDE. This means the
In addition, for group and central
following standards should be used
battery systems:
for newly planned safety lighting
 Behavior of the general lighting in systems:
case of the power system recovery
 DIN VDE 0100-718 provides basic
 Execution of the network moni-
toring
statements about the installation of
a safety lighting system,
 Documentation (DIN EN 50172)
 E DIN VDE 0108-100; 2005-10
 SCSG fire protection
provides additional information for
 Absence of system perturbations
battery-backed systems.
(DIN EN 50172)
 Ageing reserve for the battery
(DIN EN 50171)
10.4.7 Standards
As of March 2007, VDE 0108-1 to VDE Contact:
0108-8 should no longer be used.
CEAG Notlichtsysteme GmbH
DEN 50172 (VDE 0108-100: 2005-01) Senator-Schwartz-Ring 26
has already been supplemented in 59494 Soest, Germany
2005 (E DIN VDE 0108-100: 2005-10). Telephone: +49 (0) 29 21 / 6 9-8 70,
The immediate use of this draft is Fax: +49 (0) 29 21 / 69-6 17
recommended by the responsible UK Internet: www.ceag.de
221.3 of the DEK (Deutsche Kommis- E-mail: info-n@CEAG.de
sion für Elektrotechnik Elektronik

10/26 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Ease of Operation, Safety and Control Engineering
10.5 Robust
Remote Terminal
Unit for Extreme
Environmental
Conditions
(SIPLUS RIC)
The requirements for the simple
inclusion of data from peripheral
sources in the existing control sys-
tems increase. Ease of operation,
optimization and monitoring tasks
must be satisfied. The communication
paths are very comprehensive and
often also long; the data sources are
very diverse and often must be
changed in remote, inhospitable
regions. This means the remote
terminal unit must be correspondingly
flexible.
General requirements placed on a
remote control system for extreme
environmental conditions
 Extended temperature range
from -40 to +70 °C
 Standard transmission protocols,
observance of communications
standards such as IEC 60870
 Low energy consumption
 Robust construction suitable for
outdoor use, stainless steel housing
 Simple installation and commission-
ing
 Over-voltage protection
 Faster availability at the site of
installation and prepared external
connections
 Expandible hardware and software
 Versatile communication connec-
tions and protocols to the control
center
 High data security
 Compatibility to existing control
systems
Environmental conditions /
outdoor operation
The housing constructed as a robust
stainless steel unit and the electronics
designed for operation in a wide
temperature range from -40 to +70 °C
makes the remote terminal unit
suitable for use as outdoor device. For
protection from aggressive gases,
humidity and condensation, the
electronic circuit boards can be coated
with a protective varnish.
Dialectric strength of the inputs
and outputs
Depending on the application and the
site of installation, high requirements
are placed on the electrical loading
capability of the inputs. For operation
in electrical power distribution sys-
tems, the inputs and outputs must be
designed for maximum surge voltages
of 3.5 kV.
Wide-range power supplies
The integrated wide-range power
supplies that can be operated with both
110/230 V AC and 24/110 V DC allow
the devices to be connected directly to
the available power supply without
requiring any additional power con-
verter. This saves not only engineering
expense, but also hardware and installa-
tion.
Communication
The international standard protocols
developed for applications in the
power transmission and distribution
sectors permit a reliable data trans-
mission also over large distances. The
actual communication medium can
be:
 Modem with wire connection
 Ethernet
 Optical fiber conductor
 Wireless/GPRS
Use of communications standards
The communications types for remote
control systems agreed in international
committees are specified in the IEC
60870-5-101 and -104 standards and
prove a high and reliable standard. The
observance of these standards ensures
the simple and reliable data exchange.
Comprehensive know-how is available
worldwide.
Examples of the functions defined by
the IEC required uniformly for WAN:
 Data types with attributes
 Communication or operating modes
 Clock handling
 Operational and alarm signalling
 Preprocessing of measured values
and counter values
 Command processing
 Diagnostic functions
Control center link
Depending on the application, the
data must be interfaced to control
centers. For a SIMATIC solution, the
remote terminal unit is accessed from
a CPU of the S7-300 or S7-400 series.
The connection between the CPU and
the remote terminal unit is based on
the standard protocol IEC 60870-5-
101 or 60870-5-104 using an appro-
priate communications medium
(cable, optical fiber conductor, wire-
less, mobile radiocommunications, …).
If information needs to be exchanged
with power supply system operators,
utility companies, etc., the remote
terminal unit can perform this task
directly. The building services control
system or automation system is
decoupled. The interface between the
operators is a clearly defined hard-
ware interface. No intervention is
made in the building services control
system.
10/27 10
 Connection of the remote terminal
unit to an existing control center
The use of standardized remote
control protocols makes the inclusion
of SIPLUS RIC in SCADA (Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition) systems
easy to implement.
The SIPLUS RIC product family sets the
standard in the industry with regard
to flexibility, robustness and ease of
use. The connection to SIMATIC, in
Photo 10.5/1: Modular, hardened remote control system (from the left: main module, motor control
particular, allows the use of the best
module, analog inputs/outputs, digital inputs/outputs) features of both systems.

Cost-optimized design  16 digital inputs The platform basis is SIMATIC S7

 4 analog outputs
For the selection of the devices, to  Long-term availability
 16 digital outputs
avoid the need for expensive engi-  Standard portfolio, stocks of spare
Expansion modules can be extended
neering, ensure that the basic version parts
with one or more of the following
already includes all components  Familiar look-and-feel
units
required for operation, such as power  Same tool, no new on-the-job
supply, inputs, outputs and communi-  DI 16, digital inputs learning, no new training
cations interfaces. To extend the data  AI 8, analog inputs
Platform expansion with SIPLUS
volume, expansion modules supplied  CO 16, digital outputs
extreme
with power from the base unit can be  MCU, Motor Control Unit
plugged in.  Hardened against temperature
Available protocols effects
Simple installation  Hardened against environmental
 IEC 870-5-101
effects with a contour-adapted
For installation, the device is simply  IEC 870-5-104
coating (conformally coated)
snapped on a mounting rail. All con-  In preparation: ModBus RTU
nections are made using plug connec- Platform expansion with SIPLUS
tors. This allows connection to be RIC
prepared in advance so that the
 IEC protocols implemented as
commissioning cables only need to be application, no version dependency
plugged in.  Expanded with outdoor devices

Compatibility
Easy compatibility between the
SIMATIC CPU and the remote control Further information:
system makes the application very Siemens AG
A&D SE S5
flexible. This allows the benefits of
Würzburger Str. 121
both systems (automation and remote 90766 Fürth
control system) to be used.
Claus-Thomas Michalak
The main module is fully equipped with Klaus Czwalinna
Tel.: +49 (0) 9 11 / 7 50-23 04
 Power supply (AC or DC) Tel.: +49 (0) 9 11 / 7 50-49 78
 Communications interfaces (LAN, Photo 10.5/2: Possible connection of the remote E-mail: claus.michalak@siemens.com
electrical or optical fiber conductor) terminal units to a SIMATIC system E-mail: klaus.czwalinna@siemens.com

10/28 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

Appendix

chapter 11
11 Appendix
A1 Standards, When planning and erecting build-
ings, many standards, regulations and
(e.g. factory regulations) and the
responsible power distribution net-
Regulations and guidelines must be observed work operator. The following list shall
Guidelines and complied with in addition to
the explicit specifications made by
give you an overview of the most
important documents in this context.
the building and plant operator

DIN 57100 VDE 0100 Erection of low-voltage installations with rated voltages up to 1,000 V

DIN VDE 0100-710 Erection of low-voltage installations – Requirements for special installations or locations –
Part 710: Medical locations

DIN VDE 0100-718 Erection of low-voltage installations – Requirements for special installations or locations –
Part 718: Installations for gathering of people

DIN VDE 0101 Power installations exceeding 1 kV

DIN EN 60909-0 VDE 0102 Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems - Part 0: Calculation of currents

DIN VDE 0105-100 Operation of electrical installations – Part 100: General requirements

(VDE 0107) Withdrawn, currently DIN VDE 0100-710

(VDE 0108) Withdrawn, currently DIN VDE 0100-718 (transition period until 03/2007)

DIN VDE 0141 Earthing system for special power installations with nominal voltages above 1 kV

DIN VDE 0185-1 Protection against lightning – General principles

DIN EN 50272-2 VDE 0510-2 Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations – Part 2: Stationary batteries

DIN VDE 0800-1 Telecommunications; general concepts; requirements and tests for the safety of
facilities and apparatus

Arb.Stätt. VO Workplace Ordinance

Elt Bau VO Regulations (of the German Länder) on the construction of utilities rooms for electrical installations

TA-Lärm Instruction for the protection from acoustic exposure

TAB “Technical supply conditions set by the local power distribution network operator”

The stipulations made by TÜV, TÜH, and Dekra

Rules for the prevention of accidents

Official regulations (e. g. state building regulations) and other conditions for building imposed by authorities

Expertise on fire safety and expert concepts

Further notes on planning, configurations and layout:

VDI 2078 To calculate the cooling load in air-conditioned rooms

AGI J 12 Construction of rooms for indoor switchgear, Worksheet published by

Arbeitsgemeinschaft Industriebau e. V. (AGI) (Working Group on Industrial Building)

Applicable VDE standards can be found in the standards database provided by VDE Publishing House (www.vde-verlag.de).

Table A1/1: Standards, regulations and guidelines

11/2 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Appendix

A2 Safety Standard for Low-Voltage Switchgear

Assemblies

Requirements on low-voltage Type-tested assemblies (TTA) 1. Proof that temperature-rise limits

switchgear regarding their heat dissi-
pation, packing density, management
of high short-circuit currents and
insulation strength have risen tremen-
dously in recent years.
Safe operation of low-voltage
switchgear is only ensured if the
manufacturer observes all standards
applicable to the switchgear assembly
and is able to present proof thereof.
Only switchgear in compliance with
currently valid standards satisfy pres-
ent-day safety regulations.
The following standards apply:
IEC 60439-1, VDE 0660 Part 500
Low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear assembly
Type-tested and partially type-tested
assemblies
The content of these two standards
is identical. They show two
possibilities to manufacturelow-
voltage switchgear:
• Type-tested assemblies (TTA)
• Partially type-tested assemblies
(PTTA)
In such an assembly, all components
alone as well as their functionable
assembly, including all electrical an
mechanical connections have been
type-tested. The prerequisite for the
use of other switching/protective
devices is that their technical data are
at least identical or better (conclusion
by analogy).
Partially type-tested assemblies
(PTTA)
Such assemblies contain type-tested
and not type-tested components. Not
type-tested components must be
derived from type-tested ones.
For type-tested assemblies all proof
must be produced by means of
testing.
There are two exceptions for partially
type-tested assemblies:
Required proof for compliance with standards
Requirement
1. Temperature-rise limit
2. Dielectric strength
are kept. In circuits of max. 3,150 A
feeding current this proof may also be
produced by means of extrapolation.
2. Proof of the short-circuit strength is
ommitted for switchgear which is
protected by a current-limiting device
with a let-through current ≤ 15 kA.
If extrapolation or calculation accord-
ing to DIN VDE 0660 Part 500 is
required, it shall always be based
upon a deduction of type-tested
systems.
Only if all proof has been produced
unambiguously, the system in
question is a type-tested switchgear
assembly or a partially type-tested
assembly. Hence, these assemblies
meet the relevant safety
regulations.
TTA PTTA
Test Test or extrapolation
Test Test

3. Short-circuit strength Test Test or extrapolation

4. Effectiveness of the protective conductor Test Test

5. Creepage distances and clearances in air Test Test

6. Mechanical function Test Test

7. IP degree of protection Test Test

11/3 11
A3 IP Degree of Protection according to IEC 60529

Meaning for the protection of

4 Designation
equipment:
Protection by an enclosure is indicated in the IP code as follows Protected against ingress of
IP.X
water with harmful effects
4.1 IP code layout IP 2 3 C
0 (not protected)
Code letters 1 vertical drops
(International Protection)
2 drops (15 ° inclination)
Second code figure

First code figure 3 sprayproof

(figures 0 to 8 or letter X)
4 splashproof
Second code figure 5 hoseproof
(figures 0 to 8 or letter X)
6 jetproof (strong jets)
Additional letter (optional) 8 temporary immersion in water
(letters A, B, C, D)
9 permanent immersion in water

Meaning for the protection of Meaning for the protection of Meaning for the protection of
equipment: persons persons:

Protected against ingress of Protected against access to Protected against access

IP.X IP.X
foreign matter dangerous parts with a to dangerous parts with a
0 (not protected) (not protected) A back of the hand
1 ≥ 50 mm in diameter back of the hand B finger
Additional letter
First code figure

2 ≥ 12.5 mm in diameter finger C tool

(optional)

3 ≥ 2.5 mm in diameter tool D wire

4 ≥ 0.04 in in diameter wire
5 dust-protected wire
6 dustproof wire

11/4 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens


A4 Installation
Guidelines for
Cables and Wires
Again and again, cables and wires are
laid wrongly. When recoiling or
unwinding, damage may already be
inflicted (Fig. A4/1). Their tensile and
thermal loads are often not looked
into. The following installation guide-
lines shall help to minimize trouble.
Cabling must be selected appropriate
to the installation and operating
conditions. It must be protected
against mechanical, thermal or chemi-
cal impact, as well as against the
ingress of moisture from the cable
ends.
Insulated high-current power cables
must not be buried in the ground.
Temporary covering of rubber
sheathed cables, type NSSHÖU, or
cable tracks with soil, sand or similar,
e.g. on construction sites is not con-
sidered as burying.
Fixtures of stationary cables and wires
must not damage them. If cables and
wires are laid horizontally on walls or
ceilings and fastened with clips, for
cables and wires which are not rein-
forced, the 20-fold outer diameter is
an approximate value for clip spacing.
This spacing also applies to brackets
for laying on cable ladders and racks.
When laid vertically, clip spacing may
B B
A A
Fig. A2/1: Recoiling and unwinding of cables
be increased as appropriate for the
cable or clip type.
For connection to non-stationary
equipment, flexible cables must be
relieved from tensile load and shear-
ing at the entry points into the casing
and secured against twisting and
kinking.
The outer cable sheath must not be
damaged by the tension relief devices.
Standard models of flexible PVC
cables are not suitable for outdoor
installation.
Flexible rubber sheathed cables
(e.g. NEOFLEX cables) are only suit-
able for permanent use outdoors if
their outer sheath consists of plastic
material, normally based on poly-
chloroprene (e.g. Neoprene). Special
cables must be used for permanent
application in water.
Cable systems with functional
endurance
These cable systems must be designed
in compliance with the type tests
(DIN 4102-12).
Thermal load
Temperature-rise limits for the respec-
tive cable design are included in the
technical data. The upper limits must
not be exceeded because of cable
heating on account of current heat
dissipation and ambient thermal
impact. The lower limits specify the
B
B
A A
Appendix
lowest permissible ambient tempera-
ture.
Tensile load
Tensile load of conductors should be
as low as possible. The following
tensile load on cable conductors must
not be exceeded:
 Cables for non-stationary
equipment
For cable installation and operation
intended for non-stationary equip-
ment, a maximum of 15 N per mm2
conductor cross section is permitted,
whereby cable screens, concentric
conductors and split protective con-
ductors are not counted. Cabling
which is subject to dynamic stress in
operation, e.g. in cranes with a high
accelaration force, in power chains
with a great movement frequency,
appropriate measures must be taken,
e.g. increasing the bending radius in
the individual case. Otherwise the
cable service life may be impaired.
 Cables for fixed installationg
The maximum tensile load for fixed
cable installation is 50 N per mm2
conductor cross section.
For further information on these installation
guidlines please refer to
 DIN VDE 0298-1
 DIN VDE 0891
11/5 11
A5 Fire Load Values Fire load calculations are gaining
more and more importance for public
mean fire load values. The fire loads
given in the table below are non-
of Cables and Wires buildings. Depending on the material binding guide values only.
type, cables and wires have different

Integration of fire loads at and in Material Fire load in kWh/kg Fire load value in MJ/kg
Type Average Average
buildings into the calculation. As far as
the assessment and limitation of
PVC 5.8 21
consequential fire risks are concerned,
there are different national laws and PE 12.2 44
standards to date. In Germany, the
applicable state building regulations for PS 11.5 42
buildings stipulate that certain limits
PA 8.1 26
regarding the accumulation of
combustible parts directly connected to PP 12.8 46
the building, such as cables and wiring
of building installations, be also taken PUR 6.4 23
into account (see Supplement 1 of VDE
TPE-E 6.3 23
0108 Part 1).
TPE-O 7.1 26

NR 6.4 23

SIR 5.0 18

EPR 6.4 23

EVA 5.9 21

CR 4.6 17

CSM 5.9 21

PVDF 4.2 15

ETFE 3,.9 14

FEP 1.4 5

PFA 1.4 5

PTFE 1.4 5

HFFR 4.8 17

HFFR cross-linked 4.2 15

Note:
The above mentioned calculation is only applicable to cables and wires whose combustible materials
are fully made of the same material type and do not contain any other metal parts besides the copper
content. Product-specific fire load values in form of a table can beobtained on request for: ÖLFLEX
CLASSIC 100H, ÖLFLEX CLASSIC 110H, ÖLFLEX® CLASSIC 110 CH, ÖLFLEX 120H, ÖLFLEX 130H, ÖLFLEX
120 CH, ÖLFLEX FD 820 H und ÖLFLEX FD 820 CH.
Conversion of quantities: 1 kWh/m = approx. 3.6 MJ/m; 1 MJ/m = approx. 0.227 kWh/m.

11/6 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Appendix

A6 Table of Nominal Illuminance

Type of indoor area or activity Nominal illuminance En [lx] Comment

1. General areas
1.1 Traffic zones in storerooms 50
1.2 Storage areas
1.2.1 Storage areas for similar or large-unit goods 50
1.2.2 Storage areas with search requirements for non-similar storage goods 100
1.2.3 Storage areas with reading requirements 200
1.3 Automatic high-rack warehouse
1.3.1 Corridors 2
1.3.2 Operator station 200
1.4 Dispatch center 200
1.5 Recreational, sanitary and medical care facilities
1.5.1 Canteens 200 Atmospheric lighting,
possibly incandescent lamps
1.5.2 Other recreational rooms and resting areas 100
1.5.3 Rooms for physical exercise 300
1.5.4 Changing rooms 100
1.5.5 Washing rooms 100 Possibly additional illumination of mirrors
1.5.6 Lavatories 100
1.5.7 Medical rooms, rooms for first aid and medical care 500
1.6 Building services, utilities
1.6.1 Machine rooms 100
1.6.2 Power supply and distribution 100
1.6.3 Telex, post room 500
1.6.4 Telephone operator 30

2. Traffic routes inside buildings

2.1 For people 50
2.2 For people and vehicles 100 Adjustment of nominal
illuminance to adjacent areas:
En1 ≥ 0.1 En2 where:
En1 = En of the traffic routes
En2 = En of adjacent areas
2.3 Stairs, moving escalators and inclined traffic routes 100
2.4 Loading platforms 100
2.5 Automatic conveyor systems or belts in the vicinity of traffic routes 100
2.6 Gateway areas
2.6.1 For day shift 2 x En
min. 400 lx
2.6.2 For night shift 0.5 En
to 0.2 En

11/7 11
A6 Table of Nominal Illuminance

Type of indoor area or activity Nominal illuminance En [lx] Comment

3. Offices and similar rooms

3.1 Office rooms with daylight-oriented workplaces only in the
immediate vicinity of windows 300 Workplace-oriented general
lighting, at the workplace at least 0.8 En
3.2 Office rooms 500
3.3 Open-plan offices – high level of reflection 750 High levels of reflexion:
– medium reflection 1,000 ceilings with min. 0.7,
walls/partitions min. 0.5.
Single-user lamps useful
3.4 Technical drawing 750 En referred to a typical position of the
drawing board of 70 ° towards the horizontal
plane; in the center 1.2 m high
3.5 Conference and meeting rooms 300
3.6 Reception rooms 10
3.7 Areas with access to the public 200
3.8 Areas for data processing 500

4. Chemical industry
4.1 Process plants, remote- controlled 50
4.2 Process plants with occasional manual intervention 100
4.3 Permanently occupied workplaces in process plants 200
4.4 Measuring desks and stations, control platforms and desks 300 If required for operative reasons: En < 300 lx
4.5 Laboratories, fabrication 300
4.6 Works requiring advanced viewing tasks 500
4.7 Color checks 1,000 Single-user lamps useful.
Pay attention to color rendering.

5. Cement industry, ceramics and glass making

5.1 Workplaces and areas near kilns, at mixers for raw material;
crushers in brickyards 200
5.2 Enameling, rolling, pressing, forming of simple parts,
glazing, glass blowing 300
5.3 Grinding, etching, polishing of glass, forming of fine parts,
manufacture of glass instruments 500
5.4 Decoration work 500 Single-user lamps useful
5.5 Grinding of optical lenses, crystal glass, off-hand
grinding and engraving, medium-quality work 750
5.6 Fine work 1,000

11/8 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Appendix

A6 Table of Nominal Illuminance

Type of indoor area or activity Nominal illuminance En [lx] Comment

6. Iron and steel works, rolling mills, large foundries

6.1 Production plants without manual intervention 50
6.2 Production plants with occasional manual intervention 100
6.3 Permanently occupied workplaces in production plants 200
6.4 Measuring desks and stations, control platforms and desks 300 If required for operative reasons: En < 300 lx
6.5 Test and quality check stations 500 If required for operative reasons: En < 500 lx

7. Metal processing
7.1 Handforging of small parts 200
7.2 Welding 300
7.3 Workstations, automated or
semi-automated machinetools 300
7.4 Coarse and medium machine work; permissible tolerance > 0.1 mm 300 For permissible tolerances see DIN 7168 Part 1
7.5 Fine machine work; permissible deviation < 0.1 mm 500
7.6 Workplaces with robots 300
7.7 Marking, measuring and inspection workplaces 750
7.8 Cold rolling mills 200
7.9 Wire and tube drawing, production of cold strip sections 300
7.10 Metal sheet processing 300
7.11 Manufacture of tools and cutlery 500
7.12 Assembly
7.12.1 coarse 200
7.12.2 medium-fine 300
7.12.3 fine 500
7.13 Drop-forging 200
7.14 Foundries
7.14.1 Accessible subterranean tunnels, conveyor belts, cellars etc. 50
7.14.2 Platforms 100
7.14.3 Sand conditioning 200
7.14.4 Dressing station 300
7.14.5 Workplaces at the cupola and mixer 200
7.14.6 Casting houses 30
7.14.7 Shake out places 200
7.14.8 Machine molding 200
7.14.9 Manual molding 300
7.14.10 Core making 300
7.14.11 Pattern making 500
7.15 Diecasting shops 300
7.16 Surface treatment

11/9 11
A6 Table of Nominal Illuminance

Type of indoor area or activity Nominal illuminance En [lx] Comment

7.16.1 Electroplating 300

7.16.2 Smoothing, painting, varnishing 500
7.16.3 Check stations 750
7.17 Tool, gage, model and jig construction, precision tool making
high-precision assembly 1,000 Single-user lamps useful
7.18 Automotive production plants At assembly lines with workplace-
related fluorescent lighting,
glare reduction can be ommitted if
plant conditions require this
7.18.1 Body shop 500
7.18.2 Body, surface treatment 500
7.18.3 Paintshop – spray booth 1,000
7.18.4 Paintshop – polishing stations 750
7.18.5 Paintshop – finishing 1,000
7.18.6 Upholstery 500
7.18.7 Final assembly of car body and chassis 500
7.18.8 Inspection 750

8. Power plants
8.1 Feeder systems 50
8.2 Boiler house 100
8.3 Pressure compensation rooms in nuclear power plants 200
8.4 Machine rooms 100
8.5 Adjoining rooms, e.g. pump stations, condenser rooms 50
8.6 Switchgear stations in buildings 100
8.7 Control rooms 300 If required for operative reasons: En < 300 lx
8.8 Maintenance work at the turbine and generator 500 Additional lighting for the duration
of the work

9. Electrical/electronic industry
9.1 Cable and wire production, varnishing and impregnation of coils,
assembly of large machinery, simple mounting work, winding of
coils and armatures with coarse wire 300
9.2 Assembly of telephones, small motors, winding of coils and
armatures with medium-size wire 500
9.3 Assembly of small equipment, radios and TV sets,
winding of fine wire coils, fuse production,
adjusting, testing, calibrating 1,000 Single-user lamps useful
9.4 Assembly of smallest parts, electronic components 1,500

11/10 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Appendix

A6 Table of Nominal Illuminancee

Type of indoor area or activity Nominal illuminance En [lx] Comment

10 Jewelry, watch and clock making industry

10.1 Jewelry making 1000
10.2 Gem cutting 1500 Single-user lamps useful
10.3 Optician’s and watchmaker’s workshops 1500

11 Wood working
11.1 Steaming pits
11.2 Frame saws 200
11.3 Work at the planing bench, glueing, assembly 300
11.4 Selection and check of veneer wood, inlays 500
11.6 Working at woodworking tools, turning, chamfering,
dressing, rabbeting, slitting, cutting, sawing, milling 500
11.7 Wood finishing 500
11.8 Quality checks 750

12 Paper making, graphic and printing industry

12.1 Work at hollander engines, edge runners and pulp mills 200
12.2 Paperboard, corrugating and cardboard machines, cardboard production 300
12.3 Ordinary bookbinder’s work, wallpaper printing 300
12.4 Gilding, blocking or blind-tooling, work at printing presses 500
12.5 Retouching, manual and machine typesetting 1000 Avoid glare by reflection by
means of suitable angles of incidence;
diagonally from side for manual typesetting
12.6 Color checking for multi-colored prints 1500 Single-user lamps useful
12.7 Steel and copper engraving 2000
12.8 Photo typesetting, reproduction 500
12.9 Page layout finishing, copying 800

13 Leather industry
13.1 Work at tubs, vats and pits 200 Ensure vertical lighting of vats
Prevent reflections by choosing suitable angles of incidence
13.2 Scraping, slicing, rubbing, tumbling of skins 300
13.3 Saddler’s work, stitching, sewing, polishing, sorting, pressing,
cutting to size, punching, shoe making 500 For darker materials increase to
1,000 lx, possibly by single-user lights
13.4 Leather dyeing (machine-dyeing) 750
13.5 Quality checks

11/11 11
A6 Table of Nominal Illuminance

Type of indoor area or activity Nominal illuminance En [lx] Comment

13.5.1 for medium demands 750

13.5.2 for superior demands 1,000
13.5.3 for premium demands 1,500 For surface checks: additional
lighting with diagonal incidence;
single-user lamps useful
13.6 Color checks 1,000 Single-user lamps useful; pay
attention to color rendering

14 Textile manufacture and processing

14.1 Workplaces and areas at baths and breaking of bales 200
14.2 Carding, washing, ironing, work at opening and
carding machines, stretching, combing, slashing,
card cutting, roving, jute and hemp roving 300
14.3 Dyeing 300
14.4 Preparing the yarn or warp beam, warping, spinning, spooling,
reeling, twining, twisting, knitting, emboidering, weaving 500
14.5 Pricking, perching, sewing, cloth printing 750
14.6 Millinery 750
14.7 Burling, napping 1,500
14.8 Invisible mending 1,500
14.9 Quality and color checks 1,000 Single-user lamps useful, pay
attention to color rendering

15 Food, beverage and tobacco industry

15.1 Workplaces and work areas in the brewery, at the malt-floor,
for washing down, filling in barrels/kegs, cleaning, sieving,
peeling, food processing in the cannery, and work in chocolate factories,
workplaces and work areas in sugar refineries, for the drying and
fermenting of crude tobacco, fermenting cellar 200
15.2 Picking and washing of produce; grinding, mixing, packing 300
15.3 Workplaces and work areas at slaughterhouses, butchers’ shops,
dairies, grinding mills and filtering floors 300 Depending of the workplace layout,
ensure sufficient vertical illuminance
15.4 Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables 300
15.5 Preparation of delicatessen, kitchens; manufacture
of cigars and cigarettes 500
15.6 Quality checks of glass jars and product checks;
garnishing, decorating, sorting 500
15.7 Color checks, laboratories 1,000 Single-user lamps useful,
pay attention to color rendering

11/12 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Appendix

A6 Table of Nominal Illuminance

Type of indoor area or activity Nominal illuminance En [lx] Comment

16 Wholesale and retail trades

16.1 Shops 300
16.2 Cashier’s desks 500

17 Crafts and trades (examples from various industries)

17.1 Flame conditioning and painting of steel parts 200
17.2 Preassembly of heating and ventilation systems 200
17.3 Locksmith’s and plumber’s shops 300
17.4 Garages 300
17.5 Joiner’s workshops on construction sites see no. 11 Select nominal illuminance according to no. 11
17.6 Repair shops for machinery and apparatus 500
17.7 Radio and TV repair shops 500

18 Service sector
18.1 Hotels and restaurants
18.1.1 Reception 200
18.1.2 Kitchen 500
18.1.3 Dining room 200
18.1.4 Conference rooms 300
18.1.5 Self-service restaurants 300
18.2 Launderettes and dry cleaners
18.2.1 Washing 300
18.2.2 Machine ironing 300
18.2.3 Manual ironing 300
18.2.4 Sorting 300
18.2.5 Stains removal quality check 1000 Single-user lamps useful
18.3 Hair styling 500
18.4 Cosmetics 750

19 Plastic processing
19.1 Injection molding 500
19.2 Blow molding 300
19.3 Pressing 300

11/13 11
Abbreviations

A CIM Common Information Model, IEC standard (cf. IEC 61970)

for the integration von IT systems in the power generation
AA (or ST) Shunt release
and distribution industry
AC Alternating current
CSA Canadian Standards Association
ACB Air Circuit-breaker
CSV (file) Character Separated Values, Comma Separated
AGI Arbeitsgemeinschaft Industriebau, Values or Semi-Colon Separated Values; text file for saving
German working group on industrial building and exchanging simple-structured data in which the
individual data items are separated by commas, semi-
ANSI American National Standards Institute
colons or other symbols
AR Automatic reclosing
Cu Copper
AS Auxiliary switch

ASR “Arbeitsstätten-Richtlinie”, Workplace Regulation D

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials DALI Digital Adressable Lighting Interface; protocol for
controlling digital lighting equipment in buildings
B
DC Direct current
BetrSichV “Betriebssicherheitsverordnung”,
DF Dimensioning factor; ratio of the rated apparent power
Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health
Sgen to the apparent power SUPS of the uninterruptible
BGVR “Berufsgenossenschaftliche Vorschriften und Regeln power supply
für Sicherheit und Gesundheit bei der Arbeit”
Regulations and rules for safety and health at work DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V.; German industrial
by the workers' compensation insurance carriers standard

DMT Definite-time overcurrent-time protection

C

CAN Controller Area Network; field bus system developed by E

Bosch for networking controllers in automobiles EC European Community
CB Circuit-breaker ECG Electronic control gear
CCA CENELEC Certification Agreement; an agreement which
EIB European Installation Bus
entitles European manufacturers to obtain a national
certification mark for their electrical engineering products, EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
based upon test results from an approved institute of one
EN European standard
of the particpating countries.
(source: http://www.ul-europe.com/de/ EnEV Energieeinsparverordnung
solutions/marks/cca.php)
EPR Ethylene propylene rubber
CE (marking) Communauté Européenne; European
Community; using the CE mark, manufacturers confirm ETS EIB Tool Software
the conformity of their products to the relevant EC ETU Electronic trip unit
Directives and compliance with “essential requirements”
stipulated therein EVA Ethylene vinyl acetate

CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique;

European Committee for Standardization in Electrical F
Engineering FB Fuse-block; fuse socket with fuse-link
CFC Continuous Function Chart; Siemens engineering tool for
FELV Functional extra-low voltage
graphic editing of automation functions based on
prepared function blocks under the Microsoft Windows FI- Fault current
operating systems
FS Fault signal switch
CGP Central grounding point
FTP File Transfer Protocol; specific network protocol for data
CHP Combined heat and power plant transmission via TCP/IP networks

11/14 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Appendix

G LV Low-voltage

GPS General power supply LV HRC Low-voltage high rupturing capacity fuse

LVMD Low-voltage main distribution

H
M
HDP High Definition Prismatics; lighting technology deveoloped
by Siteco MCB Miniature Circuit-breaker
HV HRC High-voltage high rupturing capacity fuse MCCB Molded-case circuit-breaker
HVAC Heating, ventilation, air conditioning MES Manufacturing Execution System

HOAI Honorarordnung für Architekten und Ingenieure, MKT Capacitor type

Regulation of Architects’ and Engineers’ Fees in Germany
MLAR Sample Directive on Fireproofing Requirements for Line
Systems
I
MSP Motor Starter Protector
IAC Internal Arc Classification
MPCB Motor Protector Circuit-Breaker
I-release Instantaneous electromagnetic release MV Medium-voltage (supply)
ICCC Instrumentation and Control Cargo Cabinet; container for MVMD Medium-voltage main distribution
electrical/electronic and control systems, suitable for
transportation by air
N
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
NES 713 Standard on the toxicity of flames
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor; used in motor drives,
NF Norme Française
traction power controls, UPS systems and power supply
units, for example NiCd Nickel cadmium

IP (code) International Protection (acc. to DIN); Protection against

ingress (of) O

IP Internet Protocol ODBC Open DataBase Connectivity; standardized database

interface, used as database query language in –> SQL
ISO International Organization for Standardization
OLE (–> OPC) Object linking and embedding; a Microsoft
proprietary object system and protocol which enables
K interaction of different (OLE-capable) applications and
thus the creation of heterogenous composite documents
KUPS UPS factor
OPC OLE for Process Control; standardized software interface
KNX Konnex; building systems technology in compliance with
EN 50090 OWG Optical waveguide

L P

LAN Local Area Network PDF Portable Document File; cross-platform file format
developed by Adobe Systems
L-release Inverse-time (long-time) delayed release
PMMA Polymethylmethacrylate
LC (~ resonant circuit), inductive-capactive resonant circuit
PTB Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt, highest German
LCD Liquid crystal display
federal agency for testing, calibrating and approvals
LED Light Emitting Diode
PROFIBUS Process Fieldbus
LEMP Lightning electromagnetic pulse
PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS distributed periphery
LOI Limited Oxygen Index
PTTA Partially type-tested (switchgear) assembly
LPZ Lightning protection zone
PV Photovoltaics
LSC Category of operational availability of (medium-voltage)
switchgear PVC Polyvinyl chloride

11/15 11
R TÜV Technischer Überwachungsverein, German service
organization for technical inspection and safety tests, now
RAID Redundant Array of Independant Discs
the brand name for technical and life safety approvals
RCBO Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker with integral concerning industrial applications as well as the private
overcurrent protection consumer
RCD Residual current protective device
U
RCCB Residual-current-operated circuit-breaker
UGR Unified glare rating
S UPS Uninterruptible power supply
S-release Short-time-delayed overcurrent release
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition V

SBS Static bypass switch VDE Association for Electrical,

Electronic & Information Technologies
SD Switch-disconnector
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure e.V., Association of German
SDF Switch-disconnector-fuse; switch disconnector with fuse
Engineers
SF Simultaneity factor
VRLA Valve Regulated Lead Acid
SF6 Sulphur hexafluoride
SEMP Switching electromagnetic pulse W
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol, for easy control WHG Wasserhaushaltsschutzgesetz, German Federal Water Act
and monitoring data network components such as routers,
servers, switches, printers, computers etc. from a central WMF Windows Metafile; vector-based graphics format
server developed by Microsoft

SQL Structured Query Language; programming language for

the definition, query and manipulation of data for Z
relational databases
ZVEH Central Association of Electrical and IT Trades in Germany
STA Seamless Telecommunication Architecture
ZVEI Zentralverband Elektrotechnik- und Elektronikindustrie
STS Static transfer switch e.V., German Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers’
SPS Safety power supply Association

ZSI Zone-selective interlocking (also called short-time grading

T control)

TA Technical instruction, in Germany, on various

(environmental) issues, such as air pollution, noise etc.
TAB Technical supply conditions
(of the power supply network operator)

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

THD Total Harmonic Distortion

TIP Totally Integrated Power

TM Thermal-magnetic tripping

TTA Type-tested assembly; type-tested switchgear assembly

TÜH Staatliche Technische Überwachung Hessen, Technical

Control Association in the State of Hesse, as a joint
venture by the TÜV Süd and the State of Hesse

11/16 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

 Appendix

Your Siemens Contact Partners

Consultant Support

Hamburg Hannover Berlin

Dieter Drescher Gerd Schwarzbach Dr. Erich Maut
Tel.: +49 40 2889-2084 Tel.: +49 511 877-1539 Tel.: +49 30 386-33021
E-mail: drescher.dieter@siemens.com E-mail: gerd.schwarzbach@siemens.com E-mail: erich.maut@siemens.com

Erfurt Dresden Leipzig

Ralf Heinemann Jürgen Borsdorf Heiko Tritschler
Tel.: +49 361 753-3355 Tel.: +49 351 844-4414 Tel.: +49 341 210-221
E-mail: ralf.heinemann@siemens.com E-mail: borsdorf.juergen@siemens.com E-mail: heiko.tritschler@siemens.com

Düsseldorf Cologne Essen

Bernd Wagner Jürgen Hupperich Frank Röhling
Tel.: +49 211 399-2769 Tel.: +49 221 576-3137 Tel.: +49 2739 89285-1
E-mail: b.wagner@siemens.com E-mail: juergen.hupperich@siemens.com E-mail: frank.roehling@siemens.com

Frankfurt Nuremberg Stuttgart

Nikolaos Kartalas/Ralph Samulowitz
Tel.: +49 69 797-5016
Tel.: +49 69 797-3370
E-mail: nikolaos.kartalas@siemens.com
E-mail: ralph.samulowitz@siemens.com
Wilhelm Ebentheuer
Tel.: +49 911 654-3969
E-mail: wilhelm.ebentheuer@siemens.com
Klaus Häberlen/Karl-Heinz Markert
Tel.: +49 711 137-2221
Tel.: +49 711 137-2634
E-mail: klaus.haeberlen@siemens.com
E-mail: karl-heinz.markert@siemens.com

Munich
Wolfgang Bährle/Bernhard Hartel
Tel.: +49 89 9221-3453
Tel.: +49 89 9221-6978
E-mail: wolfgang.baehrle@siemens.com
E-mail: bernhard.hartel@siemens.com

Contacts for Special Interests

Elevators, escalators, moving walkways Safety lightingng Uninterruptible power supply

OTIS GmbH & Co. OHG CEAG Notlichtsysteme GmbH MASTERGUARD GmbH
Otisstraße 33 Senator-Schwartz-Ring 26 Postfach 2620
D-13507 Berlin D-59494 Soest D-91014 Erlangen
Tel.: +49 30 4304-1600 Tel.: +49 2921 69-0 Fax: +49 9131 6300300
Fax: +49 30 4304-2585 www.ceag.de www.masterguard.de
Infoline (workdays 9 a.m. to 5 p.m.)
Tel.: 0180 5323751
Lighting systems Cables E-mail: info@masterguard.de
Siteco Beleuchtungstechnik GmbH U.I. Lapp GmbH
Technical Support Schulze-Delitzsch-Straße 25
Georg-Simon-Ohm-Straße 50 D-70565 Stuttgart
D-83301 Traunreut/Obb. Tel.:+49 711 7838-01
Tel.: +49 8669 33844 www.lapplabel.de
Fax: +49 8669 33540
E-mail: technicalsupport@siteco.de
www.siteco.de oder www.siteco.com

11/17 11
Trademarks Imprint
ALPHA SELECT®, DIAZED®, DIGSI®, GEAFOL®, instabus® EIB, Totally Integrated Power
NEOZED®, NXAIR®, NXPLUS®, S7-300®, S7-400®, SENTRON®, Application Manual –
SICAM®, SIGRA®, SIGRES®, SIMATIC®, SIMARIS design®, SIMBOX®, Part 2: Draft Planning
SIMEAS®, SIMOCODE®, SIPLUS®, SIPROTEC®, SIQUENCE®, SIRIUS®,
SIVACON®, SolarPark™, PowerCC®, SUNIT™, Totally Integrated Published by
Power™, WinAC®, WinCC®
are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
ELDACON®, Mirrortec®
are registered trademarks of SITECO Beleuchtungstechnik GmbH
Power Transmission and Distribution
Siemens Building Technologies
GeN2™, PULSE™
are registered trademarks of OTIS GmbH. Editor

LAPPTHERM®, NEOFLEX®, ÖLFLEX®, SILFLEX®, SPIREX®, UNITRONIC®

Ralf Willeke, Siemens AG, A&D CD TIP
HITRONIC®, ETHERLINE® Publishing House
are registered trademarks of LAPP Group.
Publicis KommunikationsAgentur GmbH, GWA
Microsoft® und Windows®
Nägelsbachstr. 33
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp., Redmond, Wash., US.
91052 Erlangen, Germany

NEOPREN®
Print
Hofmann Infocom AG
The omission of any specific reference with regard to trademarks, Emmericher Straße 10
brand names, technical solutions, etc., does not imply that they are
not protected by patent. 90411 Nuremberg, Germany

Binding
THALHOFER, D-71101 Schönaich, Germany
ethabind jacket
Protected by patent

© 2007 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Berlin and Munich
Alle rights reserved. Nominal charge 36 EUR.
All data and circuit examples without engagement.
Subject to change without prior notice.

11/18 Totally Integrated Power by Siemens

H04120_2007_Umschlag_Englisch.qxd 16.08.2007 6:07 Uhr Seite 1

Application Manual –
Part 2: Draft Planning

Application Manual – Part 2: Draft Planning

www.siemens.com/tip
The information provided in this manual contains merely general descriptions or
characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as
described or which may change as a result of further development of the products.
An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly
agreed in the terms of contract.

All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or

supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate
the rights of the owners.

Integrated solutions
for power distribution
in commercial and industrial buildings

Totally Integrated PowerTM

totally integrated

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
Gleiwitzer Straße 555
90475 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
power
Power Transmission and Distribution Siemens SWITZERLAND AG Nominal charge: 36 EUR
Freyeslebenstraße 1 Building Technologies Group Order No. E20001-A70-M104-V1-7600
91058 ERLANGEN International Headquarters Dispo 27612
GERMANY Gubelstrasse 22
6301 ZUG
SWITZERLAND